UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 10-K
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the Year Ended December 31, 2014

TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
Commission file number 0-27782
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
 
11-3297463
(I.R.S. employer identification number)
 
209 Havemeyer Street, Brooklyn, NY
( Address of principal executive offices)
 
 
11211
(Zip Code)

Registrant's telephone number, including area code: (718) 782-6200

Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
None

Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
Common Stock, par value $.01 per share
(Title of Class)
Preferred Stock Purchase Rights
(Title of Class)

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.YES NO

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Act.YES NO  

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding twelve months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.YES NO

Indicate by checkmark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Website, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). YES NO

Indicate by checkmark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (Section 229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.

Indicate by checkmark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

LARGE ACCELERATED FILER ACCELERATED FILER NON-ACCELERATED FILER SMALLER REPORTING COMPANY

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act): Yes No

The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of June 30, 2014 was approximately   $467.7 million based upon the $15.79 closing price on the NASDAQ National Market for a share of the registrant's common stock on June 30, 2014.

As of March 12, 2015, there were 36,849,795 shares of the registrant's common stock, $0.01 par value, outstanding.

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
Portions of the definitive Proxy Statement to be distributed on behalf of the Board of Directors of Registrant in connection with the Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 27, 2015 and any adjournment thereof, are incorporated by reference in Part III.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
   
 
Page
PART I
 
 
PART II
 
PART III
 
PART IV
 
 
 
 
2

This Annual Report on Form 10-K contains a number of forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act").  These statements may be identified by use of words such as "anticipate," "believe," "could," "estimate," "expect," "intend," "seek," "may," "outlook," "plan," "potential," "predict," "project," "should," "will," "would" and similar terms and phrases, including references to assumptions.

Forward-looking statements are based upon various assumptions and analyses made by Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. (the "Holding Company," and together with its direct and indirect subsidiaries, the "Company") in light of management's experience and its perception of historical trends, current conditions and expected future developments, as well as other factors it believes appropriate under the circumstances. These statements are not guarantees of future performance and are subject to risks, uncertainties and other factors (many of which are beyond the Company's control) that could cause actual conditions or results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. These factors include, without limitation, the following:

·
the timing and occurrence or non-occurrence of events may be subject to circumstances beyond the Company's control;
·
there may be increases in competitive pressure among financial institutions or from non-financial institutions;
·
the net interest margin is subject to material short-term fluctuation based upon market rates;
·
changes in deposit flows, loan demand or real estate values may adversely affect the business of The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh (the "Bank");
·
changes in accounting principles, policies or guidelines may cause the Company's financial condition to be perceived differently;
·
changes in corporate and/or individual income tax laws may adversely affect the Company's business or financial condition;
·
general economic conditions, either nationally or locally in some or all areas in which the Company conducts business, or conditions in the securities markets or the banking industry, may be less favorable than the Company currently anticipates;
·
legislation or regulatory changes may adversely affect the Company's business;
·
technological changes may be more difficult or expensive than the Company  anticipates;
·
success or consummation of new business initiatives may be more difficult or expensive than the Company anticipates;
·
litigation or other matters before regulatory agencies, whether currently existing or commencing in the future, may delay the occurrence or non-occurrence of events longer than the Company anticipates; and
·
Other risks, as enumerated in the section entitled "Risk Factors."

The Company has no obligation to update any forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this document.

PART I

Item 1. Business

General

The Holding Company is a Delaware corporation and parent company of the Bank, a New York State chartered savings bank. The Bank's principal business is gathering retail deposits, and lending them primarily in multifamily residential, commercial real estate and mixed use loans, as well as investing in mortgage-backed securities ("MBS"), obligations of the U.S. Government and Government Sponsored Entities ("GSEs"), and corporate debt and equity securities. The Bank's revenues are derived principally from interest on its loan and securities portfolios, and other investments. The Bank's primary sources of funds are, in general, deposits; loan amortization, prepayments and maturities; MBS amortization, prepayments and maturities; investment securities maturities and sales; and advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank of New York ("FHLBNY").

The primary business of the Holding Company is the ownership of its wholly-owned subsidiary, the Bank. The Holding Company is a unitary savings and loan holding company, which, under existing law, is generally not restricted as to the types of business activities in which it may engage.
 
 

 
The Holding Company neither owns nor leases any property, but instead uses the premises and equipment of the Bank.  The Holding Company employs no persons other than certain officers of the Bank, who receive no additional compensation as officers of the Holding Company.  The Holding Company utilizes the support staff of the Bank from time to time, as required.  Additional employees may be hired as deemed appropriate by Holding Company management.

The Company's website address is www.dime.com . The Company makes available free of charge through its website, by clicking the Investor Relations tab under "About Us" and selecting "SEC Filings," its Annual and Transition Reports on Form 10-K, Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q, Current Reports on Form 8-K, and amendments to these reports as soon as reasonably practicable after such material is electronically filed with or furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC").

Market Area and Competition

The Bank has historically operated as a community-oriented financial institution providing financial services and loans primarily for multifamily housing within its market areas.  The Bank maintains its headquarters in the Williamsburg section of the borough of Brooklyn, New York, and operates twenty-five full-service retail banking offices located in the New York City ("NYC") boroughs of Brooklyn, Queens, and the Bronx, and in Nassau County, New York.  The Bank gathers deposits primarily from the communities and neighborhoods in close proximity to its branches, and, to a lesser extent, via the internet.  The Bank's primary lending area is the NYC metropolitan area, although its overall lending area is larger, extending approximately 50 miles in each direction from its corporate headquarters in Brooklyn.  The majority of the Bank's mortgage loans are secured by properties located in its primary lending area, with approximately 87% secured by real estate located in the NYC boroughs of Brooklyn, Queens and Manhattan on December 31, 2014.

The NYC banking environment is extremely competitive.  The Bank's competition for loans exists principally from other savings banks, commercial banks, mortgage banks and insurance companies. The Bank continues to face sustained competition for the origination of multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans, which together comprised 98% of the Bank's loan portfolio at December 31, 2014.

The Bank gathers deposits in direct competition with other savings banks, commercial banks and brokerage firms, many among the largest in the nation.  It must additionally compete for deposit monies with the stock and bond markets, especially during periods of strong performance in those arenas.  Over the previous decade, consolidation in the financial services industry, coupled with the emergence of Internet banking, has dramatically altered the deposit gathering landscape.  Facing increasingly larger and more efficient competitors, the Bank's strategy to attract depositors has utilized various marketing approaches and the delivery of technology-enhanced, customer-friendly banking services while controlling operating expenses.

Banking competition occurs within an economic and financial marketplace that is largely beyond the control of any individual financial institution.  The interest rates paid to depositors and charged to borrowers, while affected by marketplace competition, are generally a function of broader-based macroeconomic and financial factors, including the U.S. Gross Domestic Product, the supply of, and demand for, loanable funds, and the impact of global trade and international financial markets.  Within this environment, Federal Open Market Committee ("FOMC") monetary policy and governance of short-term rates also significantly influence the interest rates paid and charged by financial institutions.

The Bank's success is additionally impacted by the overall condition of the economy, particularly in the NYC metropolitan area.  As home to several national companies in the financial and business services industries, and as a popular destination for domestic and international travelers, the NYC economy is particularly sensitive to the health of both the national and global economies.

Lending Activities
 
      The Bank originates primarily non-recourse loans on multifamily and commercial real estate properties to limited liability companies.

Loan Portfolio Composition.   At December 31, 2014, the Bank's loan portfolio totaled $4.11 billion, consisting primarily of mortgage loans secured by multifamily residential apartment buildings, including buildings organized under a cooperative form of ownership; commercial properties; and one- to four-family residences and individual condominium or cooperative apartments.  Within the loan portfolio, $3.29 billion, or 80.1%, were classified as multifamily residential loans; $745.5 million, or 18.1%, were classified as commercial real estate loans; and $73.5 million, or 1.8%, were classified as one- to four-family residential, including condominium or cooperative apartments.  Of the total mortgage loan portfolio outstanding on December 31, 2014, $2.98 billion, or 72.5%, were adjustable-rate mortgage loans ('"ARMs") and $1.13 billion, or 27.5%, were fixed-rate loans.  Of the Bank's multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans, over 70%   were ARMs at December 31, 2014, the majority of which were contracted to reprice no later than 7 years from their origination date and carried a total amortization period of no longer than 30 years.  At December 31, 2014, the Bank's loan portfolio additionally included $1.8 million in consumer loans, composed of depositor, consumer installment and other loans.   As of December 31, 2014, $2.52 billion, or 61.4% of the loan portfolio, was scheduled to mature or reprice within five years.  In addition at December 31, 2014, loans totaling $397.1 million were only required to make monthly interest payments on their outstanding principal balance.  The great majority of these loans commence principal amortization prior to their contractual maturity date.  .

The Bank does not originate or purchase loans, either whole loans or collateral underlying MBS, that would be considered subprime at origination ( i.e., mortgage loans advanced to borrowers who do not qualify for market interest rates because of problems with their income or credit history).

The types of loans the Bank may originate are subject to New York State laws and regulations (See "Item 1.  Business - Regulation – Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks").

At December 31, 2014, the Bank had $122.1 million of loan commitments that were accepted by the borrowers.  All of these commitments are expected to close during the year ending December 31, 2015.  At December 31, 2013, the Bank had $83.8 million of loan commitments that were accepted by the borrowers.  All of these closed during the year ended December 31, 2014.



The following table sets forth the composition of the Bank's real estate and other loan portfolios (including loans held for sale) in dollar amounts and percentages at the dates indicated:

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
Percent of Total
   
2013
   
Percent of Total
   
2012
   
Percent of Total
   
2011
   
Percent of Total
   
2010
   
Percent of Total
 
   
Dollars in Thousands
 
Real Estate loans:
                                       
Multifamily residential
 
$
3,292,753
     
80.05
%
 
$
2,917,380
     
78.97
%
 
$
2,671,533
     
76.30
%
 
$
2,599,850
     
75.13
%
 
$
2,500,265
     
72.09
%
Commercial real estate
   
745,463
     
18.12
     
700,606
     
18.96
     
735,224
     
21.00
     
751,586
     
21.72
     
833,168
     
24.02
 
One- to four-family, including condominium and
   cooperative apartment
   
73,500
     
1.79
     
73,956
     
2.00
     
91,876
     
2.62
     
100,712
     
2.91
     
117,268
     
3.38
 
Construction and land acquisition
   
-
     
-
     
268
     
0.01
     
476
     
0.01
     
5,827
     
0.17
     
15,238
     
0.44
 
Total real estate loans
   
4,111,716
     
99.96
     
3,692,210
     
99.94
     
3,499,109
     
99.93
     
3,457,975
     
99.93
     
3,465,939
     
99.93
 
Consumer loans:
                                                                               
Depositor loans
   
677
     
0.01
     
763
     
0.02
     
712
     
0.02
     
483
     
0.01
     
530
     
0.02
 
Consumer installment and other
   
1,152
     
0.03
     
1,376
     
0.04
     
1,711
     
0.05
     
1,966
     
0.06
     
2,010
     
0.05
 
Total consumer loans
   
1,829
     
0.04
     
2,139
     
0.06
     
2,423
     
0.07
     
2,449
     
0.07
     
2,540
     
0.07
 
Gross loans
   
4,113,545
     
100.00
%
   
3,694,349
     
100.00
%
   
3,501,532
     
100.00
%
   
3,460,424
     
100.00
%
   
3,468,479
     
100.00
%
Net unearned costs
   
5,695
             
5,170
             
4,836
             
3,463
             
5,013
         
Allowance for loan losses
   
(18,493
)
           
(20,153
)
           
(20,550
)
           
(20,254
)
           
(19,166
)
       
Loans, net
 
$
4,100,747
           
$
3,679,366
           
$
3,485,818
           
$
3,443,633
           
$
3,454,326
         
Loans serviced for others:
                                                                               
One- to four-family including condominium and
  cooperative apartment
 
$
5,215
           
$
6,746
           
$
8,786
           
$
10,841
           
$
12,559
         
Multifamily residential
   
19,038
             
240,517
             
353,034
             
475,673
             
583,751
         
Total loans serviced for others
 
$
24,253
           
$
247,263
           
$
361,820
           
$
486,514
           
$
596,310
         

Loan Originations, Purchases, Sales and Servicing.  For the year ended December 31, 2014, total loan originations were $947.0 million.  The Bank originates both ARMs and fixed-rate loans, depending upon customer demand and market rates of interest.  ARMs were 95% of total loan originations during the period.  The great majority of both ARM and fixed-rate originations were multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans.

The typical multifamily residential and commercial real estate ARM carries a final maturity of 10 or 12 years, and an amortization period not exceeding 30 years. These loans generally have an interest rate that adjusts once after the fifth or seventh year, indexed to the 5-year FHLBNY advance rate plus a spread typically approximating 250 basis points, but generally may not adjust below the initial interest rate of the loan. Prepayment fees are assessed throughout the majority of the life of the loans. The Bank also offers fixed-rate, self-amortizing, multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans with maturities of up to fifteen years.

Multifamily residential real estate loans are either retained in the Bank's portfolio or sold in the secondary market to other third-party financial institutions.  The Bank currently has no formal arrangement pursuant to which it sells commercial or multifamily residential real estate loans to the secondary market.

The Bank generally retains servicing rights in connection with multifamily loans it sells in the secondary market.  Loan servicing fees are typically derived based upon the difference between the actual origination rate and contractual pass-through rate of the loans at the time of sale.  At December 31, 2014, the Bank had recorded mortgage servicing rights ("MSR") of $351,000 associated with the sale of one- to four-family and multifamily residential loans to third party institutions.

Prior to February 2013, the Bank generally sold its newly originated one- to four-family fixed-rate mortgage loans in the secondary market.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank ceased all one- to four-family fixed-rate mortgage lending in order to focus on its core multifamily residential and commercial real estate lending activities.

At December 31, 2014, the Bank's portfolio of whole loans or loan participations that it originated and sold to other financial institutions with servicing retained totaled $24.3 million, all of which were sold without recourse.

The following table sets forth the Bank's loan originations (including loans held for sale), sales, purchases and principal repayments for the periods indicated:

   
For the Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
   
2011
   
2010
 
   
Dollars in Thousands
 
Gross loans:
                   
At beginning of period
 
$
3,694,349
   
$
3,501,532
   
$
3,460,424
   
$
3,468,479
   
$
3,391,658
 
Real estate loans originated:
                                       
Multifamily residential
   
748,067
     
872,421
     
942,326
     
563,696
     
467,160
 
Commercial real estate
   
191,944
     
187,202
     
142,418
     
98,607
     
58,687
 
One- to four-family, including condominium and cooperative apartment (1)
   
2,302
     
5,896
     
12,184
     
7,094
     
7,431
 
Equity lines of credit on multifamily residential or
   commercial properties
   
4,657
     
7,578
     
2,764
     
7,685
     
6,540
 
Construction and land acquisition
   
-
     
-
     
-
     
1,712
     
1,901
 
Total mortgage loans originated
   
946,970
     
1,073,097
     
1,099,692
     
678,794
     
541,719
 
Other loans originated
   
1,263
     
1,354
     
1,414
     
1,552
     
1,756
 
Total loans originated
   
948,223
     
1,074,451
     
1,101,106
     
680,346
     
543,475
 
Loans purchased (2)
   
225,604
     
52,031
     
30,425
     
54,364
     
45,096
 
Less:
                                       
Principal repayments (including satisfactions and refinances)
   
737,776
     
923,110
     
1,020,525
     
698,928
     
427,307
 
Loans sold (3)
   
16,865
     
8,087
     
67,593
     
38,320
     
75,221
 
Write down of principal balance for expected loss
   
-
     
1,685
     
2,305
     
5,517
     
8,902
 
Loans transferred to other real estate owned
   
-
     
783
     
-
     
-
     
320
 
Gross loans at end of period
 
$
4,113,545
   
$
3,694,349
   
$
3,501,532
   
$
3,460,424
   
$
3,468,479
 
(1) Includes one- to four-family home equity and home improvement loans.
(2) Includes $225.6 million, $52.0 million, $30.4 million, $26.4 million and $22.3 million of serviced loans previously sold to a third party that were re-acquired during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
(3) Includes $3.9 million, $6.1 million, $30.9 million, $29.8 million and $47.0 million of note sales on problem loans from portfolio during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.
 
      Loan Maturity and Repricing.   The following table distributes the Bank's real estate and consumer loan portfolios (including loans held for sale) at December 31, 2014 by the earlier of the maturity or next repricing date.  ARMs are included in the period during which their interest rates are next scheduled to adjust. The table does not include scheduled principal amortization.

 
Real Estate Loans
Consumer Loans
Total
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Amount due to Mature or Reprice During the Year Ending:
     
   December 31, 2015
$155,336
$1,829
$157,165
   December 31, 2016
296,788
296,788
   December 31, 2017
605,557
605,557
   December 31, 2018
576,434
576,434
   December 31, 2019
888,462
888,462
   Sub-total (within 5 years)
2,522,577
1,829
2,524,406
December 31, 2020 and beyond
1,589,139
-
1,589,139
TOTAL
$4,111,716
$1,829
$4,113,545


The following table sets forth the outstanding principal balance of the Bank's real estate and consumer loan portfolios (including loans held for sale) at December 31, 2014 that is due to mature or reprice after December 31, 2015, and whether such loans have fixed or adjustable interest rates:

 
Due after December 31, 2015
 
Fixed
Adjustable
Total
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Real estate loans
$1,088,005
$2,868,375
$3,956,380
Consumer loans
Total loans
$1,088,005
$2,868,375
$3,956,380

Multifamily Residential Lending and Commercial Real Estate Lending. The majority of the Bank's lending activities consist of originating adjustable- and fixed-rate multifamily residential (generally buildings possessing a minimum of five residential units) and commercial real estate loans. The properties securing these loans are generally located in the Bank's primary lending area. At December 31, 2014, $3.29 billion, or 80.1% of the Bank's gross loan portfolio, were multifamily residential loans. Of the multifamily residential loans, $3.03 billion, or 92.0%, were secured by apartment buildings and $263.5 million, or 8.0%, were secured by buildings organized under a cooperative form of ownership. The Bank also had $745.5 million of commercial real estate loans in its portfolio at December 31, 2014, representing 18.1% of its total loan portfolio.  Of the $745.5 million, approximately $416.8 million were secured by collateral containing strictly commercial tenants, while the remaining $328.7 million had a portion of the underlying collateral composed of residential units.

At December 31, 2014, multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans originated by the Bank were secured by three distinct property types: (1) fully residential apartment buildings; (2) "mixed-use" properties featuring a combination of residential and commercial units within the same building; and (3) fully commercial buildings. The underwriting procedures for each of these property types were substantially similar.  The Bank classified loans secured by fully residential apartment buildings as multifamily residential loans in all instances. Loans secured by fully commercial real estate were classified as commercial real estate loans in all instances. Loans secured by mixed-use properties were classified as either residential mixed use (a component of total multifamily residential loans) or commercial mixed use (a component of total commercial real estate loans) based upon the percentage of the property's rental income received from its residential as compared to its commercial tenants. If 50% or more of the rental income was received from residential tenants, the full balance of the loan was classified as multifamily residential. If less than 50% of the rental income was received from residential tenants, the full balance of the loan was classified as commercial real estate. At December 31, 2014, mixed-use properties classified as multifamily residential or commercial real estate loans totaled $1.53 billion.

Multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans in the Bank's portfolio generally range in amount from $250,000 to $5.0 million, and, at December 31, 2014, had an average outstanding balance of approximately $2.0 million. Multifamily residential loans in this range are generally secured by buildings that contain between 5 and 100 apartments. As of December 31, 2014, the Bank had a total of $3.06 billion of multifamily residential loans in its portfolio secured by buildings with under 100 units, representing over 93% of its multifamily residential real estate loan portfolio.

At December 31, 2014, the Bank had 150 multifamily residential or commercial real estate loans in portfolio with principal balances greater than $5.0 million, totaling $1.29 billion.  Within this total were thirty-four loans totaling $520.3 million with outstanding balances greater than $10.0 million.  These 150 loans, while underwritten to the same standards as all other multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans, tend to expose the Bank to a higher degree of risk due to the potential impact of losses from any one loan relative to the size of the Bank's capital position.

Repayment of multifamily residential loans is dependent, in significant part, on cash flow from the collateral property sufficient to satisfy operating expenses and debt service. Future increases in interest rates, increases in vacancy rates on multifamily residential or commercial buildings, and other economic events which are outside the control of the borrower or the Bank could negatively impact the future net operating income of such properties.  Similarly, government regulations, such as the existing NYC Rent Regulation and Rent Stabilization laws, could limit future increases in the revenue from these buildings.  As a result, rental income might not rise sufficiently over time to satisfy increases in either the loan rate at repricing or in overhead expenses ( e.g. , utilities, taxes, and insurance).
The Bank's underwriting standards for multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans generally require: (1) a maximum loan-to-value ratio of 75% based upon an appraisal performed by an independent, state licensed appraiser, and (2) sufficient rental income from the underlying property to adequately service the debt, represented by a minimum debt service ratio of 120% for multifamily residential and 125% for commercial real estate loans. The weighted average loan-to-value and debt service ratios approximated 53% and 275%, respectively, on all multifamily residential real estate loans originated during the year ended December 31, 2014, and 53% and 273%, respectively, on commercial real estate loans originated during the year ended December 31, 2014. The Bank additionally requires all multifamily residential and commercial real estate borrowers to represent that they are unaware of any environmental risks directly related to the collateral.  In instances where the Bank's property inspection procedures indicate a potential environmental risk on a collateral property, the Bank will require a Phase 1 environmental risk analysis to be completed, and will decline loans where any significant residual environmental liability is indicated.  The Bank further considers the borrower's experience in owning or managing similar properties, the Bank's lending experience with the borrower, and the borrower's credit history and business experience ( See "Item 1. Business - Lending Activities - Loan Approval Authority and Underwriting " for a discussion of the Bank's underwriting procedures utilized in originating multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans).

It is the Bank's policy to require appropriate insurance protection at closing, including title and hazard insurance, on all real estate mortgage loans. Borrowers generally are required to advance funds for certain expenses such as real estate taxes, hazard insurance and flood insurance.
 
Commercial real estate loans are generally viewed as exposing lenders to a greater risk of loss than both one- to four-family and multifamily residential mortgage loans. Because payments on loans secured by commercial real estate are often dependent upon successful operation or management of the collateral properties, as well as the success of the business and retail tenants occupying the properties, repayment of such loans is generally more vulnerable to weak economic conditions. Further, the collateral securing such loans may depreciate over time, be difficult to appraise, or fluctuate in value based upon its rentability, among other commercial factors.  This increased risk is partially mitigated in the following manners: (i) the Bank requires, in addition to the security interest in the commercial real estate, a security interest in the personal property associated with the collateral and standby assignments of rents and leases from the borrower; (ii) the Bank will generally favor investments in mixed-use commercial properties that derive some portion of income from residential units, which provide a more reliable source of cash flow and lower vacancy rates, and (iii) the interest rate on commercial real estate loans generally exceeds that on multifamily residential loans.  At December 31, 2014, approximately $328.7 million, or 44.1%, of the Bank's commercial real estate loans were secured by mixed-use commercial properties that derived some portion of income from residential units.  The average outstanding balance of commercial real estate loans was $1.9 billion at December 31, 2014.

The Bank's three largest multifamily residential loans at December 31, 2014 were: (i) a $53.5 million loan initially originated in September 2008 (subsequently re-financed in March 2012 and August 2014) secured by seventeen mixed-use buildings located in Manhattan, New York, containing, in aggregate, 401 residential units and 11 commercial units; (ii) a $28.9 million loan originated in November 2012 secured by three apartment building complexes located in Queens, New York, containing 514 residential units and one commercial unit; and (iii) a $27.0 million loan originated in August 2014 secured by three cooperative residential apartment buildings located in Manhattan, New York, containing 436 residential units and one commercial unit.  Each of these loans made all contractual payments during the year ended December 31, 2014.

The Bank's three largest commercial real estate loans at December 31, 2014 were: (i) an $18.5 million loan initially originated in February 2013 secured by three commercial buildings located in Queens, New York containing 14 retail stores; (ii) a $15.8 million loan originated in January 2014 secured by an office building located in Manhattan, New York, containing 27 office units and 2 retail units, and (iii) a $14.2 million loan originated in September 2011 secured by a building with 10 stores located in Manhattan, New York. Each of these loans made all contractual payments during the year ended December 31, 2014.

As a New York State-chartered savings bank originating loans secured by real estate having a market value at least equal to the loan amount at the time of origination, the Bank is generally not subject to New York State Department of Financial Services ("NYSDFS") regulations limiting individual loan or borrower exposures.
 
      Small Mixed-Use Lending (Small Investment Property Loans).  From 2003 through 2008, the Bank originated small investment property loans, typically sourced through loan brokers.   At December 31, 2014, the Bank held
10

 
$27.7 million of loans in portfolio classified as small investment property, or approximately 0.7% of the gross loan portfolio, with, at the time of origination, a weighted average borrower FICO score of 676 and a weighted average loan-to-value ratio of 55%.
      One- to Four-Family Residential and Condominium / Cooperative Apartment Lending.   In 2013, the Bank ceased origination of residential first and second mortgage loans secured primarily by owner-occupied, one- to four-family residences, including condominium and cooperative apartments.  At December 31, 2014, $73.5 million, or 1.8%, of the Bank's loans consisted of one- to four-family residential and condominium or cooperative apartment loans.

Home Equity and Home Improvement Loans .  Home equity loans and home improvement loans, the great majority of which are included in one- to four-family loans, are originated to a maximum of $500,000.  The combined balance of the first mortgage and home equity or home improvement loan may not exceed 75% of the appraised value of the collateral property at the time of origination of the home equity or home improvement loan.  Interest on home equity and home improvement loans is initially the "prime lending" rate at the time of origination.  After six months, the interest rate adjusts and ranges from the prime interest rate to 100 basis points above the prime interest rate in effect at the time.  The interest rate on the loan can never fall below the rate at origination.  The combined outstanding balance of the Bank's home equity and home improvement loans was $9.7 million at December 31, 2014.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank ceased origination of home equity and home improvement loans.

Equity Lines of Credit on Multifamily Residential and Commercial Real Estate Loans.   Equity credit lines are available on multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans.  These loans are underwritten in the same manner as first mortgage loans on these properties, except that the combined first mortgage amount and equity line are used to determine the loan-to-value ratio and minimum debt service coverage ratio.  The interest rate on multifamily residential and commercial real estate equity lines of credit adjusts regularly.  The outstanding balance of loans advanced under equity lines of credit was $7.6 million at December 31, 2014, on outstanding total lines of $42.8 million.

Construction Lending.   The Bank had no unfunded construction loan commitments at December 31, 2014, and the last new construction loan commitment issued by the Bank occurred in September 2008.

Land Development and Acquisition Loans. The Bank had no outstanding land development or acquisition loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013.

Loan Approval Authority and Underwriting.   The Board of Directors of the Bank establishes lending authority levels for the various loan products offered by the Bank. The Bank maintains a Loan Operating Committee consisting of the Chief Executive Officer, President, Chief Operating Officer, Chief Accounting Officer, Chief Lending Officer and Chief Retail Officer.  The Loan Operating Committee may approve any portfolio loan origination, however, larger loans, generally in excess of $500,000, require its approval. All loans approved by the Loan Operating Committee are presented to the Bank's Board of Directors for its review.

Asset Quality

General
At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Company had neither whole loans nor loans underlying MBS that would have been considered subprime loans at origination, i.e. , mortgage loans advanced to borrowers who did not qualify for market interest rates because of problems with their income or credit history.  See Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements for a discussion of impaired investment securities and MBS.

Monitoring and Collection of Delinquent Loans

Management of the Bank reviews delinquent loans on a monthly basis and, at least quarterly, reports to its Board of Directors regarding the status of all non-performing and otherwise delinquent loans in the Bank's portfolio.

The Bank's loan servicing policies and procedures require that an automated late notice be sent to a delinquent borrower as soon as possible after a payment is ten days late in the case of multifamily residential or commercial real estate loans, or fifteen days late in connection with one- to four-family or consumer loans.  A second letter is
11

sent to the borrower if payment has not been received within 30 days of the due date.  Thereafter, periodic letters are mailed and phone calls placed to the borrower until payment is received.  When contact is made with the borrower at any time prior to foreclosure, the Bank will attempt to obtain the full payment due or negotiate a repayment schedule with the borrower to avoid foreclosure.

Accrual of interest is generally discontinued on a loan that meets any of the following three criteria:  (i) full payment of principal or interest is not expected; (ii) principal or interest has been in default for a period of 90 days or more (unless the loan is both deemed to be well secured and in the process of collection); or (iii) an election has otherwise been made to maintain the loan on a cash basis due to deterioration in the financial condition of the borrower.  Such non-accrual determination practices are applied consistently to all loans regardless of their internal classification or designation.  Upon entering non-accrual status, the Bank reverses all outstanding accrued interest receivable.

The Bank generally initiates foreclosure proceedings when a loan enters non-accrual status based upon non-payment, and typically does not accept partial payments once foreclosure proceedings have commenced.  At some point during foreclosure proceedings, the Bank procures current appraisal information in order to prepare an estimate of the fair value of the underlying collateral.  If a foreclosure action is instituted and the loan is not brought current, paid in full, or refinanced before the foreclosure action is completed, the property securing the loan is transferred to Other Real Estate Owned ("OREO") status.  The Bank generally attempts to utilize all available remedies, such as note sales in lieu of foreclosure, in an effort to resolve non-accrual loans and OREO properties as quickly and prudently as possible in consideration of market conditions, the physical condition of the property and any other mitigating circumstances.  In the event that a non-accrual loan is subsequently brought current, it is returned to accrual status once the doubt concerning collectability has been removed and the borrower has demonstrated performance in accordance with the loan terms and conditions for a period of at least six months.

Non-accrual Loans

Within the Bank's permanent portfolio, non-accrual loans totaled $6.2 million, or 0.15% of total loans, at December 31, 2014, compared to $12.5 million, or 0.34% of total loans, at December 31, 2013.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, principal amortization of $1.0 million was recognized on nine non-accrual loans, five non-accrual loans totaling $1.3 million were either disposed of or satisfied, and two loans totaling $4.8 million were returned to accrual status.  Partially offsetting these reductions were six loans totaling $813,000 that were added to non-accrual status during the year ended December 31, 2014.

Impaired Loans
 
      The recorded investment in loans deemed impaired (as defined in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements) was approximately $20.0 million, consisting of twelve loans, at December 31, 2014, compared to $30.2 million, consisting of sixteen loans, at December 31, 2013.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, three impaired loans totaling $10.6 million were satisfied by the respective borrowers, two impaired loans totaling $1.7 million were disposed of at a value at or below their respective recorded balance, and a $265,000 loan was removed from impaired status.  Additionally during the year ended December 31, 2014, principal amortization totaling $1.2 million was recognized on eleven impaired loans, and a $1.5 million impaired loan was transferred to held for sale pending a note sale that was completed at par value in October 2014.  Partially offsetting these declines was the addition of two loans totaling $3.7 million to impaired status during the year ended December 31, 2014.

The following is a reconciliation of non-accrual and impaired loans at December 31, 2014:

 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Non-accrual loans
$6,198 
Non-accrual one- to four-family and consumer loans deemed homogeneous loans
(1,314)
Troubled Debt Restructurings ("TDRs") retained on accrual status
15,100 
Impaired loans
$19,984 


TDRs

Under ASC 310-40-15, the Bank is required to recognize loans for which certain modifications or concessions have been made as TDRs.  A TDR has been created in the event that any of the following criteria is met:

·
For economic or legal reasons related to the debtor's financial difficulties, a concession has been granted that would not have otherwise been considered
·
A reduction of interest rate has been made for the remaining term of the loan to a rate lower than the current market rate for new debt with similar risk
·
The maturity date of the loan has been extended with a stated interest rate lower than the current market rate for new debt with similar risk
·
The outstanding principal amount and/or accrued interest have been reduced

In instances in which the interest rate has been reduced, management would not deem the modification a TDR in the event that the reduction in interest rate reflected either a general decline in market interest rates or an effort to maintain a relationship with a borrower who could readily obtain funds from other sources at the current market interest rate, and the terms of the restructured loan are comparable to the terms offered by the Bank to non-troubled debtors.

Accrual status for TDRs is determined separately for each TDR in accordance with the policies for determining accrual or non-accrual status that are outlined on page F-12.   At the time an agreement is entered into between the Bank and the borrower that results in the Bank's determination that a TDR has been created, the loan can be either on accrual or non-accrual status.  If a loan is on non-accrual status at the time it is restructured, it continues to be classified as non-accrual until the borrower has demonstrated compliance with the modified loan terms for a period of at least six months.  Conversely, if at the time of restructuring the loan is performing (and accruing), it will remain accruing throughout its restructured period, unless the loan subsequently meets any of the criteria for non-accrual status under the Bank's policy, as disclosed on page F-12 and agency regulations.

The Bank never accepts receivables or equity interests in satisfaction of TDRs.

At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, all TDRs were collateralized by real estate that generated rental income.  For TDRs that demonstrated conditions sufficient to warrant accrual status, the present value of the expected net cash flows of the underlying property was utilized as the primary means of determining impairment.  Any shortfall in the present value of the expected net cash flows calculated at each measurement period (typically quarter-end) compared to the present value of the expected net cash flows at the time of the original loan agreement was recognized as either an allocated reserve (in the event that it related to lower expected interest payments) or a charge-off (if related to lower expected principal payments).  For TDRs on non-accrual status, an appraisal of the underlying real estate collateral is deemed the most appropriate measure to utilize when evaluating impairment, and any shortfall in valuation from the recorded balance is accounted for through a charge-off.  In the event that either an allocated reserve or a charge-off is recognized on TDRs, the periodic loan loss provision is impacted.

The following table summarizes outstanding TDRs by underlying collateral type as of the dates indicated:

 
As of December 31, 2014
 
As of December 31, 2013
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
   One- to four-family residential, including
     condominium and cooperative apartment
2
$605
 
3
$934
   Multifamily residential and residential mixed use
4
1,105
 
4
1,148
   Commercial mixed use real estate
1
4,400
 
   Commercial real estate
4
13,707
 
5
22,245
Total real estate
11
$19,817
 
12
$24,327


The following table summarizes outstanding TDRs by accrual status as of the dates indicated:

 
As of December 31, 2014
 
As of December 31, 2013
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Outstanding principal balance at period end
11
$19,817
 
12
$24,327
TDRs on accrual status at period end
9
15,100
 
10
18,620
TDRs on non-accrual status at period end
2
4,717
 
2
5,707

The following table summarizes activity related to TDRs for the periods indicated:

 
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2014
 
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
 
Number of Loans
Pre-Modification
Outstanding Recorded Investment
Post-Modification Outstanding Recorded Investment
 
Number of Loans
Pre-Modification
Outstanding Recorded Investment
Post-Modification Outstanding Recorded Investment
Loan modifications during the period
   that met the definition of a TDR:
             
     Commercial mixed use real estate
1
$4,400
$4,400
 
     Commercial real estate
1
3,500
3,500
 
TOTAL
2
$7,900
$7,900
 

OREO

 Property acquired by the Bank, or a subsidiary, as a result of foreclosure on a mortgage loan or a deed in lieu of foreclosure is classified as OREO.  Upon entering OREO status, the Bank obtains a current appraisal on the property and reassesses its likely realizable value quarterly thereafter.  OREO is carried at the lower of the fair value or book balance, with any write downs recognized through a provision recorded in non-interest expense.  Only appraised values, or either contractual or formal marketed values that fall below the appraised value, are used when determining the likely realizable value of OREO at each reporting period.  The Bank typically seeks to dispose of OREO properties in a timely manner.  As a result, OREO properties have generally not warranted subsequent independent appraisals.

OREO properties totaled $18,000 at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.  The Bank did not recognize any write-downs on OREO properties during the year ended December 31, 2014.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, a write down in value of $180,000 was recognized on an OREO property acquired during the period.

The following table sets forth information regarding non-accrual loans and certain other non-performing assets (including OREO) at the dates indicated:

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
   
2011
   
2010
 
Non-accrual Loans and Non-Performing Assets
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
 
   One- to four-family residential including condominium and
      cooperative apartment
 
$
1,310
   
$
1,242
   
$
938
   
$
2,205
   
$
223
 
   Multifamily residential and residential mixed use real estate
   
167
     
1,197
     
507
     
7,069
     
5,010
 
   Commercial real estate and commercial mixed use real estate
   
4,717
     
10,107
     
7,435
     
16,674
     
11,992
 
   Consumer
   
4
     
3
     
8
     
4
     
17
 
   Sub-total
   
6,198
     
12,549
     
8,888
     
25,952
     
17,242
 
Non-accrual loans held for sale
   
-
     
-
     
560
     
3,022
     
2,926
 
Total non-accrual loans
   
6,198
     
12,549
     
9,448
     
28,974
     
20,168
 
Non-performing pooled trust preferred securities ("TRUPS")
   
904
     
898
     
892
     
1,012
     
564
 
OREO
   
18
     
18
     
-
     
-
     
-
 
Total non-performing assets
   
7,120
     
13,465
     
10,340
     
29,986
     
20,732
 
Ratios:
                                       
   Total non-accrual loans to total loans
   
0.15
%
   
0.34
%
   
0.25
%
   
0.84
%
   
0.58
%
   Total non-performing assets to total assets
   
0.16
     
0.33
     
0.26
     
0.75
     
0.51
 
                                         
TDRs and Impaired Loans
                                       
TDRs
 
$
19,817
   
$
24,327
   
$
51,123
   
$
48,753
   
$
22,558
 
Impaired loans (1)
   
19,983
     
30,189
     
53,144
     
73,406
     
44,097
 
(1) Amount includes all TDRs.  See the discussion entitled "Impaired Loans" commencing on page F-12 for a reconciliation of non-accrual and impaired loans.

Other Potential Problem Loans

(i)  Accruing Loans 90 Days or More Past Due

The Bank continued accruing interest on eight real estate loans with an aggregate outstanding balance of $3.3 million at December 31, 2014, and five real estate loans with an aggregate outstanding balance of $1.0 million at December 31, 2013, all of which were 90 days or more past due on their respective contractual maturity dates.  These loans continued to make monthly payments consistent with their initial contractual amortization schedule exclusive of the balloon payments due at maturity.  These loans were well secured and were expected to be refinanced, and, therefore, remained on accrual status and were deemed performing assets at the dates indicated above.

(ii)  Loans Delinquent 30 to 89 Days

The Bank had six real estate loans totaling $1.4 million that were delinquent between 30 and 89 days at December 31, 2014, a net decrease of approximately $166,000 compared to nine such loans totaling $1.6 million at December 31, 2013. The 30 to 89 day delinquency levels fluctuate monthly, and are generally considered a less accurate indicator of near-term credit quality trends than non-accrual loans.

(iii) Temporary Loan Modifications

There were no temporary modifications entered into during the years ended December 31, 2014 or 2013.  At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Bank had 3 loans totaling $1.8 million that were deemed temporary loan modifications and were mutually modified with the borrowers in a manner that: (i) did not involve a full re-underwriting of the loan; and (ii) did not meet the criteria for TDR.  These modifications, which have a typical deferral term of 12 months, and with the deferred payments added to the contractual payments at or near maturity, were granted by the Bank to borrowers who requested cash flow relief in order to assist them through periods of sub-optimal occupancy.  The key features of these modified loans were: 1) they permitted only minor reductions in the cash flow requirements of debt service; and 2) there was no forgiveness of contractual principal and interest amounts due to the Bank.  The terms of modification were generally in the form of either: (1) temporary suspension of monthly principal amortization, which, given the balloon repayment feature of these loans, typically constitutes a minor concession; or (2) a temporary reduction in interest rate, or a permanent reduction to an interest rate higher than that offered a prime borrower and generally reflective of the credit condition of the loan at the time
15

of modification.  In consideration of paragraph 12c of ASC 310-40-15, the interest rate on these temporary modifications was consistent with a "market rate" that: 1) the Bank would have offered a different borrower with comparable loan-to-value and debt service coverage ratios; and 2) the borrower could have received from another financial institution at the time of modification.  To date, none of these temporarily modified loans have had their maturities extended, nor would this be a typical negotiable item for the Bank.  Although all of the temporarily modified loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013 were secured by real estate, none of them were reliant upon liquidation of the underlying collateral for repayment of the outstanding loan.  In the rare instance in which the Bank also held a second lien on a first mortgage that was temporarily modified, it would consider the combined debt obligations of both liens in determining potential impairment.  Any impairment determined based upon this combined debt would result in a charge-off of the second lien initially, and the first loan only after the full second lien has been eliminated.
      Any temporary modification that either: 1) reduced the contractual rate below market as defined in the previous paragraph; 2) forgave principal owed; or 3) satisfied any of the other criteria designated in ASC 310-40-15 was deemed a TDR at December 31, 2014 and 2013.  Any adjustments to interest rates for loans experiencing sub-optimal underwriting conditions would be authorized under the loan approval and underwriting polices that are summarized beginning on page F-9.

Based upon the criteria established by the Bank to review its potential problem loans for impairment, designation of these temporarily modified loans as TDRs would not have had a material impact upon the determination of the adequacy of the Bank's allowance for loan losses at either December 31, 2014 or 2013.

Loans Serviced for Fannie Mae ("FNMA") Subject to the First Loss Position

Until February 20, 2014, the Bank serviced a pool of multifamily loans it sold to FNMA.   Pursuant to the sale agreement with FNMA, the Bank retained an obligation (off-balance sheet contingent liability) to absorb a portion of any losses (as defined in the agreement) incurred by FNMA in connection with the loans sold (the "First Loss Position").  The First Loss Position totaled $15.4 million as of December 31, 2013.  Against the First Loss Position, the Bank, as of December 31, 2013, had a recorded liability of $1.0 million.  On February 20, 2014, the Bank repurchased all remaining loans within this pool.  As a result of the repurchase, the First Loss Position and related liability were extinguished.

Allowance for Loan Losses

Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the United States ("GAAP") require the Bank to maintain an appropriate allowance for loan losses.  The Bank maintains a Loan Loss Reserve Committee charged with, among other functions, responsibility for monitoring the appropriateness of the loan loss reserve.

To assist the Loan Loss Reserve Committee in carrying out its assigned duties, the Bank, during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, engaged the services of an experienced third-party loan review firm to perform a review of the loan portfolio.  The 2014 review program covered 100% of construction and land development loans and 50% of the non-one- to four-family and consumer loan portfolio.  Included within the annual 50% target were: (1) the twenty largest loans in the multifamily and commercial real estate loan portfolio; (2) the ten largest pure commercial real estate loans (the remaining 50% not covered in the vendor review were reviewed internally); (3) the ten largest commercial mixed use real estate loans; (4) 50im three categories of pass loan grade (including Watch list loans); and (13) 50% of loans over $250,000 originated under the small mixed use lending program.  The loan review firm also reviewed a sampling of one- to four-family residential, including condominium and cooperative apartment, and consumer loans, all of which represented relatively small segments of the Bank's total loan portfolio during the years ended December  31, 2014 and 2013.

The Loan Loss Reserve Committee's findings, along with recommendations for changes to loan loss reserve provisions, if any, are reported directly to the Bank's executive management and the Lending and CRA Committee
16

of the Board of Directors.  The following table sets forth activity in the Bank's allowance for loan losses at or for the dates indicated:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Total loans outstanding at end of period (1)
$4,119,240
$3,699,519
$3,506,368
$3,463,887
$3,473,492
Average total loans outstanding during the period (1)
$3,964,520
$3,606,039
$3,402,838
$3,447,035
$3,455,659
Allowance for loan losses:
         
Balance at beginning of period
$20,153 
$20,550 
$20,254 
$19,166 
$21,505 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
(1,872) 
369 
3,921 
6,846 
11,209 
Charge-offs
         
   Multifamily residential
(87)
(504)
(2,478)
(2,750)
(10,864)
   Commercial real estate
(336)
(400)
(1,342)
(2,307)
(2,760)
   One- to four-family including condominium and cooperative apartment
(46)
(117)
(777)
(89)
(257)
   Construction
-  
-  
(3)
(962)
-  
   Consumer
(9)
(21)
(10)
(29)
(3)
Total charge-offs
(478)
(1,042)
(4,610)
(6,137)
(13,884)
Recoveries
690 
276 
903 
212 
64 
Reserve for loan commitments transferred from other liabilities
-   
-   
82 
167 
272 
Balance at end of period
$18,493 
$20,153 
$20,550 
$20,254 
$19,166 
Allowance for loan losses to total loans at end of period total loans at end of period
 
0.45%
 
0.54%
 
0.59%
 
0.58%
 
0.55%
Allowance for loan losses to total non-performing loans at end of period
 
298.37   
 
160.59   
 
231.21   
 
78.04   
 
95.03   
Allowance for loan losses to total non-performing loans and TDRs at end of period
 
71.09   
 
64.66   
 
42.58   
 
29.08   
 
58.81   
Ratio of net charge-offs to average loans outstanding during the period
 
(0.01)  
 
0.02   
 
0.11   
 
0.17   
 
0.40   
(1)
Total loans represent gross loans (including loans held for sale), net of deferred loan fees and discounts.

Based upon its evaluation of the loan portfolio, management believes that the Bank maintained its allowance for loan losses at a level appropriate to absorb losses inherent within the Bank's loan portfolio as of the balance sheet dates.  Factors considered in determining the appropriateness of the allowance for loan losses include the Bank's past loan loss experience, known and inherent risks in the portfolio, existing adverse situations which may affect a borrower's ability to repay, estimated value of underlying collateral and current economic conditions in the Bank's lending area.  Although management uses available information to estimate losses on loans, future additions to, or reductions in, the allowance may be necessary based on changes in economic conditions or other factors beyond management's control. In addition, the Bank's regulators, as an integral part of their examination processes, periodically review the Bank's allowance for loan losses, and may require the Bank to recognize additions to, or reductions in, the allowance based upon judgments different from those of management.

The Bank's periodic evaluation of its allowance for loan losses has traditionally been comprised of different components, each of which is discussed in Note 6 to the Company's consolidated audited financial statements.

The following table sets forth the Bank's allowance for loan losses allocated by underlying collateral type and the percent of each to total loans at the dates indicated.  Any allocated allowance associated with loans both deemed impaired and internally graded as Special Mention is reflected on the impaired loan line.

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
   
2011
   
2010
 
   
Allocated
Amount
   
Percent
of Loans
in Each Category to Total Loans
   
Allocated
Amount
   
Percent
of Loans
in Each Category to Total Loans
   
Allocated
Amount
   
Percent
of Loans
in Each Category to Total Loans
   
Allocated
Amount
   
Percent
of Loans
in Each Category to Total Loans
   
Allocated
Amount
   
Percent
of Loans
in Each Category to Total Loans
 
   
(Dollars in Thousands)
 
Impaired loans
 
$
19
     
0.49
%
 
$
1,771
     
0.82
%
 
$
520
     
1.52
%
 
$
2,175
     
2.12
%
 
$
-
     
1.27
%
Substandard loans not
   deemed impaired
   
371
     
0.44
     
53
     
0.15
     
795
     
0.44
     
-
     
-
     
-
     
-
 
Special Mention loans
   
228
     
0.81
     
185
     
0.42
     
145
     
0.54
     
800
     
0.56
     
1,880
     
1.31
 
Pass graded loans:
                                                                               
   Multifamily residential
   
13,600
     
79.38
     
13,743
     
78.49
     
14,118
     
75.99
     
14,057
     
74.67
     
13,797
     
71.35
 
   Commercial real estate
   
4,156
     
17.15
     
4,189
     
17.81
     
4,750
     
19.08
     
2,893
     
19.67
     
2,945
     
22.53
 
   One-to four- family
     including
     condominium and
     cooperative apartment
   
95
     
1.68
     
188
     
1.75
     
195
     
2.36
     
303
     
2.82
     
404
     
3.32
 
   Construction and
     land acquisition
   
-
     
-
     
-
     
-
     
-
     
-
     
-
     
0.09
     
106
     
0.14
 
Consumer
   
24
     
0.05
     
24
     
0.06
     
27
     
0.07
     
26
     
0.07
     
34
     
0.08
 
Total
 
$
18,493
     
100.00
%
 
$
20,153
     
100.00
%
 
$
20,550
     
100.00
%
 
$
20,254
     
100.00
%
 
$
19,166
     
100.00
%

Reserve Liability on the First Loss Position

The Bank had recourse exposure under the First Loss Position associated with multifamily loans that it sold to FNMA between December 2002 and February 2009, and maintained an actual reserve liability related to this contingent First Loss Position. The reserve liability reflected estimated probable losses on this loan pool at each period end.  For performing loans within the FNMA serviced pool, the reserve recognized was based upon the historical loss experience of this loan pool.  For problem loans within the pool, estimated losses were determined in a manner consistent with impaired loans within the Bank's loan portfolio.  In February 2014, the Bank re-acquired all such remaining loans.  As a result, the First Loss Position and related reserve liability were extinguished.
 
      The following is a summary of the aggregate balance of multifamily loans serviced for FNMA, the period-end First Loss Position associated with these loans, and activity in the related reserve liability:

   
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
   
(Dollars in Thousands)
 
Outstanding balance of multifamily loans serviced for FNMA at period end
 
$
-
   
$
208,375
   
$
256,731
 
Total First Loss Position at end of period
   
-
     
15,428
     
15,428
 
Reserve Liability on the First Loss Position
                       
Balance at beginning of period
 
$
1,040
   
$
1,383
   
$
2,993
 
Credit to reduce the liability for the First Loss Position(1)
   
(1,040
)
   
(305
)
   
(1,286
)
Charge-offs and other net reductions in balance
   
-
     
(38
)
   
(324
)
Balance at period end
 
$
-
   
$
1,040
   
$
1,383
 
(1)
Amount recognized as a portion of mortgage banking income during the period.

Reserve for Loan Commitments

At December 31, 2014, the Bank maintained a reserve of $25,000 associated with unfunded loan commitments accepted by the borrower at December 31, 2014.  This reserve is determined based upon the outstanding volume of loan commitments at each period end.  Any increases or reductions in this reserve are recognized in periodic non-interest expense.

Investment Activities

      Investment strategies are implemented by the Asset and Liability Committee ("ALCO"), which is comprised of the Chief Operating Officer, Chief Investment Officer, Chief Risk Officer and other senior officers.  The strategies take into account the overall composition of the Bank's balance sheet, including loans and deposits,
and are intended to protect and enhance the Bank's earnings and market value, and effectively manage both interest rate risk and liquidity.  The strategies are reviewed periodically by the ALCO and reported to the Board of Directors.

Investment Policy of the Bank.   The investment policy of the Bank, which is adopted by its Board of Directors, is designed to help achieve the Bank's overall asset/liability management objectives while complying with applicable regulations.  Generally, when selecting investments for the Bank's portfolio, the policy emphasizes principal preservation, liquidity, diversification, short maturities and/or repricing terms, and a favorable return on investment. The policy permits investments in various types of liquid assets, including obligations of the U.S. Treasury and federal agencies, investment grade corporate debt, various types of MBS, commercial paper, certificates of deposit ("CDs") and overnight federal funds sold to financial institutions.  The Bank's Board of Directors periodically approves all financial institutions to which the Bank sells federal funds.
 
      The Bank's investment policy limits a combined investment in securities issued by any one entity, with the exception of obligations of the U.S. Government, federal agencies and GSEs, to an amount not exceeding the lesser of either 2% of its total assets or 15% of its total tangible capital (20% of tangible capital in the event all securities of the obligor maintain a "AAA" credit rating).  The Bank was in compliance with this policy limit at both December 31, 2014 and 2013.  The Bank may, with Board approval, engage in hedging transactions utilizing derivative instruments.  During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank did not hold any derivative instruments or embedded derivative instruments that required bifurcation.

Federal Agency Obligations.   Federal agency obligations are purchased from time to time in order to provide the Bank a favorable yield in comparison to overnight investments.  These securities possess sound credit ratings, and are readily accepted as collateral for the Bank's borrowings.  Federal agency obligation investments totaled $70,000 at December 31, 2014.
 
      MBS.  The Bank's investment policy calls for the purchase of only priority tranches when investing in MBS. MBS provide the portfolio with investments offering desirable repricing, cash flow and credit quality characteristics. MBS yield less than the loans that underlie the securities as a result of the cost of payment guarantees and credit enhancements which reduce credit risk to the investor.  Although MBS guaranteed by federally sponsored agencies carry a reduced credit risk compared to whole loans, such securities remain subject to the risk that fluctuating interest rates, along with other factors such as the geographic distribution of the underlying mortgage loans, may alter the prepayment rate of such loans and thus affect the value of such securities.  MBS, however, are more liquid than individual mortgage loans and may readily be used to collateralize borrowings.  MBS also provide the Company with important interest rate risk management features, as the entire portfolio provides monthly cash flow for re-investment at current market interest rates.  At December 31, 2014, all MBS owned by the Company possessed the highest credit rating from at least one nationally recognized rating agency, with the exception of one privately issued MBS in the Bank's portfolio with book and market values totaling $449,000 and $455,000 at December 31, 2014, respectively. This security was downgraded to sub-investment grade by the rating agencies during 2009 due to deteriorating conditions in the national real estate market. Current credit ratings on this security range from CC to Caa1. Despite the downgrade, this security continues to perform in accordance with its contractual terms.
 
      The Company's consolidated investment in MBS totaled $26.4 million, or 0.6% of total assets, at December 31, 2014, the great majority of which was owned by the Bank.  Approximately 97.0% of the MBS portfolio at December 31, 2014 was comprised of pass-through securities guaranteed by the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation ("FHLMC"), Government National Mortgage Association ("GNMA") or FNMA.  The average duration of these securities was estimated to be 1.1 years as of December 31, 2014 and 1.2 years at December 31, 2013.
 
      At December 31, 2014, included in the MBS portfolio was a $347,000 Collateralized Mortgage Obligation ("CMO") issued by a highly rated private financial institution, and was rated in the highest rating category by at least one nationally recognized rating agency.  The Company's investment in this CMO occupies the priority tranche within the underlying issue.

The Company typically classifies MBS as available-for-sale in recognition of the prepayment uncertainty associated with these securities, and carries them at fair market value.  The fair value of MBS available-for-sale (including the CMO) was $1.5 million above their amortized cost at December 31, 2014.  Within this total, the aggregate fair value of the private financial institution-issued CMO exceeded its cost basis by approximately $4,000.

The following table sets forth activity in the MBS portfolio for the periods indicated:

   
For the Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
   
Dollars in Thousands
 
Amortized cost at beginning of period
 
$
29,962
   
$
47,448
   
$
89,149
 
Purchases, net
   
875
     
-
     
1,318
 
Principal repayments
   
(5,863
)
   
(17,372
)
   
(42,822
)
Premium amortization, net
   
(28
)
   
(114
)
   
(197
)
Amortized cost at end of period
 
$
24,946
   
$
29,962
   
$
47,448
 
 
      Corporate Debt Obligations.  The Bank may invest in investment-grade debt obligations of various corporations.  The Bank's investment policy limits new investments in corporate debt obligations to companies rated single ''A'' or better by one of the nationally recognized rating agencies at the time of purchase.  As mentioned previously, with certain exceptions, the Bank's investment policy also limits a combined investment in corporate securities issued by any one entity to an amount not exceeding the lesser of either 2% of its total assets or 15% of its total tangible capital (20% of core capital in the event all securities of the obligor maintain a "AAA" credit rating).
 
      As of December 31, 2014, the Bank's investment in corporate debt obligations was comprised solely of seven TRUPS with an aggregate remaining amortized cost of $16.1 million (based upon their purchase cost basis) that were secured primarily by the preferred debt obligations of pools of U.S. banks (with a small portion secured by debt obligations of insurance companies).  All seven securities were designated as held-to-maturity at December 31, 2014.

At December 31, 2014, five of the seven securities had previously recognized other than temporary impairment ("OTTI") charges, the most recent of which occurred during the year ended December 31, 2012.  The aggregate OTTI charge recognized on these securities was $9.5 million at December 31, 2014, of which $8.9 million was determined to be attributable to credit related factors and $569,000 was determined to be attributable to non-credit related factors. At December 31, 2014, these five securities had credit ratings ranging from "C" to "Caa3."  The remaining two securities, which were not subject to OTTI charges as of December 31, 2014, had credit ratings ranging from "BB-" to "A" on that date.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, non-credit related OTTI declined by $32,000 reflecting improvement in the estimated fair value of the five securities for which OTTI had previously been recognized.

At December 31, 2014, the remaining aggregate amortized cost of TRUPS that could be subject to future OTTI charges through earnings was $6.9 million.  Of this total, unrealized losses of $1.5 million have already been recognized as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss.

Investment Strategies of the Holding Company.   The Holding Company's investment policy generally calls for investments in relatively short-term, liquid securities similar to those permitted by the securities investment policy of the Bank.  Holding Company investments are generally intended primarily to provide future liquidity which may be utilized for general business activities.  These may include, but are not limited to: (1) purchases of the Holding Company's common stock into treasury; (2) repayment of principal and interest on the Holding Company's $70.7 million trust preferred securities debt; (3) subject to applicable restrictions, the payment of dividends on the Holding Company's common stock; and/or (4) investments in the equity securities of other financial institutions and other investments not permitted to the Bank.

The investment policy of the Holding Company calls for the purchase of only priority tranches when investing in MBS, limits new investments in corporate debt obligations to companies rated single ''A'' or better by one of the nationally recognized rating agencies at the time of purchase, and limits investments in any one corporate entity to the lesser of 1% of total assets or 5% of the Company's total consolidated capital. The Holding Company may, with Board approval, engage in hedging transactions utilizing derivative instruments.  During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Holding Company did not hold any derivative instruments or embedded derivative instruments that required bifurcation.

The Holding Company cannot assure that it will engage in these investment activities in the future.  At December 31, 2014, the Holding Company's principal asset was its $454.1 million investment in the Bank's common stock.  This investment in its subsidiary is not actively managed and falls outside of the Holding Company investment policy and strategy discussed above.

Equity Investments. The Holding Company's investment in mutual funds (primarily equity mutual funds) totaled $12.3 million at December 31, 2014, of which $3.7 million was classified as available for sale, and $8.6 million was classified as trading.  At December 31, 2014, the aggregate fair value of the available for sale mutual fund investments was $125,000 below their cost basis, and the aggregate fair value of mutual fund investments classified as trading was $80,000 below their cost basis.  The reduction of fair value below the cost basis of the available for sale equity investments was deemed temporary in nature as of December 31, 2014.

The following table sets forth the amortized/historical cost and fair value of the total portfolio of investment securities and MBS by accounting classification and type of security, that were owned by either the Bank or Holding Company at the dates indicated:

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
   
Amortized/ Historical Cost (1)
   
Fair Value
   
Amortized/ Historical Cost (1)
   
Fair Value
   
Amortized/ Historical Cost (1)
   
Fair Value
 
MBS
 
Dollars in Thousands
 
Available-for-Sale:
                       
FHLMC pass through certificates
 
$
17,080
   
$
18,145
   
$
20,686
   
$
21,766
   
$
32,218
   
$
33,063
 
FNMA pass through certificates
   
5,763
     
6,125
     
7,168
     
7,619
     
10,233
     
10,899
 
GNMA pass through certificates
   
1,311
     
1,337
     
553
     
574
     
691
     
716
 
Private issuer MBS
   
449
     
455
     
662
     
680
     
962
     
955
 
Agency issued CMOs
   
-
     
-
     
319
     
321
     
2,436
     
2,462
 
Private issuer CMOs
   
343
     
347
     
574
     
583
     
908
     
926
 
Total MBS available-for-sale
   
24,946
     
26,409
     
29,962
     
31,543
     
47,448
     
49,021
 
                                                 
INVESTMENT SECURITIES
                                               
TRUPS Held-to-Maturity
   
5,367
     
6,263
     
5,341
     
5,163
     
7,828
     
6,267
 
Total investment securities held-to-maturity
   
5,367
     
6,263
     
5,341
     
5,163
     
7,828
     
6,267
 
Available-for-Sale:
                                               
Federal agency obligations
   
70
     
70
     
15,070
     
15,091
     
29,820
     
29,945
 
Mutual funds
   
3,860
     
3,736
     
2,760
     
3,558
     
2,556
     
3,005
 
Total investment securities Available-for-Sale
   
3,930
     
3,806
     
17,830
     
18,649
     
32,376
     
32,950
 
Trading:
                                               
Mutual funds
   
8,640
     
8,559
     
6,385
     
6,822
     
4,743
     
4,874
 
Total trading securities
   
8,640
     
8,559
     
6,385
     
6,822
     
4,743
     
4,874
 
TOTAL INVESTMENT SECURITIES AND MBS
 
$
42,883
   
$
45,037
   
$
59,518
   
$
62,177
   
$
92,395
   
$
93,112
 
(1)
Amount is net of cumulative credit related OTTI totaling $9.0 million on TRUPS held-to-maturity at December 31, 2014, $9.0 million on TRUPS held-to-maturity and $106,000 on mutual funds available-for-sale at December 31, 2013, and $9.0 million on TRUPS held-to-maturity and $348,000 on mutual funds available-for-sale at December 31, 2012.

The following table presents the amortized cost, fair value and weighted average yield of the Company's consolidated available-for-sale investment securities and MBS (exclusive of equity investments) at December 31, 2014, categorized by remaining period to contractual maturity:

 
 
Amortized Cost
 
 
Fair Value
Weighted
Average Tax Equivalent Yield
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
MBS:
     
Due within 1 year
$- 
$- 
-%
Due after 1 year but within 5 years
3,104
3,250
4.72   
Due after 5 years but within 10 years
4,549
4,861
4.95   
Due after ten years
17,293
18,298
2.67   
Total
24,946
26,409
3.34   
       
Federal Agency obligations:
     
Due within 1 year
-   
Due after 1 year but within 5 years
70
70
7.90   
Due after 5 years but within 10 years
 
-   
Due after ten years
-   
Total
70
70
7.90   
       
Total:
     
Due within 1 year
Due after 1 year but within 5 years
3,174
3,320
4.79   
Due after 5 years but within 10 years
4,549
4,861
4.95   
Due after ten years
17,293
18,298
2.67   
Total
$25,016
$26,479
3.35%

With respect to MBS, the entire carrying amount of each security at December 31, 2014 is reflected in the above table in the maturity period that includes the final security payment date and, accordingly, no effect has been given to periodic repayments or possible prepayments.  As mentioned previously, the investment policies of both the Holding Company and the Bank call for the purchase of only priority tranches when investing in MBS.  As a result, the weighted average duration of the Company's MBS approximated 1.1 years as of December 31, 2014 when giving consideration to anticipated repayments or possible prepayments, which is significantly less than their weighted average maturity.

GAAP requires that investments in debt securities be classified in one of the following three categories and accounted for accordingly:  trading securities, securities available-for-sale or securities held-to-maturity.  GAAP requires investments in equity securities that have readily determinable fair values be classified as either trading securities or securities available-for-sale.  Unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities are reported as a separate component of stockholders' equity referred to as accumulated other comprehensive income, net of deferred taxes.  At December 31, 2014, the Company owned, on a consolidated basis, $30.2 million of securities classified as available-for-sale, which represented 0.7% of total assets. Based upon the size of the available-for-sale portfolio, future variations in the market value of the available-for-sale portfolio could result in fluctuations in the Company's consolidated stockholders' equity.

Sources of Funds

General.   The Bank's primary sources of funding for its lending and investment activities include deposits, loan and MBS payments, investment security principal and interest payments, and advances from the FHLBNY.  The Bank may also sell selected multifamily residential, mixed use and one- to four-family residential real estate loans to private sector secondary market purchasers and has in the past sold such loans to FNMA.  The Company may additionally issue debt under appropriate circumstances.  Although maturities and scheduled amortization of loans and investments are predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and prepayments on mortgage loans and MBS are influenced by interest rates, economic conditions and competition.

Deposits.   The Bank offers a variety of deposit accounts possessing a range of interest rates and terms.  At December 31, 2014, the Bank offered, and presently offers, savings, money market, interest bearing and non-interest bearing checking accounts, and CDs. The flow of deposits is influenced significantly by general economic conditions, changes in prevailing interest rates, and competition from other financial institutions and investment products. Traditionally, the Bank has relied upon direct and general marketing, customer service, convenience and long-standing relationships with customers to generate deposits.  The communities in which the Bank maintains
branch offices have historically provided the great majority of its deposits.  At December 31, 2014, the Bank had deposit liabilities of $2.66 billion, up $152.6 million from December 31, 2013 (See "Part II - Item 7 – Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations – Liquidity and Capital Resources").  Within total deposits at December 31, 2014, Individual Retirement Accounts totaled $311.2 million, or 12%.

The Bank is also eligible to participate in the Certificate of Deposit Account Registry Service ("CDARS"), through which it can either purchase or sell CDs.  Purchases of CDs through this program are limited by Bank policy to an aggregate of 10% of the Bank's average interest earning assets.  As of December 31, 2014, deposits taken through this program totaled $4.6 million.

The Bank is authorized to accept brokered deposits up to an aggregate limit of $120.0 million.  At December 31, 2014 and 2013, total brokered deposits consisted solely of the $4.6 million purchased CDARS deposits.

The following table presents the deposit activity of the Bank for the periods indicated:

 
Year Ended December 31,
DEPOSIT ACTIVITY
2014
2013
2012
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Deposits
$4,052,651
$4,204,263
$3,955,317
Withdrawals
3,919,596
4,196,473
3,841,368
Deposits greater than Withdrawals
$133,055
$7,790
$113,949
Interest credited
19,591
19,927
21,779
Total increase in deposits
$152,646
$27,717
$135,728

At December 31, 2014, the Bank had $456.7 million in CDs with a minimum denomination of one-hundred thousand dollars as follows:

 
 
Maturity Date
 
 
Amount
Weighted Average Rate
(Dollars in Thousands)
Within three months
$45,752
1.59%
After three but within six months
53,223
1.29   
After six but within twelve months
147,505
1.10   
After 12 months
210,261
1.87   
Total
$456,741
1.53%

The following table sets forth the distribution of the Bank's deposit accounts and the related weighted average interest rates at the dates indicated:

 
At December 31, 2014
 
At December 31, 2013
 
At December 31, 2012
 
 
 
Amount
Percent
of Total Deposits
Weighted Average Rate
 
 
 
Amount
Percent of Total Deposits
Weighted Average Rate
 
 
 
Amount
Percent of Total Deposits
Weighted Average Rate
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Savings accounts
$372,753
14.0%
0.05%
 
$376,900
15.0%
0.05%
 
$371,792
15.0%
0.15%
CDs
926,318
34.8   
1.43   
 
828,409
33.0   
1.55   
 
891,975
36.0   
1.68   
Money market accounts
1,094,698
41.2   
0.61   
 
1,040,079
41.5   
0.50   
 
961,359
38.8   
0.57   
Interest bearing checking accounts
78,430
2.9   
0.08   
 
87,301
3.5   
0.08   
 
95,159
3.8   
0.16   
Non-interest bearing checking accounts
187,593
7.1   
-    
 
174,457
7.0   
-     
 
159,144
6.4   
-     
Totals
$2,659,792
100.0%
0.76%
 
$2,507,146
100.0%
0.73%
 
$2,479,429
100.0%
0.86%



The weighted average maturity of the Bank's CDs at December 31, 2014 was 19.8   months, compared to 18.7 months at December 31, 2013.  The following table presents, by interest rate ranges, the dollar amount of CDs outstanding at the dates indicated and the period to maturity of the CDs outstanding at December 31, 2014:

 
                Period to Maturity at December 31, 2014
 
 
Interest Rate Range
 
One Year or Less
Over One Year to Three Years
Over Three Years to Five Years
 
Over Five Years
 
Total at
December 31,
2014
Total at
December 31,
2013
Total at
December 31,
2012
(Dollars in Thousands)
1.00% and below
$298,522
$47,433
$-  
$- 
 
$345,955
$407,927
$414,089
1.01% to 2.00%
131,447
79,680
88,682
11,184
 
310,993
142,030
146,168
2.01% to 3.00%
25,222
72,070
103,745
 178
 
201,215
123,923
131,691
3.01% to 4.00%
49,728
1,375
17,032 
-
 
68,135
154,529
 163,158
4.01% and above
20
 
20
36,869
Total
$504,939
$200,558
$209,459
$11,362
 
$926,318
$828,409
$891,975

Borrowings.   The Bank has been a member and shareholder of the FHLBNY since 1980. One of the privileges offered to FHLBNY shareholders is the ability to secure advances from the FHLBNY under various lending programs at competitive interest rates.  The Bank's total borrowing line equaled at least $1.57 billion at December 31, 2014.

The Bank had $1.2 billion and $910.0 million of FHLBNY advances outstanding at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively. The Bank maintained sufficient collateral, as defined by the FHLBNY (principally in the form of real estate loans), to secure such advances.

The Company had no Securities Sold Under Agreements to Repurchase ("REPOS") outstanding at December 31, 2014, 2013 or 2012.  The Company elected to prepay its outstanding REPOS during 2012, incurring $28.8 million in additional interest expense in 2012 on the prepayment.

FHLBNY Advances:
 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Balance outstanding at end of period
$1,173,725
$910,000
$842,500
Average interest cost at end of period
1.74%
2.35%
2.68%
Weighted average balance outstanding during the period
$1,039,203
$761,491
$826,176
Average interest cost during the period
2.28%
2.89%
2.96%
Maximum balance outstanding at month end during period
$1,173,725
$910,000
$939,775

Subsidiary Activities

In addition to the Bank, the Holding Company's direct and indirect subsidiaries consist of eight wholly-owned corporations, two of which are directly owned by the Holding Company and six of which are directly owned by the Bank.  The following table presents an overview of the Holding Company's subsidiaries, other than the Bank, as of December 31, 2014:

 
Subsidiary
Year/ State of Incorporation
 
Primary Business Activities
Direct Subsidiaries of the Holding Company:
   
842 Manhattan Avenue Corp.
1995/ New York
Currently in the process of dissolution.
Dime Community Capital Trust I
2004/ Delaware
Statutory Trust (1)
Direct Subsidiaries of the Bank:
   
Boulevard Funding Corp.
1981 / New York
Management and ownership of real estate
Dime Insurance Agency Inc. ( f/k/a Havemeyer Investments, Inc.)
1997 / New York
Sale of non-FDIC insured investment products
DSBW Preferred Funding Corp.
1998 / Delaware
Real Estate Investment Trust investing in multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans
DSBW Residential Preferred Funding Corp.
1998 / Delaware
Real Estate Investment Trust investing in one- to four-family real estate loans
Dime Reinvestment Corporation
2004 / Delaware
Community Development Entity.  Currently inactive.
195 Havemeyer Corp.
2008 / New York
Management and ownership of real estate.  Currently inactive.

(1)   Dime Community Capital Trust I was established for the exclusive purpose of issuing and selling capital securities and using the proceeds to acquire approximately $70 million of junior subordinated debt securities issued by the Holding Company. The junior subordinated debt securities (referred to in this Annual Report as "trust preferred securities payable") bear an interest rate of 7.0%, mature on April 14, 2034, became callable at any time after April 2009, and are the sole assets of Dime Community Capital Trust I.  In accordance with revised interpretation No. 46, "Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an interpretation of ARB No. 51," Dime Community Capital Trust I is not consolidated with the Holding Company for financial reporting purposes.

Personnel

As of December 31, 2014, the Company had 347 full-time and 62 part-time employees.  The employees are not represented by a collective bargaining unit, and the Holding Company and all of its subsidiaries consider their relationships with their employees to be good.

Federal, State and Local Taxation
 
      The following is a general description of material tax matters and does not purport to be a comprehensive review of the tax rules applicable to the Company.

Federal Taxation
 
      General .  For federal income tax purposes, the Company files a consolidated income tax return on a December 31st fiscal year basis using the accrual method of accounting and is subject to federal income taxation in the same manner as other corporations with some exceptions, including, particularly, the Bank's tax reserve for bad debts, discussed below.
 
      Tax Bad Debt Reserves .  The Bank, as a "large bank" under Internal Revenue Service classifications ( i.e. , one with assets having an adjusted basis in excess of $500 million), is: (i) unable to make additions to its tax bad debt reserve, (ii) permitted to deduct bad debts only as they occur, and (iii) required to recapture ( i.e. , take into income) over a multi-year period a portion of the balance of its tax bad debt reserves as of June 30, 1996.  At the time of enactment of the recapture requirement, the Bank had already provided a deferred income tax liability for the post 1987 increase to the tax bad debt reserve for financial reporting purposes.  There was thus no adverse impact to the Bank's financial condition or results of operations as a result of the legislation.
 
      Distributions. Capital distributions to the Bank's shareholder are considered distributions from the Bank's "base year tax bad debt reserve" ( i.e. , its reserve as of December 31, 1987, to the extent thereof), and then from its supplemental reserve for losses on loans.  Capital distributions include distributions: (i) in excess of the Bank's current and accumulated earnings and profits, as calculated for federal income tax purposes; (ii) for redemption of stock; and (iii) for partial or complete liquidation.
 
      An amount based on the total capital distributions paid will be included in the Bank's taxable income in the year of distribution.  The amount of additional taxable income created from a capital distribution is the amount that, when reduced by the amount of the tax attributable to this income, is equal to the amount of the distribution. Thus, assuming a 35% federal corporate income tax rate, approximately one and one-half times the amount of such distribution (but not in excess of the amount of the above-mentioned reserves) would be includable in income for federal income tax purposes.  The Bank does not currently intend to make distributions that would result in a recapture of any portion of its base year tax bad debt reserves.  Dividends paid out of current or accumulated earnings and profits will not be included in the Bank's income.  (See "Part I - Item 1 – Business - Regulation - Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks - Limitation on Capital Distributions," for a discussion of limits on capital distributions by the Bank to its shareholder).
 
      Corporate Alternative Minimum Tax . The Bank's federal tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2014 was 35% of taxable income.  The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended imposes a tax on alternative minimum taxable income ("AMTI") at a rate of 20%. AMTI is derived by adjusting corporate taxable income in a manner that negates the deferral or deduction of certain expense or deduction items compared to their customary tax treatment. Thus, the Bank's AMTI is increased by 75% of the amount by which the Bank's adjusted current earnings exceed its AMTI (determined without regard to this adjustment and prior to reduction for net operating losses).

State and Local Taxation
 
New York State ("NYS") Franchise Tax
 
      The Company is subject NYS franchise tax. The statutory NYS franchise tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2014 approximated 8.63% of taxable income.  This rate included a metropolitan commuter transportation district surcharge of 17% of the tax amount.  In general, the Holding Company is not required to pay NYS tax on dividends and interest received from the Bank.

On March 31, 2014, NYS enacted several reforms (the "Tax Reform Package") to its tax structure, including changes to the franchise, sales, estate and personal income taxes. These changes are generally effective on January 1, 2015.  The Tax Reform Package is intended to simplify the existing corporate tax code for NYS businesses while remaining relatively neutral in relation to corporate tax receipts.

Under the Tax Reform Package, the NYS corporate income tax rate drops, effective January 1, 2016, from 7.10% to 6.50%.  Effective January 1, 2015, the metropolitan commuter transportation district surcharge ("MTA Tax") increases from 17.0% to 25.6% of the surcharge tax base.  The MTA Tax rate for years beginning on or after January 1, 2016 will be adjusted based upon future Metropolitan Transit Authority budget projections.

Some of the most significant elements of the Tax Reform Package include the merger of the bank tax into the general corporate franchise tax, expanded application of economic nexus, adoption of water's-edge unitary reporting, and apportionment of source income solely by reference to customer location.

Merger of the Bank Tax into the Corporate Franchise Tax.  NYS has historically imposed a franchise tax on general business corporations, commonly referred to as the "Article 9-A Corporate Franchise Tax," and a separate franchise tax on banking corporations, commonly referred to as the "Article 32 Bank Tax."  Under these statutes, NYS financial service companies and banks are taxed under different regimes.

The Tax Reform Package repeals the Article 32 Bank Tax, merging it into the Article 9-A Corporate Franchise Tax.  It also makes several subtraction modifications to the Article 9-A Corporate Franchise Tax to accommodate the merger, most notably by providing a choice between three potential financial tax subtraction modifications: 1) a subtraction modification equal to 32% of NYS entire net income available to all thrifts and community banks with assets that do not exceed $8 billion; 2) a subtraction modification, available to both small thrifts and community banks with assets that do not exceed $8 billion, based upon 50% of the net interest income from loans multiplied by the fraction of interest received from loans secured by real estate located in NYS or small business loans made to NYS borrowers with a principal amount of $5 million or less divided by total interest income from loans; and 3) both small thrifts and community banks with assets that do not exceed $8 billion that owned a captive real estate investment trust ("REIT") as of April 1, 2014, may, for tax years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, subtract up to 160% of dividends received from the REIT in determining NYS taxable income.  Small thrifts and community banks with assets that do not exceed $8 billion and that continue to maintain grandfathered REITs are prohibited from claiming the first two subtraction modifications described above.  Consequently, under the revised Article 9-A
26

Corporate Franchise Tax structure, for tax years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, the Bank will be required to claim the 160% subtraction for dividends received from its captive REIT subsidiary for any year the REIT remains in existence (in lieu of a dividends paid deduction to the REIT).  If the REIT is no longer maintained, then the Bank will be entitled to choose on an annual basis between option 1) or 2) above.
      Adoption of a Full Water's-Edge Unitary Combined Filing. The Tax Reform Package requires that all firms meeting an ownership test of 50% or more be deemed a unitary business and required to file a combined tax return.  Substantial intercompany transactions are eliminated, and a domestic corporation without any assets or customers in NYS, but engaged in a unitary business with a related New York taxpayer, could become part of the NYS unitary group.
      Source Income Solely by Reference to the Location of the Customer. The Tax Reform Package requires business income to be apportioned to and taxed by NYS using a single receipts factor based on the customer's location. These provisions also contain favorable apportionment rules for asset-backed securities that will be beneficial to the Bank.
      During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Company adjusted both its deferred tax asset and income tax expense to reflect the expected adjustment in its NYS tax rate resulting from the Tax Reform Package.  Such adjustments were not material to its consolidated financial condition or results of operations.  The Company owns REIT subsidiaries and will therefore utilize the dividend received subtraction method upon its initial conformity to the Tax Reform Package on January 1, 2015.  However, the Company may utilize different tax strategies in the future.  Such strategies will be influenced by several factors including, but not limited to, the final election of NYC to conform its tax laws to the reformed NYS law.
      NYC Banking Corporation Tax
      The Holding Company and the Bank are both subject to a NYC banking corporation tax based on one of several methods, whichever results in the greatest tax.   These methods are as follows: 1) 9.0% of entire net income allocated to NYC, which is federal taxable income with adjustments; 2) .01% of assets; or 3) the alternative minimum tax of 3% (after the exclusion of certain preferential items).

NYC generally conforms its tax law to NYS tax law in the determination of taxable income (including the laws relating to tax bad debt reserves), and has recently announced its likely intention to generally conform its tax law to the reformed NYS tax law, however, NYC has not yet published any such tax law reforms.

Prior to the recent NYS tax reforms, NYC tax law only differed significantly from NYS tax law with regard to the permissible deduction for the carryover of a net operating loss of a banking company occurring prior to 2009.  The carryover deduction for such net operating loss was permissible only under NYS tax law.
 
      State of Delaware . As a Delaware holding company not earning income in Delaware, the Holding Company is exempt from Delaware corporate income tax, however, it is required to file an annual report and pay an annual franchise tax to the State of Delaware.

Regulation

General
 
      The Bank is a New York State-chartered stock savings bank.  The Bank's primary regulator is the NYSDFS, and the Bank's primary federal regulator is the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation ("FDIC"), which regulates and examines state-chartered banks that are not members of the Federal Reserve System ("State Nonmember Banks").  The FDIC also administers laws and regulations applicable to all FDIC-insured depository institutions.  The Holding Company is subject to regulation and examination by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System ("FRB") and, more specifically, the Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia.  The Bank has elected to be treated as a "savings association" under Section 10(l) of the Home Owners' Loan Act, as amended ("HOLA"), for purposes of the regulation of the Holding Company.  The Holding Company is therefore regulated as a savings and loan holding company by the FRB as long as the Bank continues to satisfy the requirements to remain a "qualified thrift lender"  ("QTL") under HOLA. If the Bank fails to remain a QTL, the Holding Company must register with the FRB, and be treated as, a bank holding company.  The Holding Company does not expect that regulation as a bank holding company rather than a savings and loan holding company would be a significant change.

The Bank's deposit accounts are insured up to applicable limits by the FDIC under the Deposit Insurance Fund ("DIF").  The Bank is required to file reports with both the NYSDFS and the FDIC concerning its activities and financial condition, and to obtain regulatory approval prior to entering into certain transactions, such as mergers with, or acquisitions of, other depository institutions. Both the NYSDFS and the FDIC conduct periodic examinations to assess the Bank's safety and soundness and compliance with various regulatory requirements. This regulation and supervision establishes a comprehensive framework of activities in which a state-chartered savings bank may engage and is intended primarily for the protection of the DIF and depositors.  As a publicly-held unitary savings bank holding company, the Holding Company is also required to file certain reports with, and otherwise comply with the rules and regulations of, both the SEC, under the federal securities laws, and the Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia.

The NYSDFS and the FDIC possess significant discretion in connection with their supervisory and enforcement activities and examination policies, including policies with respect to the classification of assets and the establishment of adequate loan loss reserves for regulatory purposes. Any change in such policies, whether by the NYSDFS, the FDIC or through legislation, could have a material adverse impact on the operations of either the Bank or Holding Company.

The following discussion is intended to be a summary of the material statutes and regulations applicable to New York State chartered savings banks and savings and loan holding companies, and does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all such statutes and regulations.

Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks

Business Activities.   The Bank derives its lending, investment, and other authority primarily from the New York Banking Law ("NYBL") and the regulations of the NYSDFS, subject to limitations under applicable FDIC laws and regulations. Pursuant to the NYBL, the Bank may invest in mortgage loans secured by residential and commercial real estate, commercial and consumer loans, certain types of debt securities (including certain corporate debt securities and obligations of federal, state, and local governments and agencies), and certain other assets. The lending powers of New York State-chartered savings banks and commercial banks are not generally subject to percentage-of-assets or capital limitations, although there are limits applicable to loans to individual borrowers.  The Bank may also establish service corporations that may engage in activities not otherwise permissible for the Bank, including certain real estate equity investments and securities and insurance brokerage activities.

Recent Financial Regulatory Reforms.  The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the "Reform Act"), which became law in 2010, was intended to address perceived weaknesses in the U.S. financial regulatory system and prevent future economic and financial crises.  Through December 31, 2014, the Reform Act did not have a material impact on the Company's core operations.  Many provisions of the Reform Act remain subject to final rulemaking or phase in over several years.  The Company believes that the following provisions of the Reform Act, when fully implemented, may have an impact on the Company:

The Reform Act created the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau ("CFPB").  With respect to insured depository institutions with less than $10 billion in assets, such as the Bank, the CFPB has rulemaking, but not enforcement, authority for federal consumer protection laws, such as the Truth in Lending Act, the Equal Credit Opportunity Act, the Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act, and the Truth in Savings Act, among others, and may participate in examinations conducted by the federal bank regulatory agencies to determine compliance with consumer protection laws and regulations.  The CFPB may impose requirements more severe than the previous bank regulatory agencies.

In January 2013, the CFPB issued final regulations governing consumer mortgage lending (including mortgage servicing, certain mortgage origination standards and "qualified mortgages."  The Bank has fully implemented all applicable standards.

The Volcker Rule prohibits banking entities from acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in, sponsoring, or having certain relationships with, a "covered fund."  The Volcker Rule generally treats as a covered fund any entity that would be an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940, except for the application of the exemptions from SEC registration set forth in Section 3(c)(1) (fewer than 100 beneficial owners) or Section 3(c)(7) (qualified purchasers) of the 1940 Act.  Under the Volcker Rule, banking entities are also prohibited from engaging in proprietary trading.
 
In December 2013, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (the "OCC"), Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation ('FDIC"), Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System ("FRB"), SEC and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission ("CFTC") adopted final rules implementing Section 619 of the Reform Act.  Section 619 and the final implementing rules are commonly referred to as the "Volcker Rule."  All banking organizations have been granted until July 21, 2015 to conform their activities and investments to the requirements of the final Volcker Rule.

On January 14, 2014, the OCC, FDIC, FRB, SEC and CFTC approved a final rule permitting banking entities to indefinitely retain interests in certain collateralized debt obligations backed primarily by trust preferred securities ("TRUP CDOs") that could otherwise not be retained after July 21, 2015 under the covered fund investment prohibitions of the Volcker Rule.  Under the final rule, the agencies permit the retention of an interest in, or sponsorship of, covered funds by banking entities if the following qualifications are satisfied:
·
the TRUP CDO was established, and the interest was issued, before May 19, 2010;
·
the banking entity reasonably believes that the offering proceeds received by the TRUP CDO were invested primarily in qualifying TRUP CDO collateral, as defined; and
·
the banking entity's interest in the TRUP CDO was acquired on or before December 10, 2013, the date the agencies issued final rules implementing the Volcker Rule.

A non-exclusive list of TRUP CDO issuers that satisfy the requirements of the final rule was concurrently released by the agencies.  All TRUP CDO investments owned by the Bank satisfied the retention requirements issued by the regulatory agencies on January 14, 2014.  Management does not currently anticipate that the Volcker Rule will have a material effect on the operations of either the Bank or Holding Company.

Basel III Capital Rules. In July 2013, the Bank's primary federal regulator, the FDIC, and the FRB published final rules (the "Basel III Capital Rules") that implement, in part, agreements reached by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision ("Basel Committee") in "Basel III: A Global Regulatory Framework for More Resilient Banks and Banking Systems."("Basel III").  The Basel III Capital Rules revise the definitions and the components of regulatory capital, as well as address other issues affecting the numerator in banking institutions' regulatory capital ratios.  The Basel III Capital Rules also address asset risk weights and other matters affecting the denominator in banking institutions' regulatory capital ratios and replace the existing general risk-weighting approach, which was derived from the Basel Committee's 1988 "Basel I" capital accords, with a more risk-sensitive approach based, in part, on the "standardized approach" in the Basel Committee's 2004 "Basel II" capital accords. In addition, the Basel III Capital Rules implement certain provisions of the Reform Act, including the requirements of Section 939A to remove references to credit ratings from the federal agencies' rules.  The Basel III Capital Rules apply to banking organizations, including depository institutions and ultimate parent savings and loan holding companies, such as the Bank and Holding Company, respectively, and are effective on January 1, 2015, subject to phase-in periods until January 1, 2019 for certain of their components.  The Holding Company, as a savings and loan holding company, has not previously been subject to consolidated risk-based capital requirements.

The Basel III Capital Rules are intended to increase both the amount and quality of regulatory capital.  Among other things, the Basel III Capital Rules: a) introduce a new capital measure entitled "Common Equity Tier 1" ("CET1"); b) specify that tier 1 capital consist of CET1 and "Additional Tier 1" capital instruments satisfying revised requirements that permit inclusion in tier 1 capital; c) define CET1 narrowly by requiring that most deductions or adjustments to regulatory capital measures be made to CET1 and not to the other components of capital; and d) expand the scope of the deductions or adjustments from capital as compared to the existing regulations.  Under the Basel III Capital Rules, for most banking organizations, including the Holding Company, the most common form of Additional Tier 1 capital is non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock, and the most common forms of Tier 2 capital are subordinated debt and a portion of the allowance for loan and lease losses, in each case, subject to the Basel III Capital Rules' specific requirements.

Under the capital rules in effect through 2014, the effects of accumulated other comprehensive income or loss ("AOCI") items included in stockholders' equity (for example, marks-to-market of securities held in the available for sale portfolio) under GAAP are reversed for the purposes of determining regulatory capital ratios.  The effects of certain AOCI items are not excluded by default under the Basel III Capital Rules, but non-advanced approach banking organizations, including the Holding Company and the Bank, may make a one-time, permanent election to continue to exclude these items.  This election must be made concurrently with the first filing of certain of the Holding Company's and the Bank's periodic regulatory reports in the beginning of 2015.  The Holding Company
29

and the Bank expect to make this election in order to avoid significant variations in the level of capital depending upon the impact of interest rate fluctuations on the fair value of their securities portfolio.
      The Basel III Capital Rules also provide a permanent exemption from the proposed phase out of existing trust preferred securities and cumulative perpetual preferred stock from regulatory capital for banking organizations with less than $15 billion in total assets, while also implementing stricter eligibility requirements for regulatory capital instruments that should serve to disallow the inclusion of all non-exempt issuances of trust preferred securities and cumulative perpetual preferred stock from tier 1 capital.  The Basel III Capital Rules also provide additional constraints on the inclusion of minority interests, mortgage servicing assets, deferred tax assets and certain investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in tier 1 capital, as well as providing stricter risk weighting rules to these assets.
      The Basel III Capital Rules provide for the following minimum capital to risk-weighted assets ratios as of January 1, 2015: a) 4.5% based upon CET1; b) 6.0% based upon tier 1 capital; and c) 8.0% based upon total regulatory capital.  A minimum leverage ratio (tier 1 capital as a percentage of total average assets) of 4.0% is also required under the Basel III Capital Rules.  When fully phased in, the Basel III Capital Rules will additionally require institutions to retain a capital conservation buffer, composed of CET1, of 2.5% above these required minimum capital ratio levels.  Banking organizations that fail to maintain the minimum 2.5% capital conservation buffer could face restrictions on capital distributions or discretionary bonus payments to executive officers.  Restrictions would begin phasing in where the banking organization's capital conservation buffer was below 2.5% at the beginning of a quarter, and distributions and discretionary bonus payments would be completely prohibited if no capital conservation buffer exists.  When the capital conservation buffer is fully phased in on January 1, 2019, the Holding Company and the Bank will effectively have the following minimum capital to risk-weighted assets ratios: a) 7.0% based upon CET1; b) 8.5% based upon tier 1 capital; and c) 10.5% based upon total regulatory capital.

The Basel III Capital Rules provide for a number of deductions from, and adjustments to, CET1.  These include, for example, the requirement that MSR, deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences that could not be realized through net operating loss carrybacks and significant investments in non-consolidated financial entities be deducted from CET1 to the extent that any one such category exceeds 10% of CET1 or all such items, in the aggregate, exceed 15% of CET1.

Implementation of the deductions from, and other adjustments to, CET1 will begin on January 1, 2015 and will be phased-in over a 4-year period (beginning at 40% on January 1, 2015 and an additional 20% per year thereafter). The implementation of the capital conservation buffer will begin on January 1, 2016 at 0.625% and increase by 0.625% each subsequent January 1, until it reaches 2.5% on January 1, 2019.

The Basel III Capital Rules prescribe a new standardized approach for risk weightings that expand the risk-weighting categories from the current four Basel I-derived categories (0%, 20%, 50% and 100%) to a larger and more risk-sensitive number of categories, depending on the nature of the assets, generally ranging from 0% for U.S. government and agency securities, to 600% for certain equity exposures, and resulting in higher risk weights for a variety of asset classes.  In particular, the Basel III Capital Rules provide stricter rules related to the risk weighting of past due and certain commercial real estate loans, as well as on some equity investment exposures, and replace the existing credit rating approach for determining the risk weighting of securitization exposures with an alternative approach in which senior securitization tranches are assigned a risk weight associated with the underlying exposure and requiting a banking organization to hold capital for the senior tranche based on the risk weight of the underlying exposures.  Under the revised approach, for subordinate securitization tranches, a banking organization must hold capital for the subordinate tranche, as well as all more senior tranches for which the subordinate tranche provides credit support.

With respect to the Bank, the Basel III Capital Rules revise the "prompt corrective action" ("PCA") regulations adopted pursuant to Section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act by: (i) introducing a CET1 ratio requirement at each PCA category (other than critically undercapitalized), with the required CET1 ratio being 6.5% for well-capitalized status; (ii) increasing the minimum Tier 1 capital ratio requirement for each category, with the minimum Tier 1 capital ratio for well-capitalized status being 8.0% (as compared to the current 6.0%); and (iii) eliminating the current provision that a bank with a composite supervisory rating of 1 may have a 3.0% leverage ratio and still be adequately capitalized. The Basel III Capital Rules do not change the total risk-based capital requirement for any PCA category.
      The Basel III Capital Rules will increase the required capital levels of the Bank and will subject the Holding Company to consolidated capital rules.  On January 1, 2015, the Bank and Company became subject to the new capital requirements of BASEL III.  Summarized below are the calculated ratios for the Bank and Company as of December 31, 2014 computed under the BASEL III capital rules.  For each of these ratios shown, it is assumed that the Bank and Company has made the one-time, permanent election to continue to exclude the effects of accumulated other comprehensive income or loss items included in stockholders' equity for the purposes of determining the regulatory capital ratios.  Such election, if ultimately made, will be finalized upon the Bank's Call Report filing for the period ending March 31, 2015.

 
Bank
 
Consolidated Company
Basel III Minimum Requirement
Basel III Minimum Requirement Plus 2.5% Buffer(1)
Common equity Tier 1 capital to risk weighted assets
12.33%
 
12.44%
4.5%
7.0%
Tier 1 capital to risk weighted assets
12.33   
 
14.51   
6.0   
8.5   
Total Capital to risk weighted assets
12.89   
 
15.07   
8.0   
10.5   
Tier 1 Capital to average assets (Leverage ratio)
9.64   
 
11.20   
4.0   
n/a    
The 2.5% buffer percentage represents the fully phased-in requirement as of January 1, 2019.

Implementation of the Basel III Capital Rules effective January 1, 2015 did not have a material impact upon the operations of the Bank or Holding Company.

Prior to January 1, 2015,   FDIC regulations required State Nonmember Banks, such as the Bank, to satisfy three minimum capital standards: (i) a minimum Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4%, (ii) a total risk-based capital ratio of 8%, and (iii) a leverage capital ratio of 4%.  For depository institutions that have been assigned a composite rating of one (the highest rating of the FDIC under the Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System), the minimum required leverage capital ratio is 3%.  For any other depository institution, the minimum required leverage capital ratio is 4%, unless a higher leverage capital ratio is warranted by the particular circumstances or risk profile of the depository institution.  In assessing an institution's capital adequacy, in addition to these numeric factors, the FDIC considers qualitative factors, and possesses the authority to establish increased capital requirements for individual institutions when necessary.  These capital requirements were superseded by the new capital requirements in the Basel III Capital Rules, effective on January 1, 2015.

The FDIC, through its general oversight of the safety and soundness of insured depository institutions, will continue to retain the power to impose minimum capital requirements on individual institutions, including if they are not in compliance with certain written FDIC guidelines regarding interest rate risk ("IRR") compliance analysis.  The FDIC has not imposed any such requirements on the Bank.

The table below presents the Bank's regulatory capital compared to FDIC regulatory capital requirements:

 
 
Actual
 
For Capital
Adequacy Purposes
 
To Be Categorized as "Well Capitalized"
As of December 31, 2014
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Tangible capital
$406,910
9.20%
 
$176,998
4.0%
 
$221,247
5.00%
Leverage capital
406,910
9.20   
 
176,998
4.0   
 
221,247
5.00   
Tier I risk-based capital (to risk
   weighted assets)
406,910
12.33   
 
131,994
4.0   
 
197,991
6.00   
Total risk-based capital (to risk
   weighted assets)
425,428
12.89   
 
263,988
8.0   
 
329,985
10.00   

      As part of the agreements reached by the Basel Committee in Basel III, the Basel Committee set forth a proposed liquidity framework to horizontally assess banking organizations.  The Basel Committee's framework contained two quantitative liquidity measures, the liquidity coverage ratio ("LCR"), which is designed to ensure that a banking organization has sufficient high-quality liquid assets to meet its expected net cash outflow over a 30-day time horizon, and the net stable funding ration ("NSFR"), which is designed to promote more medium- and long-term funding of assets and activities of a banking organization over a one-year time horizon.  In the United States, the federal banking agencies adopted a final rule in October 2014 to implement the LCR framework for advanced
approach banking institutions, which include savings associations and savings and loan holding companies with over $250 billion in total consolidated assets and $10 billion in total foreign exposure, and a modified version of LCR for bank holding companies and certain savings and loan holding companies with at least $50 billion in total consolidated assets that are not advanced approach banking organizations.  Neither the LCR nor the modified LCR  would apply to the Holding Company or the Bank. The federal banking agencies have not yet proposed rules to implement the Basel committee's NSFR framework.

      FDIC Guidance on Managing Market Risk.  In October 2013, the FDIC published guidance entitled "Managing Sensitivity to Market Risk in a Challenging Interest Rate Environment".  This guidance notes the FDIC's ongoing supervisory concern that certain institutions may be insufficiently prepared or positioned for sustained increases in, or volatility of, interest rates.  The guidance emphasizes a series of best practices to ensure that state nonmember institutions, such as the Bank, have adopted a comprehensive asset-liability and interest rate risk management process.  These practices include:  (i) effective board governance and oversight; (ii) a sound policy framework and prudent exposure limits; (iii) well-developed risk measurement tools for effective measurement and monitoring of interest rate risk and; (iv) effective risk mitigation strategies.  The Bank has implemented the best practices as of December 31, 2014.

      NYSDFS Guidelines for Bank Lending to Multifamily Properties Under the Community Reinve stment Act On September 5, 2013, the NYSDFS published guidelines addressing responsible multifamily lending.  The guidelines report DFS' future intention to have Community Reinvestment Act ("CRA") examinations review whether a bank has satisfied its responsibility to ensure that any loan contributes to, and does not undermine, the availability of affordable housing or neighborhood conditions.  Under the guidelines, a loan on a multifamily property would not be found to have a community development purpose, and would not be CRA eligible if it:  (i) significantly reduces or has the potential to reduce affordable housing; (ii) facilitates substandard living conditions; (iii) is in technical default; or (iv) has been underwritten in an unsound manner.

The guidelines also recommend that banks consider adopting a series of best practices in an effort to help avoid reductions in qualitative or quantitative CRA credit on multifamily loans.

Implementation of these guidelines are not expected to materially impact the business and operations of the Bank.

Interagency Guidance on Nontraditional Mortgage Product Risks .  In 2006, the federal bank regulatory authorities (collectively the "Agencies") published the Interagency Guidance on Nontraditional Mortgage Product Risks (the "Nontraditional Mortgage Product Guidance"). The Nontraditional Mortgage Product Guidance describes sound practices for managing risk, as well as marketing, originating and servicing nontraditional mortgage products, which include, among others, interest only loans. The Nontraditional Mortgage Product Guidance sets forth supervisory expectations with respect to loan terms and underwriting standards, portfolio and risk management practices and consumer protection. For example, the Nontraditional Mortgage Product Guidance indicates that originating interest only loans with reduced documentation is considered a layering of risk and that institutions are expected to demonstrate mitigating factors to support their underwriting decision and the borrower's repayment capacity. Specifically, the Nontraditional Mortgage Product Guidance indicates that a lender may accept a borrower's statement as to its income without obtaining verification only if there are mitigating factors that clearly minimize the need for direct verification of repayment capacity and that, for many borrowers, institutions should be able to readily document income.

Limitations on Individual Loans and Aggregate Loans to One Borrower.  As an NYS-chartered savings bank originating loans secured by real estate having a market value at least equal to the loan amount at the time of origination, the Bank is generally not subject to NYSDFS regulations limiting individual loan or borrower exposures.
 
      QTL Test .  In order for the Holding Company to be regulated by the FRB as a savings and loan holding company rather than a bank holding company, the Bank must remain a QTL. To satisfy this requirement, the Bank must maintain at least 65% of its ''portfolio assets'' in certain ''qualified thrift investments'' during at least nine of the most recent twelve months. ''Portfolio assets'' mean, in general, the Bank's total assets less the sum of: (i) specified liquid assets up to 20% of total assets, (ii) certain intangibles, including goodwill, credit card relationships and purchased MSR, and (iii) the value of property used to conduct the Bank's business. ''Qualified thrift investments'' include various types of loans made for residential and housing purposes; investments related to such purposes, including certain mortgage-backed and related securities; and small business, education, and credit card loans.  At
December 31, 2014, the Bank maintained 77.7% of its portfolio assets in qualified thrift investments. The Bank also satisfied the QTL test in each month during 2014, and, therefore, was a QTL.  If the Bank fails to remain a QTL, the Holding Company must register with the FRB as a bank holding company.

A savings association that fails the QTL test will generally be prohibited from (i) engaging in any new activity not permissible for a national bank, (ii) paying dividends, unless the payment would be permissible for a national bank, is necessary to meet obligations of a company that controls the savings bank, and is specifically approved by the FDIC and the FRB, and (iii) establishing any new branch office in a location not permissible for a national bank in the association's home state.  A savings association that fails to satisfy the QTL test may be subject to FDIC enforcement action.  In addition, within one year of the date a savings association ceases to satisfy the QTL test, any company controlling the association must register under, and become subject to the requirements of, the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended ("BHCA").  A savings association that has failed the QTL test may requalify under the QTL test and be relieved of the limitations; however, it may do so only once.  If the savings association does not requalify under the QTL test within three years after failing the QTL test, it will be required to terminate any activity, and dispose of any investment, not permissible for a national bank.  These provisions remain in effect under the Reform Act.

Advisory on Interest Rate Risk Management.   In January 2010, the Agencies released an Advisory on Interest Rate Risk Management (the "IRR Advisory") to remind institutions of the supervisory expectations regarding sound practices for managing IRR.  While some degree of IRR is inherent in the business of banking, the Agencies expect institutions to have sound risk management practices in place to measure, monitor and control IRR exposures, and IRR management should be an integral component of an institution's risk management infrastructure.  The Agencies expect all institutions to manage their IRR exposures using processes and systems commensurate with their earnings and capital levels, complexity, business model, risk profile and scope of operations.  The IRR Advisory further reiterates the importance of effective corporate governance, policies and procedures, risk measuring and monitoring systems, stress testing, and internal controls related to the IRR exposures of institutions.

The IRR Advisory encourages institutions to use a variety of techniques to measure IRR exposure, which include simple maturity gap analysis, income measurement and valuation measurement for assessing the impact of changes in market rates as well as simulation modeling to measure IRR exposure.  Institutions are encouraged to use the full complement of analytical capabilities of their IRR simulation models.  The IRR Advisory also reminds institutions that stress testing, which includes both scenario and sensitivity analysis, is an integral component of IRR management.  The IRR Advisory indicates that institutions should regularly assess IRR exposures beyond typical industry conventions, including changes in rates of greater magnitude ( e.g. , up and down 300 and 400 basis points as compared to the generally used up and down 200 basis points) across different tenors to reflect changing slopes and twists of the yield curve.

The IRR Advisory emphasizes that effective IRR management not only involves the identification and measurement of IRR, but also provides for appropriate actions to control the risk.  The adequacy and effectiveness of an institution's IRR management process and the level of its IRR exposure are critical factors in the Agencies' evaluation of an institution's sensitivity to changes in interest rates and capital adequacy.

Limitation on Capital Distributions.  The NYBL and the New York banking regulations, as well as FDIC and FRB regulations impose limitations upon capital distributions by state-chartered savings banks, such as cash dividends, payments to purchase or otherwise acquire its shares, payments to shareholders of another institution in a cash-out merger, and other distributions charged against capital.

Under the NYBL and the New York banking regulations, New York State-chartered stock savings banks may declare and pay dividends out of net profits, unless there is an impairment of capital, however, approval of the New York State Superintendent of Financial Services (''Superintendent'') is required if the total of all dividends declared by the bank in a calendar year would exceed the total of its net profits for that year combined with its retained net profits for the preceding two years less prior dividends paid.

As the subsidiary of a savings and loan holding company, the Bank is required to file a notice with the FRB at least 30 days prior to each capital distribution.  The FRB can prohibit a proposed capital distribution if it determines that the bank would be ''undercapitalized'', as defined in the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, as amended (''FDIA''), following the distribution or that a proposed distribution would constitute an unsafe or unsound practice. Further, under FDIC PCA regulations, the Bank would be prohibited from making a capital distribution if, after the distribution, the Bank would fail to satisfy its minimum capital requirements, as described above (See "PCA").


Liquidity.   Pursuant to FDIC regulations , the Bank is required to maintain sufficient liquidity to ensure its safe and sound operation (See "Part II-Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Liquidity and Capital Resources" for further discussion).  At December 31, 2014, the Bank satisfied all such liquidity requirements.
 
Assessments.    New York State-chartered savings banks are required by the NYBL to pay annual assessments to the NYSDFS in connection with its regulation and supervision (including examination) of the Bank.  This annual assessment is based primarily on the asset size of the Bank, among other factors determined by the NYSDFS.  The Bank is not required to pay additional assessments to the FDIC for its regulation and supervision (including examination) of the Bank as a state nonmember bank, however, the Bank is required to pay assessments to the FDIC as an insured depository institution.  (See "Insurance of Deposit Accounts").

Branching.    Subject to certain limitations, NYS and federal law permit NYS-chartered savings banks to establish branches in any state of the United States.  In general, federal law allows the FDIC, and the NYBL allows the Superintendent, to approve an application by a state banking institution to acquire interstate branches by merger.  The NYBL authorizes New York State-chartered savings banks to open and occupy de novo branches outside the State of New York. Pursuant to the Reform Act, the FDIC is authorized to approve the establishment by a state bank of a de novo interstate branch if the intended host state allows de novo branching within that state by banks chartered by that state.

Community Reinvestment.   Under the Community Reinvestment Act ("CRA"), as implemented by FDIC regulations, an insured depository institution possesses a continuing and affirmative obligation, consistent with its safe and sound operation, to help satisfy the credit needs of its entire community, including low and moderate income neighborhoods. The CRA does not establish specific lending requirements or programs for financial institutions nor does it limit an institution's discretion to develop the types of products and services it believes are most appropriate to its particular community. The CRA requires the FDIC, in connection with its examination of a State Nonmember Bank, to assess the bank's record of satisfying the credit needs of its community and consider such record in its evaluation of certain applications by the bank.  The CRA also requires all institutions to make public disclosure of their CRA ratings. The Bank received a "Satisfactory" CRA rating in its most recent examination.   Regulations additionally require that the Bank publicly disclose certain agreements that are in fulfillment of the CRA.  The Bank has no such agreements.

The Bank is also subject to provisions of the NYBL that impose continuing and affirmative obligations upon a New York State-chartered savings bank to serve the credit needs of its local community (the ''NYCRA'').  Such obligations are substantially similar to those imposed by the CRA.  The NYCRA requires the NYSDFS to make a periodic written assessment of an institution's compliance with the NYCRA, utilizing a four-tiered rating system, and to make such assessment available to the public.  The NYCRA also requires the Superintendent to consider the NYCRA rating when reviewing an application to engage in certain transactions, including mergers, asset purchases and the establishment of branch offices or ATMs, and provides that such assessment may serve as a basis for the denial of any such application.  The Bank became subject to the NYCRA at the Charter Conversion, and has not yet received a NYCRA rating.

Transactions with Related Parties.   The Bank's authority to engage in transactions with its ''affiliates'' is limited by FDIC regulations, Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (''FRA''), and Regulation W issued by the FRB.  FDIC regulations regarding transactions with affiliates generally conform to Regulation W.  These provisions, among other matters, prohibit, limit or place restrictions upon a depository institution extending credit to, purchasing assets from, or entering into certain transactions (including securities lending, repurchase agreements and derivatives activities) with, its affiliates, which, for the Bank, would include the Holding Company and any other subsidiary of the Holding Company.

As a "savings association" under Section 10(l) of the HOLA, the Bank is additionally subject to the rules governing transactions with affiliates for savings associations under HOLA Section 11.  These rules prohibit, subject to certain exemptions, a savings association from: (i) advancing a loan to an affiliate engaged in non-bank holding company activities; and (ii) purchasing or investing in securities issued by an affiliate that is not a subsidiary.
 
      The Bank's authority to extend credit to its directors, executive officers, and stockholders owning 10% or more of the Holding Company's outstanding common stock, as well as to entities controlled by such persons, is additionally governed by the requirements of Sections 22(g) and 22(h) of the FRA and Regulation O of the FRB
34

enacted thereunder. Among other matters, these provisions require that extensions of credit to insiders: (i) be made on terms substantially the same as, and follow credit underwriting procedures not less stringent than, those prevailing for comparable transactions with unaffiliated persons and that do not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavorable features; and (ii) not exceed certain amount limitations individually and in the aggregate, which limits are based, in part, on the amount of the bank's capital. Regulation O additionally requires that extensions of credit in excess of certain limits be approved in advance by the bank's board of directors.   .
      New York banking regulations impose certain limits and requirements on various transactions with "insiders," as defined in the New York banking regulations to include certain executive officers, directors and principal stockholders.
      The Holding Company and Bank both presently prohibit loans to Directors and executive management

Enforcement.  Under the NYBL, the Superintendent possesses enforcement power over New York State-chartered savings banks.  The NYBL gives the Superintendent authority to order a New York State-chartered savings bank to appear and explain an apparent violation of law, to discontinue unauthorized or unsafe practices and to maintain prescribed books and accounts.  Upon a finding by the Superintendent that a director, trustee or officer of a savings bank has violated any law, or has continued unauthorized or unsafe practices in conducting its business after having been notified by the Superintendent to discontinue such practices, such director, trustee, or officer may be removed from office after notice and an opportunity to be heard.  The Superintendent also has authority to appoint a conservator or receiver, such as the FDIC, for a savings bank under certain circumstances.

Under the FDIA, the FDIC possesses enforcement authority for FDIC insured depository institutions and has the authority to bring enforcement action, including civil monetary penalties, against all ''institution-affiliated parties,'' including any controlling stockholder or any shareholder, attorney, appraiser or accountant who knowingly or recklessly participates in any violation of applicable law or regulation, breach of fiduciary duty or certain other wrongful actions that cause, or are likely to cause, more than minimal loss to or other significant adverse effect on an insured depository institution. Under HOLA and the FDIA, the FRB possesses similar authority to bring enforcement actions and impose civil monetary penalties against savings and loan holding companies for violations of applicable law or regulation.  In addition, regulators possess substantial discretion to take enforcement action against an institution that fails to comply with the law, particularly with respect to capital requirements. Possible enforcement actions range from informal enforcement actions, such as a memorandum of understanding, to formal enforcement actions, such as a written agreement, cease and desist order or civil money penalty, the imposition of a capital plan and capital directive to receivership, conservatorship, or the termination of deposit insurance.

Standards for Safety and Soundness.   Pursuant to FDICIA, as amended by the Riegle Community Development and Regulatory Improvement Act of 1994, the FDIC, together with the other federal bank regulatory agencies, has adopted guidelines prescribing safety and soundness standards relating to internal controls and information systems, internal audit systems, loan documentation, credit underwriting, interest rate risk exposure, asset growth, asset quality, earnings and compensation, fees and benefits. In general, the guidelines require, among other features, appropriate systems and practices to identify and manage the risks and exposures specified in the guidelines. The guidelines prohibit excessive compensation as an unsafe and unsound practice and describe compensation as excessive when the amounts paid are unreasonable or disproportionate to the services performed by an executive officer, employee, director or principal shareholder.  In addition, the FDIC has adopted regulations pursuant to FDICIA that authorize, but do not require, the FDIC to order an institution that has been given notice by the FDIC that it is not satisfying any of such safety and soundness standards to submit a compliance plan. If, after being so ordered, an institution fails to submit an acceptable compliance plan or fails in any material respect to implement an accepted compliance plan, the FDIC must issue an order directing action to correct the deficiency and may issue an order directing other actions of the types to which an undercapitalized bank is subject under the PCA provisions of FDICIA (See "Part I - Item 1 – Business - Regulation - Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks –PCA").  If an institution fails to comply with such an order, the FDIC may seek enforcement in judicial proceedings and the imposition of civil money penalties.

PCA.   Under the FDIC PCA regulations, the FDIC is required to take certain, and authorized to take other, supervisory actions against undercapitalized insured depository institutions, including the Bank.  For this purpose, an insured depository institution is placed in one of five categories based on its capital: "well capitalized," "adequately capitalized," "undercapitalized," "significantly undercapitalized," and "critically undercapitalized." Generally, a capital restoration plan must be filed with the FDIC within 45 days of the date a bank receives notice that it is "undercapitalized," "significantly undercapitalized" or "critically undercapitalized," and the plan must be
35

 
guaranteed by any parent holding company.  In addition, the institution becomes subject to various mandatory supervisory actions, including restrictions on growth of assets and other forms of expansion.  Generally, through December 31, 2014, under the FDIC regulations, an insured depository institution is treated as well capitalized if its total risk-based capital ratio is 10% or greater, its Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio is 6% or greater, its leverage ratio is 5% or greater, and it is not subject to any order or directive by the FDIC to meet a specific capital level.  As of December 31, 2014, the Bank satisfied all capital ratios necessary to be categorized "well capitalized" under the PCA regulatory framework.  As discussed previously under "Basel III Capital Rules," the PCA regulations were amended by the Basel III Capital Rules effective January 1, 2015, to reflect higher minimum capital requirements for insured depository institutions.  Under the Basel III Capital Rules, an insured depository institution is treated as well capitalized if its total risk-based capital ratio is 10% of greater, its Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio is 8% or greater, its CET1 ratio is 6.5% or greater, and its leverage ratio is 5% or greater. When appropriate, the FDIC can require corrective action by a savings and loan holding company under the PCA provisions of FDICIA.
Insurance of Deposit Accounts.  The standard maximum amount of FDIC deposit insurance is $250,000 per depositor.  Insured depository institutions are required to pay quarterly deposit insurance assessments to the DIF.  Assessments are based on average total assets minus average tangible equity.  The assessment rate is determined through a risk-based system.  For depository institutions with less than $10 billion in assets, such as the Bank, the FDIC assigns an institution to one of four risk categories based on its safety and soundness supervisory ratings (its "CAMELS" ratings) and its capital levels.  The initial base assessment rate depends on the institution's risk category, as well as, if it is in the highest category (indicating the lowest risk), certain financial measures.  The initial base assessment rate currently ranges from 5 to 35 basis points on an annualized basis. The initial base assessment rate is then decreased depending on the institution's ratio of long-term unsecured debt to its assessment base (with such decrease not to exceed the lesser of 5 basis points or 50% of the initial base assessment rate) and, for institutions not in the highest risk category, increased if the institution's brokered deposits are more than 10 percent of its domestic deposits (with such increase not to exceed 10 basis points).  The current total base assessment rate is therefore from 2.5 to 45 basis points on an annualized basis.

As a result of the recent failures of a number of banks and thrifts, there has been a significant increase in the loss provisions of the DIF.  This resulted in a decline in the DIF reserve ratio during 2008 below the then minimum designated reserve ratio of 1.15%.  In October 2010, the FDIC adopted a new DIF restoration plan to ensure that the fund reserve ratio reaches 1.35% by September 30, 2020, as required by the Reform Act.  The FDIC has established a long-term target for the reserve ratio of 2.0%. At least semi-annually, the FDIC will update its loss and income projections for the fund and, if needed, will increase or decrease assessment rates, following notice-and-comment rulemaking if required.

The Deposit Insurance Funds Act of 1996 amended the FDIA to recapitalize the Savings Association Insurance Fund ("SAIF") [which was merged with the Bank Insurance Fund ("BIF") into the newly-formed DIF on March 31, 2006] and expand the assessment base for the payment of Financing Corporation ("FICO") bonds.  FICO bonds were sold by the federal government in order to finance the recapitalization of the SAIF and BIF that was necessitated following payments from the funds to compensate depositors of federally-insured depository institutions that experienced bankruptcy and dissolution during the 1980's and 1990's.  The Bank's total expense in 2014 for the FICO bond assessment was $227,000.  These payments will continue until the FICO bonds mature in 2017 through 2019.

Acquisitions.   Under the federal Bank Merger Act, prior approval of the FDIC is required for the Bank to merge with or purchase the assets or assume the deposits of another insured depository institution. In reviewing applications seeking approval of merger and acquisition transactions, the FDIC will consider, among other factors, the competitive effect and public benefits of the transactions, the capital position of the combined organization, the risks to the stability of the U.S. banking or financial system, the applicant's performance record under the CRA (see "Community Reinvestment") and its compliance with fair housing and other consumer protection laws and the effectiveness of the subject organizations in combating money laundering activities.

Privacy and Security Protection.  The federal banking agencies have adopted regulations for consumer privacy protection that require financial institutions to adopt procedures to protect customers and their "non-public personal information."  The regulations require the Bank to disclose its privacy policy, including identifying with whom it shares "non-public personal information," to customers at the time of establishing the customer relationship and annually thereafter.  In addition, the Bank is required to provide its customers the ability to "opt-out" of:  (1) the sharing of their personal information with unaffiliated third parties if the sharing of such information does not satisfy any of the permitted exceptions; and (2) the receipt of marketing solicitations from Bank affiliates.

The Bank is additionally subject to regulatory guidelines establishing standards for safeguarding customer information.  The guidelines describe the federal banking agencies' expectations for the creation, implementation and maintenance of an information security program, including administrative, technical and physical safeguards appropriate to the size and complexity of the institution and the nature and scope of its activities.  The standards set forth in the guidelines are intended to ensure the security and confidentiality of customer records and information, and protect against anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such records and unauthorized access to or use of such records or information that could result in substantial customer harm or inconvenience.

Federal law additionally permits each state to enact legislation that is more protective of consumers' personal information.  Currently, there are a number of privacy bills pending in the New York legislature.  Management of the Company cannot predict the impact, if any, of these bills if enacted.

Consumer Protection and Compliance Provisions. The Bank is subject to various consumer protection laws and regulations. The Bank may be subject to potential liability for material violations of these laws and regulations, in the form of litigation by governmental and consumer groups, the FDIC and other federal regulatory agencies including the Department of Justice. Moreover, the CFPB has broad rule-making authority for a wide range of consumer protection laws that apply to all depository institutions, as well as the authority to prohibit "unfair, deceptive or abusive" acts and practices.

Insurance Activities.  As a New York State chartered savings bank,   the Bank is generally permitted to engage in certain insurance activities: (i) directly in places where the population does not exceed 5,000 persons, or (ii) in places with larger populations through subsidiaries if certain conditions are satisfied.  Federal agency regulations prohibit depository institutions from conditioning the extension of credit to individuals upon either the purchase of an insurance product or annuity or an agreement by the consumer not to purchase an insurance product or annuity from an entity not affiliated with the depository institution.  The regulations additionally require prior disclosure of this prohibition if such products are offered to credit applicants.

Federal Home Loan Bank ("FHLB") System.   The Bank is a member of the FHLBNY, which is one of the twelve regional FHLBs composing the FHLB System. Each FHLB provides a central credit facility primarily for its member institutions. Any advances from the FHLBNY must be secured by specified types of collateral, and long-term advances may be obtained only for the purpose of providing funds for residential housing finance.  The Bank, as a member of the FHLBNY, is currently required to acquire and hold shares of FHLBNY Class B stock as a membership requirement and must hold additional stock based on its FHLB borrowing and certain other activities.  The Bank was in compliance with these requirements with an investment in FHLBNY Class B stock of $58.4 million at December 31, 2014.  The FHLBNY can adjust the specific percentages and dollar amount periodically within the ranges established by the FHLBNY capital plan.

Federal Reserve System.    The Bank is subject to FRA and FRB regulations requiring state-chartered depository institutions to maintain cash reserves against their transaction accounts (primarily NOW and regular checking accounts).  Because required reserves must be maintained in the form of vault cash, a low-interest-bearing account at a Federal Reserve Bank, or a pass-through account as defined by the FRB, the effect of this reserve requirement is to reduce the Bank's interest-earning assets. The balances maintained to satisfy the FRB reserve requirements may be used to satisfy liquidity requirements imposed by the FDIC.

The Federal Reserve Banks pay interest on depository institutions' required and excess reserve balances.  The interest rate paid on required reserve balances and excess balances is currently 0.25 percent.

Depository institutions are additionally authorized to borrow from the Federal Reserve ''discount window,'' however, FRB regulations require such institutions to hold reserves in the form of vault cash or deposits with Federal Reserve Banks in order to borrow.

Anti-Money Laundering and Customer Identification.    The Company is subject to Bank Secrecy Act amendments and specific federal agency guidance in relation to implementing the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 ("PATRIOT Act").  The PATRIOT Act provides the federal government with powers to address terrorist threats through enhanced domestic security measures, expanded surveillance powers, increased information sharing and broadened anti-money laundering requirements.  By way of amendments to the Bank Secrecy Act, Title III of the PATRIOT Act enacted measures intended to encourage information sharing among bank regulatory and law enforcement
37

 
agencies.  In addition, certain provisions of Title III and the FDIC guidance impose affirmative obligations on a broad range of financial institutions, including banks and thrifts.  Title III imposes the following requirements, among others, with respect to financial institutions: (i) establishment of anti-money laundering programs; (ii) establishment of procedures for obtaining identifying information from customers opening new accounts, including verifying their identity within a reasonable period of time; (iii) establishment of enhanced due diligence policies, procedures and controls designed to detect and report money laundering; and (iv) prohibition on correspondent accounts for foreign shell banks and compliance with recordkeeping obligations with respect to cocorrespondent accounts of foreign banks
       In addition, bank regulators are directed to consider an organization's effectiveness in preventing money laundering when ruling on FRA and Bank Merger Act applications.

Regulation of the Holding Company
 
      The Bank has made an election under Section 10(l) of the HOLA to be treated as a "savings association" for purposes of regulation of the Holding Company. As a result, the Holding Company continues, after the Charter Conversion, to be registered with the FRB as a non-diversified unitary savings and loan holding company within the meaning of the HOLA.  The Holding Company is currently subject to FRB regulations, examination, enforcement and supervision, as well as reporting requirements applicable to savings and loan holding companies. Among other things, this authority permits the FRB to restrict or prohibit activities that are determined to be a serious risk to the safety, soundness or stability of a subsidiary depository institution.  In addition, the FRB has enforcement authority over the Holding Company's non-depository institution subsidiaries.  If the Bank does not continue to satisfy the QTL test, the Holding Company must change its status with the FRB as a savings and loan holding company and register as a bank holding company under the BHCA.  (See "Regulation of New York State-Chartered Savings Banks–QTL Test").
 
      HOLA prohibits a savings and loan holding company, directly or indirectly, or through one or more subsidiaries, from acquiring another savings association or holding company thereof, without prior written approval of the FRB; acquiring or retaining, with certain exceptions, more than 5% of a non-subsidiary savings association, non-subsidiary holding company, or non-subsidiary company engaged in activities other than those permitted by HOLA; or acquiring or retaining control of a depository institution that is not insured by the FDIC. In evaluating an application by a holding company to acquire a savings association, the FRB must consider the financial and managerial resources and future prospects of the company and savings association involved, the effect of the acquisition on the risk to the insurance funds, the convenience and needs of the community, and competitive factors.

The Gramm-Leach Bliley Act of 1999 ("Gramm-Leach") additionally restricts the powers of certain unitary savings and loan holding companies.  A unitary savings and loan holding company that is "grandfathered," i.e. , became a unitary savings and loan holding company pursuant to an application filed with the Office of Thrift Supervision (the regulator of savings and loan holding companies prior to the FRB) prior to May 4, 1999, such as the Holding Company, retains the authority it possessed under the law in existence as of May 4, 1999.  All other savings and loan holding companies are limited to financially related activities permissible for bank holding companies, as defined under Gramm-Leach.  Gramm-Leach also prohibits non-financial companies from acquiring grandfathered savings and loan holding companies.

Upon any non-supervisory acquisition by the Holding Company of another savings association or a savings bank that satisfies the QTL test and is deemed to be a savings association and that will be held as a separate subsidiary, the Holding Company will become a multiple savings and loan holding company and will be subject to limitations on the types of business activities in which it may engage.  HOLA limits the activities of a multiple savings and loan holding company and its non-insured subsidiaries primarily to activities permissible under Section 4(c) of the BHCA, subject to prior approval of the FRB, or the activities permissible for financial holding companies under Section 4(k) of the BHCA, if the company meets the requirements to be treated as a financial holding company, and to other activities authorized by federal agency regulations.

Federal agency regulations prohibit regulatory approval of any acquisition that would result in a multiple savings and loan holding company controlling savings associations in more than one state, subject to two exceptions: an acquisition of a savings association in another state (i) in a supervisory transaction, or (ii) pursuant to authority under the laws of the state of the association to be acquired that specifically permit such acquisitions.  The conditions imposed upon interstate acquisitions by those states that have enacted authorizing legislation vary.

The Bank must file a notice with the FRB prior to the payment of any dividends or other capital distributions to the Holding Company (See "Regulation-Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks - Limitation on Capital Distributions'').  The FRB has the authority to deny such payment request.
Restrictions on the Acquisition of the Holding Company.   Under the Federal Change in Bank Control Act ("CIBCA") and implementing regulations, a notice must be submitted to the FRB if any person (including a company), or group acting in concert, seeks to acquire 10% or more of the Holding Company's shares of outstanding common stock, unless the FRB has found that the acquisition will not result in a change in control of the Holding Company. Under CIBCA and implementing regulations, the FRB generally has 60 days within which to act on such notices, taking into consideration certain factors, including the financial and managerial resources of the acquirer; the convenience and needs of the communities served by the Holding Company, the Bank; and the anti-trust effects of the acquisition. Under HOLA, any company would be required to obtain approval from the FRB before it may obtain "control" of the Holding Company within the meaning of HOLA. Control is generally defined to mean the ownership or power to vote 25% or more of any class of voting securities of the Holding Company or the ability to control in any manner the election of a majority of the Holding Company's directors, although a person or entity may also be determined to "control" the Holding Company without satisfying these requirements if it is determined that he, she or it directly or indirectly exercises a controlling influence over the management or policies of the Holding Company. In addition, an existing bank holding company or savings and loan holding company would, under federal banking laws and regulations, generally be required to obtain FRB approval before acquiring more than 5% of the Holding Company's voting stock.

In addition to the applicable federal laws and regulations, New York State Banking Law generally requires prior approval of the New York State Superintendent of Financial Services before any action is taken that causes any company to acquire direct or indirect control of a banking institution organized in New York.

       Basel III.  See "Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks–Basel III" for a discussion of the potential impact(s) of Basel III upon the Holding Company.

Federal Securities Laws

The Holding Company's common stock is registered with the SEC under Section 12(g) of the Exchange Act.  It is subject to the periodic reporting, proxy solicitation, insider trading restrictions and other requirements under the Exchange Act.

Delaware Corporation Law

The Holding Company is incorporated under the laws of the State of Delaware, and, therefore, is subject to regulation by the State of Delaware, and the rights of its shareholders are governed by the Delaware General Corporation Law.

Item 1A.   Risk Factors

The Company's business may be adversely affected by conditions in the financial markets and economic conditions generally.

The Company's financial performance generally, and in particular the ability of borrowers to pay interest on and repay principal of outstanding loans and the value of collateral securing those loans, is highly dependent upon the business environment in the markets where the Company operates, in the New York metropolitan area and in the United States as a whole.  Conditions in the marketplace for the Bank's property collateral types (mainly multifamily and commercial real estate) remained stronger than most other parts of the country throughout the years of the financial crisis, and in fact have recently rebounded to healthy pre-crisis levels.  Nevertheless, given the precarious nature of financial and economic conditions both nationally and globally, this status is always subject to change, which could adversely affect the credit quality of the Bank's loans, results of operations and financial condition.

The Bank's commercial real estate lending may subject it to greater risk of an adverse impact on operations from a decline in the economy.

The credit quality of the Bank's portfolio can have a significant impact on the Company's earnings, results of operations and financial condition.  As part of the Company's strategic plan, it originates loans secured by commercial real estate that are generally viewed as exposing lenders to a greater risk of loss than both one- to four-family and multifamily residential mortgage loans. Because payments on loans secured by commercial real estate are often dependent upon successful operation or management of the collateral properties, as well as the success of the business and retail tenants occupying the properties, repayment of such loans are generally more vulnerable to weak economic conditions. Further, the collateral securing such loans may depreciate over time, be difficult to appraise, or fluctuate in value based upon the rentability, among other commercial factors.

The performance of Bank's multifamily and mixed-use loans could be adversely impacted by regulation or a weakened economy.

Multifamily and mixed use loans generally involve a greater risk than one- to four- family residential mortgage loans because government regulations such as rent control and rent stabilization laws, which are outside the control of the borrower or the Bank, could impair the value of the security for the loan or the future cash flow of such properties. As a result, rental income might not rise sufficiently over time to satisfy increases in the loan rate at repricing or increases in overhead expenses ( e.g. , utilities, taxes, etc.). Impaired loans are thus difficult to identify before they become problematic. In addition, if the cash flow from a collateral property is reduced ( e.g. , if leases are not obtained or renewed), the borrower's ability to repay the loan and the value of the security for the loan may be impaired.

Extensions of credit on multifamily, mixed-use or commercial real estate loans may result from reliance upon inaccurate or misleading information received from the borrower.

In deciding whether to extend credit on multifamily, mixed-use or commercial real estate loans, the Bank may rely on information furnished by or on behalf of a customer and counterparties, including financial statements, credit reports and other financial information. In the event such information is inaccurate or misleading, reliance on it could have a material adverse impact on the Company's business and, in turn, its financial condition and results of operations.

Geographic and borrower concentrations could adversely impact financial performance.

The Company's financial performance generally, and in particular the ability of borrowers to pay interest on and repay principal of outstanding loans, as well as the value of collateral securing those loans, is highly dependent upon business and economic conditions in the United States, particularly in the local New York metropolitan area where the Company conducts substantially all of its business. Conditions in these marketplaces have begun to rebound in recent months after several years of deterioration. Should such conditions fail to continue to improve, they may adversely affect the credit quality of the Bank's loans, its results of operations and its financial condition.

Conditions in the real estate markets in which the collateral for the Bank's mortgage loans are located strongly influence the level of the Bank's non-performing loans and the value of its collateral. Real estate values are affected by, among other items, fluctuations in general or local economic conditions, supply and demand, changes in governmental rules or policies, the availability of loans to potential purchasers and acts of nature. Declines in real estate markets have in the past, and may in the future, negatively impact the Company's results of operations, cash flows, business, financial condition and prospects.  In addition, at December 31, 2014 the Bank had four borrowers for which its total lending exposure equaled or exceeded 10% of its Tier 1 risk-based capital (its lowest capital measure).  Default by these borrowers could adversely impact the Bank's financial condition and results of operations.

The Bank's allowance for loan losses may be insufficient.

The Bank's allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level considered adequate by management to absorb losses inherent in its loan portfolio. The amount of inherent loan losses which could be ultimately realized is susceptible to changes in economic, operating and other conditions, including changes in interest rates, that could be beyond the Bank's control. Such losses could exceed current estimates. Although management believes that the Bank's allowance for loan losses is adequate, there can be no assurance that the allowance will be sufficient to satisfy actual loan losses should such losses be realized. Any increases in the allowance for loan losses will result in a decrease in net income and capital, and may have a material adverse effect on the Bank's financial condition and results of operations.

Increases in interest rates may reduce the Company's profitability.

The Bank's primary source of income is its net interest income, which is the difference between the interest income earned on its interest earning assets and the interest expense incurred on its interest bearing liabilities. The Bank's one-year interest rate sensitivity gap is the difference between interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing within one year and its interest rate sensitive liabilities maturing or repricing within one year, expressed as both a total amount and as a percentage of total assets.  At December 31, 2014, the Bank's one year interest rate gap was negative 23%, indicating that the overall level of its interest rate sensitive liabilities maturing or repricing within one year exceeded that of its interest rate sensitive assets maturing or repricing within one year.  In a rising interest rate environment, an institution with a negative gap would generally be expected, absent the effects of other factors, to experience a greater increase in its cost of liabilities relative to its yield on assets, and thus a decline in net interest income from its existing investments and funding sources.

Based upon historical experience, if interest rates were to rise, the Bank would expect the demand for multifamily loans to decline. Decreased loan origination volume would likely negatively impact the Bank's interest income. In addition, if interest rates were to rise rapidly and result in an economic decline, the Bank would expect its level of non-performing loans to increase. Such an increase in non-performing loans may result in an increase to the provision/allowance for loan losses and possible increased charge-offs, which would negatively impact the Company's net income.

Further, the actual amount of time before mortgage loans and MBS are repaid can be significantly impacted by changes in mortgage redemption rates and market interest rates. Mortgage prepayment, satisfaction and refinancing rates will vary due to several factors, including the regional economy in the area where the underlying mortgages were originated, seasonal factors, and other demographic variables. However, the most significant factors affecting prepayment, satisfaction and refinancing rates are prevailing interest rates, related mortgage refinancing opportunities and competition.  The level of mortgage and MBS prepayment, satisfaction and refinancing activity impacts the Company's earnings due to its effect on fee income earned on prepayment and refinancing activities, along with liquidity levels the Company will experience to fund new investments or ongoing operations.

As a New York State chartered savings bank, the Bank is required to monitor changes in its Economic Value of Equity ("EVE"), which is the difference between the present value of the expected future cash flows of the Bank's assets and liabilities plus the value of any off-balance sheet items, such as firm commitments to originate loans, or derivatives, if applicable.  To monitor its overall sensitivity to changes in interest rates, the Bank also simulates the effect of instantaneous changes in interest rates of up to 400 basis points on its assets, liabilities and net interest income.  Interest rates do and will continue to fluctuate, and the Bank cannot predict future FOMC actions or other factors that will cause interest rates to vary.

The Company operates in a highly regulated industry and is subject to uncertain risks related to changes in laws, government regulation and monetary policy.

The Holding Company and the Bank are subject to extensive supervision, regulation and examination by the NYSDFS (the Bank's primary regulator), the FRB (the Holding Company's primary regulator) and the FDIC, as its deposit insurer. Such regulation limits the manner in which the Holding Company and Bank conduct business, undertake new investments and activities and obtain financing. This regulation is designed primarily for the protection of the deposit insurance funds and the Bank's depositors, and not to benefit the Bank or its creditors. The regulatory structure also provides the regulatory authorities extensive discretion in connection with their supervisory and enforcement activities and examination policies, including policies with respect to capital levels, the classification of assets and the establishment of adequate loan loss reserves for regulatory purposes.  Failure to comply with applicable laws and regulations could subject the Holding Company and Bank to regulatory enforcement action that could result in the assessment of significant civil money penalties against the Holding Company and Bank.  For further information regarding the laws and regulations that affect the Holding Company and the Bank, see "Item 1. Business - Regulation - Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks," and "Item 1. Business - Regulation - Regulation of Holding Company."

The fiscal and monetary policies of the federal government and its agencies could have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of operations. The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System regulates the supply of money and credit in the United States.  Its policies determine in significant part the cost of funds for lending and investing and the return earned on those loans and investments, both of which affect the Company's net interest
41

margin.  Government action can materially decrease the value of the Company's financial assets, such as debt securities, mortgages and MSR.  Governmental policies can also adversely affect borrowers, potentially increasing the risk that they may fail to repay their loans.  Changes in Federal Reserve Board or governmental policies are beyond the Company's control and difficult to predict; consequently, the impact of these changes on the Company's activities and results of operations is difficult to predict.
      Financial institution regulation has been the subject of significant legislation in recent years, and may be the subject of further significant legislation in the future, none of which is within the control of the Holding Company or the Bank. Significant new laws or changes in, or repeals of, existing laws may cause the Company's results of operations to differ materially. Further, federal monetary policy significantly affects credit conditions for the Company, primarily through open market operations in United States government securities, the discount rate for bank borrowings and reserve requirements for liquid assets. A material change in any of these conditions would have a material impact on the Bank, and therefore, on the Company's results of operations.
      In addition, the Company expects to face increased regulation and supervision of the Bank's industry as a result of the financial crisis in the banking and financial markets, and there will be additional requirements and conditions imposed to the extent that it participates in any of the programs established or to be established by the U.S. Department of the Treasury ("Treasury") or by the federal bank regulatory agencies. Such additional regulation and supervision may increase costs and limit the Company's ability to pursue business opportunities.
Competition from other financial institutions in originating loans and attracting deposits may adversely affect profitability.

The Bank operates in a highly competitive industry that could become even more competitive as a result of legislative, regulatory and technological changes, and continued consolidation.

The Bank's retail banking and a significant portion of its lending business are concentrated in the NYC metropolitan area. The NYC banking environment is extremely competitive. The Bank's competition for loans exists principally from savings banks, commercial banks, mortgage banks and insurance companies.  The Bank has faced sustained competition for the origination of multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans. Management anticipates that the current level of competition for multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans will continue for the foreseeable future, and this competition may inhibit the Bank's ability to maintain its current level and pricing of such loans.

Clients could pursue alternatives to the Bank's deposits, causing the Bank to lose a historically less expensive source of funding.  The Bank gathers deposits in direct competition with commercial banks, savings banks and brokerage firms, many among the largest in the nation. In addition, it must also compete for deposit monies against the stock markets, mutual funds, and other securities.  Over the previous decade, consolidation in the financial services industry, coupled with the emergence of Internet banking, has altered the deposit gathering landscape and may increase competitive pressures on the Bank.

The Bank may not be able to meet the cash flow requirements of its depositors and borrowers or meet its operating cash needs.

Liquidity is the ability to meet cash flow needs on a timely basis at a reasonable cost. The liquidity of the Bank is used to make loans and repay deposit liabilities as they become due or are demanded by customers. Liquidity policies and limits are established by the board of directors. The Holding Company's overall liquidity position and the liquidity position of the Bank are regularly monitored to ensure that various alternative strategies exist to cover unanticipated events that could affect liquidity. Funding sources include deposits, repayments of loans and MBS, investment security maturities and redemptions, and advances from the FHLBNY. The Bank maintains a portfolio of securities that can be used as a secondary source of liquidity. The Bank also can borrow through the Federal Reserve Bank's discount window. If the Bank was unable to access any of these funding sources when needed, it might be unable to meet customers' needs, which could adversely impact the Company's financial condition, results of operations, cash flows, and level of regulatory capital.

The soundness of other financial institutions could adversely affect the Company.

The Company's ability to engage in routine funding transactions could be adversely affected by the actions and commercial soundness of other financial institutions.  The Company has exposure to many different industries and
42

counterparties.  As a result, defaults by, or even rumors or questions about, one or more financial services institutions, or the financial services industry generally, have led to market-wide liquidity problems and could lead to losses or defaults by the Company or by other institutions.  There is no assurance that any such losses would not materially and adversely affect the Company's results of operations.

Negative public opinion could damage the Company's reputation and adversely impact its business and revenues.

      As a financial institution, the Bank's earnings and capital are subject to risks associated with negative public opinion.  Negative public opinion could result from the Company's actual or alleged conduct in any number of activities, including lending practices, the failure of any product or service sold by the Bank to meet customers' expectations or applicable regulatory requirements, corporate governance and acquisitions, or from actions taken by government regulators and community organizations in response to those activities.  Negative public opinion can adversely affect the Company's ability to attract and/or retain clients and can expose the Company to litigation and regulatory action.  Actual or alleged conduct by one of the Company's businesses can result in negative public opinion about its other businesses.  Negative public opinion could also affect the Company's credit ratings, which are important to its access to unsecured wholesale borrowings.  Significant changes in these ratings could change the cost and availability of these sources of funding.

The recent adoption of regulatory reform legislation has created uncertainty and may have a material effect on the Company's operations and capital requirements.

The Reform Act creates minimum standards for the origination of mortgage loans.  The CFPB recently adopted rules imposing extensive regulations governing an institution's obligation to evaluate a borrower's ability to repay a mortgage loan.  The rule applies to all consumer mortgages (except home equity lines of credit, timeshare plans, reverse mortgages or temporary loans). The rule also prohibits prepayment fees on certain types of mortgage loans.
 
      Congress and various federal regulators also may significantly impact the financial services industry and the Company's business.  Complying with any new legislative or regulatory requirements could have an adverse impact on the Company's consolidated results of operations, its ability to fill positions with the most qualified candidates available, and the Holding Company's ability to maintain its dividend.
 
      Furthermore, the Federal Government may take action to transform the role of government in the U.S. housing market, such as reducing the size and scope of FNMA and FHLMC, or diminishing other government support to such markets. Congressional leaders have voiced similar plans for future legislation. It is too early to determine the nature and scope of any legislation that may develop along these lines, or the roles FNMA and FHLMC or the private sector will play in future housing markets. However, it is possible that legislation will be proposed over the near term that would considerably limit the nature of GSE guarantees relative to historical measurements, which could have broad adverse implications for the market and significant implications for the Company's business.

The Bank has recently become subject to more stringent capital requirements.

Effective January 1, 2015, the federal banking agencies have adopted the Basel III Capital Rules, which apply to both the Bank and Holding Company. These rules are subject to phase-in periods until January 1, 2019 for certain of their components.  The Basel III Capital Rules will result in significantly higher capital requirements and more restrictive leverage and liquidity ratios for the Bank than those previously in effect.  The Basel III Capital Rules will also apply to the Holding Company, which, as a savings and loan holding company, has not previously been subject to consolidated risk-based capital requirements.
 
      While the Bank expects to satisfy the requirements of the Basel III Capital Rules, inclusive of the capital conservation buffer, as phased in by the FRB, it may fail to do so. In addition, these requirements could have a negative impact on the Bank's ability to lend, grow deposit balances, make acquisitions and make capital distributions in the form of increased dividends or share repurchases. Higher capital levels could also lower the Company's consolidated return on equity.

The Company's accounting estimates and risk management processes rely on analytical and forecasting models.
 
      The processes the Company uses to estimate its probable loan losses and to measure the fair value of some financial instruments, as well as the processes used to estimate the effects of changing interest rates and other market
43

measures on the Company's financial condition and results of operations, depends upon the use of analytical and forecasting models. These models reflect assumptions that may not be accurate, particularly in times of market stress or other unforeseen circumstances. Even if these assumptions are adequate, the models may prove to be inadequate or inaccurate because of other flaws in their design or their implementation. If the models the Company uses for interest rate risk and asset-liability management are inadequate, the Company may incur increased or unexpected losses upon changes in market interest rates or other market measures. If the models the Company uses for determining its probable loan losses are inadequate, the allowance for loan losses may not be sufficient to support future charge-offs. If the models the Company uses to measure the fair value financial instruments is inadequate, the fair value of such financial instruments may fluctuate unexpectedly or may not accurately reflect what the Company could realize upon sale or settlement of such financial instruments. Any such failure in the Company's analytical or forecasting models could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.
The value of the Company's goodwill and other intangible assets may decline in the future.
 
      As of December 31, 2014, the Company had $55.6 million of goodwill and other intangible assets.  A significant decline in the Company's expected future cash flows, a significant adverse change in the business climate, slower growth rates or a significant and sustained decline in the price of the Holding Company's common stock may necessitate taking charges in the future related to the impairment of the Company's goodwill and other intangible assets. If the Company were to conclude that a future write-down of goodwill and other intangible assets is necessary, the Company would record the appropriate charge, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.

The Company's controls and procedures may fail or be circumvented.
 
      The Company's internal controls, disclosure controls and procedures, and corporate governance policies and procedures are based in part on certain assumptions and can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurances that the objectives of the system are satisfied. Any failure or circumvention of the Company's controls and procedures or failure to comply with regulations related to controls and procedures could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.

The Company's risk management practices may not be effective in mitigating the risks to which it is subject or in reducing the potential for losses in connection with such risks.
 
      As a financial institution, the Company is subject to a number of risks, including credit, interest rate, liquidity, market, operational, legal/compliance, reputational, and strategic. The Company's risk management framework is designed to minimize the risks to which it is subject, as well as any losses resulting from such risks. Although the Company seeks to identify, measure, monitor, report, and control the Company's exposure to such risks, and employ a broad and diversified set of risk monitoring and mitigation techniques in the process, those techniques are inherently limited because they cannot anticipate the existence or development of risks that are currently unknown and unanticipated.
 
      For example, recent economic conditions, heightened legislative and regulatory scrutiny of the financial services industry, and increases in the overall complexity of the Company's operations, among other developments, have resulted in the creation of a variety of risks that were previously unknown and unanticipated, highlighting the intrinsic limitations of the Company's risk monitoring and mitigation techniques. As a result, the further development of previously unknown or unanticipated risks may result in the Company incurring losses in the future that could adversely impact its financial condition and results of operations.

The Company's operations rely on certain external vendors.

      The Company relies on certain external vendors to provide products and services necessary to maintain its day-to-day operations.  Accordingly, the Company's operations are exposed to risk that these vendors will not perform in accordance with the contracted arrangements. The failure of an external vendor to perform in accordance with the contracted arrangements because of changes in the vendor's organizational structure, financial condition, support for existing products and services, or strategic focus, or for any other reason, could be disruptive to the Company's operations, which could have a material adverse impact on the Company's business and, in turn, the Company's financial condition and results of operations.

The Company is subject to environmental liability risk associated with lending activities.
 
      A significant portion of the Company's loan portfolio is secured by real property. During the ordinary course of business, the Company may foreclose on and take title to properties securing certain loans. In doing so, there is a risk that hazardous or toxic substances could be found on these properties. If hazardous or toxic substances are found, the Company may be liable for remediation costs, as well as for personal injury and property damage. Environmental laws may require the Company to incur substantial expenses and may materially reduce the affected property's value or limit the Company's ability to use or sell the affected property. In addition, future laws or more stringent interpretations or enforcement policies with respect to existing laws may increase the Company's exposure to environmental liability. Environmental reviews of real property before initiating foreclosure may not be sufficient to detect all potential environmental hazards. The remediation costs and any other financial liabilities associated with an environmental hazard could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial condition and results of operations.

Severe weather, natural disasters, acts of war or terrorism and other external events could significantly impact the Company's business.
 
      Severe weather, natural disasters, acts of war or terrorism and other adverse external events could have a significant impact on the Company's ability to conduct business. In addition, such events could affect the stability of the Company's deposit base, impair the ability of borrowers to repay outstanding loans, impair the value of collateral securing loans, cause significant property damage, result in loss of revenue and/or cause the Company to incur additional expenses. The occurrence of any such event in the future could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, which, in turn, could have a material adverse effect on the Company's financial condition and results of operations.

Credit risk stemming from held-for-investment lending activities may adversely impact on the Company's consolidated net income.
 
      The loans originated by the Bank for investment are primarily multi-family residential loans and, to a lesser extent, commercial real estate loans. Such loans are generally larger, and have higher risk-adjusted returns and shorter maturities, than one-to four-family mortgage loans.  Credit risk would ordinarily be expected to increase with the growth of these loan portfolios.
 
      Payments on multi-family residential and commercial real estate loans generally depend on the income produced by the underlying properties, which, in turn, depend on their successful operation and management. Accordingly, the ability of the Bank's borrowers to repay these loans may be impacted by adverse conditions in the local real estate market and the local economy.  While the Bank seeks to minimize these risks through its underwriting policies, which generally require that such loans be qualified on the basis of the collateral property's cash flows, appraised value, and debt service coverage ratio, among other factors, there can be no assurance that the Bank's underwriting policies will protect it from credit-related losses or delinquencies.
 
      Although the Bank's losses have been comparatively limited, despite the economic weakness in its market, it cannot guarantee that this record will be maintained in future periods. The ability of the Bank's borrowers to repay their loans could be adversely impacted by a further decline in real estate values and/or an increase in unemployment, which not only could result in an increase in charge-offs and/or the provision for loan losses.  Either of these events would have an adverse impact on the Company's consolidated net income.

Security measures may not be sufficient to mitigate the risk of a cyber attack.
 
      Communications and information systems are essential to the conduct of the Company's business, as it uses such systems to manage its customer relationships, general ledger, deposits, and loans. The Company's operations rely on the secure processing, storage, and transmission of confidential and other information in its computer systems and networks. Although the Company takes protective measures and endeavors to modify them as circumstances warrant, the security of its computer systems, software, and networks may be vulnerable to breaches, unauthorized access, misuse, computer viruses, or other malicious code and cyber attacks that could have a security impact.
 
      In addition, breaches of security may occur through intentional or unintentional acts by those having authorized or unauthorized access to the Company's confidential or other information or the confidential or other information of its customers, clients, or counterparties. If one or more of such events were to occur, the confidential and other information processed and stored in, and transmitted through, the Company's computer systems and networks could potentially be jeopardized, or the operations of the Company or its customers, clients, or counterparties could otherwise experience interruptions or malfunctions. This could cause the Company significant reputational damage or result in significant losses.
 
      Furthermore, the Company may be required to expend significant additional resources to modify its protective measures or investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures arising from operational and security risks. Also, the Company may be subject to wholly or partially uninsured litigation and financial losses.
 
      In addition, the Company routinely transmits and receives personal, confidential, and proprietary information by e-mail and other electronic means. The Company has discussed and worked with its appropriate customers and counterparties to develop secure transmission capabilities, however, it does not have, and may be unable to install, secure capabilities with all of these constituents, and may be unable to ensure that these third parties have appropriate controls in place to protect the confidentiality of such information.  Any interception, misuse, or mishandling of personal, confidential, or proprietary information transmitted to or received from a customer or counterparty could result in legal liability, regulatory action, and reputational harm, and could have a significant adverse effect on the Company's competitive position, financial condition, and results of operations.
 
Security measures may not protect the Company from systems failures or interruptions.
 
      Communications and information systems are essential to the conduct of the Company's business, as it uses such systems to manage its customer relationships, general ledger, deposits, and loans. The Company's operations rely on the secure processing, storage, and transmission of confidential and other information in its computer systems and networks. The security of its computer systems, software, and networks may be vulnerable to breaches, unauthorized access, misuse, computer viruses, or other malicious code and cyber attacks that could have a security impact.
 
      A failure in or breach of security may occur through intentional or unintentional acts by those having authorized or unauthorized access to the Company's confidential or other information or the confidential or other information of its customers, clients, or counterparties. If one or more of such events were to occur, the confidential and other information processed and stored in, and transmitted through, the Company's computer systems and networks could potentially be jeopardized, or the operations of the Company or its customers, clients, or counterparties could otherwise experience interruptions or malfunctions.  If this confidential or proprietary information were to be mishandled, misused or lost, the Company could additionally be exposed to significant regulatory consequences, reputational damage, civil litigation and financial loss.
 
      Information security risks have generally increased in recent years because of the proliferation of new technologies and the increased sophistication and activities of perpetrators of cyber-attacks and mobile phishing.  Mobile phishing, a means for identity thieves to obtain sensitive personal information through fraudulent e-mail, text or voice mail, is an emerging threat targeting the customers of popular financial entities.
 
      Furthermore, the Company may be required to expend significant additional resources to modify its protective measures or investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures arising from operational and security risks. Also, the Company may be subject to wholly or partially uninsured litigation and financial losses.
 
      In addition, the Company routinely transmits and receives personal, confidential, and proprietary information by e-mail and other electronic means. The Company has discussed and worked with its appropriate customers and counterparties to develop secure transmission capabilities, however, it does not have, and may be unable to install, secure capabilities with all of these constituents, and may be unable to ensure that these third parties have appropriate controls in place to protect the confidentiality of such information.  Any interception, misuse, or mishandling of personal, confidential, or proprietary information transmitted to or received from a customer or counterparty could result in legal liability, regulatory action, and reputational harm, and could have a significant adverse effect on the Company's competitive position, financial condition, and results of operations.
 
      The Company also outsources certain aspects of its data processing to select third-party providers. If these third-party providers encounter difficulties, or problems arise in communicating with them, the Company's ability to
46

adequately process and account for customer transactions could be affected, and its business operations could be adversely impacted.
      Although both the Company and all significant third party providers utilized to process, store and transmit confidential and other information employ a variety of physical, procedural and technological safeguards to protect this confidential and proprietary information from mishandling, these safeguards do not provide absolute assurance that mishandling, misuse or loss of the information will not occur, and that if mishandling, misuse or loss of the information did occur, those events will be promptly detected and addressed.

The trading volume in the Holding Company's common stock is less than that of other larger financial services companies.
 
      Although the Holding Company's common stock is listed for trading on the Nasdaq National Exchange, the trading volume in its common stock is less than that of other, larger financial services companies. A public trading market having the desired characteristics of depth, liquidity and orderliness depends on the presence in the marketplace of willing buyers and sellers of the Holding Company's common stock at any given time. This presence depends on the individual decisions of investors and general economic and market conditions over which the Holding Company has no control. Given the lower trading volume of the Holding Company's common stock, significant sales of the Holding Company's common stock, or the expectation of these sales, could, from time to time, cause the Holding Company's stock price to exhibit weakness unrelated to financial performance.

The Holding Company may reduce or eliminate dividends on its common stock in the future.
 
      Holders of the Holding Company's common stock are entitled to receive only such dividends as its Board of Directors may declare out of funds legally available for such payments. Although the Holding Company has historically declared cash dividends on its common stock, it is not required to do so and may reduce or eliminate its common stock dividend in the future. This could adversely affect the market price of the Holding Company's common stock. In addition, the Holding Company is a savings and loan holding company, and its ability to declare and pay dividends is dependent on certain federal regulatory considerations, including the guidelines of the Federal Reserve Board regarding capital adequacy and dividends.

Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments

Not applicable.

Item 2. Properties

The headquarters of both the Holding Company and the Bank are located at 209 Havemeyer Street, Brooklyn, New York 11211. The headquarters building is fully owned by the Bank. The Bank conducts its business through twenty-five full-service retail banking offices located throughout Brooklyn, Queens, the Bronx and Nassau County, New York.

Item 3.  Legal Proceedings

In the ordinary course of business, the Company is routinely named as a defendant in or party to various pending or threatened legal actions or proceedings.  Certain of these matters may seek substantial monetary damages.  In the opinion of management, the Company is involved in no actions or proceedings that will have a material adverse impact on its consolidated financial condition and results of operations.

Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures

Not applicable.

PART II

Item 5.  Market for Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities

The Holding Company's common stock is traded on the Nasdaq National Market and quoted under the symbol "DCOM."  Prior to June 15, 1998, the Holding Company's common stock was quoted under the symbol "DIME."

      The following table indicates the high and low sales price for the Holding Company's common stock, and dividends declared, during the periods indicated.  The Holding Company's common stock began trading on June 26, 1996, the date of the initial public offering.

 
Twelve Months Ended
December 31, 2014
 
Twelve Months Ended
December 31, 2013
 
 
Quarter Ended
 
Dividends
Declared
High
Sales
Price
Low
Sales
Price
 
 
Dividends
Declared
High
Sales
Price
Low
Sales
Price
March 31 st
$0.14
$18.23
$15.43
 
$0.14
$14.94
$13.33
June 30 th
0.14
17.53
14.77
 
0.14
15.63
13.79
September 30 th
0.14
16.22
14.23
 
0.14
17.92
15.31
December 31 st
0.14
16.63
14.02
 
0.14
17.43
15.90

On December 31, 2014, the final trading date in the fiscal year, the Holding Company's common stock closed at $16.28.

Management estimates that the Holding Company had approximately 7,900 stockholders of record as of March 1, 2015, including persons or entities holding stock in nominee or street name through various brokers and banks. There were 36,855,019 shares of Holding Company common stock outstanding at December 31, 2014.

During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Holding Company paid cash dividends totaling $20.1 million, representing $0.56 per outstanding common share.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Holding Company paid cash dividends totaling $19.7 million, representing $0.56 per outstanding common share.
On January 21, 2015, the Board of Directors declared a cash dividend of $0.14 per common share to all stockholders of record as of February 2, 2015.  This dividend was paid on February 10, 2015.
The Holding Company is subject to the requirements of Delaware law, which generally limits dividends to an amount equal to the excess of net assets ( i.e., the amount by which total assets exceed total liabilities) over statutory capital, or if no such excess exists, to net profits for the current and/or immediately preceding fiscal year.
As the principal asset of the Holding Company, the Bank is often called upon to provide funds for the Holding Company's payment of dividends (See "Item 1 – Business - Regulation – Regulation of New York State Chartered Savings Banks – Limitation on Capital Distributions").  (See also Note 2 to the Company's Audited Consolidated Financial Statements for a discussion of limitations on distributions from the Bank to the Holding Company).
In March 2004, the Holding Company issued $72.2 million in trust preferred debt, with a stated annual coupon rate of 7.0%. The Holding Company re-acquired and retired $1.5 million of this outstanding debt during 2009.  Pursuant to the provisions of the debt, the Holding Company is required to first satisfy the interest obligation on the debt, which currently approximates $4.9 million annually, prior to the authorization and payment of common stock cash dividends.  Management of the Holding Company does not presently believe that this requirement will materially affect its ability to pay dividends to its common stockholders.

The Holding Company did not purchase any shares of its common stock into treasury during the three months ended December 31, 2014.


A summary of the shares repurchased by month is as follows:

ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

 
 
 
Period
 
Total Number
of Shares Purchased
 
Average
Price Paid  Per Share
 
Total Number of
Shares Purchased as Part of Publicly Announced Programs (1)
 
Maximum Number of Shares that May Yet be Purchased Under the Programs (1)
October 2014
  -     
 
  -     
 
  -     
 
1,124,549
November 2014
  -     
 
  -     
 
  -     
 
1,124,549
December 2014
  -     
 
  -     
 
  -     
 
1,124,549
(1) No existing repurchase programs expired during the three months ended December 31, 2014, nor did the Company terminate any repurchase programs prior to expiration during the quarter.  The 1,124,549 shares that remained eligible for repurchase at December 31, 2014 were available under the Holding Company's twelfth stock repurchase program, which was publicly announced in June 2007.  The twelfth stock repurchase program authorized the purchase of up to 1,787,665 shares of the Holding Company's common stock, and has no expiration.

Performance Graph

Pursuant to regulations of the SEC, the graph below compares the Holding Company's stock performance with that of the total return for the U.S. Nasdaq Stock Market and an index of all thrift stocks as reported by SNL Securities L.C. from January 1, 2010 through December 31, 2014.  The graph assumes the reinvestment of dividends in additional shares of the same class of equity securities as those listed below.


 
Period Ending December 31,
Index
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc.
100.00
129.65
116.61
133.80
169.11
168.66
NASDAQ Composite
100.00
118.15
117.22
138.02
193.47
222.16
SNL Thrift
100.00
104.49
87.90
106.91
137.20
147.56

Item 6.  Selected Financial Data

Financial Highlights
(Dollars in Thousands, except per share data)
The consolidated financial and other data of the Company as of and for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011and 2010 set forth below is derived in part from, and should be read in conjunction with, the Company's audited Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes thereto.  Certain amounts as of and for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010 have been reclassified to conform to the December 31, 2014 presentation.  These reclassifications were not material.

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
Selected Financial Condition Data:
         
Total assets
$4,497,107 
$4,028,190
$3,905,399
$4,021,180
$4,040,295 
Loans and loans held for sale (net of deferred costs or fees
   and the allowance for loan losses)
4,100,747 
3,679,366
3,485,818
3,443,633
 
3,454,326  
MBS
26,409 
31,543
49,021
93,877
144,518 
Investment securities (including FHLBNY capital stock)
76,139 
78,863
88,762
232,642
145,491 
Federal funds sold and other short-term investments
250 
951
4,536 
Goodwill
55,638 
55,638
55,638
55,638
55,638 
Deposits
2,659,792 
2,507,146
2,479,429
2,343,701
2,350,581 
Borrowings
1,244,405 
980,680
913,180
1,205,455
1,256,205 
Stockholders' equity
459,725 
435,506
391,574
361,034
328,734 
Selected Operating Data:
         
Interest income
$172,952 
$175,456
$195,954
$209,216
$214,794 
Interest expense
48,416 
46,969
86,112
69,714
79,413 
Net interest income
124,536 
128,487
109,842
139,502
135,381 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
(1,872)
369
3,921
6,846
11,209 
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
126,408 
128,118
105,921
132,656
124,172 
Non-interest income
9,038 
7,463
23,849
7,929
8,055 
Non-interest expense
61,076 
62,692
62,572
61,688
61,977 
Income before income tax
74,370 
72,889
67,198
78,897
70,250 
Income tax expense
30,124 
29,341
26,890
31,588
28,861 
Net income
$44,246 
$43,548
$40,308
$47,309
$41,389 


 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
SELECTED FINANCIAL RATIOS AND OTHER DATA (1):
         
   Return on average assets
1.03%
1.09%
1.02%
1.16%
1.01%
   Return on average stockholders' equity
9.83  
10.58  
10.73  
13.65   
13.15   
   Stockholders' equity to total assets at end of period
10.22   
10.81   
10.03   
8.98   
8.14   
   Loans to deposits at end of period
154.87   
147.56   
141.42   
147.80   
147.77   
   Loans to interest-earning assets at end of period
94.68   
96.74   
94.41   
91.36   
92.18   
   Net interest spread (2)
2.84   
3.19   
2.58   
3.38   
3.34   
   Net interest margin (3)
3.03   
3.39   
2.92   
3.60   
3.53   
   Average interest-earning assets to average interest-bearing liabilities
115.98   
116.49   
114.83   
112.07   
109.32   
   Non-interest expense to average assets
1.42   
1.57   
1.59   
1.51   
1.52   
   Efficiency ratio (4)
46.28   
46.23   
52.58   
41.64   
42.74   
   Effective tax rate
40.51   
40.25   
40.02   
40.04   
41.08   
   Dividend payout ratio
45.53   
45.53   
47.86   
30.00   
45.16   
Per Share Data:
         
   Diluted earnings per share
$1.23   
$1.23   
$1.17   
$1.40   
$1.24   
   Cash dividends paid per share
0.56   
0.56   
0.56   
0.56   
0.56   
   Book value per share (5)
12.47   
11.86   
10.96   
10.28   
9.50   
Asset Quality Ratios and Other Data(1):
         
   Net charge-offs (recoveries)
$(212)   
$766   
$3,707   
$5,925   
$13,821   
   Total non-performing loans (6)
6,198   
12,549   
8,888   
28,973   
20,168   
   OREO
18   
18   
-    
-    
-    
    Non-performing TRUPS
904   
898   
892   
1,012   
564   
    Total non-performing assets
7,120   
13,465   
9,780   
29,985   
20,732   
   Non-performing loans to total loans
0.15%
0.34%
0.25%
0.84%
0.58%
   Non-performing assets to total assets
0.16   
0.33   
0.25   
0.75   
0.51   
Allowance for Loan Losses to:
         
   Non-performing loans
298.37%
160.59%
231.21%
78.04%
95.03%
   Total loans (7)
0.45  
0.54  
0.59  
0.58  
0.55  
Regulatory Capital Ratios: (Bank only) (1)
         
   Tangible capital
9.20%
9.52%
9.98%
9.11%
8.23%
   Leverage Capital
9.20   
9.52   
9.98   
9.11   
8.23   
   Total risk-based capital
12.89   
13.36   
13.72   
12.24   
11.95   
Earnings to Fixed Charges Ratios (8) (9):
         
   Including interest on deposits
2.50x   
2.51x   
1.77x   
2.12x   
1.87x   
   Excluding interest on deposits
3.49    
3.58    
2.95    
2.78    
3.24    
Full Service Branches
25    
25    
26    
26    
25    

 (1)   With the exception of end of period ratios, all ratios are based on average daily balances during the indicated periods. Asset Quality Ratios and Regulatory Capital Ratios are end of period ratios.
(2)   The net interest spread represents the difference between the weighted-average yield on interest-earning assets and the weighted-average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.
(3)   The net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
(4)   The efficiency ratio represents non-interest expense as a percentage of the sum of net interest income and non-interest income, excluding any gains or losses on sales of assets.
(5)   Book value per share equals total stockholders' equity divided by shares outstanding at each period end.
(6)   Includes non-performing loans designated as held for sale at period end.
(7)   Total loans represent loans and loans held for sale, net of deferred fees and costs and unamortized premiums, and excluding (thus not reducing the aggregate balance by) the allowance for loan losses.
(8)   For purposes of computing the ratios of earnings to fixed charges, earnings represent income before taxes, extraordinary items and the cumulative effect of accounting changes plus fixed charges.  Fixed charges represent total interest expense, including and excluding interest on deposits.
(9)    Interest on unrecognized tax benefits totaling $677, $555 and $480 is included in the calculation of fixed charges for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.



Item 7.  Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

Executive Summary

The Holding Company's primary business is the ownership of the Bank.  The Company's consolidated results of operations are dependent primarily on net interest income, which is the difference between the interest income earned on interest-earning assets, such as loans and securities, and the interest expense paid on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits and borrowings.  The Bank additionally generates non-interest income such as service charges and other fees, mortgage banking related income, and income associated with Bank Owned Life Insurance.  Non-interest expense primarily consists of employee compensation and benefits, federal deposit insurance premiums, data processing costs, occupancy and equipment, marketing and other operating expenses.  The Company's consolidated results of operations are also significantly affected by general economic and competitive conditions (particularly fluctuations in market interest rates), government policies, changes in accounting standards and actions of regulatory agencies.

The Bank's primary strategy is generally to seek to increase its product and service utilization for each individual depositor, and increase its household and deposit market shares in the communities that it serves.  In addition, the Bank's primary strategy includes the origination of, and investment in, mortgage loans, with an emphasis on NYC multifamily residential and mixed-use real estate loans.  The Company believes that multifamily residential and mixed-use loans in and around NYC provide several advantages as investment assets.  Initially, they offer a higher yield than investment securities of comparable maturities or terms to repricing.  In addition, origination and processing costs for the Bank's multifamily residential and mixed use loans are lower per thousand dollars of originations than comparable one-to four-family loan costs.  Further, the Bank's market area has generally provided a stable flow of new and refinanced multifamily residential and mixed-use loan originations.  In order to address the credit risk associated with multifamily residential and mixed use lending, the Bank has developed underwriting standards that it believes are reliable in order to maintain consistent credit quality for its loans.

The Bank also strives to provide a stable source of liquidity and earnings through the purchase of investment grade securities, seeks to maintain the asset quality of its loans and other investments, and uses portfolio and asset/liability management techniques in an effort to manage the effects of interest rate volatility on its profitability and capital.

  Critical Accounting Policies

The Company's policies with respect to (1) the methodologies it uses to determine the allowance for loan losses (including reserves for loan commitments), and (2) accounting for defined benefit plans are its most critical accounting policies because they are important to the presentation of the Company's consolidated financial condition and results of operations, involve a significant degree of complexity and require management to make difficult and subjective judgments which often necessitate assumptions or estimates about highly uncertain matters. The use of different judgments, assumptions or estimates could result in material variations in the Company's consolidated results of operations or financial condition.

The following are descriptions of the Company's critical accounting policies and explanations of the methods and assumptions underlying their application.

Allowance for Loan Losses and Reserve for Loan Commitments. The Bank's methods and assumptions utilized to periodically determine its allowance for loan losses are summarized in Note 6 to the Company's consolidated financial statements.

Accounting for Defined Benefit Plans.   Defined benefit plans are accounted for in accordance with ASC 715, which requires an employer sponsoring a single employer defined benefit plan to recognize the funded status of such benefit plan in its statements of financial condition, measured as the difference between plan assets at fair value (with limited exceptions) and the benefit obligation.  The Company utilizes the services of trained actuaries employed at an independent benefits plan administration entity in order to assist in measuring the funded status of its defined benefit plans.

      The Bank's methods and assumptions utilized for its accounting for defined benefit plans are discussed in Note 15 to the Company's consolidated financial statements.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

The Board of Directors of the Bank has approved a liquidity policy that it reviews and updates at least annually. Senior management is responsible for implementing the policy.  The Bank's ALCO is responsible for general oversight and strategic implementation of the policy, and management of the appropriate departments are designated responsibility for implementing any strategies established by ALCO.  On a daily basis, senior management receives a current cash position report and one-week forecast to ensure that all short-term obligations are timely satisfied and that adequate liquidity exists to fund future activities.  On a monthly basis, reports detailing the Bank's liquidity reserves and forecasted cash flows are presented to both senior management and the Board of Directors.  In addition, on a monthly basis, a twelve-month liquidity forecast is presented to ALCO in order to assess potential future liquidity concerns.  A forecast of cash flow data for the upcoming 12 months is presented to the Board of Directors on a monthly basis.

The Bank's primary sources of funding for its lending and investment activities include deposits, loan and MBS payments, investment security principal and interest payments, and advances from the FHLBNY.  The Bank may also sell selected multifamily residential, mixed use and one- to four-family residential real estate loans to private sector secondary market purchasers and has in the past sold such loans to FNMA.  The Company may additionally issue debt under appropriate circumstances.  Although maturities and scheduled amortization of loans and investments are predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and prepayments on mortgage loans and MBS are influenced by interest rates, economic conditions and competition.

The Bank gathers deposits in direct competition with commercial banks, savings banks and brokerage firms, many among the largest in the nation.  It must additionally compete for deposit monies against the stock and bond markets, especially during periods of strong performance in those arenas.  The Bank's deposit flows are affected primarily by the pricing and marketing of its deposit products compared to its competitors, as well as the market performance of depositor investment alternatives such as the U.S. bond or equity markets.  To the extent that the Bank is responsive to general market increases or declines in interest rates, its deposit flows should not be materially impacted.   However, favorable performance of the equity or bond markets could adversely impact the Bank's deposit flows.

Retail branch and Internet banking deposits increased $152.6 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to an increase of $27.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2013.  Within deposits, core deposits (i.e., non-CDs) increased $54.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2014 and $91.3 million during the year ended December 31, 2013.  These increases were due to successful gathering efforts tied to promotional money market offerings.  CDs increased $97.9 million during the year ended December 31, 2014 and declined by $63.6 million during the year ended December 31, 2013.  The increase during the year ended December 31, 2014 resulted primarily from successful promotional activities related to 30-month and 5-year traditional CDs as well as Individual Retirement Account CDs.  The reduction during the year ended December 31, 2013 was due to the attrition of maturing CDs from prior period promotional activities, as CD promotional activities were de-emphasized during that period. Deposit gathering was given greater emphasis during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, and thus resulted in increased deposit inflows during the year ended December 31, 2014.

The Bank increased its outstanding FHLBNY advances by $263.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, partially in order to fund the $225.6 million of loan purchases that occurred during the period.  The Bank increased its outstanding FHLBNY advances by $67.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2013 in order to fund asset growth.

During the year ended December 31, 2014, principal repayments totaled $735.4 million on real estate loans and $5.9 million on MBS.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, principal repayments totaled $923.1 million on real estate loans and $17.4 million on MBS.  The decrease in principal repayments on real estate loans reflected reduced loan refinancing activity during the year ended December 31, 2014, as such levels were historically high during the year ended December 31, 2013 as a result of the prolonged period of low interest rates on mortgage origination.  The decline in principal repayments on MBS resulted from a reduction of $10.3 million in their average balance from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014 due to ongoing principal repayments.

In the event that the Bank should require funds beyond its ability or desire to generate them internally, an additional source of funds is available through use of its borrowing line at the FHLBNY.  At December 31, 2014,
53

the Bank had an additional potential borrowing capacity of $394.5 million through the FHLBNY, subject to customary minimum common stock ownership requirements imposed by the FHLBNY ( i.e. , 4.5% of the Bank's outstanding FHLBNY borrowings).

The Bank is subject to minimum regulatory capital requirements imposed by its primary regulators, the NYSDFS and the FDIC, which, as a general matter, are based on the amount and composition of an institution's assets. At December 31, 2014, the Bank was in compliance with all applicable regulatory capital requirements and was considered "well-capitalized" for all regulatory purposes.  Effective January 1, 2015, the Bank became subject to the regulatory capital requirements imposed under Basel III and prompt corrective action.  The Bank was in compliance with all regulatory capital requirements under Basel III and prompt corrective action.

The Company generally utilizes its liquidity and capital resources primarily to fund the origination of real estate loans, the purchase of mortgage-backed and other securities, the repurchase of Holding Company common stock into treasury, the payment of quarterly cash dividends to holders of the Holding Company's common stock and the payment of quarterly interest to holders of its outstanding trust preferred debt.  During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, real estate loan originations totaled $947.0 million and $1.07 billion, respectively.  The decrease from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014 reflected the Company's election to compete less aggressively for new loans during the year ended December 31, 2014 as a result of the $225.6 million of loans repurchased during the period.  Security purchases were de-emphasized during the years ended both December 31, 2014 and 2013 due to their lack of beneficial yield above cash balances.

The Holding Company did not repurchase any shares of its common stock during the years ended December 31, 2014 or 2013.  As of December 31, 2014, up to 1,124,549 shares remained available for purchase under authorized share purchase programs.  Based upon the $16.28 per share closing price of its common stock as of December 31, 2014, the Holding Company would utilize $18.3 million in order to purchase all of the remaining authorized shares.  As of December 31, 2014, the Holding Company possessed adequate cash on hand to complete such repurchases, if desired.

During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Holding Company paid $20.1 million in cash dividends on its common stock, up from $19.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, reflecting an increase of 142,068 in issued and outstanding shares from December 31, 2013 to December 31, 2014.

Contractual Obligations

The Bank has outstanding at any time, significant borrowings in the form of FHLBNY advances, as well as fixed interest obligations on CDs.  The Holding Company also has $70.7 million of trust preferred borrowings due to mature in April 2034, which became callable at any time after April 2009.  The Holding Company currently does not intend to call this debt.

The Bank is obligated under leases for rental payments on certain of its branches and equipment.  A summary of CDs, borrowings and lease obligations at December 31, 2014 is as follows:

 
Payments Due By Period
 
 
Contractual Obligations
Less than One Year
One Year to Three Years
Over Three Years to Five Years
Over Five Years
 
 
 
Total
 
(Dollars in thousands)
CDs
$504,939
$200,558
$209,459
$11,362
 
$926,318
Weighted average interest rate of CDs
1.10%
1.55%
2.11%
1.71%
 
1.43%
Borrowings
$569,500
$453,075
$113,350
$37,800
 
$1,173,725
Weighted average interest rate of borrowings
1.48%
2.04%
1.68%
2.46%
 
1.74%
Operating lease obligations
$3,092
$6,361
$6,191
$15,069
 
$30,713


Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

As part of its loan origination business, the Bank generally has outstanding commitments to extend credit to third parties, which are granted pursuant to its regular underwriting standards.  Since many of these loan commitments expire prior to funding, in whole or in part, the contract amounts are not estimates of future cash flows.

The following table presents off-balance sheet arrangements as of December 31, 2014:

 
 
Less than One Year
 
One Year to Three Years
Over Three Years to Five Years
 
Over Five Years
 
 
Total
 
(Dollars in thousands)
Credit Commitments:
           
   Available lines of credit
$37,616
$- 
$- 
$- 
 
$37,616
   Other loan commitments
122,092
 
122,092
Total Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
$159,708
$- 
$- 
$- 
 
$159,708

Analysis of Net Interest Income

The Company's profitability, like that of most banking institutions, is dependent primarily upon net interest income, which is the difference between interest income on interest-earnings assets, such as loans and securities, and interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities, such as deposits or borrowings.  Net interest income depends on the relative amounts of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, and the interest rate earned or paid on them.  The following tables set forth certain information relating to the Company's consolidated statements of operations for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, and reflect the average yield on interest-earning assets and average cost of interest-bearing liabilities for the periods indicated. Such yields and costs are derived by dividing interest income or expense by the average balance of interest-earning assets or interest-bearing liabilities, respectively, for the periods indicated. Average balances are derived from daily balances. The yields and costs include fees and charges that are considered adjustments to yields and costs.  All material changes in average balances and interest income or expense are discussed in the sections entitled "Interest Income" and "Interest Expense" in the comparisons of operating results commencing on page F-58.

 
For the Year Ended December 31,
   
2014
     
2013
     
2012
 
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
     
Average
     
Average
     
Average
 
Average
 
Yield/
 
Average
 
Yield/
 
Average
 
Yield/
 
Balance
Interest
Cost
 
Balance
Interest
Cost
 
Balance
Interest
Cost
Assets:
                     
  Interest-earning assets:
                     
    Real estate loans  (1)
$3,962,566
$169,208
4.27%
 
$3,603,841
$171,594
4.76%
 
$3,400,847
$189,149
5.56%
    Other loans
1,954
105
5.37   
 
2,198
101
4.60   
 
1,991
104
5.22   
    Investment securities
19,220
560
2.91   
 
32,520
503
1.55   
 
103,936
1,263
1.22   
    MBS
27,658
914
3.30   
 
37,999
1,413
3.72   
 
81,897
3,025
3.69   
    Federal funds sold and other short-term investments
92,609
2,165
2.34   
 
110,630
1,845
1.67   
 
173,336
2,413
1.39   
      Total interest-earning assets
4,104,007
$172,952
4.21%
 
3,787,188
$175,456
4.63%
 
3,762,007
$195,954
5.21%
     Non-interest earning assets
190,627
     
196,122
     
185,036
   
Total assets
$4,294,634
     
$3,983,310
     
$3,947,043
   
                       
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity:
                     
  Interest-bearing liabilities:
                     
    Interest bearing checking accounts
$79,455
$222
0.28%
 
$90,871
$236
0.26%
 
$93,596
$237
0.25%
    Money Market accounts
1,113,104
6,265
0.56   
 
1,082,104
5,652
0.52   
 
840,098
4,622
0.55   
    Savings accounts
377,930
188
0.05   
 
378,391
260
0.07   
 
364,271
580
0.16   
    CDs
858,526
12,916
1.50   
 
867,664
13,779
1.59   
 
947,803
16,340
1.72   
    Borrowed Funds (2)
1,109,532
28,825
2.60   
 
832,149
27,042
3.25   
 
1,030,287
64,333
6.24   
      Total interest-bearing liabilities
3,538,547
$48,416
1.37%
 
3,251,179
$46,969
1.44%
 
3,276,055
$86,112
2.63%
  Non-interest bearing checking accounts
177,163
     
170,455
     
151,818
   
  Other non-interest-bearing liabilities
129,034
     
149,913
     
143,659
   
      Total liabilities
3,844,744
     
3,571,547
     
3,571,532
   
  Stockholders' equity
449,890
     
411,763
     
375,511
   
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
$4,294,634
     
$3,983,310
     
$3,947,043
   
Net interest spread (3)
   
2.84%
     
3.19%
     
2.58%
Net interest income/ net interest margin (4)
 
$124,536
3.03%
   
$128,487
3.39%
   
$109,842
2.92%
Net interest-earning assets
$565,460
     
$536,009
     
$485,952
   
Ratio of interest-earning assets
   to interest-bearing liabilities
   
115.98%
     
116.49%
     
114.83%
(1)   In computing the average balance of real estate loans, non-performing loans have been included.  Interest income on real estate loans includes loan fees.  Interest income on real estate loans also includes applicable prepayment fees and late charges totaling $12.5 million, $13.7 million and $15.1 million during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.
(2)   Interest expense on borrowed funds includes $28.8 million of prepayment charge recognized during the year ended December 31, 2012.  There were no such fees during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.  Absent the prepayment charge, the average cost of borrowings would have been 3.45% during the year ended December 31, 2012.
(3)   Net interest spread represents the difference between the average yield on interest-earning assets and the average cost of interest-bearing liabilities.
(4)   Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.

R ate/Volume Analysis .  The following table represents the extent to which variations in interest rates and the volume of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities have affected interest income and interest expense during the periods indicated. Information is provided in each category with respect to: (i) variances attributable to fluctuations in volume (change in volume multiplied by prior rate), (ii) variances attributable to rate (changes in rate multiplied by prior volume), and (iii) the net change. Variances attributable to the combined impact of volume and rate have been allocated proportionately to the changes due to volume and the changes due to rate.

 
Year Ended December 31, 2014
Compared to
Year Ended December 31, 2013
Increase/ (Decrease) Due to
 
Year Ended December 31, 2013
Compared to
Year Ended December 31, 2012
Increase/ (Decrease) Due to
 
Year Ended December 31, 2012
Compared to
Year Ended December 31, 2011
Increase/ (Decrease) Due to
 
Volume
 Rate
Total
 
Volume
 Rate
Total
 
Volume
 Rate
Total
  Interest-earning assets:
(Dollars in Thousands)
    Real Estate Loans
$16,177 
$(18,563)
$(2,386)
 
$10,471 
$(28,026)
$(17,555)
 
$(2,617)
$(8,268)
$(10,885)
    Other loans
(12)
16 
 
10 
(13)
(3)
 
66 
(59)
    Investment securities
(362)
(137)
(499)
 
(986)
226 
(760)
 
(1,226)
(792)
(2,018)
    MBS
(296)
353 
57 
 
(1,629)
17 
(1,612)
 
(523)
385
(138)
    Federal funds sold and
       other short-term investments
(361)
681 
320 
 
(963)
395 
(568)
 
143 
(371)
(228)
      Total
$15,146 
$(17,650)
$(2,504)
 
$6,903 
$(27,401)
$(20,498)
 
$(4,157)
$(9,105)
$(13,262)
  Interest-bearing liabilities:
                     
    Interest bearing checking accounts
$(31)
$17 
$(14)
 
$(9)
$8 
$(1)
 
$(3)
$(81)
$(84)
    Money market accounts
171 
442 
613 
 
1,307 
(277)
1,030 
 
518 
(944)
(426)
    Savings accounts
(74)
(72)
 
15 
(335)
(320)
 
34 
(185)
(151)
    CDs
(113)
(750)
(863)
 
(1,355)
(1,206)
(2,561)
 
(1,887)
(1,804)
(3,691)
    Borrowed funds
8,103 
(6,320)
1,783 
 
(9,428)
(27,863)
(37,291)
 
(8,880)
29,630 
20,750 
      Total
$8,132 
$(6,685)
$1,447 
 
$(9,470)
$(29,673)
$(39,143)
 
$(10,218)
$26,616 
$16,398 
Net change in net interest income
$7,014 
$(10,965)
$(3,951)
 
$16,373 
$2,272 
$18,645 
 
$6,061 
$(35,721)
$(29,660)


Comparison of Financial Condition at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013

Assets.   Assets totaled $4.5 billion at December 31, 2014, $468.9 million above their level at December 31, 2013.

Real estate loans increased $420.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2014.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank originated $947.0 million of real estate loans (including refinancing of existing loans) and purchased $225.6 million of real estate loans, which exceeded the $13.0 million of sales and $735.4 million of aggregate amortization on such loans (also including refinancing of existing loans).

Cash and due from banks increased by $32.4 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, due primarily to the inflows of retail deposits and mortgagor escrow funds.  The Company also purchased an additional $25.0 million of Bank Owned Life Insurance.  Further, it increased its investment in FHLBNY common stock by $10.4 million during the year ended December 31, 2014 in order to collateralize the $193.2 million growth in its outstanding FHLBNY borrowings during the period.

Investment securities available-for-sale declined $14.8 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, due to a $15.0 million agency security that was called and not replaced during the period.

During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Company also completed the sale of a $3.6 million real estate parcel that had historically been earmarked for utilization as office space.

Liabilities.   Total liabilities increased $444.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2014.  Retail deposits (due to depositors) increased $152.6 million and FHLBNY advances increased $263.7 million during the period.  Please refer to "Part II – Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Liquidity and Capital Resources" for a discussion of the increase in retail deposits and FHLBNY advances during the year ended December 31, 2014. Mortgagor escrow and other deposits grew $22.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2014 as a result of the growth in loans during the period.

Stockholders' Equity.   Stockholders' equity increased $24.2 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, due primarily to net income of $44.2 million, an aggregate increase to stockholders' equity of $3.4 million related to either expense amortization or income tax benefits associated with stock benefit plans, and $278,000 of stockholders' equity
57

added from the exercise of stock options.  Partially offsetting these additions to stockholders' equity were $20.1 million in cash dividends paid during the period, and a $3.8 million increase in the accumulated other comprehensive loss component (a negative component) of stockholders' equity that resulted from the adverse impact of applying lower market discount rates in deriving the estimated unfunded balance of defined benefit plans at December 31, 2014 compared to December 31, 2013.
Comparison of Operating Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2014 and 2013

General.  Net income was $44.2 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, an increase of $698,000 from net income of $43.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2013.  During the comparative period, the provision for loan losses declined by $2.2 million, non-interest expense declined by $1.6 million, and non-interest income increased by $1.6 million.  Partially offsetting these additions to pre-tax income was a reduction of $4.0 million in net interest income. Income tax expense increased $783,000 during the comparative period as a result of higher pre-tax income.

Net Interest Income.  The discussion of net interest income for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 below should be read in conjunction with the tables presented on pages F-56 and F-57, which set forth certain information related to the consolidated statements of operations for those periods, and which also present the average yield on assets and average cost of liabilities for the periods indicated.  The average yields and costs were derived by dividing income or expense by the average balance of their related assets or liabilities during the periods represented. Average balances were derived from average daily balances. The yields include fees that are considered adjustments to yields.

The Company's net interest income and net interest margin during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 were impacted by the following factors:

·
During the period January 1, 2009 through December 31, 2014, FOMC monetary policies resulted in the maintenance of the overnight federal funds rate in a range of 0.0% to 0.25%, helping deposit and borrowing costs remain at historically low levels.

·
Increased marketplace competition and refinancing activity on real estate loans resulted in both an ongoing reduction in the average yield on real estate loans and uneven recognition of prepayment fee income.
 
         Interest Income.   Interest income was $173.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, a reduction of $2.5 million from the year ended December 31, 2013, primarily reflecting reductions of $2.4 million and $499,000 in interest income on real estate loans and MBS, respectively.  Prepayment and refinancing on real estate loans at reduced interest rates over the 24-month period ended December 31, 2014 lowered the Company's average yield on real estate loans by 49 basis points during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013.  Partially offsetting the decline in interest income on real estate loans attributable to the 49 basis point reduction in their average yield was an increase of $358.7 million in their average balance during the comparative period, reflecting both the repurchase of $225.6 million of real estate loans during the year ended December 31, 2014 and the implementation of a measured balance sheet growth strategy during the period January 1, 2013 through December 31, 2014.  The decline in interest income on MBS resulted from a reduction of $10.3 million in their average balance from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014, as a result of ongoing principal repayments.  During the period January 1, 2013 through December 31, 2014, purchases of MBS were limited, and were exceeded by principal repayments of existing MBS.  The average yield on MBS also declined 42 basis points during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, as higher yielding MBS continued to amortize.

Interest Expense.   Interest expense increased $1.4 million, to $48.4 million, during the year ended December 31, 2014, from $47.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2013.  The increase resulted from growth in interest expense of $1.8 million on borrowed funds and $613,000 on money market deposits, which were partially offset by reductions in interest expense of $72,000 on savings deposits and $863,000 on CDs, during the comparative period.  The higher interest expense recognized on borrowed funds resulted from an increase of $277.4 million in their average balance from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014, as borrowings were utilized to fund a portion of the balance sheet growth experienced from January 1, 2013 to December 31, 2014.  The increased interest expense on money market deposits primarily reflected an increase of $31.0 million in their average balance during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, as the Company's deposit gathering activities were focused primarily upon money market accounts during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The lower interest expense recognized on savings accounts and CDs reflected declines in their average cost of 2 basis points and 9 basis points, respectively, during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, as a result of
58

reductions in interest rates offered during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The reduction in interest expense on CDs also reflected a decline of $9.1 million in their average balance during the comparative period, as the Company did not elect to compete aggressively for these deposits during the year ended December 31, 2014, and experienced attrition in the promotional balances that matured during the period.
         Provision for Loan Losses.   The Company recognized a credit (negative provision) for loan losses of $1.9 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to a provision of $369,000 during the year ended December 31, 2013.  The reduction reflected the improvement in the overall credit quality of the loan portfolio during 2014.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Company experienced a $978,000 decline in net charge-offs recognized.

Non-Interest Income.     Total   non-interest income increased $1.6 million from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014, due primarily to an increase of $752,000 in mortgage banking income and additional net gains of $1.2 million on securities and other assets recognized during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The increase in mortgage banking income reflected primarily a credit of $1.0 million recognized during the year ended December 31, 2014 to eliminate the liability in relation to the First Loss Position compared to $305,000 in 2013.  The additional $1.2 million of gains recognized on securities and other assets were generated primarily from non-recurring sales of equity investments and a real estate parcel.  These increases were partially offset by reductions of income on the following items during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013: (i) $166,000 in rental income due to the sale of a real estate parcel that generated rental income; and (ii) $228,000 in administrative loan servicing fees recognized.

Non-Interest Expense.   Non-interest expense was $61.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, a reduction of $1.6 million from $62.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, reflecting both a reduction of $1.9 million in compensation and employee benefits expense and a $180,000 write down of OREO that was recognized in non-interest expense during the year ended December 31, 2013.  The reduction in compensation and employee benefits expense resulted primarily from both a reduction in projected executive compensation for the year ending December 31, 2014 (mainly attributable to the performance of the Holding Company's common stock during the period January 1, 2014 to December 31, 2014), as well as lower actuarial expenses associated with several defined benefit plans.

Non-interest expense was 1.42% of average assets during the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to 1.57% during the year ended December 31, 2013, reflecting both the reduction in non-interest expense and an increase of $311.3 million in average assets from the year ended December 31, 2013 to the year ended December 31, 2014.  Partially offsetting these declines were additional FDIC insurance costs of $200,000 and promotional activity expenses of $830,000 recognized during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013.  The increased FDIC insurance expense reflected higher average assets during the year ended December 31, 2014, and the additional promotional expenses related to the recognition of the Bank's 150 th anniversary.

Income Tax Expense.    Income tax expense was $30.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2014, up from $29.3 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, due primarily to an additional $1.5 million of pre-tax earnings recorded during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The Company's consolidated tax rate was 40.5% during the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to 40.3% during the year ended December 31, 2013.  Adjustments from the filing of previous period tax returns had a slightly more favorable impact upon the effective tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2014.  Otherwise, the Company's normalized effective tax rate approximated 41.0% during the years ended both December 31, 2014 and 2013.

Comparison of Operating Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012

General.   Net income was $43.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, $3.2 million above net income of $40.3 million during the year ended December 31, 2012.  During the comparative period, net interest income increased $18.6 million, the provision for loan losses declined $3.6 million, non-interest income decreased $16.4 million and non-interest expense increased $120,000, resulting in $5.7 million of additional pre-tax income.  Income tax expense increased $2.5 million during the comparative period due to the increase in pre-tax earnings.

Net Interest Income.  The discussion of net interest income for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 presented below should be read in conjunction with the tables presented on pages F-56 and F-57, which set forth certain information related to the consolidated statements of operations for those periods, and which also present the average yield on assets and average cost of liabilities for the periods indicated.  The average yields and costs were derived by dividing
59

 income or expense by the average balance of their related assets or liabilities during the periods represented. Average balances were derived from average daily balances. The yields include fees that are considered adjustments to yields.
During the year ended December 31, 2012, the Company prepaid $195.0 million of REPOS, incurring $28.8 million of additional interest expense on this prepayment. During the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, the Company recognized $13.4 million and $14.6 million of interest income related to prepayment of its real estate loans.  The levels of both interest expense on prepayment of borrowings and interest income from loan prepayments were higher than typically experienced by the Company.  The net impact of this prepayment activity adversely impacted net interest income and net interest margin for the year ended December 31, 2013.

In addition, during the period January 1, 2009 through December 31, 2013, FOMC monetary policies resulted in the maintenance of the overnight federal funds rate in a range of 0.0% to 0.25%.  The Company, absent prepayment costs on its borrowings, thus experienced historically low levels of both deposit and borrowing costs throughout both 2013 and 2012, while similarly experiencing historically low yields on its investment securities and real estate loans (excluding the impact of prepayment fee income) during the same period.

Interest Income.   Interest income was $175.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, $20.5 million below the level recognized during the year ended December 31, 2012, primarily reflecting reductions of $17.6 million, $1.6 million and $760,000 in interest income on real estate loans, MBS and investment securities, respectively.  High volumes of real estate loan prepayment and refinancing at reduced market interest rates lowered the Company's average yield on real estate loans by 80 basis points during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012.  Partially offsetting the decline in interest income on real estate loans during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 that was attributable to the 80 basis point reduction in their average yield, was an increase of $203.0 million in their average balance during the comparative period, as the Company increased its loan origination volumes late in 2012 and during the year ended December 31, 2013, as part of a measured balance sheet growth strategy.  The decline in interest income on MBS reflected a reduction of $43.9 million in their average balance from the year ended December 31, 2012 to the year ended December 31, 2013.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, purchases of MBS were limited and were exceeded by principal repayments of existing MBS.  The decline in interest income on investment securities during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 resulted from a reduction of $71.4 million in their average balance, which was partially offset by an increase of 33 basis points in their average yield.  Similar to MBS, purchases of investment securities were limited during the year ended December 31, 2013 and were exceeded by their calls and/or maturity activity.  Since the great majority of the investment securities that either were called or matured during 2013 possessed yields between 0.50% and 1.0%, their removal served to improve the average yield on the aggregate portfolio of investment securities during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012.

Interest Expense.   Interest expense declined $39.1 million, to $47.0 million, during the year ended December 31, 2013, from $86.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2012, primarily reflecting $37.3 million of lower interest expense on borrowed funds.  The reduction in interest expense on borrowed funds resulted primarily from $28.8 million of costs recognized during the year ended December 31, 2012 on the prepayment of REPO borrowings.  The remaining decline in borrowing expense resulted primarily from a reduction of $198.1 million in their average balance from the year ended December 31, 2012 to the year ended December 31, 2013.  Interest expense on deposits declined $1.9 million during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012, primarily due to a reduction of $2.6 million in interest expense on CDs.  The reduction in interest expense on CDs reflected declines of both $80.1 million in their average balance and 13 basis points in their average cost during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012.  Since the Company did not elect to compete aggressively for CDs during the year ended December 31, 2013, it experienced attrition in the higher cost CDs that matured during the period.  The reduction in the average cost of CDs also resulted from ongoing reductions in offering rates on new CDs that occurred during 2013.  Interest expense on money market deposits increased $1.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of growth of $242.0 million in their average balance.

Provision for Loan Losses.   The provision for loan losses was $369,000 during the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to $3.9 million during the year ended December 31, 2012.  The reduction reflected the improvement in the overall credit quality of the loan portfolio during 2013.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company experienced a $2.9 million decline in net charge-offs recognized.

Non-Interest Income.     Total   non-interest income decreased $16.4 million from the year ended December 31, 2012 to the year ended December 31, 2013, due primarily to non-recurring pre-tax gains of $13.7 million on the sales of three
60

 real estate parcels and $887,000 on the sale of an equity mutual fund investment that were recorded during the year ended December 31, 2012.  In addition, mortgage banking income decreased $1.3 million as the Company recognized a credit of $1.3 million to reduce the liability in relation to the First Loss Position during the year ended December 31, 2012, while recognizing a similar recovery of only $305,000 during the year ended December 31, 2013.  The servicing fee income component of mortgage banking income also declined $261,000 during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of the ongoing reduction in the aggregate balance of serviced loans. Other non-interest income also declined $762,000, mainly as a result of the elimination of rental income on real estate properties that were disposed of in December 2012.
         Non-Interest Expense.   Non-interest expense was $62.7 million during the year ended December 31, 2013, an increase of $120,000 from $62.6 million during the year ended December 31, 2012.
         Salaries and employee benefits increased $531,000 during the comparative period due to additional staffing and ongoing increases to existing salaries and benefits, and stock benefit plan compensation expense increased $115,000, as a result of a higher average value for the Holding Company's common stock.  Data processing costs increased $539,000 from higher contractual costs.  Occupancy and equipment increased $399,000 as a result of higher rental expenses on leased properties.  Other expenses decreased $1.4 million primarily as a result of lower legal, marketing and regulatory examinations costs.

N on-interest expense was 1.57% of average assets during the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 1.59% during the year ended December 31, 2012, reflecting the $36.3 million increase in average assets during the comparative period.

Income Tax Expense.    Income tax expense increased $2.5 million during the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012, due primarily to the growth of $5.7 million in pre-tax earnings.  The Company's consolidated effective tax rate approximated 40% during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

Impact of Inflation and Changing Prices

The consolidated financial statements and notes thereto presented herein have been prepared in accordance with GAAP, which requires the measurement of financial position and operating results in terms of historical dollars without considering the changes in the relative purchasing power of money over time due to inflation. The impact of inflation is reflected in the increased costs of operations. Unlike industrial companies, nearly all of the Company's consolidated assets and liabilities are monetary in nature. As a result, interest rates have a greater impact on the Company's consolidated performance than do the effects of general levels of inflation. Interest rates do not necessarily fluctuate in the same direction or to the same extent as the price of goods and services.

Recently Issued Accounting Standards

For a discussion of the impact of recently issued accounting standards, please see Note 1 to the Company's consolidated financial statements that commence on page F-68.

Item 7A.  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

As a depository financial institution, the Bank's primary source of market risk is interest rate volatility.  Fluctuations in interest rates will ultimately impact the level of interest income recorded on, and the market value of, a significant portion of the Bank's assets.  Fluctuations in interest rates will also ultimately impact the level of interest expense recorded on, and the market value of, a significant portion of the Bank's liabilities.  In addition, the Bank's real estate loan portfolio, concentrated primarily within the NYC metropolitan area, is subject to risks associated with the local economy.

Real estate loans, the largest component of the Bank's interest earning assets, traditionally derive their interest rates primarily from either the five- or seven-year constant maturity Treasury index.  As a result, the Bank's interest earning assets are most sensitive to these benchmark interest rates. Since the majority of the Bank's interest bearing liabilities mature within one year, its interest bearing liabilities are most sensitive to fluctuations in short-term interest rates.

Neither the Holding Company nor the Bank is subject to foreign currency exchange or commodity price risk.  In addition, the Company engaged in no hedging transactions utilizing derivative instruments (such as interest rate swaps and caps) or embedded derivative instruments that required bifurcation during the years ended December 31, 2014 or 2013.  In
the future, the Company may, with appropriate Board approval, engage in hedging transactions utilizing derivative instruments.  Trading securities owned by the Company were nominal at December 31, 2014 and 2013.
Since a majority of the Company's consolidated interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities are located at the Bank, virtually all of the interest rate risk exposure exists at the Bank level.  As a result, all of the significant interest rate risk management procedures are performed at the Bank level.  The Bank's interest rate risk management strategy is designed to limit the volatility of net interest income and preserve capital over a broad range of interest rate movements and has the following three primary components:

Assets.   The Bank's largest single asset type is the adjustable-rate multifamily residential loan. Multifamily residential loans typically carry shorter average terms to maturity than one- to four-family residential loans, thus significantly reducing the overall level of interest rate risk.  Approximately 95% of multifamily residential loans originated by the Bank during the year ended December 31, 2014 and approximately 86% of multifamily residential loans originated by the Bank during the year ended December 31, 2013 were adjustable rate, with repricing typically occurring after five or seven years.   In addition, the Bank has sought to include in its portfolio various types of adjustable-rate one- to four-family loans and adjustable and floating-rate investment securities, with repricing terms generally of three years or less.  At December 31, 2014, adjustable-rate real estate and consumer loans totaled $2.98 billion, or 66.4% of total assets,   and adjustable-rate investment securities (CMOs, REMICs, MBS issued by GSEs and other securities) totaled $18.5 million, or 0.4% of total assets.  At December 31, 2013, adjustable-rate real estate and consumer loans totaled $2.64 billion, or 65.6% of total assets,   and adjustable-rate investment securities (CMOs, REMICs, MBS issued by GSEs and other securities) totaled $22.6 million, or 0.6% of total assets.

Deposit Liabilities.  As a traditional community-based savings bank, the Bank is largely dependent upon its base of competitively priced core deposits to provide stability on the liability side of the balance sheet.  The Bank has retained many loyal customers over the years through a combination of quality service, convenience, and a stable and experienced staff. Core deposits at December 31, 2014 were $1.73 billion, or 65.0% of total deposits. The balance of CDs as of December 31, 2014 was $926.3 million, or 35.0% of total deposits, of which $504.9 million, or 54.5%, were to mature within one year.  The weighted average maturity of the Bank's CDs at December 31, 2014 was 19.8   months, compared to 18.7 months at December 31, 2013.  During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank generally priced its CDs in an effort to encourage the extension of the average maturities of deposit liabilities beyond one year.

Wholesale Funds .  The Bank is a member of the FHLBNY, which provided the Bank with a borrowing line of up to $1.57 billion at December 31, 2014.   The Bank borrows from the FHLBNY for various purposes. At December 31, 2014, the Bank had outstanding advances of $1.17 billion from the FHLBNY, all of which were secured by a blanket lien on the Bank's loan portfolio.  Wholesale funding provides the Bank opportunities to extend the overall duration of its interest bearing liabilities, thus helping manage interest rate risk.

At December 31, 2014, the Company had $140.0 million of callable borrowings outstanding, with a weighted average maturity of 2.3 years.  Since the weighted average cost of these $140.0 million of borrowings was 4.04% as of December 31, 2014 (significantly above current market rates), they are not anticipated to be called in the near term.

The Bank is also eligible to participate in the CDARS, through which it can either purchase or sell CDs.  Purchases of CDs through this program are limited to an aggregate of 10% of the Bank's average interest earning assets.  As of December 31, 2014, deposits taken through this program totaled $4.6 million.

The Bank is authorized to accept brokered deposits up to an aggregate limit of $120.0 million.  At December 31, 2014 and 2013, total brokered deposits were limited to the $4.6 million of purchased CDARS deposits.

Interest Rate Risk Exposure Analysis
Economic Value of Equity ("EVE") Analysis .  In accordance with agency regulatory guidelines, the Bank simulates the impact of interest rate volatility upon EVE using several interest rate scenarios.  EVE is the difference between the present value of the expected future cash flows of the Bank's assets and liabilities plus the value of any off-balance sheet items, such as firm commitments to originate loans, or derivatives, if applicable.

Traditionally, the fair value of fixed-rate instruments fluctuates inversely with changes in interest rates.  Increases in interest rates thus result in decreases in the fair value of interest-earning assets, which could adversely affect the Company's consolidated results of operations in the event they were to be sold, or, in the case of interest-earning assets classified as
62

available-for-sale, reduce the Company's consolidated stockholders' equity, if retained.  The changes in the value of assets and liabilities due to fluctuations in interest rates measure the interest rate sensitivity of those assets and liabilities.
      In order to measure the Bank's sensitivity to changes in interest rates, EVE is calculated under market interest rates prevailing at a given quarter-end ("Pre-Shock Scenario"), and under various other interest rate scenarios ("Rate Shock Scenarios") representing immediate, permanent, parallel shifts in the term structure of interest rates from the actual term structure observed in the Pre-Shock Scenario.  An increase in the EVE is considered favorable, while a decline is considered unfavorable.  The changes in EVE between the Pre-Shock Scenario and various Rate Shock Scenarios due to fluctuations in interest rates reflect the interest rate sensitivity of the Bank's assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet items that are included in the EVE.  Management reports the EVE results to the Bank's Board of Directors on a quarterly basis. The report compares the Bank's estimated Pre-Shock Scenario EVE to the estimated EVEs calculated under the various Rate Shock Scenarios.

The calculated EVEs incorporate some asset and liability values derived from the Bank's valuation model, such as those for mortgage loans and time deposits, and some asset and liability values provided by reputable independent sources, such as values for the Bank's MBS and CMO portfolios, as well as all borrowings.  The Bank's valuation model makes various estimates regarding cash flows from principal repayments on loans and deposit decay rates at each level of interest rate change.  The Bank's estimates for loan repayment levels are influenced by the recent history of prepayment activity in its loan portfolio, as well as the interest rate composition of the existing portfolio, especially in relation to the existing interest rate environment.  In addition, the Bank considers the amount of fee protection inherent in the loan portfolio when estimating future repayment cash flows.  Regarding deposit decay rates, the Bank tracks and analyzes the decay rate of its deposits over time, with the assistance of a reputable third party, and over various interest rate scenarios.  Such results are utilized in determining estimates of deposit decay rates in the valuation model.  The Bank also generates a series of spot discount rates that are integral to the valuation of the projected monthly cash flows of its assets and liabilities.  The Bank's valuation model employs discount rates that it considers representative of prevailing market rates of interest, with appropriate adjustments it believes are suited to the heterogeneous characteristics of the Bank's various asset and liability portfolios.  No matter the care and precision with which the estimates are derived, however, actual cash flows could differ significantly from the Bank's estimates, resulting in significantly different EVE calculations.

The analysis that follows presents, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the estimated EVE at both the Pre-Shock Scenario and the +200 Basis Point Rate Shock Scenario.   The analysis additionally presents the percentage change in EVE from the Pre-Shock Scenario to the +200 Basis Point Rate Shock Scenario at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.

 
At December 31, 2014
 
At December 31, 2013
 
EVE
 
Dollar
Change
 
Percentage
Change
 
EVE
 
Dollar
Change
 
Percentage
Change
 
(Dollars in Thousands)
Rate Shock Scenario
             
+ 200 Basis Points
$498,138
$(49,201)
-9.0%
 
$445,618
$(56,896)
-11.3%
Pre-Shock Scenario
547,339
-  
-    
 
502,514
-  
-    

The Pre-Shock Scenario EVE was $547.3 million at December 31, 2014, compared to $502.5 million at December 31, 2013.  The increase resulted from more favorable valuations ascribed to the Bank's real estate portfolio due to both a decline in market lending rates from December 31, 2013 to December 31, 2014 and growth in the Bank's real estate portfolio during the nine months ended December 31, 2014 from purchased loans carrying above market interest rates.  Partially offsetting these increases was a less favorable valuation on core deposits resulting from a change in the projected re-pricing schedule for various money market accounts.

The Bank's EVE in the +200 basis point Rate Shock Scenario increased from $445.6 million at December 31, 2013 to $498.1 million at December 31, 2014. The more favorable valuation at December 31, 2014 resulted primarily from an increase in the value of the Bank's real estate loans as discussed in the Pre-Shock Scenario EVE Scenario above.  The percentage change in the EVE from the Pre-Shock Scenario to the +200 basis point Rate Shock Scenario decreased from 11.3% at December 31, 2013 to 9.0% at December 31, 2014.  This reduction resulted from lower comparative sensitivity on real estate loans and borrowings at December 31, 2014 than December 31, 2013.

Income Simulation Analysis.   As of the end of each quarterly period, the Bank also monitors the impact of interest rate changes through a net interest income simulation model.  This model estimates the impact of interest rate changes on the
63

 
Bank's net interest income over forward-looking periods typically not exceeding 36 months (a considerably shorter period than measured through the EVE analysis).  Management reports the net interest income simulation results to the Bank's Board of Directors on a quarterly basis. The following table discloses the estimated changes to the Bank's net interest income over the 12-month period ending December 31, 2015 assuming instantaneous changes in interest rates for the given Rate Shock Scenarios:

Instantaneous Change in Interest rate of:
 
Percentage Change in Net Interest Income
+ 200 Basis Points
 
(11.9)%
+ 100 Basis Points
 
(6.5)   
-100 Basis Points
 
5.0    


Item 8.  Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

For the Company's consolidated financial statements, see index on page F-67.

Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

None.

Item 9A.  Controls and Procedures

Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Management of the Company, with the participation of its Chief Executive Officer and Chief Accounting Officer, conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness as of December 31, 2014, of the Company's disclosure controls and procedures, as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15(d)-15(e) under the Exchange Act.  Based upon this evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Accounting Officer concluded that the Company's disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of December 31, 2014 in ensuring that information required to be disclosed by the Company in the reports that it files or submits under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC's rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to management of the Company as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosures.

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
      There was no change in the Company's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the Company's last fiscal quarter that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, such controls.

Management's Report On Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

Management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the Company.  The Company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance to the Company's management and Board of Directors regarding the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements.

Because of inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements.  In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
  
 
      The Company's management assessed the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, utilizing the criteria established by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission in "Internal Controls – Integrated Framework (2013 Framework)."  Based upon its assessment, management believes that, as of December 31, 2014, the Company's internal control over financial reporting is effective.

Crowe Horwath LLP, the independent registered public accounting firm that audited the consolidated financial statements included in the Annual Report, has issued an audit report on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, which is included on page F-68.

Item 9B . Other Information

None.

PART III

Item 10.  Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance

Information regarding directors and executive officers of the Company is presented under the headings, "Proposal 1 - Election of Directors," "Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance" and "Executive Officers" in the Holding Company's definitive Proxy Statement for its Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 27, 2015 (the "Proxy Statement") which will be filed with the SEC within 120 days of December 31, 2014, and is incorporated herein by reference.

Information regarding the audit committee of the Holding Company's Board of Directors, including information regarding audit committee financial experts serving on the audit committee, is presented under the headings, "Meetings and Committees of the Company's Board of Directors," and "Report of the Audit Committee" in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

The Holding Company has adopted a written Code of Business Ethics that applies to all officers, including its principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officer or controller, or persons performing similar functions.  The Code of Business Ethics is published on the Company's website, www.dime.com .  The Company will provide to any person, without charge, upon request, a copy of such Code of Business Ethics.  Such request should be made in writing to:  Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., 209 Havemeyer Street, Brooklyn, New York 11211, attention Investor Relations.

Item 11.  Executive Compensation

Information regarding executive and director compensation and the Compensation Committee of the Holding Company's Board of Directors is presented under the headings, "Directors' Compensation," "Compensation - Executive Compensation," "Compensation Discussion and Analysis," "Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation," and "Compensation Committee Report" in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 12.  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters

Information regarding security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is included under the heading "Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management" in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 13.  Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence

Information regarding certain relationships and related transactions is included under the heading, "Transactions with Certain Related Persons" in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.  Information regarding director independence is included under the heading, "Information as to Nominees and Continuing Directors" in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 14. Principal Accounting Fees and Services
 
Information regarding principal accounting fees and services, as well as the Audit Committee's pre-approval policies and procedures, is included under the heading, "Proposal 2 – Ratification of Appointment of Independent Auditors," in the Proxy Statement and is incorporated herein by reference.

PART IV

Item 15.  Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules

(a) (1) Financial Statements

See index to Consolidated Financial Statements on page F-67.

(2) Financial Statement Schedules

Financial statement schedules have been omitted because they are not applicable or not required or the required information is shown in the Consolidated Financial Statements or Notes thereto under "Part II - Item 8.  Financial Statements and Supplementary Data."

(3) Exhibits Required by Item 601 of SEC Regulation S-K

See Index of Exhibits on pages F-119 and F-120.

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized on March 13, 2015.
 
                                                                                 DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.
 
                                                                                 By: /s/ VINCENT F. PALAGIANO
                                                                                 Vincent F. Palagiano
                                                                                 Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer


Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below on March 13, 2015 by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities indicated.

Name
Title
/s/ VINCENT F. PALAGIANO
Vincent F. Palagiano
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)
/s/ MICHAEL P. DEVINE
Michael P. Devine
Vice Chairman and President and Director
/s/ KENNETH J. MAHON
Kenneth J. Mahon
Senior Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer and Director
/s/ MICHAEL PUCELLA
Michael Pucella
Executive Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer
(Principal Financial Officer)
/s/ ANTHONY BERGAMO
Anthony Bergamo
Director
/s/ GEORGE L. CLARK, JR.
George L. Clark, Jr.
Director
/s/ STEVEN D. COHN
Steven D. Cohn
Director
/s/ PATRICK E. CURTIN
Patrick E. Curtin
Director
/s/ ROBERT C. GOLDEN
Robert C. Golden
Director
/s/ KATHLEEN M. NELSON
Kathleen M. Nelson
Director
/s/ JOSEPH J. PERRY
Joseph J. Perry
Director
/s/ OMER S.J. WILLIAMS
Omer S.J. Williams
Director




CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF
DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

INDEX


 
Page
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
F-68
Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition at December 31, 2014 and 2013
F-69
Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Income for the years ended
   December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
 
F-70
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
F-71
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012
F-72
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
F73-F118

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM


Audit Committee, Board of Directors, and Stockholders
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Subsidiaries
Brooklyn, New York

We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Subsidiaries (the "Company") as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2014.  We also have audited the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.  The Company's management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting located in Item 9A of Form 10-K. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements.  Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2014, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.



/s/ Crowe Horwath LLP

New York, New York
March 16, 2015




DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
(Dollars in thousands except share amounts)

   
December 31,
2014
   
December 31,
2013
 
ASSETS:
       
Cash and due from banks
 
$
78,187
   
$
45,777
 
Federal funds sold and other short-term investments
   
250
     
-
 
  Total cash and cash equivalents
   
78,437
     
45,777
 
Investment securities held-to-maturity (estimated fair value of $6,315, and $5,163 at December 31,
   2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively) (Fully unencumbered)
   
5,367
     
5,341
 
Investment securities available-for-sale, at fair value (Fully unencumbered)
   
3,806
     
18,649
 
Mortgage-backed securities ("MBS") available-for-sale, at fair value (Fully unencumbered)
   
26,409
     
31,543
 
Trading securities
   
8,559
     
6,822
 
Loans:
               
    Real estate, net
   
4,117,411
     
3,697,380
 
    Consumer loans
   
1,829
     
2,139
 
    Less allowance for loan losses
   
(18,493
)
   
(20,153
)
   Total loans, net
   
4,100,747
     
3,679,366
 
Premises and fixed assets, net
   
25,065
     
26,077
 
Premises held for sale
   
-
     
3,624
 
Federal Home Loan Bank of New York ("FHLBNY") capital stock
   
58,407
     
48,051
 
Other real estate owned ("OREO")
   
18
     
18
 
Bank Owned Life Insurance ("BOLI")
   
82,614
     
55,871
 
Goodwill
   
55,638
     
55,638
 
Other assets
   
52,040
     
51,413
 
Total Assets
 
$
4,497,107
   
$
4,028,190
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
               
Liabilities:
               
Due to depositors:
               
Interest bearing deposits
 
$
2,472,199
   
$
2,332,689
 
Non-interest bearing deposits
   
187,593
     
174,457
 
Total deposits
   
2,659,792
     
2,507,146
 
Escrow and other deposits
   
91,921
     
69,404
 
FHLBNY advances
   
1,173,725
     
910,000
 
Trust Preferred securities payable
   
70,680
     
70,680
 
Other liabilities
   
41,264
     
35,454
 
Total Liabilities
 
$
4,037,382
   
$
3,592,684
 
Commitments and Contingencies
               
Stockholders' Equity:
               
Preferred stock ($0.01 par, 9,000,000 shares authorized, none issued or outstanding at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013)
   
-
     
-
 
Common stock ($0.01 par, 125,000,000 shares authorized, 52,871,443 shares and 52,854,483 shares issued at
    December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively, and 36,855,019 shares and 36,712,951 shares
    outstanding at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively)
   
529
     
528
 
Additional paid-in capital
   
254,358
     
252,253
 
Retained earnings
   
427,126
     
402,986
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of deferred taxes
   
(8,547
)
   
(4,759
)
Unallocated common stock of Employee Stock Ownership Plan ("ESOP")
   
(2,545
)
   
(2,776
)
Unearned Restricted Stock Award common stock
   
(3,066
)
   
(3,193
)
Common stock held by Benefit Maintenance Plan ("BMP")
   
(9,164
)
   
(9,013
)
Treasury stock, at cost (16,016,424 shares and 16,141,532 shares at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively)
   
(198,966
)
   
(200,520
)
Total Stockholders' Equity
 
$
459,725
   
$
435,506
 
Total Liabilities And Stockholders' Equity
 
$
4,497,107
   
$
4,028,190
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
69


DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts)
   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Interest income:
           
Loans secured by real estate
 
$
169,208
   
$
171,594
   
$
189,149
 
Other loans
   
105
     
101
     
104
 
MBS
   
914
     
1,413
     
3,025
 
Investment securities
   
560
     
503
     
1,263
 
Federal funds sold and other short-term investments
   
2,165
     
1,845
     
2,413
 
Total interest income
   
172,952
     
175,456
     
195,954
 
Interest expense:
                       
Deposits and escrow
   
19,591
     
19,927
     
21,779
 
Borrowed funds
   
28,825
     
27,042
     
64,333
 
Total interest expense
   
48,416
     
46,969
     
86,112
 
Net interest income
   
124,536
     
128,487
     
109,842
 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
   
(1,872
)
   
369
     
3,921
 
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
   
126,408
     
128,118
     
105,921
 
Non-interest income:
                       
Total other than temporary impairment ("OTTI") losses
   
-
     
-
     
(187
)
Less:  Non-credit portion of OTTI recorded in other comprehensive income (before taxes)
   
-
     
-
     
6
 
Net OTTI recognized in earnings
   
-
     
-
     
(181
)
Service charges and other fees
   
3,191
     
3,459
     
3,445
 
Mortgage banking income
   
1,225
     
473
     
1,768
 
Net gain on securities (1)
   
952
     
375
     
1,135
 
Net (loss) gain on the disposal of other assets
   
649
     
(21
)
   
13,726
 
Income from BOLI
   
1,743
     
1,672
     
1,689
 
Other
   
1,278
     
1,505
     
2,267
 
Total non-interest income
   
9,038
     
7,463
     
23,849
 
Non-interest expense:
                       
Salaries and employee benefits
   
32,462
     
34,336
     
33,805
 
Stock benefit plan compensation expense
   
3,817
     
3,957
     
3,842
 
Occupancy and equipment
   
10,177
     
10,451
     
10,052
 
Data processing costs
   
3,595
     
3,565
     
3,026
 
Advertising and marketing
   
1,922
     
1,109
     
1,554
 
Federal deposit insurance premiums
   
2,151
     
1,951
     
2,057
 
Provision for losses on OREO
   
-
     
180
     
-
 
Other
   
6,952
     
7,143
     
8,236
 
Total non-interest expense
   
61,076
     
62,692
     
62,572
 
Income before income taxes
   
74,370
     
72,889
     
67,198
 
Income tax expense
   
30,124
     
29,341
     
26,890
 
Net income
 
$
44,246
   
$
43,548
   
$
40,308
 
Earnings per Share:
                       
Basic
 
$
1.23
   
$
1.24
   
$
1.18
 
Diluted
 
$
1.23
   
$
1.23
   
$
1.17
 
(1) Amount includes periodic valuation gains or losses on trading securities.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
Net Income
$44,246 
$43,548 
$40,308 
Amortization and reversal of net unrealized loss on securities transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity,
   net of tax of $(29), $(122) and $(91) during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively
36 
149 
111 
Non-credit component of OTTI charge recognized during the period, net of tax benefit of  $3 during the year ended
   December 31, 2012
-  
-  
(3)
Reduction in non-credit component of OTTI, net of taxes of $(16), $(16) and $(137) during the years ended December 31, 2014,
   2013 and 2012, respectively
16 
16 
165 
Reclassification adjustment for securities sold during the period, net of tax benefit of $450, $50 and $461 during the years ended
   December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively (reclassified from net gain on securities)
(547)
(60)
(561)
Net unrealized securities gain (loss) arising during the period, net of deferred tax (expense) benefit of $29, $(162) and $1,102
   during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively
 
(36)
 
201 
 
(1,339)
Change in pension and other postretirement obligations, net of deferred tax (expense) benefit of $2,685, $(3,765) and $(1,395)
   during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively
(3,257)
4,575 
1,696 
Total other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax
(3,788)
4,881 
69 
Comprehensive Income
$40,458 
$48,429 
$40,377 
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
70


DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
(In thousands except share amounts)
   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Common Stock:
           
Balance at beginning of period
 
$
528
   
$
520
   
$
516
 
Shares issued in exercise of options (16,960 shares, 833,334 shares and 455,051 shares during the years  
    ended December 31, 2014, 2013, and 2012, respectively)
   
1
     
8
     
4
 
Balance at end of period
   
529
     
528
     
520
 
Additional Paid-in Capital:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
252,253
     
239,041
     
231,521
 
Stock options exercised
   
277
     
11,220
     
5,604
 
Excess tax benefit of stock benefit plans
   
71
     
292
     
389
 
Amortization of excess fair value over cost – ESOP stock and stock option expense
   
1,111
     
1,176
     
1,168
 
Release from treasury stock for equity awards,  net of return of shares to treasury for forfeited shares
    (125,108 shares,165,348 shares and 150,173 shares during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013, and
      2012, respectively)
   
646
     
524
     
359
 
Balance at end of period
   
254,358
     
252,253
     
239,041
 
Retained Earnings:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
402,986
     
379,166
     
358,079
 
Net income for the period
   
44,246
     
43,548
     
40,308
 
Cash dividends declared and paid
   
(20,106
)
   
(19,728
)
   
(19,221
)
Balance at end of period
   
427,126
     
402,986
     
379,166
 
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss, Net of Deferred Taxes:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
(4,759
)
   
(9,640
)
   
(9,709
)
Other comprehensive income (loss) recognized during the period, net of tax
   
(3,788
)
   
4,881
     
69
 
Balance at end of period
   
(8,547
)
   
(4,759
)
   
(9,640
)
Unallocated Common Stock of ESOP:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
(2,776
)
   
(3,007
)
   
(3,239
)
Amortization of earned portion of ESOP stock
   
231
     
231
     
232
 
Balance at end of period
   
(2,545
)
   
(2,776
)
   
(3,007
)
Unearned Restricted Stock Award Common Stock:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
(3,193
)
   
(3,122
)
   
(3,037
)
Amortization of earned portion of restricted stock awards
   
1,976
     
2,011
     
1,842
 
Release from treasury stock for award shares, net of return of shares to treasury for forfeited shares
   
(1,849
)
   
(2,082
)
   
(1,927
)
Balance at end of period
   
(3,066
)
   
(3,193
)
   
(3,122
)
Common Stock Held by BMP:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
(9,013
)
   
(8,800
)
   
(8,655
)
Release from treasury stock for award shares
   
(151
)
   
(213
)
   
(145
)
Balance at end of period
   
(9,164
)
   
(9,013
)
   
(8,800
)
Treasury Stock, at cost:
                       
Balance at beginning of period
   
(200,520
)
   
(202,584
)
   
(204,442
)
Release from treasury stock for equity awards, net of return of shares to treasury for forfeited shares
   
1,554
     
2,064
     
1,858
 
Balance at end of period
   
(198,966
)
   
(200,520
)
   
(202,584
)
TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY AT THE END OF PERIOD
 
$
459,725
   
$
435,506
   
$
391,574
 

See notes to consolidated financial statements.
71


DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(Dollars in thousands)
   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
           
Net Income
 
$
44,246
   
$
43,548
   
$
40,308
 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities
                       
Net gain on the sales of investment securities and MBS available-for-sale
   
(997
)
   
(110
)
   
(1,022
)
Net gain recognized on trading securities
   
(13
)
   
(265
)
   
(113
)
Net gain on sale of loans held for sale
   
(27
)
   
(13
)
   
(68
)
Net (loss) gain on the disposal of other assets
   
(649
)
   
21
     
(13,726
)
Loss on debt extinguishment
   
-
     
-
     
28,772
 
Net depreciation, amortization and accretion
   
2,641
     
2,834
     
2,880
 
Stock plan compensation expense (excluding ESOP)
   
2,087
     
2,205
     
2,164
 
ESOP compensation expense
   
1,230
     
1,213
     
1,078
 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
   
(1,872
)
   
369
     
3,921
 
Provision for losses on OREO
   
-
     
180
     
-
 
Credit to reduce the liability for loans sold with recourse
   
(1,040
)
   
(305
)
   
(1,286
)
Net OTTI recognized in earnings
   
-
     
-
     
181
 
Increase in cash surrender value of BOLI
   
(1,743
)
   
(1,672
)
   
(1,689
)
Deferred income tax expense (credit)
   
771
     
(940
)
   
(2,068
)
Excess tax benefit of stock benefit plans
   
(71
)
   
(292
)
   
(389
)
Changes in assets and liabilities:
                       
Originations of loans held for sale during the period
   
-
     
(1,621
)
   
(32,665
)
Proceeds from sales of loans held for sale
   
-
     
2,194
     
36,755
 
(Increase) Decrease in other assets
   
(2,873
)
   
8,168
     
6,009
 
Increase in other liabilities
   
5,573
     
5,637
     
3,663
 
Net cash provided by Operating Activities
   
47,263
     
61,151
     
72,705
 
CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
                       
Proceeds from maturities of investment securities held-to-maturity
   
88
     
949
     
983
 
Proceeds from maturities and calls of investment securities available-for-sale
   
15,000
     
14,750
     
200,320
 
Proceeds from sales of investment securities available-for-sale
   
3,780
     
366
     
22,415
 
Proceeds from sales of MBS available-for-sale
   
-
     
-
     
21,949
 
Proceeds from sales of trading securities
   
7,115
     
131
     
171
 
Purchases of investment securities available-for-sale
   
(3,884
)
   
(458
)
   
(80,153
)
Purchases of MBS available-for-sale
   
(875
)
   
-
     
(23,186
)
Acquisition of trading securities
   
(8,839
)
   
(1,814
)
   
(3,158
)
Principal collected on MBS available-for-sale
   
5,863
     
17,372
     
42,822
 
Purchase of BOLI
   
(25,000
)
   
-
     
-
 
Purchases of loans
   
(225,604
)
   
(52,031
)
   
(30,425
)
Proceeds from sale of portfolio loans
   
16,892
     
5,893
     
30,906
 
Net increase in loans
   
(210,770
)
   
(149,122
)
   
(50,609
)
Proceeds from the sale of OREO and real estate property owned
   
-
     
564
     
-
 
Proceeds from the sale of fixed assets
   
4,273
     
-
     
17,477
 
Purchases of fixed assets
   
(1,618
)
   
(1,963
)
   
(4,422
)
(Purchase) Redemption of FHLBNY capital stock
   
(10,356
)
   
(3,040
)
   
4,478
 
Net cash provided by (used in) Investing Activities
   
(433,935
)
   
(168,403
)
   
149,568
 
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
                       
Increase in due to depositors
   
152,646
     
27,717
     
135,728
 
Increase (Decrease) in escrow and other deposits
   
22,517
     
(13,349
)
   
10,941
 
Repayments of FHLBNY advances
   
(1,224,500
)
   
(218,500
)
   
(172,275
)
Proceeds from FHLBNY advances
   
1,488,225
     
286,000
     
75,000
 
Repayments of securities sold under agreements to repurchase ("REPOS" )
   
-
     
-
     
(195,000
)
Prepayment penalty on debt
   
-
     
-
     
(28,772
)
Proceeds from exercise of stock options
   
278
     
11,228
     
5,608
 
Excess tax benefit of stock benefit plans
   
71
     
292
     
389
 
Equity award distribution
   
201
     
293
     
145
 
Cash dividends paid to stockholders
   
(20,106
)
   
(19,728
)
   
(19,221
)
Net cash (used in) provided by Financing Activities
   
419,332
     
73,953
     
(187,457
)
INCREASE(DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
   
32,660
     
(33,299
)
   
34,816
 
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, BEGINNING OF PERIOD
   
45,777
     
79,076
     
44,260
 
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF PERIOD
 
$
78,437
   
$
45,777
   
$
79,076
 
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:
                       
Cash paid for income taxes
 
$
29,035
   
$
29,858
   
$
26,913
 
Cash paid for interest
   
48,329
     
47,155
     
87,281
 
Loans transferred to OREO
   
-
     
783
     
-
 
Loans transferred to held for sale
   
16,865
     
7,514
     
65,131
 
Amortization of unrealized loss on securities transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity
   
65
     
271
     
202
 
Net increase (decrease) in non-credit component of OTTI
   
(32
)
   
(32
)
   
296
 
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
72

DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 (Dollars In Thousands except for share amounts)



1.   NATURE OF OPERATIONS AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Nature of Operations - Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. (the "Holding Company" and together with its direct and indirect subsidiaries, the "Company") is a Delaware corporation organized by The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh (the "Bank") for the purpose of acquiring all of the capital stock of the Bank issued in the Bank's conversion to stock ownership on June 26, 1996.  At December 31, 2014, the significant assets of the Holding Company were the capital stock of the Bank, the Holding Company's loan to the ESOP and investments retained by the Holding Company.  The liabilities of the Holding Company were comprised primarily of a $70,680 trust preferred securities payable maturing in 2034, and currently callable.  The Company is subject to the financial reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

The Bank was originally founded in 1864 as a New York State-chartered mutual savings bank, and currently operates as a New York State-chartered stock savings bank.  The Bank has been a community-oriented financial institution providing financial services and loans for housing within its market areas.  The Bank maintains its headquarters in the Williamsburg section of the borough of Brooklyn, New York.  The Bank has twenty-five retail banking offices located throughout the boroughs of Brooklyn, Queens, and the Bronx, and in Nassau County, New York.

Summary of Significant Accounting Policies – Management believes that the accounting and reporting policies of the Company conform to accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America ("GAAP").  The following is a description of the significant policies.

Principles of Consolidation - The accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Holding Company and its subsidiaries (with the exception of its special purpose entity, Dime Community Capital Trust I), and the Bank and its subsidiaries.  All inter-company accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Use of Estimates - To prepare consolidated financial statements in conformity with GAAP, management makes judgments, estimates and assumptions based on available information.  These estimates and assumptions affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and the disclosures provided, and actual results could differ.

Cash and Cash Equivalents: Cash and cash equivalents include cash, deposits with other financial institutions with maturities fewer than 90 days, and federal funds sold.  Net cash flows are reported for customer loan and deposit transactions, interest bearing deposits in other financial institutions, and repurchase agreements.
 
Investment Securities and MBS - Debt securities that have readily determinable fair values are carried at fair value unless they are held-to-maturity. Debt securities are classified as held-to-maturity and carried at amortized cost only if the Company has a positive intent and ability to hold them to maturity.  If not classified as held-to-maturity, such securities are classified as securities available-for-sale or trading. Equity securities and mutual fund investments (fixed income or equity in nature) are classified as either available-for-sale or trading securities and carried at fair value.  Unrealized holding gains or losses on securities available-for-sale that are deemed temporary are excluded from net income and reported net of income taxes as other comprehensive income or loss.  While the Holding Company had a small portfolio of mutual fund investments designated as trading at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, neither the Holding Company nor the Bank actively acquires securities for the purpose of engaging in trading activities.

Interest income includes amortization of purchase premium or discount.  Premiums and discounts on securities are amortized on the level-yield method without anticipating prepayments, except for MBS where prepayments are anticipated.  Gains and losses on sales are recorded on the trade date and determined using the specific identification method.

The Company evaluates securities for OTTI at least quarterly, and more frequently when economic or market conditions warrant such an evaluation.  In making its evaluation of OTTI for debt securities, the Company initially considers whether: (1) it intends to sell the security, or (2) it is more likely than not that it will be required to sell the security prior to recovery of its amortized cost basis. If either of these criteria is satisfied, an OTTI charge is
recognized in the statement of income equal to the full amount of the decline in fair value below amortized cost.  For debt securities, if neither of these criteria are satisfied, however, the Company does not expect to recover the entire amortized cost basis, an OTTI loss has occurred that must be separated into two categories: (a) the amount related to credit loss, and (b) the amount related to other factors. In assessing the level of OTTI attributable to credit loss, the Company compares the present value of expected cash flows to the amortized cost basis of the security. The portion of OTTI determined to result from credit-related factors is recognized through earnings, while the portion of the OTTI related to other factors is recognized in other comprehensive income.  When OTTI is recognized on a debt security, its amortized cost basis is reduced to reflect the credit-related component.

In determining whether OTTI exists on an equity security, the Company considers the following:  1) the duration and severity of the impairment; 2) the Company's ability and intent to hold the security until it recovers in value (as well as the likelihood of such a recovery in the near term); and 3) whether it is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell such security before recovery of its individual amortized cost basis less any unrecognized loss.  Should OTTI be determined to have occurred based upon this analysis, it is fully recognized through earnings.

Loans - Loans that the Bank has the intent and ability to hold for the foreseeable future or until maturity or payoff are reported at the principal amount outstanding, net of unearned fees or costs, unamortized premiums and the allowance for loan losses.  Interest income on loans is recorded using the level yield method.  Loan origination fees and certain direct loan origination costs are deferred and amortized as yield adjustments over the contractual loan terms.  Past due status is based upon the contractual terms of the loan.

Accrual of interest is generally discontinued on a loan that meets any of the following three criteria:  (i) full payment of principal or interest is not expected; (ii) principal or interest has been in default for a period of 90 days or more and the loan is not both deemed to be well secured and in the process of collection; or (iii) an election has otherwise been made to maintain the loan on a cash basis due to deterioration in the financial condition of the borrower.  Such non-accrual determination practices are applied consistently to all loans regardless of their internal classification or designation.  Upon entering non-accrual status, the Bank reverses all outstanding accrued interest receivable.

Management may elect to continue the accrual of interest when a loan that otherwise meets the criteria for non-accrual status is in the process of collection and the estimated fair value and cash flows of the underlying collateral property are sufficient to satisfy the outstanding principal balance (including any outstanding advances related to the loan) and accrued interest.  Management may also elect to continue the accrual of interest on a loan that would otherwise meet the criteria for non-accrual status when its delinquency relates solely to principal amounts due, it is well secured and refinancing activities have commenced on the loan.  Such elections have not been commonplace.

The Bank generally initiates foreclosure proceedings when a delinquent loan enters non-accrual status, and typically does not accept partial payments once foreclosure proceedings have commenced.  At some point during foreclosure proceedings, the Bank procures current appraisal information in order to prepare an estimate of the fair value of the underlying collateral.  If a foreclosure action is instituted and the loan is not brought current, paid in full, or refinanced before the foreclosure action is completed, the property securing the loan is transferred to OREO status.  The Bank generally utilizes all available remedies, such as note sales in lieu of foreclosure, in an effort to resolve non-accrual loans as quickly and prudently as possible in consideration of market conditions, the physical condition of the property and any other mitigating circumstances.  In the event that a non-accrual loan is subsequently brought current, it is returned to accrual status once the doubt concerning collectability has been removed and the borrower has demonstrated performance in accordance with the loan terms and conditions for a period of at least six months.

A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement.

Factors considered by management in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value, and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays or shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired.  Management determines the significance of payment delays and shortfalls on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration all of the circumstances surrounding the loan and the borrower, including the length of the delay, the reasons for the delay, the borrower's prior payment record, and the amount of the shortfall in relation to the principal and interest owed.  Impairment is typically measured using the difference between the outstanding loan principal balance and either: 1) the likely realizable value of a note sale; 2) the fair value of the underlying collateral, net of likely disposal costs, if repayment is expected to come from liquidation of the collateral; or 3) the present value of estimated future cash flows (using the
loan's pre-modification rate for some of the performing troubled debt restructurings ("TDRs").  If a TDR is substantially performing in accordance with its restructured terms, management will look to either the potential net liquidation proceeds of the underlying collateral property or the present value of the expected cash flows from the debt service in measuring impairment (whichever is deemed most appropriate under the circumstances).  If a TDR has re-defaulted, generally the likely realizable net proceeds from either a note sale or the liquidation of the collateral is considered when measuring impairment.  Measured impairment is either charged off immediately or, in limited instances, recognized as an allocated reserve within the allowance for loan losses.


Allowance for Loan Losses and Reserve for Loan Commitments - The allowance for loan losses is a valuation allowance for probable incurred credit losses.  Loan losses are charged against the allowance when management believes the uncollectibility of a loan balance is confirmed.  Subsequent recoveries, if any, are credited to the allowance. Management estimates the allowance balance required using past loan loss experience, the nature and volume of the portfolio, information about specific borrower situations and estimated collateral values, economic conditions, and other factors.  Allocations of the allowance may be made for specific loans, but the entire allowance is available for any loan that, in management's judgment, should be charged off.

Measured impairment is either charged off immediately or, in limited instances, recognized as an allocated reserve within the allowance for loan losses.  All multifamily residential, mixed use, commercial real estate and construction loans that are deemed to meet the definition of impaired are individually evaluated for impairment.  In addition, all condominium or cooperative apartment and one- to four-family residential loans with balances greater than the Fannie Mae ("FNMA") conforming loan limits for high-cost areas such as the Bank's primary lending area ("FNMA Limits") that are deemed to meet the definition of impaired are individually evaluated for impairment.   Loans for which the terms have been modified in a manner that meets the criteria of a TDR are deemed to be impaired and individually evaluated for impairment.  If a TDR is substantially performing in accordance with its restructured terms, management will look to either the potential net liquidation proceeds of the underlying collateral property or the present value of the expected cash flows from the debt service in measuring impairment (whichever is deemed most appropriate under the circumstances).  If a TDR has defaulted, the likely realizable net proceeds from either a note sale or the liquidation of collateral is generally considered when measuring impairment.

Smaller balance homogeneous loans, such as condominium or cooperative apartment and one-to four-family residential real estate loans with balances less than or equal to the FNMA Limits and consumer loans, are collectively evaluated for impairment, and accordingly, not separately identified for impairment disclosures.

In determining both the specific and the general components of the allowance for loan losses, the Company has identified the following portfolio segments: 1) real estate loans; and 2) consumer loans.  Consumer loans represent a nominal portion of the Company's loan portfolio.  Within these segments, the Bank analyzes the allowance based upon the underlying collateral type.

The underlying methodology utilized to assess the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses is summarized in Note 6.

The Bank maintains a separate reserve within other liabilities associated with commitments to fund future loans that have been accepted by the borrower.  This reserve is determined based upon the historical loss experience of similar loans owned by the Bank at each period end.  Any changes in this reserve amount are recognized through earnings as a component of non-interest expense.

Reserve Liability For the First Loss Position on Multifamily Loans Sold to FNMA.   As of December 31, 2013, the Bank serviced a pool of multifamily loans sold to FNMA.  Pursuant to the sale agreement with FNMA, the Bank retained an obligation (off-balance sheet contingent liability) to absorb a portion of any losses (as defined in the agreement) incurred by FNMA in connection with the loans sold (the "First Loss Position").  A reserve liability was recorded in other liabilities related to the First Loss Position.  The off balance sheet contingent liability and reserve liability were both extinguished during the year ended December 31, 2014.  Please refer to Note 6 for further discussion of this reserve liability.

Loans Held for Sale - Mortgage loans originated and intended for sale in the secondary market are carried at the lower of aggregate cost or net realizable proceeds.  Multifamily residential and mixed-use loans sold are generally sold with servicing rights retained.  During the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, the Bank re-classified certain problematic loans for which it had an executed pending note sale agreement as held for sale.  Such loans are carried at their expected net realizable proceeds.

OREO - Properties acquired as a result of foreclosure on a mortgage loan or a deed in lieu of foreclosure are initially recorded at fair value less costs to sell when acquired, establishing a new cost basis.  These assets are subsequently accounted for at the lower of cost or fair value less estimated costs to sell.  Declines in the recorded balance subsequent to acquisition by the Company are recorded through expense.  Operating costs after acquisition are expensed.

Premises and Fixed Assets, Net - Land is stated at original cost. Buildings and furniture, fixtures and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the properties as follows:

Buildings
 
2.22% to 2.50% per year
Leasehold improvements
 
Lesser of the useful life of the asset or the remaining non-cancelable terms of the related leases
Furniture, fixtures and equipment
 
10% per year

Accounting for Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets – An impairment test is required to be performed at least annually for goodwill acquired in a business combination. The Company performs impairment tests of goodwill as of December 31 st of each year.  As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Company concluded that no impairment of goodwill existed.  As of both December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Company had goodwill totaling $55,638.

Mortgage Servicing Rights ("MSR") - Servicing assets are carried at the lower of cost or fair value and are amortized in proportion to, and over the period of, anticipated net servicing income.  All separately recognized MSR are required to be initially measured at fair value, if practicable.  The estimated fair value of loan servicing assets is determined by calculating the present value of estimated future net servicing cash flows, using assumptions of prepayments, defaults, servicing costs and discount rates derived based upon actual historical results for the Bank, or, in the absence of such data, from historical results for the Bank's peers. Capitalized loan servicing assets are stratified based on predominant risk characteristics of the underlying loans ( i.e., collateral, interest rate, servicing spread and maturity) for the purpose of evaluating impairment. A valuation allowance is then established in the event the recorded value of an individual stratum exceeds its fair value.

BOLI – BOLI is carried at the amount that can be realized under the insurance contract at the balance sheet date, which is the cash surrender value adjusted for other charges or amounts due that are probable at settlement.  Increases in the contract value are recorded as non-interest income in the consolidated statements of operations and insurance proceeds received are recorded as a reduction of the contract value.


Income Taxes – Income tax expense is the total of the current year income tax due or refundable and the change in deferred tax assets and liabilities.  Deferred tax assets and liabilities are the expected future tax amounts for the temporary differences between carrying amounts and tax bases of assets and liabilities, computed using enacted tax rates.  A valuation allowance, if needed, reduces deferred tax assets to the amount deemed more likely than not to be realized.

A tax position is recognized as a benefit only if it is "more likely than not" that the tax position would be sustained in a tax examination, with a tax examination being presumed to occur.  The amount recognized is the largest amount of tax benefit that is greater than 50% likely of being realized on examination.  For tax positions not satisfying the "more likely than not" test, no tax benefit is recorded.  The Company recognizes interest and/or penalties related to tax matters in income tax expense.  The Company had no uncertain tax positions at December 31, 2014 or 2013.

Employee Benefits – The Bank maintains The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh 401(k) Plan [the "401(k) Plan"] for substantially all of its employees, and the Retirement Plan of The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh (the "Employee Retirement Plan"), both of which are tax qualified under the Internal Revenue Code.

The Bank also maintains the Postretirement Welfare Plan of The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh (the "Postretirement Benefit Plan"), providing additional postretirement benefits to certain retirees, which requires accrual of postretirement benefits (such as health care benefits) during the years an employee provides services, a Retirement Plan for its outside Directors, (the "Director Retirement Plan"), and the BMP that provides additional benefits to certain of its officers.

As the sponsor of a single employer defined benefit plan, the Company must do the following for the Employee Retirement Plan, a portion of the BMP, the Director Retirement Plan and the Postretirement Benefit Plan: (1) recognize the funded status of the benefit plans in its statements of financial condition, measured as the difference between plan assets at fair value (with limited exceptions) and the benefit obligation. For a pension plan, the benefit obligation is the projected benefit obligation; for any other postretirement benefit plan, such as a retiree health care plan, the benefit obligation is the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation; (2) recognize as a component of other comprehensive income, net of tax, the gains or losses and prior service costs or credits that arise during the period but are not recognized as components of net periodic benefit or cost.  Amounts recognized in accumulated other comprehensive income, including the gains or losses, prior service costs or credits, and the transition asset or obligation are adjusted as they are subsequently recognized as components of net periodic benefit cost; (3) measure defined benefit plan assets and obligations as of the date of the employer's fiscal year-end statements of financial condition (with limited exceptions); and (4) disclose in the notes to financial statements additional information about certain effects on net periodic benefit cost for the next fiscal year that arise from delayed recognition of the gains or losses, prior service costs or credits, and transition asset or obligation.

The Holding Company and Bank maintain the ESOP.  Compensation expense related to the ESOP is recorded during the period in which the shares become committed to be released to participants.  The compensation expense is measured based upon the average fair market value of the stock during the period, and, to the extent that the fair value of the shares committed to be released differs from the original cost of such shares, the difference is recorded as an adjustment to additional paid-in capital.  Cash dividends are paid on all ESOP shares, and reduce retained earnings accordingly.

The Holding Company and Bank maintain the Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 2001 Stock Option Plan for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees and the Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 2004 Stock Incentive Plan for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees (the "2004 Stock Incentive Plan," and collectively the "Stock Plans"); which are discussed more fully in Note 15.  Under the Stock Plans, compensation cost is recognized for stock options and restricted stock awards issued to employees based on the fair value of the awards at the date of grant.  A Black-Scholes model is utilized to estimate the fair value of stock options, while the market price of the Holding Company's common stock at the date of grant is used for restricted stock awards. Compensation cost is recognized over the required service period, generally defined as the vesting period. For awards with graded vesting, compensation cost is recognized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period for the entire award.

Earnings Per Share   ("EPS") - Basic EPS is computed by dividing net income by the weighted-average common shares outstanding during the reporting period.  Diluted EPS is computed using the same method as basic EPS, but reflects the potential dilution that would occur if "in the money" stock options were exercised and converted into common stock.  In determining the weighted average shares outstanding for basic and diluted EPS, treasury stock and unallocated ESOP shares are excluded.  Vested restricted stock award shares are included in the calculation of the weighted average shares outstanding for basic and diluted EPS.   Unvested restricted stock award shares are recognized as a special class of securities under ASC 260.

The following is a reconciliation of the numerator and denominator of basic EPS and diluted EPS for the periods indicated:

   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Numerator:
           
Net Income per the Consolidated Statements of Operations
 
$
44,246
   
$
43,548
   
$
40,308
 
Less: Dividends paid on earnings allocated to participating securities
   
(168
)
   
(180
)
   
(184
)
Income attributable to common stock
 
$
44,078
   
$
43,368
   
$
40,124
 
Weighted average common shares outstanding, including participating securities
   
36,174,962
     
35,507,765
     
34,623,287
 
Less: weighted average participating securities
   
(301,785
)
   
(320,566
)
   
(327,326
)
Weighted average common shares outstanding
   
35,873,177
     
35,187,199
     
34,295,961
 
Basic EPS
 
$
1.23
   
$
1.24
   
$
1.18
 
Income attributable to common stock
 
$
44,078
   
$
43,368
   
$
40,124
 
Weighted average common shares outstanding
   
35,873,177
     
35,187,199
     
34,295,961
 
Weighted average common equivalent shares outstanding
   
75,339
     
119,073
     
68,492
 
Weighted average common and equivalent shares outstanding
   
35,948,516
     
35,306,272
     
34,364,453
 
Diluted EPS
 
$
1.23
   
$
1.23
   
$
1.17
 

Common stock equivalents resulting from the dilutive effect of "in-the-money" stock options are calculated based upon the excess of the average market value of the Holding Company's common stock over the exercise price of outstanding options.

There were approximately 293,272, 901,037 and 1,279,708 weighted average options for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013, and 2012, respectively, that were not considered in the calculation of diluted EPS since the sum of their exercise price and unrecognized compensation cost exceeded the average market value during the relevant period.

Comprehensive Income - Comprehensive income for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 included changes in the unrealized gain or loss on available-for-sale securities, changes in the unfunded status of defined benefit plans, the non-credit component of OTTI, and a transfer loss related to securities transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity.  Under GAAP, all of these items bypass net income and are typically reported as components of stockholders' equity.  All comprehensive income adjustment items are presented net of applicable tax effect.

Comprehensive and accumulated comprehensive income are summarized in Note 3.

Disclosures About Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information - The Company has one reportable segment, "Community Banking."  All of the Company's activities are interrelated, and each activity is dependent and assessed based on the manner in which it supports the other activities of the Company.  For example, lending is dependent upon the ability of the Bank to fund itself with retail deposits and other borrowings and to manage interest rate and credit risk.  Accordingly, all significant operating decisions are based upon analysis of the Company as one operating segment or unit.

For the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, there was no customer that accounted for more than 10% of the Company's consolidated revenue.

Reclassification – There have been no significant reclassifications to prior year amounts to conform to their current presentation.

2.   CONVERSION TO STOCK FORM OF OWNERSHIP

On November 2, 1995, the Board of Directors of the Bank adopted a Plan of Conversion to convert from mutual to stock form of ownership.  At the time of conversion, the Bank established a liquidation account in an amount equal to the retained earnings of the Bank as of the date of the most recent financial statements contained in the final conversion prospectus. The liquidation account is reduced annually to the extent that eligible account holders have reduced their qualifying deposits as of each anniversary date. Subsequent increases in deposits do not restore an eligible account holder's interest in the liquidation account. In the event of a complete liquidation, each eligible account holder will be entitled to receive a distribution from the liquidation account in an amount proportionate to the adjusted qualifying balances on the date of liquidation for accounts held at conversion.

The Holding Company acquired Conestoga Bancorp, Inc. on June 26, 1996.  The liquidation account previously established by Conestoga's subsidiary, Pioneer Savings Bank, F.S.B., during its initial public offering in March 1993, was assumed by the Company in the acquisition.

The Holding Company acquired Financial Bancorp, Inc. on January 21, 1999.  The liquidation account previously established by Financial Bancorp, Inc.'s subsidiary, Financial Federal Savings Bank, during its initial public offering, was assumed by the Company in the acquisition.

The aggregate balance of these liquidation accounts was $11,522 and $13,785 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

The Holding Company may not declare or pay cash dividends on, or repurchase any of its, shares of common stock if the effect thereof would cause stockholders' equity to be reduced below either applicable regulatory capital maintenance requirements, or the amount of the liquidation account, or if such declaration, payment or repurchase would otherwise violate regulatory requirements.


3.   OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

The before and after tax amounts allocated to each component of other comprehensive income (loss) are presented in the table below.  Reclassification adjustments related to securities available-for-sale are included in the line entitled net gain on securities in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations.

 
Pre-tax
Amount
 
Tax Expense (Benefit)
 
After tax
Amount
Year Ended December 31, 2014
         
Securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities
         
     Change in non-credit component of OTTI
$32 
 
$16 
 
$16 
     Change in unrealized loss on securities transferred to held to maturity
65 
 
29 
 
36 
          Total securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities
97 
 
45 
 
52 
Securities available-for-sale
         
      Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net gain on securities
(997)
 
(450)
 
(547)
      Change in net unrealized gain during the period
(65)
 
(29)
 
(36)
            Total securities available-for-sale
(1,062)
 
(479)
 
(583)
Defined benefit plans:
         
      Reclassification adjustment for expense included in salaries and employee benefits expense
1,044 
 
468 
 
576 
       Change in the net actuarial gain or loss
(6,986)
 
(3,153)
 
(3,833)
            Total defined benefit plans
(5,942)
 
(2,685)
 
(3,257)
      Total other comprehensive income
$(6,907) 
 
$(3,119)
 
$(3,788)
Year Ended December 31, 2013
         
Securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities:
         
     Change in non-credit component of OTTI
$32 
 
$16 
 
$16 
     Change in unrealized loss on securities transferred to held to maturity
271 
 
122 
 
149 
          Total securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities
303 
 
138 
 
165 
Securities available-for-sale:
         
      Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net gain on securities
(110)
 
(50)
 
(60)
      Change in net unrealized gain during the period
363 
 
162 
 
201 
            Total securities available-for-sale
253 
 
112 
 
141 
Defined benefit plans:
         
       Reclassification adjustment for expense included in in salaries and employee benefits expense
2,396 
 
1,082 
 
1,314 
       Change in the net actuarial gain or loss
5,944 
 
2,683 
 
3,261 
            Total defined benefit plans
8,340 
 
3,765 
 
4,575 
       Total other comprehensive income
$8,896 
 
$4,015 
 
$4,881 
Year Ended December 31, 2012
         
Securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities:
         
     Change in non-credit component of OTTI
$296 
 
$134 
 
$162 
     Change in unrealized loss on securities transferred to held to maturity
202 
 
91 
 
111 
          Total securities held-to-maturity and transferred securities
498 
 
225 
 
273 
Securities available-for-sale:
         
      Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net gain on securities
(1,022)
 
(461)
 
(561)
      Change in net unrealized gain during the period
(2,441)
 
(1,102)
 
(1,339)
            Total securities available-for-sale
(3,463)
 
(1,563)
 
(1,900)
Defined benefit plans:
         
       Reclassification adjustment for expense included in salaries and employee benefits expense
2,166 
 
978 
 
1,188 
       Change in the net actuarial gain or loss
925 
 
417 
 
508 
            Total defined benefit plans
3,091 
 
1,395 
 
1,696 
       Total other comprehensive income
$126 
 
$57 
 
$69 



Activity in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax, was as follows:

   
Securities Held-to-Maturity and Transferred Securities
   
Securities Available-for-Sale
   
Defined Benefit Plans
   
Total Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)
 
Balance as of January 1, 2014
 
$
(878
)
 
$
1,319
   
$
(5,200
)
 
$
(4,759
)
Other comprehensive income (loss) before reclassifications
   
52
     
(36
)
   
(3,833
)
   
(3,817
)
Amounts reclassified from accumulated other
   comprehensive income (loss)
   
-
     
(547
)
   
576
     
29
 
Net other comprehensive income (loss) during the period
   
52
     
(583
)
   
(3,257
)
   
(3,788
)
Balance as of December 31, 2014
 
$
(826
)
 
$
736
   
$
(8,457
)
 
$
(8,547
)
                                 
Balance as of January 1, 2013
 
$
(1,043
)
 
$
1,178
   
$
(9,775
)
 
$
(9,640
)
Other comprehensive income before reclassifications
   
165
     
201
     
3,261
     
3,627
 
Amounts reclassified from accumulated other
   comprehensive income (loss)
   
-
     
(60
)
   
1,314
     
1,254
 
Net other comprehensive income during the period
   
165
     
141
     
4,575
     
4,881
 
Balance as of December 31, 2013
 
$
(878
)
 
$
1,319
   
$
(5,200
)
 
$
(4,759
)

4.   INVESTMENT AND MORTGAGE-BACKED SECURITIES

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, there were no holdings of investment securities of any one issuer, other than the U.S. Government and its agencies, in an amount greater than 10% of stockholders' equity.

The following is a summary of major categories of securities owned by the Company excluding trading securities at December 31, 2014:
   
Purchase
Amortized/ Historical Cost
   
Recorded Amortized/
Historical Cost (1)
   
Unrealized
Gains
   
Unrealized Losses
   
Fair
Value
 
Investment securities held-to-maturity:
                   
Pooled bank trust preferred securities ("TRUPS")
 
$
15,815
   
$
5,367
   
$
1,119
   
$
(171
)
 
$
6,315
 
Available-for-sale securities:
                                       
Investment securities
                                       
   Registered Mutual Funds
   
3,860
     
3,860
     
-
     
(124
)
   
3,736
 
   Agency notes
   
70
     
70
     
-
     
-
     
70
 
MBS
                                       
   Pass-through MBS issued by Government Sponsored Entities ("GSEs")
   
24,154
     
24,154
     
1,453
     
-
     
25,607
 
   Private issuer pass through MBS
   
449
     
449
     
6
     
-
     
455
 
   Private issuer collateralized mortgage obligations ("CMOs")
   
343
     
343
     
4
     
-
     
347
 
(1)  Amount represents the purchase amortized / historical cost less any OTTI charges (credit or non-credit related) previously recognized.  For the TRUPS, amount is also net of the $932 unamortized portion of the unrealized loss that was recognized in accumulated other comprehensive loss on September 1, 2008 (the day on which these securities were transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity).
The following is a summary of major categories of securities owned by the Company (excluding trading securities) at December 31, 2013:

   
Purchase
Amortized/ Historical Cost
   
Recorded Amortized/
Historical Cost (1)
   
Unrealized
Gains
   
Unrealized Losses
   
Fair
Value
 
Investment securities held-to-maturity:
                   
TRUPS
 
$
15,885
   
$
5,341
   
$
118
   
$
(296
)
 
$
5,163
 
Available-for-sale securities:
                                       
Investment securities
                                       
   Registered Mutual Funds
   
2,866
     
2,760
     
815
     
(17
)
   
3,558
 
   Agency notes
   
15,070
     
15,070
     
21
     
-
     
15,091
 
MBS
                                       
   Pass-through MBS issued by GSEs
   
28,407
     
28,407
     
1,552
     
-
     
29,959
 
   CMOs issued by GSEs
   
319
     
319
     
2
     
-
     
321
 
   Private issuer pass through MBS
   
662
     
662
     
18
     
-
     
680
 
   Private issuer CMOs
   
574
     
574
     
9
     
-
     
583
 
(1)  Amount represents the purchase amortized / historical cost less any OTTI charges (credit or non-credit related) previously recognized.  For the TRUPS, amount is also net of the $997 unamortized portion of the unrealized loss that was recognized in accumulated other comprehensive loss on September 1, 2008 (the day on which these securities were transferred from available-for-sale to held-to-maturity).



At December 31, 2014, the agency note investments in the table above had contractual maturities as follows:

 
Amortized Cost   
Estimated Fair Value
Due after one year through three years
$70
$70
   TOTAL
$70
$70

The held-to-maturity TRUPS had a weighted average term to maturity of 20.0 years at December 31, 2014.  At December 31, 2014, MBS available-for-sale (which included pass-through MBS issued by GSEs, CMOs issued by GSEs, one private issuer pass through MBS and one private issuer CMO) possessed a weighted average contractual maturity of 16.8 years and a weighted average estimated duration of 1.1 years.  There were no sales of investment securities held-to-maturity during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 or 2012.

During the year ended December 31, 2014, gross proceeds from the sales of investment securities available-for-sale totaled $3,780.  A gross gain of $997 was recognized on these sales and there were no gross recognized losses.  During the year ended December 31, 2013, gross proceeds from the sales of investment securities available-for-sale totaled $366.  A gross gain of $110 was recognized on these sales and there were no gross recognized losses.  During the year ended December 31, 2012, gross proceeds from the sales of investment securities available-for-sale totaled $22,415.  A gross gain of $941 was recognized on these sales.

During the year ended December 31, 2012, gross proceeds on the sales of MBS available-for-sale totaled $21,949.  A gross gain of $81 was recognized on these sales and there were no gross recognized losses.  There were no sales of MBS available-for-sale during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.

Tax provisions related to the gains on sales of investment securities and MBS available-for-sale recognized during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 are disclosed in the consolidated statements of comprehensive income.

On September 1, 2008, the Bank transferred eight TRUPS ( i.e. , investment securities primarily secured by the preferred debt obligations of a pool of U.S. banks with a small portion secured by debt obligations of insurance companies) with an amortized cost of $19,922 from its available-for-sale portfolio to its held-to-maturity portfolio.  Based upon the lack of an orderly market for these securities, management determined that a formal election to hold them to maturity was consistent with its initial investment decision.  On the date of transfer, the unrealized loss of $8,420 on these securities continued to be recognized as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss within the Company's consolidated stockholders' equity (net of income tax benefit), and was expected to be amortized over the remaining average life of the securities, which approximated 21.1 years on a weighted average basis.  Activity related to this transfer loss was as follows:

 
For the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
Cumulative balance at the beginning of the period
$997 
$1,268 
Amortization
(65)
(271)
Cumulative balance at end of the period
$932 
$997 

As of each reporting period through December 31, 2014, the Company has applied the protocol established by ASC 320-10-65 ("ASC 320-10-65") in order to determine whether OTTI existed for its TRUPS and/or to measure, for TRUPS that have been determined to be other than temporarily impaired, the credit related and non-credit related components of OTTI.  As of December 31, 2014, five TRUPS were determined to meet the criteria for OTTI based upon this analysis.  At December 31, 2014, these five securities had credit ratings ranging from "C" to "A1."

The following table provides a reconciliation of the pre-tax OTTI charges recognized on the Company's TRUPS:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31, 2014
 
Credit Related OTTI Recognized in Earnings
Non-Credit OTTI Recognized in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss
Total OTTI Charge
Cumulative pre-tax balance at the beginning of the period
$8,945 
$601 
$9,546 
Amortization of previously recognized OTTI
-  
(32)
(32)
Cumulative pre-tax balance at end of the period
$8,945 
$569 
$9,514 

 
At or for the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
 
At or for the Year Ended
December 31, 2012
 
Credit Related
OTTI Recognized
in Earnings
Non-Credit OTTI Recognized in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss
Total
OTTI Charge
 
Credit Related OTTI Recognized in Earnings
Non-Credit OTTI Recognized in Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss
Total OTTI Charge
Cumulative pre-tax balance at the beginning of
   the period
$8,945 
$634 
$9,579 
 
$8,974 
$930 
$9,904 
OTTI recognized during the period
-  
-  
-  
 
181 
187 
Reductions and transfers to credit-related OTTI
-  
-  
-  
 
-  
(181)
(181)
Amortization of previously recognized OTTI
-  
(33)
(33)
 
(210)
(121)
(331)
Cumulative pre-tax balance at end of the period
$8,945 
$601 
$9,546 
 
$8,945 
$634 
$9,579 

The following table provides a reconciliation of the pre-tax OTTI charges recognized on the Company's registered mutual funds:

 
At or For the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Cumulative balance at the beginning of the period
$106 
$348 
$1,425 
Reduction of OTTI for securities sold during the period
(106)
(242)
(1,077)
Cumulative balance at end of the period
$- 
$106 
$348 

The following table summarizes the gross unrealized losses and fair value of investment securities as of December 31, 2014, aggregated by investment category and the length of time the securities were in a continuous unrealized loss position:

 
Less than 12
Months Consecutive
Unrealized Losses
12 Months or More
Consecutive
Unrealized Losses
 
 
Total
 
 
Fair Value
Gross Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
 
Fair Value
Gross Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
 
Fair Value
Gross
Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
Held-to-Maturity Securities:
           
TRUPS
$- 
$- 
$2,571
$163
$2,571
$163
Available-for-Sale Securities:
           
Registered Mutual Funds
3,736
124
-
-
3,736
124

TRUPS That Have Maintained an Unrealized Holding Loss for 12 or More Consecutive Months

At December 31, 2014, impairment of two TRUPS was deemed temporary, as management believed that the full recorded balance of the investments would be realized.  In making this determination, management considered the following:

·
Based upon an internal review of the collateral backing the TRUPS portfolio, which accounted for current and prospective deferrals, the securities could reasonably be expected to continue making all contractual payments
·
The Company does not intend to sell these securities prior to full recovery of their impairment
·
There were no cash or working capital requirements nor contractual or regulatory obligations that would compel the Company to sell these securities prior to their forecasted recovery or maturity
·
The securities have a pool of underlying issuers comprised primarily of banks
·
None of the securities have exposure to real estate investment trust issued debt (which has experienced high default rates)
·
The securities feature either a mandatory auction or a de-leveraging mechanism that could result in principal repayments to the Bank prior to the stated maturity of the security
·
The securities are adequately collateralized

The following table summarizes the gross unrealized losses and fair value of investment securities as of December 31, 2013, aggregated by investment category and the length of time the securities were in a continuous unrealized loss position:

 
Less than 12
Months Consecutive
Unrealized Losses
12 Months or More
Consecutive
Unrealized Losses
 
 
Total
 
 
Fair Value
Gross Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
 
Fair Value
Gross Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
 
Fair Value
Gross Unrecognized/
Unrealized Losses
Held-to-Maturity Securities:
           
TRUPS
$- 
$- 
$5,163
$1,775
$5,163
$1,775
Available-for-Sale Securities:
           
Registered Mutual Funds
536
17
536
17


5.   LOANS RECEIVABLE AND CREDIT QUALITY

Loans are reported at the principal amount outstanding (as adjusted for any amounts charged-off), net of unearned fees or costs, unamortized premiums and the allowance for loan losses.  Interest income on loans is recorded using the level yield method.  Under this method, discount accretion and premium amortization are included in interest income.  Loan origination fees and certain direct loan origination costs are deferred and amortized as yield adjustments over the contractual loan terms.

The Bank paid an aggregate premium of $13,163 on real estate loans repurchased during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The premium will be amortized as an adjustment to interest income throughout the remaining estimated life of the loans.

Credit Quality Indicators:

The Company categorizes loans into risk categories based on relevant information about the ability of borrowers to service their debt, such as:  current financial information, historical payment experience, credit structure, loan documentation, public information, and current economic trends, among other factors.  The Company analyzes loans individually by classifying them as to credit risk.  This analysis includes all non-homogeneous loans, such as multifamily residential, mixed use residential ( i.e., loans in which the aggregate rental income of the underlying collateral property is generated from both residential and commercial units, but fifty percent or more of such income is generated from the residential units), mixed use commercial real estate ( i.e. ,   loans in which the aggregate rental income of the underlying collateral property is generated from both residential and commercial units, but over fifty percent of such income is generated from the commercial units), commercial real estate and construction and land acquisition loans, as well as one-to four family residential and cooperative and condominium  apartment loans with balances in excess of the FNMA Limits that are deemed to meet the definition of impaired.  This analysis is performed on a quarterly basis.  The Company uses the following definitions for risk ratings:

Special Mention.   Loans classified as special mention have a potential weakness that deserves management's close attention. If left uncorrected, these potential weaknesses may result in deterioration of the repayment prospects for the loan or of the Bank's credit position at some future date.

Substandard.   Loans classified as substandard are inadequately protected by the current net worth and paying capacity of the obligor or of the collateral pledged, if any. Loans so classified have a well-defined weakness or weaknesses that jeopardize the liquidation of the debt. They are characterized by the distinct possibility that the Bank will sustain some loss if the deficiencies are not corrected.

Doubtful.   Loans classified as doubtful have all the weaknesses inherent in those classified as substandard, with the added characteristic that the weaknesses make collection or liquidation in full, on the basis of then existing facts, conditions, and values, highly questionable and improbable.

At December 31, 2013, the Bank had a portion of one commercial mixed use real estate loan classified as doubtful, with a full reserve applied against the balance deemed doubtful.  Due to favorable events occurring during the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank upgraded the entire loan balance to substandard as of December 31, 2014.

All real estate loans not classified as Special Mention, Substandard or Doubtful were deemed pass loans at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.

The following is a summary of the credit risk profile of real estate loans (including deferred costs) by internally assigned grade as of the dates indicated:

 
Balance at December 31, 2014
Grade
One- to Four-Family
Residential, Including Condominium and
Cooperative Apartment
Multifamily
Residential and Residential
Mixed Use
Commercial
Mixed Use Real Estate
Commercial Real Estate
Construction
Total Real Estate Loans
Not Graded(1)
$9,091
$- 
$- 
$- 
$- 
$9,091
Pass
60,764
3,271,430
317,718
391,227
4,041,139
Special Mention
1,370
20,738
4,944
6,431
33,483
Substandard
2,275
6,280
6,005
19,138
33,698
Doubtful
Total
$73,500
$3,298,448
$328,667
$416,796
$- 
$4,117,411
(1) Amount comprised of fully performing one- to four-family residential and condominium and cooperative unit loans with balances equal to or less than the FNMA Limits.

 
Balance at December 31, 2013
Grade
One- to Four-Family
Residential, Including Condominium and
Cooperative Apartment
Multifamily
Residential and Residential
Mixed Use
Commercial
Mixed Use Real Estate
Commercial Real Estate
Construction
Total Real Estate Loans
Not Graded(1)
$11,370
$- 
$- 
$- 
$- 
$11,370
Pass
53,472
2,900,979
364,808
299,122
3,618,381
Special Mention
6,651
17,938
5,203
4,420
34,212
Substandard
2,463
3,633
4,579
21,154
268
32,097
Doubtful
1,320
1,320
Total
$73,956
$2,922,550
$375,910
$324,696
$268
$3,697,380
(1) Amount comprised of fully performing one- to four-family residential and condominium and cooperative unit loans with balances equal to or less than the FNMA Limits.

For consumer loans, the Company evaluates credit quality based on payment activity.  Consumer loans that are 90 days or more past due are placed on non-accrual status, while all remaining consumer loans are classified and evaluated as performing.

The following is a summary of the credit risk profile of consumer loans by internally assigned grade:

Grade
Balance at December 31, 2014
Balance at December 31, 2013
Performing
$1,825
$2,136
Non-accrual
4
3
Total
$1,829
$2,139


The following is a breakdown of the past due status of the Company's investment in loans (excluding accrued interest and loans held for sale) as of the dates indicated:

At December 31, 2014
 
30 to 59 Days Past Due
60 to 89 Days Past Due
Loans 90 Days or More Past Due and Still Accruing Interest
Non-accrual (1)
Total Past Due
Current
Total Loans
Real Estate:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   One- to four-family residential, including
     condominium and cooperative apartment
$240
$- 
$-
$1,310
$1,550
$71,950
$73,500
   Multifamily residential and residential mixed use
1,187
2,922
167
4,276
3,294,172
3,298,448
   Commercial mixed use real estate
411
411
328,256
328,667
   Commercial real estate
4,717
4,717
412,079
416,796
   Construction
Total real estate
$1,427
$- 
$3,333
$6,194
$10,954
$4,106,457
$4,117,411
Consumer
$2
$- 
$- 
$4
$6
$1,823
$1,829
(1) Includes all loans on non-accrual status regardless of the number of days such loans were delinquent as of December 31, 2014.


At December 31, 2013
 
30 to 59 Days Past Due
60 to 89 Days Past Due
Loans 90 Days or More Past Due and Still Accruing Interest
Non-accrual (1)
Total Past Due
Current
Total Loans
Real Estate:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   One- to four-family residential, including
     condominium and cooperative apartment
$143
$302
$- 
$1,242
$1,687
$72,269
$73,956
   Multifamily residential and residential mixed use
744
1,031
1,197
2,972
2,919,578
2,922,550
   Commercial mixed use real estate
4,400
4,400
371,510
375,910
   Commercial real estate
404
5,707
6,111
318,585
324,696
   Construction
268
268
Total real estate
$1,291
$302
$1,031
$12,546
$15,170
$3,682,210
$3,697,380
Consumer
$6
$4
$- 
$3
$13
$2,126
$2,139
(1) Includes all loans on non-accrual status regardless of the number of days such loans were delinquent as of December 31, 2013.

Accruing Loans 90 Days or More Past Due:

The Bank continued accruing interest on eight real estate loans with an aggregate outstanding balance of $3,333 at December 31, 2014, and five real estate loans with an aggregate outstanding balance of $1,031 at December 31, 2013, all of which were 90 days or more past due on their respective contractual maturity dates.  These loans continued to make monthly payments consistent with their initial contractual amortization schedule exclusive of the balloon payments due at maturity.  These loans were well secured and were expected to be refinanced, and, therefore, remained on accrual status and were deemed performing assets at the dates indicated above.

TDRs

The following table summarizes outstanding TDRs by underlying collateral type as of the dates indicated:

 
As of December 31, 2014
 
As of December 31, 2013
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
No. of Loans
Balance
   One- to four-family residential, including condominium and cooperative apartment
2
$605
 
3
$934
   Multifamily residential and residential mixed use
4
1,105
 
4
1,148
   Commercial mixed use real estate
1
4,400
 
   Commercial real estate
4
13,707
 
5
22,245
Total real estate
11
$19,817
 
12
$24,327

The following table summarizes outstanding TDRs by accrual status as of the dates indicated :

 
As of December 31, 2014
 
As of December 31, 2013
 
No. of Loans
Balance
 
No. of Loans
Balance
Outstanding principal balance at period end
11
$19,817
 
12
$24,327
TDRs on accrual status at period end
9
15,100
 
10
18,620
TDRs on non-accrual status at period end
2
4,717
 
2
5,707

Accrual status for TDRs is determined separately for each TDR in accordance with the Bank's policies for determining accrual or non-accrual status.  At the time an agreement is entered into between the Bank and the borrower that results in the Bank's determination that a TDR has been created, the loan can be on either accrual or non-accrual status.  If a loan is on non-accrual status at the time it is restructured, it continues to be classified as non-
accrual until the borrower has demonstrated compliance with the modified loan terms for a period of at least six months.  Conversely, if at the time of restructuring the loan is performing (and accruing), it will remain accruing throughout its restructured period, unless the loan subsequently meets any of the criteria for non-accrual status under the Bank's policy and agency regulations.

The Company has not restructured troubled consumer loans, as its consumer loan portfolio has not experienced any problem issues warranting restructuring.  Therefore, all TDRs were collateralized by real estate at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.

The following table summarizes activity related to TDRs for the periods indicated:

 
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2014
 
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
 
Number of Loans
Pre-Modification
Outstanding Recorded Investment
Post-Modification Outstanding Recorded Investment
 
Number of Loans
Pre-Modification
Outstanding Recorded Investment
Post-Modification Outstanding Recorded Investment
Loan modifications during the period
   that met the definition of a TDR:
             
     Commercial mixed use real estate
1
$4,400
$4,400
 
     Commercial real estate
1
3,500
3,500
 
TOTAL
2
$7,900
$7,900
 


The Bank's allowance for loan losses at December 31, 2014 reflected $19 of allocated reserve associated with TDRs.  The Bank's allowance for loan losses at December 31, 2013 reflected $451 of allocated reserve associated with TDRs.  During the year ended December 31, 2014, one TDR was fully satisfied in accordance with its contractual terms.  The allocated reserve associated with this loan was thus eliminated, and accounted for the great majority of the reduction in the allocated reserves associated with TDRs from December 31, 2013 to December 31, 2014.  Otherwise, activity related to reserves associated with TDRs was immaterial during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.

As of December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Bank had no loan commitments to borrowers with outstanding TDRs.

A TDR is considered to be in payment default once it is 90 days contractually past due under the modified terms.  All TDRs are considered impaired loans and are evaluated individually for measurable impairment, if any.

There were no TDRs which defaulted within twelve months following the modification during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 (thus no significant impact to the allowance for loan losses during those periods).

Impaired Loans

A loan is considered impaired when, based on then current information and events, it is probable that all contractual amounts due will not be collected in accordance with the terms of the loan.  Factors considered by management in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value, and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due.  Loans that experience insignificant payment delays or shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired.  Management determines the significance of payment delays and shortfalls on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration all of the circumstances surrounding the loan and the borrower, including the length of the delay, the reasons for the delay, the borrower's prior payment record, and the amount of the shortfall in relation to the principal and interest owed.

The Bank considers TDRs and non-accrual multifamily residential, mixed-use and commercial real estate loans, along with non-accrual one- to four-family loans in excess of the FNMA Limits, to be impaired.  Non-accrual one-to four-family loans equal to or less than the FNMA Limits, as well as all consumer loans, are considered homogeneous loan pools and are not required to be evaluated individually for impairment unless considered a TDR.

Impairment is typically measured using the difference between the outstanding loan principal balance and either: 1) the likely realizable value of a note sale; 2) the fair value of the underlying collateral, net of likely disposal costs, if repayment is expected to come from liquidation of the collateral; or 3) the present value of estimated future cash flows (using the loan's pre-modification rate for certain performing TDRs).  If a TDR is substantially performing in
accordance with its restructured terms, management will look to either the potential net liquidation proceeds of the underlying collateral or the present value of the expected cash flows from the debt service in measuring impairment (whichever is deemed most appropriate under the circumstances).  If a TDR has re-defaulted, generally the likely realizable net proceeds from either a note sale or the liquidation of the collateral is considered when measuring impairment.  Measured impairment is either charged off immediately or, in limited instances, recognized as an allocated reserve within the allowance for loan losses.

Please refer to Note 6 for tabular information related to impaired loans.

Delinquent Serviced Loans Subject to the First Loss Position

Until February 20, 2014, the Bank serviced a pool of multifamily loans that it sold to FNMA, and retained the First Loss Position.  This pool of loans was re-acquired on February 20, 2014, and the First Loss Position was extinguished.  At December 31, 2013, delinquencies within this pool of loans were immaterial.  On February 20, 2014, all of the loans in the repurchased pool were performing.  Any delinquencies related to these loans as of December 31, 2014 are reported in the table on page F-85.

Please refer to Notes 6 for further discussion of these loans.

6.   ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES AND RESERVE FOR FIRST LOSS POSITION

The allowance for loan losses may consist of specific and general components.  The Bank's periodic evaluation of its allowance for loan losses (specific or general) is comprised of four primary components: (1) impaired loans; (2) non-impaired substandard loans; (3) non-impaired special mention loans; and (4) pass graded loans.  Within these components, the Company has identified the following portfolio segments for purposes of assessing its allowance for loan losses (specific or general): (1) real estate loans; and (2) consumer loans.  Consumer loans were evaluated in aggregate as of both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.

Impaired Loan Component

All multifamily residential, mixed use, commercial real estate and construction loans that are deemed to meet the definition of impaired are individually evaluated for impairment.  In addition, all condominium or cooperative apartment and one- to four-family residential real estate loans in excess of the FNMA Limits are individually evaluated for impairment.  Impairment is typically measured using the difference between the outstanding loan principal balance and either: (1) the likely realizable value of a note sale; (2) the fair value of the underlying collateral, net of likely disposal costs, if repayment is expected to come from liquidation of the collateral; or (3) the present value of estimated future cash flows (using the loan's pre-modification rate in the case of certain performing TDRs).  For impaired loans on non-accrual status, either of the initial two measurements is utilized.

All TDRs are considered impaired loans and are evaluated individually for measurable impairment, if any.  While measured impairment is generally charged off immediately, impairment attributed to a reduction in the present value of expected cash flows of a performing TDR was reflected as an allocated reserve within the allowance for loan losses at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.

Smaller balance homogeneous real estate loans, such as condominium or cooperative apartment and one-to four-family residential real estate loans with balances equal to or less than the FNMA Limits, are collectively evaluated for impairment, and accordingly, are not separately identified for impairment disclosures.

Non-Impaired Substandard Loan Component

At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the reserve allocated within the allowance for loan losses associated with non-impaired loans internally classified as Substandard reflected expected loss percentages on the Bank's pool of such loans that were derived based upon an analysis of historical losses over a measurement timeframe.  The loss percentage resulting from this analysis was then applied to the aggregate pool of non-impaired Substandard loans at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.  Based upon this methodology, increases or decreases in the amount of either non-impaired Substandard loans or charge-offs associated with such loans, or a change in the measurement timeframe utilized to derive the expected loss percentage, would impact the level of reserves determined on non-impaired Substandard loans.  As a result, the allowance for loan losses associated with non-impaired Substandard loans is subject to volatility.

The portion of the allowance for loan losses attributable to non-impaired Substandard loans was $371 at December 31, 2014 and $53 at December 31, 2013.  The increase resulted from both growth of $12,755 in the balance of such loans from December 31, 2013 to December 31, 2014, as well as the application of a higher expected loss percentage on these loans at December 31, 2014 compared to December 31, 2013 from the consideration of additional minor components that commenced on January 1, 2014.

All non-impaired Substandard loans were deemed sufficiently well secured and performing to have remained on accrual status both prior and subsequent to their downgrade to the Substandard internal loan grade.

Non-Impaired Special Mention Loan Component

At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the reserve allocated within the allowance for loan losses associated with non-impaired loans internally classified as Special Mention reflected an expected loss percentage on the Bank's pool of such loans that was derived based upon an analysis of historical losses over a measurement timeframe.  The loss percentage resulting from this analysis was then applied to the aggregate pool of non-impaired Special Mention loans at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.  Based upon this methodology, increases or decreases in the amount of either non-impaired Special Mention loans or charge-offs associated with such loans, or a change in the measurement timeframe utilized to derive the expected loss percentage, would impact the level of reserves determined on non-impaired Special Mention loans.  As a result, the allowance for loan losses associated with non-impaired Special Mention loans is subject to volatility.

The portion of the allowance for loan losses attributable to non-impaired Special Mention loans increased from $185 at December 31, 2013 to $228 at December 31, 2014, due the application of a higher loss percentage on these loans at December 31, 2014 compared to December 31, 2013 from the consideration of additional minor components that commenced on January 1, 2014.

Pass Graded Loan Component

The Bank initially looks to the underlying collateral type when determining the allowance for loan losses associated with pass graded real estate loans.  The following underlying collateral types are analyzed separately: 1) one- to four family residential and condominium or cooperative apartment; 2) multifamily residential and residential mixed use; 3) commercial mixed use real estate, 4) commercial real estate; and 5) construction and land acquisition.  Within the analysis of each underlying collateral type, the following elements are additionally considered and provided weighting in determining the allowance for loan losses for pass graded real estate loans:

(i)
Charge-off experience (including peer charge-off experience)
(ii)
Economic conditions
(iii)
Underwriting standards or experience
(iv)
Loan concentrations
(v)
Regulatory climate
(vi)
Nature and volume of the portfolio
(vii)
Changes in the quality and scope of the loan review function

The following is a brief synopsis of the manner in which each element is considered:

(i)  Charge-off experience - Loans within the pass graded loan portfolio are segmented by significant common characteristics, against which historical loss rates are applied.  The Bank also reviews and considers the charge-off experience of peer banks in its lending marketplace in order to determine whether there may exist potential losses that have taken a longer period to flow through its allowance for loan losses.

(ii) Economic conditions - At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Bank assigned a loss allocation to its entire pass graded real estate loan portfolio based, in part, upon a review of economic conditions affecting the local real estate market. Specifically, the Bank considered both the level of, and recent trends in: 1) the local and national unemployment rate, 2) residential and commercial vacancy rates, 3) real estate sales and pricing, and 4) delinquencies in the Bank's loan portfolio.

(iii) Underwriting standards or experience - Underwriting standards are reviewed to ensure that changes in the Bank's lending policies and practices are adequately evaluated for risk and reflected in its analysis of potential credit losses.  Loss expectations associated with changes in the Bank's lending policies and practices, if any, are then incorporated into the methodology.

(iv) Concentrations of credit - The Bank regularly reviews its loan concentrations (borrower, collateral type and location) in order to ensure that heightened risk has not evolved that has not been captured through other factors.  The risk component of loan concentrations is regularly evaluated for reserve adequacy.

(v) Regulatory climate – Consideration is given to public statements made by the banking regulatory agencies that have a potential impact on the Bank's loan portfolio and allowance for loan losses.

(vi) Nature and volume of the portfolio – The Bank considers any significant changes in the overall nature and volume of its loan portfolio.

(vii) Changes in the quality and scope of the loan review function – The Bank considers the potential impact upon its allowance for loan losses of any favorable or adverse change in the quality and scope of the loan review function.

Consumer Loans

Due to their small individual balances, the Bank does not evaluate individual consumer loans for impairment.  Loss percentages are applied to aggregate consumer loans based upon both their delinquency status and loan type.  These loss percentages are derived from a combination of the Company's historical loss experience and/or nationally published loss data on such loans.  Consumer loans in excess of 120 days delinquent are typically fully charged off against the allowance for loan losses.

The following table presents data regarding the allowance for loan losses and loans evaluated for impairment by class of loan within the real estate loan segment as well as for the aggregate consumer loan segment:

At or for the Year Ended December 31, 2014
 
Real Estate Loans
Consumer Loans
 
One- to Four Family Residential,
Including Condominium and
Cooperative
Apartment
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
Commercial
Mixed Use Real Estate
Commercial Real Estate
Construction
Total Real Estate
 
Beginning balance
$236 
$13,840 
$3,003 
$3,047 
$3 
$20,129 
$24 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
(164)
(76)
(1,710)
72 
(3)
(1,881) 
Charge-offs
(46)
(87)
(30)
(306)
-  
(469)
(9)
Recoveries
124 
175 
381 
10 
-  
690 
-  
Ending balance
$150 
$13,852 
$1,644 
$2,823 
$- 
$18,469 
$24 
               
Ending balance – loans individually
   evaluated for impairment
$605 
$1,272 
$4,400 
$13,707 
$-  
$19,984 
$-  
Ending balance – loans collectively
   evaluated for impairment
72,895 
3,297,176 
324,267 
403,089 
-  
4,097,427 
1,829 
Allowance balance associated with loans
   individually evaluated for impairment
-  
-  
-  
19 
-  
19 
-  
Allowance balance associated with loans
   collectively evaluated for impairment
150 
13,852 
1,644 
2,804 
-  
18,450 
24 



At or for the Year Ended December 31, 2013
 
Real Estate Loans
Consumer Loans
 
One- to Four Family Residential,
Including Condominium and
Cooperative
Apartment
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
Commercial
Mixed Use Real Estate
Commercial Real Estate
Construction
Total Real Estate
 
Beginning balance
$344 
$14,299 
$2,474 
$3,382 
$24 
$20,523 
$27 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
(187)
10 
891 
(342)
(21)
351 
18 
Charge-offs
(117)
(504)
(391)
(9)
-  
(1,021)
(21)
Recoveries
196 
35 
29 
16 
-  
276 
Ending balance
$236 
$13,840 
$3,003 
$3,047 
$3 
$20,129 
$24 
               
Ending balance – loans individually
   evaluated for impairment
$1,199 
$2,345 
$4,400 
$22,245 
$-  
$30,189 
$-  
Ending balance – loans collectively
   evaluated for impairment
72,757 
2,920,205 
371,510 
302,451 
268 
3,667,191 
2,139 
Allowance balance associated with loans
   individually evaluated for impairment
-  
-  
1,320 
451 
-  
1,771 
Allowance balance associated with loans
   collectively evaluated for impairment
236 
13,840 
1,683 
2,596 
18,358 
24 


At or for the Year Ended December 31, 2012
 
Real Estate Loans
Consumer Loans
 
One- to Four Family Residential,
Including Condominium and
Cooperative
Apartment
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
Commercial Mixed Use
Real Estate
Commercial Real Estate
Construction
Total Real Estate
 
Beginning balance
$480 
$14,313 
$1,528 
$3,783 
$124 
$20,228 
$26 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
624 
1,583 
1,744 
56 
(97)
3,910 
11 
Charge-offs
(777)
(2,478)
(821)
(521)
(3)
(4,600)
(10)
Recoveries
17 
829 
18 
39 
-  
903 
-  
Transfer from reserve for loan commitments
-  
52 
25 
-  
82 
-  
Ending balance
$344 
$14,299 
$2,474 
$3,382 
$24 
$20,523 
$27 
               
Ending balance – loans individually
   evaluated for impairment
$1,291 
$2,460 
$1,900 
$47,493 
$-  
$53,144 
$-  
Ending balance – loans collectively
   evaluated for impairment
90,585 
2,673,909 
338,233 
347,038 
476 
3,450,241 
2,423
Allowance balance associated with loans
   individually evaluated for impairment
-  
-  
513 
-  
520 
-  
Allowance balance associated with loans
   collectively evaluated for impairment
337 
14,299 
2,474 
2,869 
24 
20,003 
27 

The following tables summarize impaired real estate loans as of and for the periods indicated (by collateral type within the real estate loan segment):

 
At December 31, 2014
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2014
 
Unpaid Principal Balance at Period End
Recorded Investment
at Period End(1)
Reserve Balance Allocated within the Allowance for Loan Losses at Period End
Average Recorded Investment(1)
 
Interest
Income Recognized
One- to Four Family Residential, Including
   Condominium and Cooperative Apartment
           
   With no allocated reserve
$646
$605
$- 
$747
 
$58
   With an allocated reserve
41
 
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
           
   With no allocated reserve
1,272
1,272
2,147
 
87
   With an allocated reserve
 
Commercial Mixed Use Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
4,425 
4,400
2,640
 
237
   With an allocated reserve
1,760
 
Commercial Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
10,306
8,207
7,470
 
148
   With an allocated reserve
5,500
5,500
19
9,317
 
495
Construction
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
 
   With an allocated reserve
 
Total
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
$16,649
$14,484
$- 
$13,004
 
$530
   With an allocated reserve
$5,500
$5,500
$19
$11,118
 
$495
(1)
The recorded investment excludes accrued interest receivable and loan origination fees, net, due to immateriality.

 
At December 31, 2013
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
 
Unpaid Principal Balance at Period End
Recorded Investment
at Period End(1)
Reserve Balance Allocated within the Allowance for Loan Losses at Period End
Average Recorded Investment(1)
 
Interest
Income Recognized
One- to Four Family Residential, Including Condominium and Cooperative Apartment
           
   With no allocated reserve
$1,066
$987
$- 
$1,010
 
$42
   With an allocated reserve
255
212
211
 
14
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
           
   With no allocated reserve
2,494
2,345
2,851
 
163
   With an allocated reserve
 
Commercial Mixed Use Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
1,272
 
200
   With an allocated reserve
4,500
4,400
1,320
880
 
Commercial Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
8,316
7,203
22,787
 
1,100
   With an allocated reserve
15,042
15,042
451
15,168
 
857
Construction
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
 
   With an allocated reserve
 
Total
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
$11,876
$10,535
$- 
$27,920
 
$1,505
   With an allocated reserve
$19,797
$19,654
$1,771
$16,259
 
$871
(1) The recorded investment excludes accrued interest receivable and loan origination fees, net, due to immateriality.


 
At December 31, 2012
For the Year Ended
December 31, 2012
 
Unpaid Principal Balance at Period End
Recorded Investment
at Period End(1)
Reserve Balance Allocated within the Allowance for Loan Losses at Period End
Average Recorded Investment(1)
 
Interest
Income Recognized
One- to Four Family Residential, Including Condominium and Cooperative Apartment
           
   With no allocated reserve
$1,079
$1,079
$- 
$867
 
$55
   With an allocated reserve
258
212
7
452
 
19
Multifamily Residential and Residential Mixed Use
           
   With no allocated reserve
2,767
2,460
5,434
 
341
   With an allocated reserve
420
 
-  
Commercial Mixed Use Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
1,900
1,900
2,516
 
74
   With an allocated reserve
192
 
-  
Commercial Real Estate
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
33,416
32,217
29,362
 
1,675
   With an allocated reserve
15,276
15,276
513
20,087
 
746
Construction
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
 
-  
   With an allocated reserve
 
-  
Total
     
 
   
   With no allocated reserve
$39,162
$37,656
$- 
$38,179
 
$2,145 
   With an allocated reserve
$15,534
$15,488
$520
$21,151
 
$765 
(1) The recorded investment excludes accrued interest receivable and loan origination fees, net, due to immateriality.


Reserve Liability for First Loss Position

Until February 20, 2014, the Bank serviced a pool of loans that it sold to FNMA and was subject to the First Loss Position.  The Bank maintained a reserve liability in relation to the First Loss Position that reflected estimated losses on this loan pool.  On February 20, 2014, the Bank repurchased the remaining loans within this pool and extinguished both the First Loss Position and related reserve liability.

The following is a summary of the aggregate balance of multifamily loans serviced for FNMA, the period-end First Loss Position associated with these loans and activity in the related liability:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Outstanding balance of multifamily loans serviced for FNMA at period end
$- 
$208,375 
$256,731 
Total First Loss Position at end of period
-  
15,428 
15,428 
Reserve Liability on the First Loss Position
     
Balance at beginning of period
$1,040 
$1,383 
$2,993 
Credit for losses on problem loans (1)
(1,040)
(305)
(1,286)
Charge-offs and other net reductions in balance
-  
(38)
(324)
Balance at period end
$-  
$1,040 
$1,383 
(1) Amount recognized as a portion of mortgage banking income during the period.

The total First Loss Position remained unchanged during the year ended December 31, 2013 and was reduced by $928 during the year ended December 31, 2012.


7.   MORTGAGE SERVICING ACTIVITIES AND MORTGAGE BANKING INCOME

At December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, the Bank was servicing loans for others having principal balances outstanding of approximately $24,253, $247,263, and $361,820, respectively.  Servicing loans for others generally consists of collecting mortgage payments, maintaining escrow accounts, disbursing payments to investors, paying taxes and insurance, and processing foreclosure.  In connection with loans serviced for others, the Bank held borrowers' escrow balances of approximately $295 and $4,378 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

There are no restrictions on the Company's consolidated assets or liabilities related to loans sold with servicing rights retained.  Upon sale of these loans, the Company recorded an MSR, and has elected to account for the MSR under the "amortization method" prescribed under GAAP.  The aggregate MSR balance was $351 at December 31, 2014, $628 at December 31, 2013 and $1,115 at December 31, 2012.


Net mortgage banking income presented in the consolidated statements of operations was comprised of the following items:

 
Year Ended December 31,
 
2014  
2013  
2012  
Gain on the sale of loans originated for sale
$27 
$13 
$68 
Credit to reduce the liability for the First Loss Position
1,040 
305 
1,286 
Mortgage banking fees
158 
155 
414 
Net mortgage banking income
$1,225 
$473 
$1,768 


8.   PREMISES AND FIXED ASSETS, NET AND PREMISES HELD FOR SALE


The following is a summary of premises and fixed assets, net and premises held for sale:

 
At December 31,
2014
At December 31,
2013
Land
$7,067 
$7,067 
Buildings
19,952 
19,445 
Leasehold improvements
12,045 
11,665 
Furniture, fixtures and equipment
14,080 
13,366 
Premises and fixed assets, gross
$53,144 
$51,543 
Less:  accumulated depreciation and amortization
(28,079)
(25,466)
Premises and fixed assets, net
$25,065 
$26,077 
Premises held for sale(1)
3,624 
(1)
At December 31, 2013, the Company had a pending contract of sale on a real estate premises with a net book value of $3,624.  This sale was completed during the year ended December 31, 2014, and the net proceeds from the sale exceeded the current book value.


Depreciation and amortization expense amounted to approximately $2,630, $2,780 and $2,828 during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  Proceeds from the sales of premises and fixed assets were $4,273 during the year ended December 31, 2014.  A gain of $649 was recognized on these sales.  There were no sales of premises and fixed assets during the year ended December 31, 2013.  Proceeds from the sales of premises and fixed assets were $17,477 during the year ended December 31, 2012.  A gain of $13,726 was recognized on these sales.

9.   FHLBNY CAPITAL STOCK

The Bank is a Savings Bank Member of the FHLBNY.  Membership requires the purchase of shares of FHLBNY capital stock at $100 per share. The Bank owned 584,070 shares and 480,508 shares at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The Bank recorded dividends on the FHLBNY capital stock of $2,091, $1,698 and $2,124 during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.


10.   DUE TO DEPOSITORS

Deposits are summarized as follows:

 
At December 31, 2014
At December 31, 2013
 
Effective Cost
 
Liability
Effective Cost
 
Liability
Savings accounts
0.05%
$372,753
0.05%
$376,900
Certificates of deposit ("CDs")
1.43   
926,318
1.55   
828,409
Money market accounts
0.61   
1,094,698
0.50   
1,040,079
Interest bearing checking accounts
0.08   
78,430
0.08   
87,301
Non-interest bearing checking accounts
-    
187,593
-    
174,457
TOTAL
0.76%
$2,659,792
0.73%
$2,507,146

The following table presents a summary of future maturities of CDs outstanding at December 31, 2014:

 
 
Year Ending December 31,
Maturing  Balance
Weighted Average Interest Rate
2015
$504,939
1.10%
2016
113,041
1.32   
2017
87,517
1.84   
2018
99,067
2.25   
2019
110,392
1.98   
2020 and beyond
11,362
1.71   
TOTAL
$926,318
1.43%(1)
(1) The weighted average cost of CDs, inclusive of their contractual compounding of interest, was 1.43% at December 31, 2014.

CDs that meet or exceed the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation ("FDIC") Insurance limit of two-hundred and fifty thousand dollars were approximately $122,603 and $77,369 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.


11.   REPOS

Presented below is information concerning REPOS:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Balance outstanding at end of period
$-    
$-    
$-   
Average interest cost at end of period
-%
-%
-%
Average balance outstanding during the period
$-   
$-   
$132,910
Average interest cost during the period
-%
-%
26.24%(a)
Estimated fair value of underlying collateral
$-   
$-   
$- 
Maximum balance outstanding at month end during the year
$-    
$-    
$195,000   
(a) Excluding a prepayment charge of $28,772 included in interest expense on borrowed funds in the consolidated statements of operations, the average interest cost would have been 4.33% during the year ended December 31, 2012.

12.   FHLBNY ADVANCES

The Bank had borrowings (''Advances'') from the FHLBNY totaling $1,173,725 and $910,000 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, all of which were fixed rate. The average interest cost of FHLBNY Advances was 2.28%, 2.89%, and 2.96% during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.  The average interest rate on outstanding FHLBNY Advances was 1.74% and 2.35% at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.  In accordance with its Advances, Collateral Pledge and Security Agreement with the FHLBNY, the Bank was eligible
to borrow up to $1,568,197 as of December 31, 2014 and $1,203,939 as of December 31, 2013, and maintained sufficient qualifying collateral, as defined by the FHLBNY, with the FHLBNY (principally real estate loans), to secure Advances in excess of its borrowing limit at both December 31, 2014 and 2013.  Certain of the FHLBNY Advances outstanding at December 31, 2014 contained call features that may be exercised by the FHLBNY.  Prepayment penalties were associated with all fixed rate Advances outstanding as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

The following table presents a summary of future maturities of FHLBNY Advances outstanding at December 31, 2014:

 
 
Year Ending December 31,
 
Maturing
Balance
   
Weighted Average Interest Rate
 
2015
 
$
569,500
     
1.48
%
2016
   
151,000
     
2.03
 
2017
   
302,075
     
2.04
 
2018
   
77,100
     
1.63
 
2019
   
36,250
     
1.80
 
After 2019
   
37,800
     
2.46
 
TOTAL
 
$
1,173,725
     
1.74
%

13.   TRUST PREFERRED SECURITIES PAYABLE

On March 19, 2004, the Holding Company completed an offering of trust preferred securities through Dime Community Capital Trust I, an unconsolidated special purpose entity formed for the purpose of the offering.  The trust preferred securities bear a fixed interest rate of 7.0%, mature on April 14, 2034, and became callable without penalty at any time on or after April 15, 2009.  The outstanding balance of the trust preferred securities was $70,680 at both December 31, 2014 and 2013.  The Holding Company currently does not intend to call this debt.

Interest expense recorded on the trust preferred securities totaled $5,024 during each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively
14.   INCOME TAXES

The Company's consolidated Federal, State and City income tax provisions were comprised of the following:

   
Year Ended December 31,
   
Year Ended December 31,
   
Year Ended December 31,
 
       
2014
           
2013
           
2012
     
   
Federal
   
State
and City
   
Total
   
Federal
   
State
and City
   
Total
   
Federal
   
State
and City
   
Total
 
Current
 
$
21,232
   
$
8,121
   
$
29,353
   
$
22,475
   
$
7,806
   
$
30,281
   
$
21,607
   
$
7,351
   
$
28,958
 
Deferred
   
540
     
231
     
771
     
362
     
(1,302
)
   
(940
)
   
(1,395
)
   
(673
)
   
(2,068
)
TOTAL
 
$
21,772
   
$
8,352
   
$
30,124
   
$
22,837
   
$
6,504
   
$
29,341
   
$
20,212
   
$
6,678
   
$
26,890
 

The preceding table excludes tax effects recorded directly to stockholders' equity in connection with unrealized gains and losses on securities available-for-sale (including losses on such securities upon their transfer to held-to-maturity), stock-based compensation plans, and adjustments to other comprehensive income relating to the minimum pension liability, unrecognized gains of pension and other postretirement obligations and changes in the non-credit component of OTTI.  These tax effects are disclosed as part of the presentation of the consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity and Comprehensive Income.

The provision for income taxes differed from that computed at the Federal statutory rate as follows:

   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Tax at Federal statutory rate
 
$
26,029
   
$
25,511
   
$
23,519
 
State and local taxes, net of federal income tax benefit
   
5,466
     
4,228
     
4,341
 
Benefit plan differences
   
(156
)
   
(445
)
   
(114
)
Adjustments for prior period returns and tax items
   
(164
)
   
422
     
63
 
Investment in BOLI
   
(610
)
   
(585
)
   
(591
)
Other, net
   
(441
)
   
210
     
(328
)
TOTAL
 
$
30,124
   
$
29,341
   
$
26,890
 
Effective tax rate
   
40.51
%
   
40.25
%
   
40.02
%


Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded for temporary differences between the book and tax bases of assets and liabilities.  The components of Federal, State and City deferred income tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

   
At December 31,
 
Deferred tax assets:
 
2014
   
2013
 
Allowance for loan losses
 
$
8,261
   
$
9,518
 
Employee benefit plans
   
19,487
     
15,478
 
Credit component of OTTI
   
4,023
     
4,088
 
Tax effect of other components of income on investment securities and MBS
   
109
     
-
 
Other
   
1,515
     
2,435
 
Total deferred tax assets
   
33,395
     
31,519
 
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
Tax effect of other components of income on investment securities and MBS
   
-
     
559
 
Difference in book and tax carrying value of fixed assets
   
983
     
986
 
Other
   
16
     
109
 
Total deferred tax liabilities
   
999
     
1,654
 
Net deferred tax asset (recorded in other assets)
 
$
32,396
   
$
29,865
 

No valuation allowances were recognized on deferred tax assets during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, since, at each period end, it was deemed more likely than not that the deferred tax assets would be fully realized.

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank had accumulated bad debt reserves totaling $15,158 for which no provision for income tax was required to be recorded. These bad debt reserves could be subject to recapture into taxable income under certain circumstances, including a distribution of the bad debt benefits to the Holding Company or the failure of the Bank to qualify as a bank for federal income tax purposes.  Should the reserves as of December 31, 2014 be fully recaptured, the Bank would recognize $6,844 in additional income tax expense.    Should the reserves as of December 31, 2013 be fully recaptured, the Bank would recognize $6,844 in additional income tax expense.  The Company expects to take no action in the foreseeable future that would require the establishment of a tax liability associated with these bad debt reserves.

The Company is subject to regular examination by various tax authorities in jurisdictions in which it conducts significant business operations.  The Company regularly assesses the likelihood of additional examinations in each of the tax jurisdictions resulting from ongoing assessments.

Under current accounting rules, all tax positions adopted are subjected to two levels of evaluation.  Initially, a determination is made, based on the technical merits of the position, as to whether it is more likely than not that a tax position will be sustained upon examination, including resolution of any related appeals or litigation processes. In conducting this evaluation, management is required to presume that the position will be examined by the appropriate taxing authority possessing full knowledge of all relevant information. The second level of evaluation is the measurement of a tax position that satisfies the more-likely-than-not recognition threshold.  This measurement is performed in order to determine the amount of benefit to recognize in the financial statements. The tax position is measured at the largest amount of benefit that is greater than 50 percent likely to be realized upon ultimate settlement.  The Company had no unrecognized tax benefits as of December 31, 2014 or 2013.  The Company does not anticipate any material change to unrecognized tax benefits during the year ending December 31, 2015.

As of December 31, 2014, the tax years ended December 31, 2011, 2012, 2013 and 2014 remained subject to examination by all of the Company's relevant tax jurisdictions.  While the Company is currently under audit by
certain taxing jurisdictions, no material impact to the financial statements is expected to result from these examinations.

15.   EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

Employee Retirement Plan - The Bank sponsors the Employee Retirement Plan, a tax-qualified, noncontributory, defined-benefit retirement plan.  Prior to April 1, 2000, substantially all full-time employees of at least 21 years of age were eligible for participation after one year of service.  Effective April 1, 2000, the Bank froze all participant benefits under the Employee Retirement Plan.


The net periodic cost for the Employee Retirement Plan included the following components:

   
Year Ended December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
   
2012
 
Interest cost
 
$
1,003
   
$
877
   
$
921
 
Expected return on plan assets
   
(1,774
)
   
(1,518
)
   
(1,451
)
Amortization of unrealized loss
   
948
     
1,803
     
1,792
 
Net periodic cost
 
$
177
   
$
1,162
   
$
1,262
 

The funded status of the Employee Retirement Plan was as follows:

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Accumulated benefit obligation at end of period
 
$
27,635
   
$
22,751
 
Reconciliation of Projected benefit obligation:
               
Projected benefit obligation at beginning of period
 
$
22,751
   
$
24,640
 
Interest cost
   
1,003
     
877
 
Actuarial (gain) loss
   
5,166
     
(1,541
)
Benefit payments
   
(1,183
)
   
(1,099
)
Settlements
   
(102
)
   
(126
)
Projected benefit obligation at end of period
   
27,635
     
22,751
 
Plan assets at fair value (investments in trust funds managed by trustee)
               
Balance at beginning of period
   
24,402
     
20,958
 
Return on plan assets
   
1,327
     
4,156
 
Contributions
   
13
     
513
 
Benefit payments
   
(1,183
)
   
(1,099
)
Settlements
   
(102
)
   
(126
)
Balance at end of period
   
24,457
     
24,402
 
Funded status at end of year
 
$
(3,178
)
 
$
1,651
 

 
The change in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) that resulted from the Employee Retirement Plan is summarized as follows:

 
 At December 31,
 
2014
2013
Balance at beginning of period
$(8,798)
$(14,780)
Amortization of unrealized loss
948 
1,803 
Gain (loss) recognized during the year
(5,613) 
4,179 
Balance at the end of the period
$(13,463)
$(8,798)
Period end component of accumulated other comprehensive loss (net of tax)
7,384 
4,826 

For the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank used December 31 st as its measurement date for the Employee Retirement Plan.  The Bank contributed $13 to the Employee Retirement Plan during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The Bank expects to make contributions of $14 to the Employee Retirement Plan during the year ending December 31, 2015.  During the year ending December 31, 2015, $1,677 in actuarial losses are anticipated to be recognized as a component of net periodic cost.


Major assumptions utilized to determine the net periodic cost of the benefit obligations were as follows:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Discount rate used for net periodic cost
4.56%
3.67%
4.15%
Discount rate used to determine benefit obligation at period end
3.72   
4.56   
3.67   
Expected long-term return on plan assets used for net periodic cost
7.50   
7.50   
7.50   
Expected long-term return on plan assets used to determine benefit obligation at period end
7.00   
7.50   
7.50   

The Employee Retirement Plan assets are invested in two diversified investment portfolios of the Pentegra Retirement Trust (the "Trust"), a private placement investment fund, that has been given discretion by the Bank to determine the appropriate strategic asset allocation versus plan liabilities, as governed by the Trust's Investment Policy Statement.

The Employee Retirement Plan's asset allocation targets to hold 65% of assets in equity securities via investment in the Long-Term Growth Equity Portfolio ("LTGE"), 34% in intermediate-term investment grade bonds via investment in the Long-Term Growth Fixed-Income Portfolio ("LTGFI"), and 1% in a cash equivalents portfolio (for liquidity).  Asset rebalancing is performed at least annually, with interim adjustments when the investment mix varies in excess of 10% from the target.

The LTGE is a diversified portfolio of six registered mutual funds and seven common collective trust funds.  The LTGE holds a diversified mix of equity funds in order to gain exposure to the U.S. and non-U.S. equity markets. The common collective investment funds held by the LTGE were privately offered, and the Employee Retirement Plan's investment in these common collective investment funds was therefore valued by the fund managers of each respective fund based on the Employee Retirement Plan's proportionate share of units of beneficial interest in the respective funds.  All of the common collective investment funds are audited, and the overwhelming majority of assets held in these funds (which derive the unit value of the common collective investment funds) are actively traded in established marketplaces.  The six registered mutual funds held by the LTGE are all actively traded on national securities exchanges and are valued at their quoted market prices.

The LTGFI is a diversified portfolio that invests in two intermediate-term bond funds, both of which are registered mutual funds.  These mutual funds are actively traded on national securities exchanges and are valued at their quoted market prices.

The investment goal is to achieve investment results that will contribute to the proper funding of the Employee Retirement Plan by exceeding the rate of inflation over the long-term.  In addition, investment managers for the trust function managing the assets of the Employee Retirement Plan are expected to provide a reasonable return on investment.  Performance volatility is also monitored.  Risk and volatility are further managed by the distinct investment objectives of each of the trust funds and the diversification within each fund.

The weighted average allocation by asset category of the assets of the Employee Retirement Plan were summarized as follows:

 
At December 31,
 
2014
2013
Asset Category
   
Equity securities
66%
71%
Debt securities (bond mutual funds)
32   
29   
Cash equivalents
2   
-    
Total
100%
100%

The allocation percentages in the above table were consistent with future planned allocation percentages as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

The following table sets forth by level within the fair value hierarchy a summary of the Employee Retirement Plan's investments measured at fair value on a recurring basis at December 31, 2014 (See Note 17 for a discussion of the fair value hierarchy).

 
Fair Value Measurements Using
   
Description
Quoted Prices in Active Markets for Identical Assets (Level 1)
Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)
Significant Unobservable Inputs
(Level 3)
 
Total
Mutual Funds (all registered and publicly traded):
         
    Domestic Large Cap
$2,920
-  
-  
 
$2,920
    Domestic Mid Cap
1,417
-  
-  
 
1,417
    Domestic Small Cap
499
-  
-  
 
499
    International Equity
3,076
-  
-  
 
3,076
    Fixed Income
7,786
-  
-  
 
7,786
    Cash equivalents
687
-  
-  
 
687
Common collective investment funds:
         
    Domestic Large Cap
-  
5,012
-  
 
5,012
    Domestic Mid Cap
-  
679
-  
 
679
    Domestic Small Cap
-  
1,483
-  
 
1,483
    International Equity
-  
898
-  
 
898
Total Plan Assets
       
$24,457

The following table sets forth by level within the fair value hierarchy a summary of the Employee Retirement Plan's investments measured at fair value on a recurring basis at December 31, 2013 (See Note 17 for a discussion of the fair value hierarchy).

 
Fair Value Measurements Using
   
Description
Quoted Prices in Active Markets for Identical Assets (Level 1)
Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)
Significant Unobservable Inputs
(Level 3)
 
Total
Mutual Funds (all registered and publicly traded) :
         
    Domestic Large Cap
$6,621
-  
-  
 
$6,621
    Domestic Small Cap
3,455
-  
-  
 
3,455
    International Equity
2,790
-  
-  
 
2,790
    Fixed Income
4,747
-  
-  
 
4,747
Common collective investment funds:
         
    Domestic Large Cap
-  
4,435
-  
 
4,435
    Fixed Income
-  
2,354
-  
 
2,354
Total Plan Assets
       
$24,402


The expected long-term rate of return assumptions on Employee Retirement Plan assets were established based upon historical returns earned by equities and fixed income securities, adjusted to reflect expectations of future returns as applied to the Employee Retirement Plan's target allocation of asset classes.  Equities and fixed income securities were assumed to earn real annual rates of return in the ranges of 6% to 8% and 3% to 5%, respectively.  The long-term inflation rate was estimated to be 2.5%.  When these overall return expectations were applied to the Employee Retirement Plan's target allocation, the expected annual rate of return was determined to be 7.00% at December 31, 2014 and 7.50% at December 31, 2013.


Benefit payments, which reflect expected future service (as appropriate), are anticipated to be made as follows:

Year Ending December 31,
   
2015
 
$1,616
2016
 
1,639
2017
 
1,625
2018
 
1,616
2019
 
1,613
2020 to 2024
 
7,858

BMP and Director Retirement Plan - The Holding Company and Bank maintain the BMP, which exists in order to compensate executive officers for any curtailments in benefits due to statutory limitations on benefit plans.  As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the BMP had investments, held in a rabbi trust, in the Holding Company's common stock of $13,232 and $13,595, respectively.  Benefit accruals under the defined benefit portion of the BMP were suspended on April 1, 2000, when they were suspended under the Employee Retirement Plan.

Effective July 1, 1996, the Company established the Director Retirement Plan to provide benefits to each eligible outside director commencing upon the earlier of termination of Board service or at age 75.  The Director Retirement Plan was frozen on March 31, 2005, and only outside directors serving prior to that date are eligible for benefits.


The combined net periodic cost for the defined benefit portions of the BMP and the Director Retirement Plan included the following components:

 
Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Interest cost
$347 
$281 
$304 
Amortization of unrealized loss
98 
545 
372 
Net periodic cost
$445 
$826 
$676 

The combined funded status of the defined benefit portions of the BMP and the Director Retirement Plan was as follows:

   
At December 31,
 
   
2014
   
2013
 
Accumulated benefit obligation at end of period
 
$
11,077
   
$
8,645
 
Reconciliation of projected benefit obligation:
               
Projected benefit obligation at beginning of period
 
$
8,645
   
$
8,958
 
Interest cost
   
347
     
281
 
Benefit payments
   
(181
)
   
(181
)
Actuarial (gain) loss
   
2,266
     
(413
)
Projected benefit obligation at end of period
   
11,077
     
8,645
 
Plan assets at fair value:
               
Balance at beginning of period
   
-
     
-
 
Contributions
   
181
     
181
 
Benefit payments
   
(181
)
   
(181
)
Balance at end of period
   
-
     
-
 
Funded status at the end of the year:
 
$
(11,077
)
 
$
(8,645
)
The combined change in accumulated other comprehensive income that resulted from the BMP and Director Retirement Plan is summarized as follows:

 
 At December 31,
 
2014
2013
Balance at beginning of period
$(1,081)
$(2,039)
Adjustment for change in actuarial calculation
-  
-  
Amortization of unrealized loss
98 
545 
Gain (loss) recognized during the year
(2,267)
413 
Balance at the end of the period
$(3,250)
$(1,081)
Period end component of accumulated other comprehensive loss (net of tax)
1,782 
593 

Major assumptions utilized to determine the net periodic cost and benefit obligations for both the BMP and Director Retirement Plan were as follows:

 
At or For the Year
Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Discount rate used for net periodic cost  – BMP
4.00%
3.09%
3.77%
Discount rate used for net periodic cost – Director Retirement Plan
4.22   
3.30   
3.84   
Discount rate used to determine BMP benefit obligation at period end
3.39   
4.00   
3.09   
Discount rate used to determine Director Retirement Plan benefit obligation at period end
3.49   
4.22   
3.30   

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank used December 31 st as its measurement date for both the BMP and Director Retirement Plan.  Both the BMP and Director Retirement Plan are unfunded non-qualified benefit plans that are not anticipated to ever hold assets for investment.  Any contributions made to either the BMP or Director Retirement Plan are expected to be used immediately to pay benefits that accrue.

Actuarial projections performed as of December 31, 2014 assumed the Bank will contribute $604 to the BMP and $188 to the Director Retirement Plan during the year ending December 31, 2015 in order to pay benefits due under the respective plans.  During the year ending December 31, 2015, actuarial losses of $70 related to the BMP and $172 related to the Director Retirement Plan are anticipated to be recognized as a component of net periodic cost.

Combined benefit payments under the BMP and Director Retirement Plan, which reflect expected future service (as appropriate), are anticipated to be made as follows:

Year Ending December 31,
   
2015
 
$792
2016
 
831
2017
 
819
2018
 
807
2019
 
792
2020 to 2024
 
3,870

There is no defined contribution cost incurred by the Holding Company or the Bank under the Director Retirement Plan.  Defined contribution costs incurred by the Company related to the BMP were $1,789, $2,377 and $1,935 for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Postretirement Benefit Plan - The Bank offers the Postretirement Benefit Plan to its retired employees who provided at least five consecutive years of credited service and were active employees prior to April 1, 1991, as follows:

(1)   Qualified employees who retired prior to April 1, 1991 receive the full medical coverage in effect at the time of retirement until their death at no cost to such retirees;

(2)   Qualified employees retiring on or after April 1, 1991 are eligible for medical benefits. Throughout retirement, the Bank will continue to pay the premiums for the coverage not to exceed the premium amount paid for the first year of retirement coverage. Should the premiums increase, the employee is required to pay the differential to maintain full medical coverage.

Postretirement Benefit Plan benefits are available only to full-time employees who commence or commenced collecting retirement benefits from the Retirement Plan immediately upon termination of service from the Bank. The Bank reserves the right at any time, to the extent permitted by law, to change, terminate or discontinue any of the group benefits, and can exercise the maximum discretion permitted by law in administering, interpreting, modifying or taking any other action with respect to the plan or benefits.

The Postretirement Benefit Plan net periodic cost included the following components:

 
Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Service cost
$41 
$60 
$83 
Interest cost
232 
227 
236 
Amortization of unrealized loss
48 
Net periodic cost
$273 
$335 
$321 

Major assumptions utilized to determine the net periodic cost were as follows:

 
At or for the Year
Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Discount rate used for net periodic cost
4.72%
3.72%
4.28%
Rate of increase in compensation levels used for net periodic cost
3.50   
3.50   
3.50   
Discount rate used to determine benefit obligation at period end
3.80   
4.72   
3.72   
Rate of increase in compensation levels used to determine benefit obligation at period end
3.50   
3.50   
3.50   
 
Major assumptions utilized to determine the net periodic cost were as follows:

As of December 31, 2014, an escalation in the assumed medical care cost trend rates by 1% in each year would increase the net periodic cost by approximately $4.  A decline in the assumed medical care cost trend rates by 1% in each year would decrease the net periodic cost by approximately $5.


The funded status of the Postretirement Benefit Plan was as follows:

 
At December 31,
At December 31,
 
2014
2013
Accumulated benefit obligation at end of period
$4,284    
$4,998    
Reconciliation of projected benefit obligation:
   
Projected benefit obligation at beginning of period
$4,998    
$6,191    
Service cost
41    
60    
Interest cost
232    
227    
Actuarial gain (loss)
309    
(1,352)   
Benefit payments
(95)   
(128)   
Plan amendments
(1,201)   
-
Projected benefit obligation at end of period
4,284    
4,998    
Plan assets at fair value:
   
Balance at beginning of period
-     
-    
Contributions
95    
128    
Benefit payments
(95)   
(128)   
Balance at end of period
-      
-      
Funded status:
   
Deficiency of plan assets over projected benefit obligation
(4,284)   
(4,998)   
Unrecognized loss from experience different from that assumed
N/A    
N/A    
Unrecognized net past service liability
N/A    
N/A    
Accrued expense included in other liabilities
$(4,284)   
$(4,998)   

The change in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) that resulted from the Postretirement Benefit Plan is summarized as follows:

 
 At December 31,
 
2014
2013
Balance at beginning of period
$400 
$(1,000)
Amortization of unrealized loss
-  
48 
Gain (loss) recognized during the year
(309)
1,352 
Plan amendments
1,201 
Balance at the end of the period
$1,292 
$400 
Period end component of accumulated other comprehensive loss (net of tax)
(709)
(219)

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank used December 31 st as its measurement date for the Postretirement Benefit Plan.  The assumed medical care cost trend rate used in computing the accumulated Postretirement Benefit Plan obligation was 6.5% in 2015 and was assumed to decrease gradually to 5.0% in 2018 and remain at that level thereafter.  An escalation in the assumed medical care cost trend rates by 1% in each year would increase the accumulated Postretirement Benefit Plan obligation by approximately $153.  A decline in the assumed medical care cost trend rates by 1% in each year would reduce the accumulated Postretirement Benefit Plan obligation by approximately $140.

GAAP provides guidance on both accounting for the effects of the Medicare Prescription Drug Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (the "Act") to employers that sponsor postretirement health care plans which provide prescription drug benefits, and measuring the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation ("APBO") and net periodic postretirement benefit cost, and the effects of the Act on the APBO.  The Company determined that the benefits provided by the Postretirement Benefit Plan are actuarially equivalent to Medicare Part D under the Act.  The effects of an expected subsidy on payments made under the Postretirement Benefit Plan were treated as an actuarial gain for purposes of calculating the APBO as of December 31, 2014 and 2013. The Company remains in the process of claiming this subsidy from the government, and, as a result, the Bank cannot determine the amount of subsidy it will ultimately receive.

The Postretirement Benefit Plan is an unfunded non-qualified benefit plan that is not anticipated to ever hold assets for investment.  Any contributions made to the Postretirement Benefit Plan are expected to be used immediately to pay benefits that accrue.

The Bank expects to contribute $145 to the Postretirement Benefit Plan during the year ending December 31, 2015 in order to pay benefits due under the plan.  During the year ending December 31, 2015, no actuarial gain or losses are anticipated to be recognized as components of net periodic cost.


Benefit payments under the Postretirement Benefit Plan, which reflect expected future service (as appropriate), are expected to be made as follows:

Year Ending December 31,
   
2015
 
$145
2016
 
155
2017
 
161
2018
 
168
2019
 
171
2020 to 2024
 
893

401(k) Plan - The Bank also maintains the 401(k) Plan, which covers substantially all of its employees.  The Bank made discretionary contributions totaling $701, $679 and $647 to eligible 401(k) Plan participants during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively, which were recognized as a component of compensation expense.

The 401(k) Plan owned participant investments in the Holding Company's common stock for the accounts of participants totaling $8,827 and $10,016 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

ESOP - The Holding Company adopted the ESOP in connection with the Bank's June 26, 1996 conversion to stock ownership.  The ESOP borrowed $11,638 from the Holding Company and used the funds to purchase 3,927,825
shares of the Holding Company's common stock.  The loan was originally to be repaid principally from the Bank's discretionary contributions to the ESOP over a period of time not to exceed 10 years from the date of the conversion.  Effective July 1, 2000, the loan agreement was amended to extend the repayment period to thirty years from the date of the conversion, with the right of optional prepayment.  The loan had an outstanding balance of $3,222 and $3,401 at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively, and a fixed rate of 8.0%.

Shares purchased with the loan proceeds are held in a suspense account for allocation among participants as the loan is repaid.  Shares released from the ESOP suspense account are allocated among participants on the basis of compensation, as defined in the plan, in the year of allocation.  ESOP distributions vest at a rate of 25% per year of service, beginning after two years, with full vesting after five years or upon attainment of age 65, death, disability, retirement or a "change of control" of the Holding Company as defined in the ESOP.  Common stock allocated to participating employees totaled 78,155 shares during each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012.   The ESOP benefit expense is recorded based upon the fair value of the award shares, and totaled $1,730, $1,753 and $1,691, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012.  Included in ESOP expense were dividends on unallocated common stock that were paid to participants.  These dividends totaled $525, $569 and $613 during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Stock Option Activity

The Company has made stock option grants to outside Directors and certain officers under the Stock Plans.  All option shares granted have a ten-year life.  The option shares granted to the outside Directors vest over one year, while the option shares granted to officers vest ratably over four years.  The exercise price of each option award was determined based upon the fair market value of the Holding Company's common stock on the respective grant dates.  Compensation expense recorded during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 was determined based upon the fair value of the option shares on the respective dates of grant, as determined utilizing a recognized option pricing methodology.

There were no stock options granted during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.  The weighted average fair value per option at the date of grant for stock options granted during the year indicated was estimated as follows:

 
Year Ended December 31, 2012
Estimated fair value on date of grant
$4.09   
Pricing methodology utilized
Black- Scholes   
Expected life (in years)
6.53   
Interest rate
1.21%
Volatility
45.17   
Dividend yield
4.04   

Combined stock option activity related to the Stock Plans was as follows:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Options outstanding – beginning of period
1,615,771
2,456,137
2,893,760
Options granted
24,440
Weighted average exercise price of grants
$- 
$- 
$13.86
Options exercised
16,960
833,334
455,051
Weighted average exercise price of exercised options
$16.45
$13.47
$12.32
Options that expired prior to being exercised
618,895
7,032
7,012
Weighted average exercise price of forfeited options
$19.90
$16.93
$19.90
Options outstanding - end of period(1)
979,916
1,615,771
2,456,137
Weighted average exercise price of outstanding
   options - end of period
$14.74
$16.74
$15.63
Remaining options available for grant
925,626
1,043,074
249,230
Vested options at end of period
960,641
1,563,493
2,317,799
Weighted average exercise price of vested
   options – end of period
$14.73
$16.80
$15.78
Cash received for option exercise cost
278
11,228
5,608
Income tax benefit recognized
30
531
319
Compensation expense recognized
110
194
309
Remaining unrecognized compensation expense
31
141
335
Weighted average remaining years for which
   compensation expense is to be recognized
0.3
1.2
1.8
Intrinsic value of options exercised during the period
$6
$2,569
$871
Intrinsic value of outstanding options at period end
1,690
2,243
722
Intrinsic value of vested options at period end
1,674
2,129
531
(1) At December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively, expected forfeitures were immaterial.

The range of exercise prices and weighted-average remaining contractual lives of both outstanding and vested options (by option exercise cost) as of December 31, 2014 were as follows:

   
Outstanding Options
 
Vested Options
Exercise Prices
 
Amount
Weighted Average Contractual Years Remaining
 
Amount
Weighted Average Contractual Years Remaining
$8.34
 
24,582
4.3
 
24,582
4.3
$12.75
 
39,589
5.3
 
39,589
5.3
$13.74
 
370,062
2.3
 
370,062
2.3
$13.86
 
17,108
7.3
 
17,108
7.3
$15.10
 
257,579
0.4
 
257,579
0.4
$15.46
 
85,183
6.3
 
65,908
6.3
$16.45
 
59,360
0.1
 
59,360
0.1
$16.73
 
46,453
3.6
 
46,453
3.6
$18.18
 
80,000
3.4
 
80,000
3.4
   Total
 
979,916
2.4
 
960,641
2.3

Restricted Stock Awards

The Company has made restricted stock award grants to outside Directors and certain officers under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan.  Awards made to the outside Directors vest over one year, while officer awards vest ratably over four years.  All awards were made at the fair value of the Holding Company's common stock on the award date.  Compensation expense on all restricted stock awards was thus recorded during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 based upon the fair value of the shares on the respective dates of grant.


The following is a summary of activity related to the restricted stock awards granted under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan:

 
At or for the Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Unvested allocated shares – beginning of period
318,314 
328,003 
324,454 
Shares granted
121,333 
145,925 
141,289 
Shares vested
141,361 
155,614 
135,369 
Shares forfeited
8,626 
-  
2,371 
Unvested allocated shares – end of period
289,660 
318,314 
328,003 
Unallocated shares – end of period
-  
-  
-  
Compensation recorded to expense
$1,976 
$2,011 
$1,842 
Income tax benefit recognized
41 
104 
70 
Fair value of shares vested during the period
$2,266 
$1,944 
$1,834 
Weighted average remaining years for which compensation expense is to be recognized
1.2 
1.2 
1.3 

Long Term Cash Incentive Payment Plan – During the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, the Company established  long term incentive award programs to certain officers that will ultimately be settled in cash.  For each award, a threshold (50% of target), target (100% of target) and maximum (150% of target) payment opportunity is eligible to be earned over a three-year performance period based on the Company's relative performance on certain measurement goals.  Both the measurement goals and the peer group utilized to determine the Company's relative performance are established at the onset of the measurement period and cannot be altered subsequently.

At December 31, 2014, a liability totaling $1,596 was recorded for expected future payments under the long-term cash incentive payment plan. This liability reflects the expectation of the most likely payment outcome determined for each individual incentive award (based upon both period-to-date actual and estimated future results for each award period).  During the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, total expense recognized related to long-term cash incentive payment plan awards were $467, $639 and $717, respectively.

16.   COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

Mortgage Loan Commitments and Lines of Credit - At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank had outstanding commitments to make real estate loans that were accepted by the borrower aggregating approximately $122,092 and $83,831, respectively.  At both December 31, 2014 and 2013, the great majority of these commitments were to originate adjustable-rate real estate loans.  Substantially all of the Bank's commitments expire within three months of their acceptance by the prospective borrower.  The primary concentrations of credit risk associated with these commitments were geographical (as the majority of committed loans were collateralized by properties located in the New York City metropolitan area) and the proportion of the commitments comprised of multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans.

Unused lines of credit available on one- to four-family residential, multifamily residential and commercial real estate loans totaled $37,616 at December 31, 2014 and $40,924 at December 31, 2013.

At December 31, 2014, the Bank had an available line of credit with the FHLBNY equal to its excess borrowing capacity.  At December 31, 2014, this amount approximated $395,000.

Lease Commitments - At December 31, 2014, aggregate minimum annual rental commitments on operating leases were as follows:

Lease Year Ending December 31,
Amount
2015
$3,092
2016
3,155
2017
3,206
2018
3,097
2019
3,094
Thereafter
15,069
   Total
$30,713
 

 
Rental expense for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 totaled $3,388, $3,477, and $3,028, respectively.

Litigation - The Company is subject to certain pending and threatened legal actions which arise out of the normal course of business.  Litigation is inherently unpredictable, particularly in proceedings where claimants seek substantial or indeterminate damages, or which are in their early stages.  The Company cannot predict with certainty the actual loss or range of loss related to such legal proceedings, the manner in which they will be resolved, the timing of final resolution or the ultimate settlement.  Consequently, the Company cannot estimate losses or ranges of losses related to such legal matters, even in instances where it is reasonably possible that a loss will be incurred.  In the opinion of management, after consultation with counsel, the resolution of all ongoing legal proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on the consolidated financial condition or results of operations of the Company.  The Company accounts for potential losses related to litigation in accordance with GAAP.

17.   FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

The fair value hierarchy established under ASC 820-10 is summarized as follows:

Level 1 Inputs – Quoted prices (unadjusted) for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that the reporting entity has the ability to access at the measurement date.

Level 2 Inputs – Significant other observable inputs such as any of the following: (1) quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets, (2) quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active, (3) inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability ( e.g. , interest rates and yield curves observable at commonly quoted intervals, volatilities, prepayment speeds, loss severities, credit risks, and default rates), or (4) inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means (market-corroborated inputs).

Level 3 Inputs – Significant unobservable inputs for the asset or liability.  Significant unobservable inputs reflect the reporting entity's own assumptions about the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability (including assumptions about risk).  Significant unobservable inputs shall be used to measure fair value to the extent that observable inputs are not available, thereby allowing for situations in which there is little, if any, market activity for the asset or liability at the measurement date.

The following tables present the assets that are reported on the consolidated statements of financial condition at fair value as of the date indicated by level within the fair value hierarchy.  Financial assets are classified in their entirety based on the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement.

Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis at December 31, 2014
   
       
Fair Value Measurements Using
   
Description
 
Total
 
Level 1 Inputs
 
Level 2
Inputs
 
Level 3 Inputs
 
Gains (Losses) for the Year Ended
December 31, 2014
Trading securities (Registered Mutual Funds):
                   
   Domestic Equity Mutual Funds
 
$1,399
 
$1,399
 
$- 
 
$- 
 
$1 
   International Equity Mutual Funds
 
159
 
159
 
 
 
(7)
   Fixed Income Mutual Funds
 
7,001
 
7,001
 
 
 
19 
Investment securities available-for-sale:
                   
   Agency notes
 
70
 
 
70
 
 
-  
   Registered Mutual Funds:
                   
      Domestic Equity Mutual Funds
 
2,160
 
2,160
 
 
 
918  
      International Equity Mutual Funds
 
415
 
415
 
 
 
56  
      Fixed Income Mutual Funds
 
1,161
 
1,161
 
 
 
23  
Pass-through MBS issued by GSEs
 
25,607
 
 
25,607
 
 
-  
CMOs  issued by GSEs
 
-
 
 
-
 
 
-  
Private issuer pass through MBS
 
455
 
 
455
 
 
-  
Private issuer CMOs
 
347
 
 
347
 
 
-  



Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis at December 31, 2013
   
       
Fair Value Measurements Using
   
Description
 
Total
 
Level 1 Inputs
 
Level 2 Inputs
Level 3 Inputs
 
Gains (Losses) for
the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
Trading Securities (Registered Mutual Funds)
                 
   Domestic Equity Mutual Funds
 
$1,311
 
$1,311
 
$- 
$- 
 
$290 
   International Equity Mutual Funds
 
164
 
164
 
 
23 
   Fixed Income Mutual Funds
 
5,347
 
5,347
 
 
(48)
Investment securities available-for-sale:
               
-  
   Agency notes
 
15,091
 
 
15,091
 
-  
   Registered Mutual Funds:
                 
      Domestic Equity Mutual Funds
 
2,016
 
2,016
 
 
-  
      International Equity Mutual Funds
 
427
 
427
 
 
-  
      Fixed Income Mutual Funds
 
1,115
 
1,115
 
 
-  
Pass-through MBS issued by GSEs
 
29,959
 
 
29,959
 
CMOs  issued by GSEs
 
321
 
 
321
 
Private issuer pass through MBS
 
680
 
 
680
 
Private issuer CMOs
 
583
 
 
583
 


The Company's available-for-sale investment securities and MBS are reported at fair value, which were determined utilizing prices obtained from independent parties. The valuations obtained are based upon market data, and often utilize evaluated pricing models that vary by asset and incorporate available trade, bid and other market information. For securities that do not trade on a daily basis, pricing applications apply available information such as benchmarking and matrix pricing. The market inputs normally sought in the evaluation of securities include benchmark yields, reported trades, broker/dealer quotes (obtained only from market makers or broker/dealers recognized as market participants), issuer spreads, two-sided markets, benchmark securities, bids, offers and reference data. For certain securities, additional inputs may be used or some market inputs may not be applicable.  Prioritization of inputs may vary on any given day based on market conditions.

With one immaterial exception, the agency notes and MBS owned by the Company possessed the highest possible credit rating published by at least one established credit rating agency as of both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013.  Obtaining market values as of December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013 for these securities utilizing significant observable inputs was not difficult due to their continued marketplace demand.

Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Non-Recurring Basis at December 31, 2014
       
Fair Value Measurements Using
Description
 
Total
 
Level 1 Inputs
 
Level 2 Inputs
Level 3 Inputs
Impaired loans:
             
   One- to Four Family Residential, Including
        Condominium and Cooperative Apartment
 
$- 
 
 
$- 
   Multifamily Residential and Residential
        Mixed Use Real Estate
 
 
 
   Commercial Mixed Use Real Estate
 
4,400
 
 
4,400
   Commercial Real Estate
 
 
 

Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Non-Recurring Basis at December 31, 2013
       
Fair Value Measurements Using
Description
 
Total
 
Level 1 Inputs
 
Level 2 Inputs
Level 3 Inputs
Impaired loans:
             
   One- to Four Family Residential, Including
        Condominium and Cooperative Apartment
 
$477
 
 
$477
   Multifamily Residential and Residential
        Mixed Use Real Estate
 
325
 
 
325
   Commercial Mixed Use Real Estate
 
4,400
 
 
4,400
   Commercial Real Estate
 
5,707
 
 
5,707


      Impaired Loans - Loans with certain characteristics are evaluated individually for impairment. A loan is considered impaired under ASC 310-10-35 when, based upon existing information and events, it is probable that the Bank will be unable to collect all amounts due, including principal and interest, according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. The Bank's impaired loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013 were collateralized by real estate and were thus carried at the lower of the outstanding principal balance or the estimated fair value of the collateral.  Fair value is estimated through either a negotiated note sale value (Level 2 input), or, more commonly, a recent real
estate appraisal (Level 3 input).  These appraisals may utilize a single valuation approach or a combination of approaches including comparable sales and the income approach. Adjustments are routinely made in the appraisal process by the independent appraisers to adjust for differences between the comparable sales and income data available. Such adjustments are usually significant and typically result in a Level 3 classification of the inputs for determining fair value.

An appraisal is generally ordered for all impaired multifamily residential, mixed use or commercial real estate loans for which the most recent appraisal is more than one year old.  The Bank never adjusts independent appraisal data upward.  Occasionally, management will adjust independent appraisal data downward based upon its own lending expertise and/or experience with the subject property, utilizing such factors as potential note sale values, or a more refined estimate of costs to repair and time to lease the property.  Adjustments for potential disposal costs are also considered when determining the final appraised value.

As of December 31, 2014, impaired loans measured for impairment using the estimated fair value of the collateral had an aggregate principal balance of $4,400, and no valuation allowance within the allowance for loan losses.  As of December 31, 2013, impaired loans measured for impairment using the estimated fair value of the collateral had an aggregate principal balance of $12,392, and valuation allowance of $1,320 within the allowance for loan losses. The removal of the $1,320 valuation allowance impacted the provision for loan losses during the year ended December 31, 2014.  The recognition of the $1,320 valuation allowance similarly impacted the provision for loan losses during the year ended December 31, 2013.  Otherwise, these loans had no impact on the provision for loan losses.


The following table presents quantitative information about Level 3 fair value measurements for impaired loans measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis at December 31, 2014:

Fair Value Derived
Valuation Technique Utilized
Significant Unobservable Input(s)
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Weighted Average Value
$4,400
Income approach only
Capitalization rate
N/A(1)
N/A(1)
7.5%
(1)  Only one loan in this population.

The following table presents quantitative information about Level 3 fair value measurements for impaired loans measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis at December 31, 2013:

Fair Value Derived
Valuation Technique Utilized
Significant Unobservable Input(s)
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Weighted Average Value
$4,607
Income approach only
Capitalization rate
N/A(1)
N/A(1)
7.5%
   
Reduction for planned expedited disposal
N/A(1)
N/A(1)
0.4%
           
802
Blended income and sales comparison approaches
Reduction to the sales comparison value to reconcile differences between comparable sales
0.0%
15.0%
5.0%
   
Capitalization rate (income approach component)
7.8%
8.5%
8.3%
   
Reduction for planned expedited disposal
20.0%
30.0%
26.0%
5,500
Previously negotiated note sales
Discount to unpaid principal balance from likely realizable value of a note sale based upon comparable note sale experience
N/A(1)
N/A(1)
17.0%
(1)
Only one loan in population.
 

 
The carrying amounts and estimated fair values of financial instruments at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013 were as follows:

     
Fair Value at December 31, 2014 Using
 
At December 31, 2014
Carrying
Amount
 
Level 1
Inputs
Level 2
Inputs
Level 3
Inputs
Total
Assets:
           
Cash and due from banks
$78,187
 
$78,187
$- 
$- 
$78,187
Investment securities held to maturity (TRUPS)
5,367
 
6,315
6,315
Loans, net (excluding impaired loans carried at fair value)
4,096,347
 
4,188,137
4,188,137
Accrued interest receivable
12,664
 
104
12,558
12,664
MSR
351
 
351
351
FHLBNY capital stock
58,407
 
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Liabilities:
           
Savings, money market and checking accounts
1,733,474
 
1,733,474
1,733,474
CDs
926,318
 
934,324
934,324
Escrow and other deposits
91,921
 
91,921
91,921
FHLBNY Advances
1,173,725
 
1,186,069
1,186,069
Trust Preferred securities payable
70,680
 
70,680
70,680
Accrued interest payable
2,729
 
2,729
2,729

     
Fair Value at December 31, 2013 Using
 
At December 31, 2013
Carrying
Amount
 
Level 1
Inputs
Level 2
Inputs
Level 3
Inputs
Total
Assets:
           
Cash and due from banks
$45,777
 
$45,777
$- 
$- 
$45,777
Investment securities held to maturity (TRUPS)
5,341
 
5,163
5,163
Loans, net (excluding impaired loans carried at fair value)
3,668,457
 
3,707,695
3,707,695
Loans held for sale
3,624
 
4,400 
4,400
Accrued interest receivable
12,066
 
178
11,888
12,066
MSR
628
 
1,006
1,006
FHLBNY capital stock
48,051
 
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Liabilities:
           
Savings, money market and checking accounts
1,678,737
 
1,678,737
1,678,737
CDs
828,409
 
839,059
839,059
Escrow and other deposits
69,404
 
69,404
69,404
FHLBNY Advances
910,000
 
934,336
934,336
Trust Preferred securities payable
70,680
 
70,680
70,680
Accrued interest payable
2,642
 
2,642
2,642

Methods and assumptions used to estimate fair values for financial assets and liabilities other than those previously discussed are summarized as follows:

Cash and Due From Banks – The fair value is assumed to be equal to their carrying value as these amounts are due upon demand (deemed a Level 1 valuation).

Federal Funds Sold and Other Short Term Investments – As a result of their short duration to maturity, the fair value of these assets, principally overnight deposits, is assumed to be equal to their carrying value due (deemed a Level 1 valuation).

TRUPS Held to Maturity – At both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Company owned seven TRUPS classified as held-to-maturity.  Late in 2008, the market for these securities became illiquid, and continued to be deemed illiquid as of December 31, 2014.  As a result, at both December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, their estimated fair value was obtained utilizing a blended valuation approach (Level 3 pricing).  Under the blended valuation approach, the Bank utilized the following valuation sources: 1) broker quotations, which were deemed to meet the criteria of "distressed sale" pricing under the guidance of ASC 820-10-65-4, were given a minor 10% weighting (deemed to be a Level 2 valuation); 2) an internally created cash flow valuation model that considered the creditworthiness of each individual issuer underlying the collateral pools, and utilized default, cash flow and discount rate assumptions determined by the Company's management (the "Internal Cash Flow Valuation"), was given a 45% weighting (deemed to be a Level 3 valuation); and 3) a minimum of two of three available independent cash flow valuation models were averaged and given a 45% weighting (deemed to be a Level 3 valuation for which
the Company is not provided detailed information regarding the significant unobservable inputs utilized by the third party).

The major assumptions utilized in the Internal Cash Flow Valuation (each of which represents a significant unobservable input as defined by ASC 820-10) were as follows:

(i)      Current Discount Rate – The current discount rate utilized was derived from the Bloomberg fair market value curve for debt offerings of similar credit rating.  In the event that a security had a split credit rating, separate cash flow valuations were made utilizing the appropriate discount rate and were averaged in order to determine the Internal Cash Flow Valuation.  In addition, the discount rate was interpolated from the Bloomberg fair market value curve for securities possessing a credit rating below "B."  The existing discount rates utilized to compute fair value as of December 31, 2014 ranged from 4.0% to 10.0%, with a weighted average value of 5.8%.

(ii) Defaults – The Company utilized the most recently published measures of capital adequacy and/or problematic assets to estimate potential defaults in the collateral pool of performing issuers underlying the seven securities.  In instances where problematic assets equaled or exceeded the issuer's regulatory capital, or the issuer's capital level fell below the limits established by the regulatory agencies, defaults were deemed probable to occur.  Based upon the application of this methodology, the computed default rates utilized in the determination of the fair value of the TRUPS as of December 31, 2014 ranged from 0% to 7.8% of the performing security pool balance, with a weighted average rate of 0.8%.  The Company additionally utilized a standard default rate of 1.2% every three years, which was applied uniformly.

(iii) Cash Flows – The expected payments for the tranche of each security owned by the Company, as adjusted to assume that all estimated defaults occur immediately.  The cash flows further assumed an estimated recovery rate of 10% per annum to occur one year after initial default, which was applied uniformly.

As discussed above, in addition to the Internal Cash Flow Valuation and broker quotations, at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, the Company utilized two additional independent cash flow valuation models in order to estimate the fair value of TRUPS.  The two independent cash flow valuation models utilized a methodology similar to the Internal Cash Flow Valuation, differing only in the underlying assumptions utilized to derive estimated cash flows, individual bank defaults and discount rate.  Weighting was applied, as deemed appropriate, to all valuations utilized at each period end, including the Internal Cash Flow Valuation.

Loans, Net (Excluding Impaired Loans Carried at Fair Value) – For adjustable rate loans that reprice frequently and with no significant change in credit risk, fair values are based on carrying values.  The fair value of all remaining loans receivable is determined by discounting anticipated future cash flows of the loans, net of anticipated prepayments, using a discount rate reflecting current market rates for loans with similar terms to borrowers of similar credit quality.  The valuation method used for loans does not necessarily represent an exit price valuation methodology as defined under ASC 820.  However, since the valuation methodology is deemed to be akin to a Level 3 valuation methodology, the fair value of loans receivable other than impaired loans measured at fair value, is shown under the Level 3 valuation column.

Premises Held For Sale – The fair value of premises held for sale is determined utilizing an executed sales price (pending closing) or an independent property appraisal utilizing comparable sales data (either deemed a Level 2 valuation).

Accrued Interest Receivable – The estimated fair value of accrued interest receivable approximates its carrying amount, and is deemed to be valued at an input level comparable to its underlying financial asset.

MSR – On a quarterly basis, the aggregate balance of the MSR is evaluated for impairment based upon the fair value of the rights as compared to their carrying amount.  If the aggregate carrying amount of the MSR exceeds fair value, impairment is recorded on the MSR so that they are carried at fair value.  Fair value is determined based on a valuation model that calculates the present value of estimated future net servicing income.  The valuation model utilizes assumptions that market participants would use in estimating future net servicing income and that can be validated against available market data (Level 2 input).

FHLBNY Capital Stock – It is not practicable to determine the fair value of FHLBNY capital stock due to restrictions placed on transferability.
 

Deposits – The fair value of savings, money market, and checking accounts is, by definition, equal to the amount payable on demand at the reporting date ( i.e ., their carrying amount), which has been deemed a Level 1 valuation.  The fair value of CDs is based upon the present value of contractual cash flows using current interest rates for instruments of the same remaining maturity (deemed a Level 2 valuation).

Escrow and Other Deposits – The fair value of escrow and other deposits is, by definition, equal to the amount payable on demand at the reporting date (i.e. , their carrying amount), which has been deemed a Level 1 valuation.

REPOS and FHLBNY Advances – REPOS   are accounted for as financing transactions.  Their fair value is measured by the discounted anticipated cash flows through contractual maturity or next interest repricing date, or an earlier call date if, as of the valuation date, the borrowing is expected to be called (deemed a Level 2 valuation).  The carrying amount of accrued interest payable on REPOS and FHLBNY Advances is its fair value and is deemed a Level 2 valuation.

Trust Preferred Securities Payable – The fair value of trust preferred securities payable is estimated using discounted cash flow analyses based on the current borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements (deemed a Level 2 valuation), and is provided to the Company quarterly independently by a market maker in the underlying security.

Accrued Interest Payable – The estimated fair value of accrued interest payable approximates its carrying amount, and is deemed to be valued at an input level comparable to its underlying financial liability.

18.   TREASURY STOCK

The Holding Company did not purchase any shares of its common stock into treasury during the years ended December 31, 2014 or 2013.

19.   REGULATORY MATTERS

The Bank is subject to regulation, examination, and supervision by the New York State Department of Financial Services and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation ("FDIC"). The Bank is also governed by numerous federal and state laws and regulations, including the FDIC Improvement Act of 1991, which established five categories of capital adequacy ranging from well capitalized to critically undercapitalized.  The FDIC utilizes these categories of capital adequacy to determine various matters, including, but not limited to, prompt corrective action and deposit insurance premium assessment levels.  Capital levels and adequacy classifications may also be subject to qualitative judgments by the Bank's regulators regarding, among other factors, the components of capital and risk weighting.

Quantitative measures established to ensure capital adequacy require that banks maintain minimum amounts and ratios of leverage capital to average assets, and of Tier 1 and total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets (as such measures are defined in the regulations). At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank exceeded all minimum capital adequacy requirements to which it was subject.

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bank satisfied all criteria necessary to be categorized as "well capitalized" under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action.  To be categorized as "well capitalized," the Bank was required to maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier I risk-based, and Tier I leverage ratios as set forth in the following tables:

 
 
Actual
 
For Capital
Adequacy Purposes
 
To Be Categorized as "Well Capitalized"
As of December 31, 2014
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
Tangible capital
$406,910
9.20%
 
$176,998
4.0%
 
$221,247
5.00%
Leverage capital
406,910
9.20   
 
176,998
4.0   
 
221,247
5.00   
Tier I risk-based capital (to risk weighted assets)
406,910
12.33   
 
131,994
4.0   
 
197,991
6.00   
Total risk-based capital (to risk weighted assets)
425,428
12.89   
 
263,988
8.0   
 
329,985
10.00   


 
 
Actual
 
For Capital
Adequacy Purposes
 
To Be Categorized as "Well Capitalized"
As of December 31, 2013
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
 
Amount
Ratio
Tangible capital
$376,717
9.52%
 
$158,298
 4.0%
 
$197,872
5.00%
Leverage capital
376,717
9.52   
 
158,298
 4.0   
 
197,872
5.00   
Tier I risk-based capital (to risk weighted assets)
376,717
12.64   
 
119,169
4.0   
 
178,753
6.00   
Total risk-based capital (to risk weighted assets)
397,935
13.36   
 
238,338
8.0   
 
297,922
10.00   

The following is a reconciliation of stockholders' equity to regulatory capital for the Bank:

 
At December 31, 2014
 
At December 31, 2013
 
 
 
Tangible Capital
 
 
Leverage Capital
Total Risk-Based Capital
 
 
 
Tangible Capital
 
 
Leverage Capital
Total
Risk-Based Capital
Stockholders' equity
$454,095 
$454,095 
$454,095 
 
$427,209 
$427,209 
$427,209 
Non-allowable assets:
             
MSR
(35)
(35)
(35)
 
(63)
(63)
(63)
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
8,488 
8,488 
8,488 
 
5,209 
5,209 
5,209 
Goodwill
(55,638)
(55,638)
(55,638)
 
(55,638)
(55,638)
(55,638)
Tier 1 risk-based capital
406,910 
406,910 
406,910 
 
376,717 
376,717 
376,717 
General regulatory valuation allowance
-  
-  
18,518 
 
-  
-  
21,218 
Total (Tier 2) risk based capital
406,910 
406,910 
425,428 
 
376,717 
376,717 
397,935 
Minimum capital requirement
176,998 
176,998 
263,988 
 
158,298 
158,298 
238,338 
Regulatory capital excess
$229,912 
$229,912 
$161,440 
 
$218,419 
$218,419 
$159,597 

20.   UNAUDITED QUARTERLY FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The following represents the unaudited condensed consolidated results of operations for each of the quarters during the fiscal years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013:

 
For the three months ended
 
March 31,
2014
June 30,
2014
September 30, 2014
December 31, 2014
Net interest income
$30,255 
$30,594 
$31,959 
$31,728 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
281 
(1,130)
(501)
(522)
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
29,974 
31,724 
32,460 
32,250 
Non-interest income
3,060 
1,565 
1,817 
2,596 
Non-interest expense
15,823 
15,298 
14,724 
15,231 
Income before income taxes
17,211 
17,991 
19,553 
19,615 
Income tax expense
7,177 
7,531 
7,788 
7,628 
Net income
$10,034 
$10,460 
$11,765 
$11,987 
EPS (1):
       
  Basic
$0.28 
$0.29 
$0.33 
$0.33 
  Diluted
$0.28 
$0.29 
$0.33 
$0.33 
(1) The quarterly EPS amounts, when added, may not coincide with the full fiscal year EPS reported on the Consolidated Statements of Operations due to differences in the computed weighted average shares outstanding as well as rounding differences.
 


 
For the three months ended
 
March 31,
2013
June 30,
2013
September 30, 2013
December 31, 2013
Net interest income
$32,314 
$33,752 
$31,653
$30,767 
Provision (credit) for loan losses
157 
28 
240
(56)
Net interest income after provision for loan losses
32,157 
33,724 
31,413
30,823 
Non-interest income
1,898 
1,721 
2,008
1,837 
Non-interest expense
16,309 
15,347 
15,575
15,461 
Income before income taxes
17,746 
20,098 
17,846
17,199 
Income tax expense
7,176 
8,059 
7,215
6,891 
Net income
$10,570 
$12,039 
$10,631
$10,308 
EPS (1):
       
  Basic
$0.30 
$0.34 
$0.30 
$0.29 
  Diluted
$0.30 
$0.34 
$0.30 
$0.29 
(1) The quarterly EPS amounts, when added, may not coincide with the full fiscal year EPS reported on the Consolidated Statements of Operations due to differences in the computed weighted average shares outstanding as well as rounding differences.


21.   CONDENSED HOLDING COMPANY ONLY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


The following statements of condition as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the related statements of operations and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, reflect the Holding Company's investment in its wholly-owned subsidiaries, the Bank and 842 Manhattan Avenue Corp., and its unconsolidated subsidiary, Dime Community Capital Trust I, using, as deemed appropriate, the equity method of accounting:

DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.
CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION

 
At December 31,
At December 31,
 
2014
2013
ASSETS:
   
Cash and due from banks
$58,112
$61,665
Investment securities available-for-sale
3,736
3,558
Trading securities
8,559
6,822
MBS available-for-sale
496
573
ESOP loan to subsidiary
3,222
3,401
Investment in subsidiaries
454,095
427,083
Other assets
3,798
3,435
Total assets
$532,018
$506,537
     
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY:
   
Trust Preferred securities payable
$70,680
$70,680
Other liabilities
1,613
351
Stockholders' equity
459,725
435,506
Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
$532,018
$506,537


DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.
CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME(1)

 
Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Net interest loss
$(4,748)
$(4,851)
$(4,830)
Dividends received from Bank
18,050 
54,500 
20,000 
Non-interest income
1,376 
812 
1,493 
Non-interest expense
(643)
(636)
(635)
Income before income taxes and equity in
   undistributed earnings of direct subsidiaries
14,035 
49,825 
16,028 
Income tax credit
1,803 
2,183 
1,823 
Income before equity in undistributed earnings
   of direct subsidiaries
15,838 
52,008 
17,851 
Equity in (over-distributed) undistributed earnings of subsidiaries
28,408 
(8,460)
22,457 
Net income
$44,246 
$43,548 
$40,308 
(1) Other comprehensive income for the Holding Company approximated other comprehensive income for the consolidated Company during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012.

DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.
CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 
Year Ended December 31,
 
2014
2013
2012
Cash flows from Operating Activities:
     
Net income
$44,246 
$43,548 
$40,308 
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
     
Equity in over-distributed (undistributed) earnings of direct subsidiaries
(28,408)
8,460 
(22,457)
Net gain on the sale of investment securities available for sale
(997)
(110)
(941)
Net (gain) loss on trading securities
45
(265)
(103) 
Decrease (Increase) in other assets
(489)
355 
1,866 
(Decrease) Increase in other liabilities
1,680
(595)
(149)
Net cash provided by operating activities
16,077 
51,393 
18,524 
       
Cash flows from Investing Activities:
     
Proceeds from sale of investment securities available-for-sale
3,780 
366 
2,418 
Proceeds from the sale of trading securities
7,056 
131 
-  
Purchases of investment securities available-for-sale
(3,884)
(458)
(403)
Reimbursement from subsidiary for purchases of investment securities available-for-sale
1,620 
642 
2,917 
Net purchases of trading securities
(8,839)
(202)
(2,997)
Principal collected on MBS available-for-sale
72 
138 
72 
Principal repayments on ESOP loan
179 
166 
154 
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
(16)
783 
2,161 
       
Cash flows from Financing Activities:
     
Common stock issued for exercise of stock options
278 
11,228 
5,608 
Equity award distribution
202 
293 
145 
Cash dividends paid to stockholders
(20,094)
(19,716)
(19,208)
Net cash used in financing activities
(19,614)
(8,195)
(13,455)
       
Net increase (decrease) in cash and due from banks
(3,553)
43,981 
7,230 
Cash and due from banks, beginning of period
61,665 
17,684 
10,454 
Cash and due from banks, end of period
$58,112 
$61,665 
$17,684 
 

 

22.  SUBSEQUENT EVENTS (UNAUDITED)

In February 2015, the Company significantly curtailed future eligibility to participate in the Postretirement Benefit Plan.  Under the revised plan document, only persons having retired on or before April 1, 2015 will be eligible to receive benefits under the Postretirement Benefit Plan. In order to maintain eligibility to participate in the Postretirement Benefit Plan, active employees wishing to retire on or before April 1, 2015 were required to notify the Company in writing of such intent to retire prior to March 15, 2015.

While the ultimate impact of this amendment to the Postretirement Benefit Plan cannot be measured until after the date of this filing, the amendment is actuarially projected to reduce the plan's funded projected benefit obligation by approximately $2,300, based upon the valuation assumptions utilized as of December 31, 2014.  Both an adjustment to accumulated other comprehensive income and a curtailment gain are likely to be recognized to effect the reduction in the funded projected benefit obligation.
 


Exhibit Number

3(i)
 
Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. (1)
3(ii)
 
Amended and Restated Bylaws of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc.
4.1
 
Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. [See Exhibit 3(i) hereto]
4.2
 
Amended and Restated Bylaws of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. [See Exhibit 3(ii) hereto]
4.3
 
Draft Stock Certificate of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. (2)
4.4
 
Second Amended and Restated Declaration of Trust, dated as of July 29, 2004, by and among Wilmington Trust Company, as Delaware Trustee, Wilmington Trust Company as Institutional Trustee, Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., as Sponsor, the Administrators of Dime Community Capital Trust I and the holders from time to time of undivided beneficial interests in the assets of Dime Community Capital Trust I (5)
4.5
 
Indenture, dated as of March 19, 2004, between Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Wilmington Trust Company, as trustee (5)
4.6
 
Series B Guarantee Agreement, dated as of July 29, 2004, executed and delivered by Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., as Guarantor and Wilmington Trust Company, as Guarantee Trustee, for the benefit of the holders from time to time of the Series B Capital Securities of Dime Community Capital Trust I (5)
10.1
 
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh and Vincent F. Palagiano (12)
10.2
 
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh and Michael P. Devine (12)
10.3
 
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement between The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh and Kenneth J. Mahon (12)
10.4
 
Employment Agreement between Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Vincent F. Palagiano (12)
10.5
 
Employment Agreement between Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Michael P. Devine (12)
10.6
 
Employment Agreement between Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Kenneth J. Mahon (12)
10.7
 
Form of Employee Retention Agreement by and among The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh, Dime Community Bancorp, Inc. and certain officers (14)
10.8
 
The Benefit Maintenance Plan of Dime Community Bancorp, Inc. (11)
10.9
 
Severance Pay Plan of The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh (9)
10.10
 
Retirement Plan for Board Members of Dime Community Bancorp, Inc. (9)
10.12
 
Recognition and Retention Plan for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees of Dime Community Bancorp, Inc., as amended by amendments number 1 and 2 (3)
10.13
 
Form of stock option agreement for Outside Directors under Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 1996 and 2001 Stock Option Plans for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees and the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan. (3)
10.14
 
Form of stock option agreement for officers and employees under Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 1996 and 2001 Stock Option Plans for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees and the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan (3)
10.20
 
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 2001 Stock Option Plan for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees (13)
10.21
 
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 2004 Stock Incentive Plan for Outside Directors, Officers and Employees (8)
10.22
 
Waiver executed by Vincent F. Palagiano (7)
10.23
 
Waiver executed by Michael P. Devine (7)
10.24
 
Waiver executed by Kenneth J. Mahon (7)
10.25
 
Form of restricted stock award notice for officers and employees under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan (6)
10.27
 
Form of restricted stock award notice for outside directors under the 2004 Stock Incentive Plan (6)
10.28
 
Employee Retention Agreement between The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh, Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Daniel Harris (9)
10.29
 
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. Annual Incentive Plan (9)
10.30
 
Adoption Agreement for Pentegra Services, Inc. Volume Submitter 401 (k) Profit Sharing Plan
10.31
 
Employee Stock Ownership Plan of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Certain Affiliates (9)
10.32
 
Amendment to the Benefit Maintenance Plan (15)
10.33
 
Amendments One, Two and Three to the Employee Stock Ownership Plan of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Certain Affiliates (16)
10.34
Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. 2013 Equity And Incentive Plan (17)
10.35 Form of restricted stock award notice for officers and employees under the 2013 Equity and Incentive Plan (18)
10.36
Form of restricted stock award notice for outside directors under the 2013 Equity and Incentive Plan (18)
10.37  The Dime Savings Bank of Williamsburgh 401(K) Savings Plan
10.38
Amendment Number Four to the Employee Stock Ownership Plan of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. and Certain Affiliates (16)


12.1
Computation of ratio of earnings to fixed charges
31(i).1
 
Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a)
31(i).2
 
Certification of Principal Financial Officer Pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a)
32.1
 
Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. 1350
32.2
 
Certification of Principal Financial Officer Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. 1350
101**
 
Pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T, the following financial information from the Company's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the period ended December 31, 2014 is formatted in XBRL (Extensible Business Reporting Language) interactive data files: (i) the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, (ii) the Consolidated Statements of Income for each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, (iii) the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, (iv) the Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity for each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, (v) the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for each of the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, and (vi) the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

**
Furnished, not filed, herewith.
(1)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Transition Report on Form 10-K for the transition period ended December 31, 2002 filed on March 28, 2003.
(2)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1998 filed on September 28, 1998.
(3)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1997 filed on September 26, 1997, and the Current Reports on Form 8-K filed on March 22, 2004 and March 29, 2005.
(4)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2000 filed on September 28, 2000.
(5)
Incorporated by reference to Exhibits to the registrant's Registration Statement No. 333-117743 on Form S-4 filed on July 29, 2004.
(6)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K filed on March 22, 2005.
(7)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2005 filed on May 10, 2005.
(8)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2008 filed on August 8, 2008.
(9)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2008 filed on March 16, 2009.
(10)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2010 filed on May 10, 2010
(11)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K filed on April 4, 2011.
(12)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2011 filed on May 10, 2011
(13)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2011 filed on August 9, 2011
(14)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2012 filed on May 9, 2012
(15)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2012 filed on November 13, 2012
(16)
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on March 15, 2013
(17) 
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013 filed on August 9, 2013
(18) 
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2014 filed on August 5, 2014.
(19) 
Incorporated by reference to the registrant's Current Report on Form 8-K filed on October 23, 2014.


120
E XHIBIT 12.1
 
 
COMPUTATION OF RATIO OF EARNINGS TO FIXED CHARGES AND PREFERRED STOCK DIVIDENDS
(in thousands, except ratio of earnings to fixed charges)
 
 
The following table sets forth our consolidated ratios of earnings to fixed charges and preferred stock dividends for the periods shown. For purposes of computing the ratios, earnings represent income before taxes, extraordinary items and the cumulative effect of accounting changes, plus fixed charges. Fixed charges represent total interest expense plus an estimate of the interest within rental expense, including and excluding interest on deposits. Currently, the Company has no shares of preferred stock outstanding and have not paid any dividends on preferred stock in the periods shown. Therefore, the ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges and preferred stock dividends is not different from the ratio of earnings to fixed charges.
 
 
 
                     
 
2014
 
2013
 
2012
 
2011
 
2010
 
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividends (Including Deposits):
         
Earnings:
                   
Income before income taxes
 $           74,370
 
 $              67,198
 
 $          78,897
 
 $     70,250
 
 $     40,275
 
Add: Fixed charges, net
49,503
 
87,121
 
70,422
 
80,746
 
99,027
 
Income before income taxes and fixed charges, net
123,873
 
154,319
 
149,319
 
150,996
 
139,302
 
Fixed charges
                   
Interest expense
48,416
 
86,112
 
69,714
 
79,413
 
97,685
 
Estimate of interest (1/3) within rental expense
1,087
 
1,009
 
708
 
656
 
787
 
Interest on unrecognized tax benefits
-
 
-
 
-
 
677
 
555
 
Total fixed charges
49,503
 
87,121
 
70,422
 
80,746
 
99,027
 
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges
                  2.50
x
1.77
x
2.12
x
1.87
x
1.41
x
                     
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividends (Excluding Deposits):
         
Earnings:
                   
Income before income taxes
 $           74,370
 
 $              67,198
 
 $          78,897
 
 $     70,250
 
 $     40,275
 
Add: Fixed charges, net
29,912
 
64,333
 
44,291
 
31,324
 
56,235
 
Income before income taxes and fixed charges, net
104,282
 
131,531
 
123,188
 
101,574
 
96,510
 
Fixed charges
                   
Interest expense (excluding deposits)
28,825
 
43,583
 
43,583
 
29,991
 
54,893
 
Estimate of interest (1/3) within rental expense
1,087
 
1,009
 
708
 
656
 
787
 
Interest on unrecognized tax benefits
-
 
-
 
-
 
677
 
555
 
Total fixed charges
29,912
 
44,592
 
44,291
 
31,324
 
56,235
 
Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges
                  3.49
x
2.95
x
2.78
x
3.24
x
1.72
x

 
 
EXHIBIT 23.1
 

 
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
 
We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement Nos. 333-184240 on Form S-3, and 333-153174 and 333-1972777 on Form S-8 of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc. of our report dated March 16, 2015, relating to the financial statements and effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
 
 

 


/s/ Crowe Horwath LLP
Crowe Horwath LLP
 
New York, New York
March 16, 2015
 
 
EXHIBIT 31(i).1


CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 17 CFR 240.13a-14(a) / 15d-14(a) 

 

I, Vincent F. Palagiano, certify that:

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc.;

2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the   
    circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results
    of  operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.   The registrant's other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and
    15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
 
a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
 
d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant's most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant's fourth fiscal quarter In the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant's internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5.   The registrant's other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit
     committee of the registrant's board of directors:
 
a)    
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonable likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
b)    
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.
 



Date:    March 16,  2015
 
/s/ VINCENT F. PALAGIANO                              
 
Vincent F. Palagiano
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer
 
 
EXHIBIT 31(i).2


PRINCIPAL FINANCIAL OFFICER CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 17 CFR 240.13a-14(a) / 15d-14(a)


I, Michael Pucella certify that:

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc.;

2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the
    circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of
     operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.   The registrant's other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and
     15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
 
a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
 
d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant's most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant's fourth fiscal quarter In the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant's internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5.   The registrant's other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit
    committee of the registrant's board of directors:
 
a)    
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonable likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
b)    
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.
 
 

Date:        March 16, 2015
 
/s/ MICAHEL PUCELLA                                     
 
Michael Pucella
Executive Vice President and Chief  Accounting Officer (Principal Financial Officer)
 
Exhibit 32.1




CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. 1350
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K (the "Report") for the period ended December 31, 2014 of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., (the "Company") as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof, I, Vincent F. Palagiano, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
 
(1)
The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
(2)
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
 

 
March 16, 2015
Date
 

 
By:   /s/ VINCENT F. PALAGIANO                                
    Vincent F. Palagiano
    Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer
 
Exhibit 32.2




CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. 1350
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K (the "Report") for the period ended December 31, 2014 of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., (the "Company") as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof, I, Michael Pucella, Chief Accounting Officer of the Company, hereby certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
 
(1)
The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
(2)
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
 


March 16, 2015
Date
 

 
By:       /s/ MICHAEL PUCELLA                                        
                    Michael Pucella
            Executive Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer (Principal Financial Officer)
 
 
 

 

 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 

 
 
 
 

PENTEGRA SERVICES, INC.
DEFINED CONTRIBUTION VOLUME SUBMITTER PLAN AND TRUST

 


                                                                   Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS

ARTICLE II ADMINISTRATION
                     2.1           POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER.................................................................................................. 16
                     2.2            DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY ......................................................................................................16
                     2.3            ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................16
                     2.4           POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR.......................................................................................................... 17
                                2.5            RECORDS AND REPORTS ........................................................................................................................................................17
                                2.6           APPOINTMENT OF ADVISERS.................................................................................................................................................18
                                2.7           INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER ........................................................................................................................................18
                                2.8           PAYMENT OF EXPENSES..........................................................................................................................................................18
                                2.9           MAJORITY ACTIONS ................................................................................................................................................................18
                               2.10         CLAIMS PROCEDURES...............................................................................................................................................................18
ARTICLE III ELIGIBILITY
                               3.1             CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY .............................................................................................................................................. 19
                     3.2             EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION ..............................................................................................................................19
                     3.3             DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY .................................................................................................................................... .20
                             3.4             TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY ...........................................................................................................................................20
                             3.5            REHIRED EMPLOYEES AND 1-YEAR BREAKS IN SERVICE ............................................................................................20
                    3.6             ELECTION NOT TO PARTICIPATE ...................................................................................................................................... 21
                     3.7          OMISSION OF ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE; INCLUSION OF INELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE ..........................................................22
ARTICLE IV CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION
                                    4.1           FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION.................................................................................... 22
                                    4.2            TIME OF PAYMENT OF EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION ................................................................................................. 23
                                   4.3           ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTIONS, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS ......................................................................... 23
                                   4.4           MAXIMUM ANNUAL ADDITIONS..........................................................................................................................................29
                                   4.5            ADJUSTMENT FOR EXCESS ANNUAL ADDITIONS ........................................................................................................ 32
                                   4.6              ROLLOVERS ................................................................................................................................................................................32
                                   4.7            PLAN-TO-PLAN TRANSFERS FROM QUALIFIED PLANS ............................................................................................... 33
                                   4.8           AFTER-TAX VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS................................................................................................34
                                   4.9           QUALIFIED VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS..................................................................................................34
                                  4.10           PARTICIPANT DIRECTED INVESTMENTS ..........................................................................................................................35
                                  4.11          INTEGRATION IN MORE THAN ONE PLAN .........................................................................................................................35
                                   4.12           QUALIFIED MILITARY SERVICE .............................................................................................................................................35
                               4.13        TRANSFER OF ASSETS FROM TERMINATED EMPLOYER DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION PLAN .............................36

© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers

i
Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

ARTICLE V VALUATIONS
                                     5.1          VALUATION OF THE TRUST FUND .....................................................................................................................................36
                                     5.2          METHOD OF VALUATION ......................................................................................................................................................37
ARTICLE VI
DETERMINATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS
                                    6.1            DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON RETIREMENT ................................................................................................... 37
                                    6.2            DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH .............................................................................................................. 37
                                    6.3            DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS IN EVENT OF DISABILITY ........................................................................................ 38
                                    6.4           DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION................................................................................................. 38
                                    6.5           DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS................................................................................................................................................. 40
                                   6.6            DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH .................................................................................................................... 44
                                   6.7            TIME OF DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................................................................................................ 45
                                   6.8             REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 45
                                   6.9            DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR OR INCOMPETENT INDIVIDUAL ................................................................................... 49
                                   6.10          LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN .................................................................................... 49
                                   6.11          IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION ...................................................................................................................................................49
                                   6.12         ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP....................................................................................................................... 50
                                   6.13         SPECIAL RULE FOR CERTAIN PROFIT SHARING PLANS .............................................................................................. 50
                                   6.14          QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDER DISTRIBUTION ..................................................................................... 51
                                   6.15          DIRECT ROLLOVERS ............................................................................................................................................................... 51
                                6 .16        RESTRICTIONS ON DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS TRANSFERRED FROM A MONEY PURCHASE PLAN ............. 52
                                  6.17          CORRECTIVE DISTRIBUTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 52
                                  6.18          QUALIFIED RESERVIST DISTRIBUTIONS AND HEART ACT ........................................................................................ 53
ARTICLE VII TRUSTEE AND CUSTODIAN
                     7.1           BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TRUSTEE........................................................................................................................ 53
                     7.2           INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF DISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE ......................................................................... 54
                     7.3           INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF NONDISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE ................................................................ 56
                     7.4            POWERS AND DUTIES OF CUSTODIAN ............................................................................................................................... 57
                     7.5           LIFE INSURANCE.......................................................................................................................................................................... 57
                     7.6             LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS .................................................................................................................................................... 58
                     7.7            ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES ...............................................................................................59
                     7.8            TRUSTEE'S COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES AND TAXES .......................................................................................... 59
                     7.9           ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TRUSTEE...................................................................................................................................... 59
                     7.10            AUDIT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
                     7.11          RESIGNATION, REMOVAL AND SUCCESSION OF TRUSTEE ......................................................................................... 60
                     7.12         TRANSFER OF INTEREST........................................................................................................................................................... 61
                     7.13           TRUSTEE INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................................................... 61
                     7.14         EMPLOYER SECURITIES AND REAL PROPERTY................................................................................................................. 61
                     7.15          DIVESTMENT OF EMPLOYER SECURITIES ........................................................................................................................  61

© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
ii

                               Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

ARTICLE VIII
AMENDMENT, TERMINATION AND MERGERS
                     8.1           AMENDMENT............................................................................................................................................................................. 62
                     8.2           TERMINATION .......................................................................................................................................................................... 63
                     8.3            MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS .............................................................................................. 63
ARTICLE IX
TOP - HEAVY PROVISIONS
                     9.1           TOP-HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................... 64
                     9.2           DETERMINATION OF TOP-HEAVY STATUS.................................................................................................................... 64
ARTICLE X MISCELLANEOUS
                     10.1         EMPLOYER ADOPTIONS........................................................................................................................................................ 65
                     10.2           PARTICIPANT'S RIGHTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 65
                     10.3            ALIENATION ......................................................................................................................................................................... 65
                     10.4         PLAN COMMUNICATIONS, INTERPRETATION AND CONSTRUCTION.................................................................. 66
                     10.5           GENDER, NUMBER AND TENSE ........................................................................................................................................ 66
                     10.6         LEGAL ACTION......................................................................................................................................................................... 67
                     10.7         PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS............................................................................................................. 67
                     10.8         EMPLOYER'S AND TRUSTEE'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE................................................................................................... 67
                     10.9           INSURER'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE ..................................................................................................................................... 67
                     10.10        RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 67
                     10.11        ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER ............................................................................................................................................... 67
                     10.12      NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................... 67
                     10.13        APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE ............................................................................................................... 68
                     10.14       PAYMENT OF BENEFITS......................................................................................................................................................... 68
                     10.15         ELECTRONIC MEDIA ............................................................................................................................................................. 68
                     10.16         PLAN CORRECTION ............................................................................................................................................................... 68
                     10.17         NONTRUSTEED PLANS ......................................................................................................................................................... 68
ARTICLE XI PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS
                     11.1          ELECTION TO BECOME A PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER .............................................................................................. 69
                     11.2         REQUIREMENTS OF PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS........................................................................................................ 69
                     11.3           DESIGNATION OF AGENT .................................................................................................................................................... 69
                     11.4         EMPLOYEE TRANSFERS.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
                     11.5         PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION AND FORFEITURES ....................................................................... 69
                     11.6         AMENDMENT............................................................................................................................................................................ 70
                     11.7           DISCONTINUANCE OF PARTICIPATION ......................................................................................................................... 70
                     11.8           ADMINISTRATOR'S AUTHORITY ..................................................................................................................................... 70
                     11.9          PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTION FOR AFFILIATE ................................................................................ 70

© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers

iii

                                                Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

ARTICLE XII
CASH OR DEFERRED PROVISIONS
  12.1         FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION..................................................................................... 70
  12.2          PARTICIPANT'S SALARY DEFERRAL ELECTION .............................................................................................................. 71
  12.3          ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTIONS AND FORFEITURES .............................................................................................. 75
  12.4          ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS ....................................................................................................................... 76
  12.5         ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS...................................................................................... 78
   12.6         ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS................................................................................................................. 81
   12.7          ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS ........................................................................... 83
  12.8          401(k) ADP TEST SAFE HARBOR PROVISIONS ................................................................................................................... 85
 12.9         QUALIFIED AUTOMATIC CONTRIBUTION ARRANGEMENT........................................................................................ 87
12.10       ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP......................................................................................................................... 88
12.11       IN-PLAN ROTH ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS..................................................................................................................... 89
ARTICLE XIII SIMPLE 401(K) PROVISIONS
13.1         SIMPLE 401(k) PROVISIONS........................................................................................................................................................ 90
13.2         DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
13.3         CONTRIBUTIONS........................................................................................................................................................................... 91
13.4          ELECTION AND NOTICE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 91
13.5           VESTING REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 92
13.6         TOP-HEAVY RULES........................................................................................................................................................................ 92
13.7         NONDISCRIMINATION TESTS.................................................................................................................................................... 92
ARTICLE XIV
MULTIPLE EMPLOYER PROVISIONS
14.1         ELECTION AND OVERRIDING EFFECT.................................................................................................................................... 92
14.2         DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
14.3           PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER ELECTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 92
14.4          HIGHLY COMPENSATED EMPLOYEE STATUS ..................................................................................................................... 93
14.5            TESTING ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 93
14.6           TOP HEAVY PROVISIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
14.7         COMPENSATION........................................................................................................................................................................... 93
14.8            SERVICE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
14.9           REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 94
14.10       COOPERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION.............................................................................................................................. 94
14.11       INVOLUNTARY TERMINATION............................................................................................................................................... 94
14.12       VOLUNTARY TERMINATION................................................................................................................................................... 95

© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
iv

                                                                                    Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS

As used in this Plan, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings set forth herein unless a different meaning is clearly required by the context:

1.1
"Account"   means any separate notational account established and maintained by the Administrator for each Participant under the Plan. To the extent applicable, a Participant may have any (or all) of the following notational Accounts:

(a)
"Combined Account" means the account representing the Participant's total interest under the Plan resulting from (1) the Employer's contributions in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan or Money Purchase Plan, and (2) the Employer Nonelective Contributions in the case of a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan. In addition, Forfeitures are part of the Combined Account to the extent they are reallocated. Separate accountings shall be maintained with respect to that portion of a Participant's Account attributable to Employer contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) and to Employer contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3).

(b)
"Elective Deferral Account" means the account established hereunder to which Elective Deferrals (including a separate accounting for Catch-Up Contributions) are allocated. Amounts in the Participant's Elective Deferral Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(e). The Elective Deferral Account may consist of the
sub-Accounts listed below. Unless specifically stated otherwise, any reference to a Participant's Elective Deferral Account will refer to both of these sub-Accounts.

(1)
"Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account" means the portion of the Elective Deferral Account attributable to Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals (i.e., Elective Deferrals that are not subject to federal income tax at the time of their deferral to the Plan).

(2)
"Roth Elective Deferral Account" means the portion of the Elective Deferral Account attributable to Roth Elective Deferrals (i.e., that are subject to federal income tax at the time of their deferral to the Plan) which does not include amounts attributable to "in-Plan Roth rollover contributions" (as defined in Section 12.11). No contributions other than Roth Elective Deferrals and properly attributable earnings will be credited to each Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account.

(c)
"In-Plan Roth Rollover Account" means the account attributable to a distribution from the Plan that is directly rolled over within this Plan, as described in Section 12.11. The amount thus contributed retains the characteristics of the source Account from which the amount of the "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" (as defined in Section 12.11) was distributed (except for the tax treatment of such amount when distributed out of the Plan).

(d)
"Qualified Automatic Contribution Safe Harbor Account" means the account established hereunder to which Qualified Automatic Contribution "ADP test safe harbor contributions" are allocated. Amounts in the Qualified Automatic Contribution Safe Harbor Account are subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(e).

(e)
"Qualified Matching Contribution Account" means the account established hereunder to which Qualified Matching Contributions are allocated. Amounts in the Qualified Matching Contribution Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(e).

(f)
"Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account" means the account established hereunder to which Qualified Nonelective Contributions are allocated. Amounts in the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account are nonforfeitable when made and are subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(e).

(g)
"Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account" means the account established hereunder to which a Participant's tax- deductible qualified voluntary Employee contributions made pursuant to Section 4.9 are allocated.

(h)
"Rollover Account" means the account established hereunder to which amounts transferred from a qualified plan (including this Plan) or individual retirement account in accordance with Section 4.6 are allocated.

(i)
"Transfer Account" means the account established hereunder to which amounts transferred to this Plan from a direct plan-to-plan transfer in accordance with Section 4.7 are allocated.

(j)
"Voluntary Contribution Account" means the account established hereunder to which after-tax voluntary Employee contributions made pursuant to Section 4.8 are allocated. Amounts recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5 shall remain subject to the limitations of Section 12.2. Therefore, a separate accounting shall be maintained with respect to that portion of the Voluntary Contribution Account attributable to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions made pursuant to Section 4.8.

1.2
"ACP"   means the "Actual Contribution Percentage" determined pursuant to Section 12.6(d).

1.3
"Act"   means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers

1

                                                                                             Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

1.4
"ADP"   means the "Actual Deferral Percentage" determined pursuant to Section 12.4(d).

1.5
"Administrator"   means the Employer unless another person or entity has been designated by the Employer pursuant to Section 2.2 to administer the Plan on behalf of the Employer. "Administrator" also includes any Qualified Termination Administrator (QTA) that has assumed the responsibilities of the Administrator in accordance with guidelines set forth by the Department of Labor.

1.6
"Adoption   Agreement"   means the separate agreement which is executed by the Employer and sets forth the elective provisions of this Plan and Trust as specified by the Employer.

1.7
"Affiliated   Employer"   means any corporation which is a member of a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code §414(b)) which includes the Employer; any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which is under common control (as defined in Code
§414(c)) with the Employer; any organization (whether or not incorporated) which is a member of an affiliated service group (as defined in Code §414(m)) which includes the Employer; and any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to Regul ations under Code §414(o).

1.8
"Affirmative   Election"   means a Salary Deferral Agreement submitted by a Participant to the Administrator in accordance with Section 12.2 that provides instructions to defer a specific amount of Compensation (including an affirmative election to defer no amount) as an Elective Deferral to the Plan. A Participant's Affirmative Election is generally effective as of the first payroll period which follows       the payroll period in which the Participant made the Affirmative Election. However, a Participant may make an Affirmative Election which is effective: (a) for the first payroll period in which he or she becomes a Participant if the Participant makes an Affirmative Election within a reasonable period following the Participant's becoming eligible to make Elective Deferrals and before the Compensation to which the Election applies becomes currently available; or (b) for the first payroll period following the effective date of the Automat ic Contribution Arrangement if the Participant makes an Affirmative Election not later than the Automatic Contribution Arrangement's effective date.

1.9
"Alternate Payee"   means an alternate payee pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order that meets the requirements of Code §414(p).

1.10
"Anniversary   Date"   means the last day of the Plan Year.

1.11
"Annuity   Starting   Date"   means, with respect to any Participant, the first day of the first period for which an amount is paid as an annuity, or, in the case of a benefit not payable in the form of an annuity, the first day on which all events have occurred which entitles the Participant to such benefit.

1.12
"Automatic   Contribution   Arrangement"   means the Automatic Deferral provisions described by Section 12.2 and, if applicable, Section 12.9.

1.13
"Automatic   Deferral"   means the amount (if any) that a Participant is deemed to defer in accordance with an Automatic Contribution Arrangement. The effective date of an Employee's Automatic Deferral will be as soon as practicable after the Employee is subject to Automatic Deferrals described by Section 12.2(b) or 12.9, consistent with (a) applicable law, and (b) the objective of affording the Employee a reasonable period of time after receipt of the notice to make an Affirmative Election (and, if applicable, an investment election). All Automatic Deferrals constitute Elective Deferrals.

1.14
"Beneficiary"   means the person (or entity) to whom all or a portion of a deceased Participant's interest in the Plan is payable, subject to the restrictions of Sections 6.2 and 6.6.

1.15
"Catch-Up   Contribution"   means an Elective Deferral made to the Plan by a Catch-Up Eligible Participant that, during any taxable year of such Participant, exceeds one of the following:

(a)
a statutory dollar limit on Elective Deferrals or "annual additions" as provided in Code §401(a)(30), 402(h), 403(b), 408, 415(c), or 457(b)(2) (without regard to Code §457(b)(3)), as applicable; or

(b)
any Plan limit on Elective Deferrals other than a limit described in (a) above; or the limit imposed by the ADP test under Code
§401(k)(3) which Excess Contributions would otherwise be distributed pursuant to Section 12.5(b) to a Highly Compensated Employee who is a Catch-Up Eligible Participant.

Catch-Up Contributions for a Participant for a Participant's taxable year may not exceed the dollar limit on Catch-Up Contributions under Code §414(v) for the Participant's taxable year. The dollar limit on Catch-Up Contributions under Code §414(v)(2)(B)(i) was $5,000 for taxable years beginning in 2006. After 2006, the $5,000 is adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code §414(v)(2)(C). Any such adjustments shall be in multiples of $500. Notwithstanding the preceding, different dollar limits apply to Catch-Up Contributions under SIMPLE 401(k) plans.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
2

 

                                                                                                Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

1.16
"Catch-Up   Eligible   Participant"   means a Participant who:

(a)
is eligible to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan pursuant to Section 12.2; and

(b)
will attain age 50 or older by the end of such taxable year.

1.17
"Code"   means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as it may be amended from time to time.

1.18
"Compensation"   means, with respect to any Participant, the amount determined in accordance with the following provisions, except as otherwise provided in the Adoption Agreement.

(a)
Base   definition.   One of the following, as elected in the Adoption Agreement:

(1)
Information required to be reported under Code §§6041, 6051 and 6052 (Wages, tips and other compensation as reported on Form W-2). Compensation means wages, within the meaning of Code §3401(a), and all other payments of compensation to an Employee by the Employer (in the course of the Employer's trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under Code §§6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052. Compensation must be determined without regard to any rules under Code §3401(a) that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code §3401(a)(2)).

(2)
Code §3401(a) Wages. Compensation means an Employee's wages within the meaning of Code §3401(a) for the purposes of income tax withholding at the source but determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code
§3401(a)(2)).

(3)
415 safe harbor compensation. Compensation means wages, salaries, for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2008, Military Differential Pay, and fees for professional services and other amounts received (without regard to whether or not an amount is paid in cash) for personal services actually rendered in the course of employment with the Employer maintaining the Plan to the extent that the amounts are includible in gross income (including, but not limited to, commissions paid salespersons, compensation for services on the basis of a percentage of profits, commissions on insurance premiums, tips, bonuses, fringe benefits, and reimbursements, or other expense allowances under a nonaccountable plan (as described in Regulation §1.62-2(c))), and excluding the following:

(i)
Employer contributions to a plan of deferred compensation which are not includible in the Employee's gross income for the taxable year in which contributed, or Employer contributions under a simplified employee pension plan to the extent such contributions are excludable from the Employee's gross income, or any distributions from a plan of deferred     compensation;

(ii)
Amounts realized from the exercise of a nonqualified stock option, or when restricted stock (or property) held by the Employee either becomes freely transferable or is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture;

(iii)
Amounts realized from the sale, exchange or other disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock option; and

(iv)
Other amounts which receive special tax benefits, or contributions made by the Employer (whether or not under a salary deferral agreement) towards the purchase of an annuity contract described in Code §403(b) (whether or not the contributions are actually excludable from the gross income of the Employee).

(b)
Earned   Income   for   Self-Employed   Individual.   Notwithstanding the foregoing, Compensation for any Self-Employed Individual shall be equal to Earned Income. Furthermore, the contributions on behalf of any "owner-Employee" shall be made only with respect to the Earned Income for such "owner-Employee" which is derived from the trade or business with respect to which such Plan is established. For this purpose, an "owner-Employee" means a sole proprietor who owns the entire interest in the Employer or a partner (or member in the case of a limited liability company treated as a partnership or sole proprietorship for federal income tax purposes) who owns more than ten percent (10%) of either the capital interest or the profits interest in the Employer and who receives income for personal services from the Employer.

(c)
Paid   during   "determination   period."   Compensation shall include only that Compensation which is actually paid to the Participant during the "determination period." Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, the "determination period" is the period elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement. If the Employer makes no election, the "determination period" shall be the Plan Year.

(d)
Inclusion   of   deferrals.   Notwithstanding the above, unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, Compensation shall include all of the following types of elective contributions and all of the following types of deferred compensation:

(1)
Elective contributions that are made by the Employer on behalf of a Participant that are not includible in gross income under Code §§125, 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B), 402(k), 403(b), and 132(f)(4). However, regardless of any election in the Adoption


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
3


                                                                                          Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Agreement to the contrary, amounts described in the preceding sentence will be included in Compensation for purposes of making Elective Deferrals or receiving any Employer matching contributions under this Plan. If specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), amounts under Code §125 shall be deemed to include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage. An amount will be treated as an amount under Code §125 pursuant to the preceding sentence only if the Employer does not request or collect information regarding the Participant's other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan. Roth Elective Deferrals will be treated as Pre-tax Elective Deferrals for purposes of determining Compensation if the Employer elects to exclude from Compensation the items described in this Subsection (d)(1).

(2)
Compensation deferred under an eligible deferred compensation plan within the meaning of Code §457(b).

(3)
Employee contributions (under governmental plans) described in Code §414(h)(2) that are picked up by the employing unit and thus are treated as Employer contributions.

(e)
Post-severance   compensation     Code   §415   Regulations.   The Administrator shall adjust Compensation, for Plan Years beginning on or after July 1, 2007 (or such other date as the Employer specifies in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement), for amounts that would otherwise be included in the definition of Compensation but are paid by the later of 2 1/2 months after a Participant's severance from employment with the Employer or the end of the Plan Year that includes the date of the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, in accordance with the following, as elected in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement. The preceding time period, however, does not apply with respect to payments described in Subsections (4) and (5) below. Any other payment of compensation paid after severance of employment that is not described in the following types of compensation is not considered Compensation, even if payment is made within the time period specified above.

(1)
Regular   pay.   Compensation shall include regular pay after severance of employment (to the extent otherwise included in the definition of Compensation) if:

(i)
The payment is regular compensation for services during the Participant's regular working hours, or compensation for services outside the Participant's regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments; and

(ii)
The payment would have been paid to the Participant prior to a severance from employment if the Participant had continued in employment with the Employer.

(2)
Leave   cash-outs.   Compensation shall include leave cash-outs if those amounts would have been included in the definition of Compensation if they were paid prior to the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, and the amounts are for unused accrued bona fide sick, vacation, or other leave, but only if the Participant would have been able to use            the leave if employment had continued.

(3)
Deferred   compensation.   Compensation shall include deferred compensation if those amounts would have been included in the definition of Compensation if they were paid prior to the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, and the amounts are received pursuant to a nonqualified unfunded deferred compensation plan, but only if the payment would have been paid if the Participant had continued in employment with the Employer and only to the extent the payment is includible in the Participant's gross income.

(4)
Military   Differential   Pay.   Compensation shall include payments to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (as that term is used in Code §414(u)(1)) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for             the Employer rather than entering qualified military service.

(5)
Disability   pay.   Compensation shall include compensation paid to a Participant who is permanently and totally disabled, as defined in Code §22(e)(3), provided, as elected by the Employer in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement, salary continuation applies to all Participants who are permanently and totally disabled for a fixed or determinable period, or the Participant was not a Highly Compensated Employee immediately before becoming disabled.

(f)
Dollar   limitation.   Compensation in excess of $200,000 shall be disregarded for all purposes other than for purposes of Elective Deferrals. Such amount shall be adjusted by the Commissioner for increases in the cost-of-living in accordance with Code
§401(a)(17)(B). The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to any "determination period" beginning with or within such calendar year. If a "determination period" consists of fewer than twelve (12) months, the $200,000 annual Compensation limit will be multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the "determination period," and the denominator of which is twelve (12). In applying any Plan limitation on the amount of matching contributions or any Plan limit on Elective Deferrals which are subject to matching contributions, where such limits are expressed as a percentage of Compensation, the Administrator may apply the Compensation limit under this Section annually, even if the matching contribution formula is appl ied on any time interval which is less than the full Plan Year or the Administrator may pro rate the Compensation limit.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
4


                                                                                          Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(g)
Noneligible   Employee.   If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude a class of Employees from the Plan, then Compensation for any Employee who becomes eligible or ceases to be eligible to participate during a "determination period" shall only include Compensation while the Employee is an Eligible Employee. In addition, with respect to the determination of any matching contributions, the Plan will disregard Elective Deferrals made while the Participant is not eligible for the matching contribution component of the Plan.

(h)
Amendment.   If, in connection with the adoption of any amendment, the definition of Compensation has been modified, then, except as otherwise provided herein, for Plan Years prior to the Plan Year which includes the adoption date of such amendment, Compensation means compensation determined pursuant to the terms of the Plan then in effect.

1.19
"Contract"   or   "Policy"   means any life insurance policy, retirement income policy, or annuity contract (group or individual) issued by the Insurer. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any contract purchased hereunder , the Plan provisions shall control.

1.20
"Custodian"   means a person or entity that has custody of all or any portion of the Plan assets.

1.21
"Directed   Trustee"   means a Trustee who, with respect to the investment of Plan assets, is subject to the direction of the Administrator, the Employer, a properly appointed Investment Manager, a named Fiduciary, or Plan Participant. To the extent the Trustee is a Directed Trustee, the Trustee does not have any discretionary authority with respect to the investment of Plan assets. In addition, the Trustee is not responsible for the propriety of any directed investment made pursuant to this Section and shall not be required to consult or advise the Employer regarding the investment quality of any directed investment held under the Plan.

1.22
"Discretionary   Trustee"   means a Trustee who has the authority and discretion to invest, manage or control any portion of the Plan assets.

1.23
"Early   Retirement   Date"   means the date specified in the Adoption Agreement on which a Participant has satisfied the requirements specified in the Adoption Agreement (Early Retirement Age). If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant shall become fully Vested upon satisfying such requirements if the Participant is still employed at the Early Retirement Age.

A Participant who severs from employment after satisfying any service requirement but before satisfying the age requirement for Early Retirement Age and who thereafter reaches the age requirement contained herein shall be entitled to receive benefits under this Plan (other than any accelerated vesting and allocations of Employer contributions) as though the requirements for Early Retirement Age had been satisfied.

1.24
"Earned   Income"   means the net earnings from self-employment in the trade or business with respect to which the Plan is established, for which the personal services of the individual are a material income-producing factor. Net earnings will be determined without regard to items not included in gross income and the deductions allocable to such items. Net earnings are reduced by contributions made by the Employer to a qualified plan to the extent deductible under Code §404. In addition, net earnings shall be determined with regard to the deduction allowed to the taxpayer by Code §164(f).

If Compensation is defined to exclude any items of Compensation (other than safe harbor adjustments permitted under the
Code §414(s) Regulations or limiting Compensation to periods of Plan participation), then for purposes of determining the Compensation of a Self-Employed Individual, Earned Income shall be adjusted by multiplying Earned Income by the percentage of total compensation that is included for the eligible Participants who are Nonhighly Compensated Employees. That percentage is determined by calculating the percentage of each eligible Nonhighly Compensated Participant's total Compensation prior to excluding any non-safe harbor adjustments selected in the Adjustments to Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement that are included in the definition of Compensation and averaging those percentages.

1.25
"Effective   Date"   means the date this Plan, including any restatement or amendment of this Plan, is effective .   Where   the   Plan   is   restated   or   amended,   a   reference   to   Effective   Date is   the   effective   date   of   the   restatement   or   amendment,   except   where   the   context   indicates   a   reference   to   an   earlier   Effective   Date.   If   any   provision   of   this   Plan   is   retroactively   effective,   then   provisions   of   this Plan generally   control.   However,   if   a   provision   of   this   Plan   is   different   from   the   provision   of   the   Employer's   prior   plan   document   and,   after   the   retroactive     Effective   Date   of   this   Plan,   the   Employer   operated   in   compliance   with   the   provisions   of   the   prior   plan,   then   the   provision   of   such   prior   plan   is   incorporated   into   this   Plan   for   purposes   of   determining   whether   the   Employer   operated   the   Plan   in   compliance   with   its   terms,   provided   operation   in   compliance   with   the terms   of   the   prior   plan   do   not   violate   any   qualification   requirements   under   the   Code,   Regulations,   or   other   IRS   guidance.

The Employer may designate special effective dates for individual provisions under the Plan where provided in the Adoption Agreement or under Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections). If one or more qualified retirement plans have been merged into this Plan, the provisions of the merging plan(s) will remain in full force and effect until the effective date of the plan merger(s).

1.26
"Elective   Deferrals"   means the Employer's contributions to the Plan that are made pursuant to a Participant's salary deferral election in accordance with Section 12.2. Elective Deferrals shall be subject to the requirements of Sections 12.2(d) and 12.2(e) and shall, except as


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
5


                                                                                       Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

otherwise provided herein, be required to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of the Code §401(k) Regulations. The term "Elective Deferrals" includes Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals and, if permitted by the Plan, Roth Elective Deferrals.

1.27
"Eligible   Automatic   Contribution   Arrangement"   (EACA)   means an Automatic Contribution Arrangement that is intended to comply as such for purposes of Code §414(w) and that therefore complies with the Automatic Deferral provisions described in the EACA provisions set forth in Section 12.2(b).

1.28
"Eligible   Employee"   means any Eligible Employee as elected in the Adoption Agreement and as provided herein. With respect to a volume submitter or non-standardized Adoption Agreement, an individual shall not be an Eligible Employee if such individual is not reported on the payroll records of the Employer as a common law employee. In particular, it is expressly intended that indivi duals not treated as common law employees by the Employer on its payroll records and out-sourced workers, are not Eligible Employees and are excluded from Plan participation even if a court or administrative agency determines that such individuals are common law employees and not independent contractors. However, the two preceding sentences shall not apply to partners or other Self-Employed Individuals unless the Employer treats them as independent contractors. Furthermore, with respect to a volume submitter or non-standardized Adoption Agreement, Employees of an Affiliated Employer will not be treated as Eligible Employees prior to the date the Affiliated Employer adopts the Plan as a Participating Employer.

Employees who became Employees as the result of a "Code §410(b)(6)(C) transaction" will, unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, only be Eligible Employees after the expiration of the transition period beginning on the date of the tra nsaction and ending on the last day of the first Plan Year beginning after the date of the transaction. A "Code §410(b)(6)(C) transaction" is an asset or stock acquisition, merger, or similar transaction involving a change in the Employer of the Employees of a trade or business that is subject to the special rules set forth in Code §410(b)(6)(C). However, regardless of any election made in the Adoption Agreement, if a separate entity becomes an Affiliated Employer as the result of a "Code §410(b)(6)(C) transaction," then Employees of such separate entity will not be treated as Eligible Employees prior to the date the entity adopts the Plan as a Participating Employer or, with respect to a standardized Adoption Agreement, if earlier, the expiration of the transition period set forth above.

If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude union employees, then Employees whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and "employee representatives" under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining and if two percent (2%) or less of the Employees covered pursuant to that agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation §1.410(b)-9, shall not be eligible to participate in this Plan to the extent of employment covered by such agreement, unless the agreement provides for coverage in the Plan (see Section 4.1(d)). For this purpose, the term "employee representatives" does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the Employer. If a Participant performs services both as a collectively bargained Employee and as a non-collectively bargained Employee, then the Participant's Hours of Service in each respective category are treated separately.

If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude nonresident aliens, then Employees who are nonresident aliens (within the meaning of Code §7701(b)(1)(B)) who received no earned income (within the meaning of Code §911(d)(2)) from the Employer which constitutes income from sources within the United States (within the meaning of Code §861(a)(3)) shall not be eligible to participate in this Plan. In addition, this paragraph shall also apply to exclude from participation in the Plan an Employee who is a nonresident alien (within the meaning of Code §7701(b)(1)(B)) but who receives earned income (within the meaning of Code §911(d)(2)) from the Employer that constitutes income from sources within the United States (within the meaning of Code §861(a)(3)), if all of the Employee's earned income from the Employer from sources within the United States is exempt from United States income tax under an applicable income tax convention. The preceding sentence will apply only if all Employees described in the preceding sentence are excluded from the Plan.

If, in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer elects to exclude Part-Time/Temporary/Seasonal Employees, then notwithstanding any such exclusion, if any such excluded Employee actually completes or completed a Year of Service, then such Employee will cease to be within this particular excluded class.

1.29
"Employee"   means any person who is employed by the Employer. The term "Employee" shall also include any person who is an employee of an Affiliated Employer and any Leased Employee deemed to be an Employee as provided in Code §414(n) or (o).

1.30
"Employer"   means the entity specified in the Adoption Agreement, any successor which shall maintain this Plan and any predecessor which has maintained this Plan. In addition, unless the context means otherwise, the term "Employer" shall include any Participating Employer which shall adopt this Plan.

1.31
"Excess   Aggregate   Contributions"   means, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of:

(a)
The aggregate "contribution percentage amounts" (as defined in Section 12.6) actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants for such Plan Year and taken into account in computing the numerator of the ACP, over

(b)
The maximum "contribution percentage amounts" permitted by the ACP test in Section 12.6 (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants in order of their "contribution percentages" beginning with the highest of such percentages).


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
6


                                                                                          Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Such determination shall be made after first taking into account corrections of any Excess Deferrals pursuant to Section 12.2 and then taking into account adjustments of any Excess Contributions pursuant to Section 12.5.

1.32
"Excess   Compensation"   means, with respect to a Plan that is integrated with Social Security (permitted disparity), a Participant's Compensation which is in excess of the integration level elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, if Compensation is based on less than a twelve (12) month "determination period," Excess Compensation shall be determined by reducing the integration level by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of full months in the short period and the denominator of which is twelve (12). A "determination period" is not less than twelve (12) months solely because a Participant's Compensation does not include Compensation paid during a "determination period" while the Participant was not a Participant in this component of the Plan.

1.33
"Excess   Contributions"   means, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of:

(a)
The aggregate amount of Employer contributions actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants for such Plan Year and taken into account in computing the numerator of the ADP, over

(b)
The maximum amount of such contributions permitted by the ADP test in Section 12.4 (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants in order of the actual deferral ratios, beginning with the highest of such ratios).

In determining the amount of Excess Contributions to be distributed and/or recharacterized with respect to an affected Highly Compensated Participant as determined herein, such amount shall be reduced by any Excess Deferrals previously distributed to such affected Highly Compensated Participant for the Participant's taxable year ending with or within such Plan Year.

1.34
"Excess   Deferrals"   means, with respect to any taxable year of a Participant, either (a) those elective deferrals within the meaning of Code §§402(g) or 402A that are made during the Participant's taxable year and exceed the dollar limitation under Code §402(g) (including, if applicable, the dollar limitation on Catch-Up Contributions defined in Code §414(v)) for such year; or (b) are made during a calendar year and exceed the dollar limitation under Code §§402(g) and 402A (including, if applicable, the dollar limitation on Catch-Up Contributions defined in Code §414(v)) for the Participant's taxable year beginning in such calendar year, counting only Elective Deferrals made under this Plan and any other plan, contract or arrangement maintained by the Employer.

1.35
"Fiduciary"   means any person who (a) exercises any discretionary authority or discretionary control respecting management of the Plan or exercises any authority or control respecting management or disposition of its assets, (b) renders investment advice for a fee or other compensation, direct or indirect, with respect to any monies or other property of the Plan or has any authority or responsibility to do so, or (c) has any discretionary authority or discretionary responsibility in the administration of the Plan.

1.36
"Fiscal   Year"   means the Employer's accounting year.

1.37
"Forfeiture"   means that portion of a Participant's Account that is not Vested and is disposed of in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. Unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, Forfeitures occur pursuant to (a) below.

(a)
A Forfeiture will occur on the earlier of:

(1)
The last day of the Plan Year in which a Participant incurs five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, or

(2)
The distribution of the entire Vested portion of the Participant's Account of a Participant who has severed employment with the Employer. For purposes of this provision, if the Participant has a Vested benefit of zero, then such Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such Vested benefit as of the year in which the severance of employment occurs. For this purpose, a Participant's Vested benefit shall not include: (i) the Participant's Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account, and (ii) the Participant's Rollover Account.

(b)
If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Forfeiture will occur as of the last day of the Plan Year in which a Participant incurs five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service.

Regardless of the preceding, if a Participant is eligible to share in the allocation of Forfeitures in the year in which the Forfeiture would otherwise occur, then the Forfeiture will not occur until the end of the first Plan Year for which the Participant is not eligible to share in the allocation of Forfeitures. Furthermore, the term "Forfeiture" shall also include amounts deemed to be Forfeitures pursuant to any other provision of this Plan.

1.38
"Former   Employee"   means an individual who has severed employment with the Employer or an Affiliated Employer.

1.39
"414(s)   Compensation"   means Compensation as defined in Section 1.18. However, the Employer may operationally elect to use any other definition of compensation for 414(s) Compensation provided such definition satisfies the nondiscrimination requirements of Code
§414(s) and the Regulations thereunder. For purposes of applying the ADP and ACP tests, the period for determining 414(s) Compensation must be either the Plan Year or the calendar year ending with or within the Plan Year. For all other purposes, the period of determining 414(s) Compensation must be the Plan Year or another twelve (12) month period of time ending in the Plan Year. An Employer may


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
7


                                                                                 Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

further limit the period taken into account to that part of the determination period in which an Employee was a Participant in the component of the Plan being tested. The period used to determine 414(s) Compensation must be applied uniformly to all Participants for the Plan Year.

1.40
"415   Compensation"   means, with respect to any Participant, such Participant's (a) Wages, tips and other compensation on Form W-2, (b) Code §3401(a) wages or (c) 415 safe harbor compensation as elected in the Adoption Agreement for purposes of Compensation (and as defined in Subsections 1.18(a)(1)-(3) respectively). 415 Compensation shall be based on the full Limitation Year regardless of when participation in the Plan commences. Furthermore, regardless of any election made in the Adoption Agreement, 415 Compensation shall include any elective deferral (as defined in Code §§402(e)(3), 402(k) and 402(h)(1)(B)) and any amount which is contributed or deferred by the Employer at the election of the Participant and which is not includible in the gross income of the Participant by reason of Code §§125, 457, and 132(f)(4). In addition, for years beginning after December 31, 2008 Military Differential Pay is treated as 415 Compensation.

(a)
Deemed   125   compensation.   If elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), amounts under Code §125 shall be deemed to include any amounts not available to a Participant in cash in lieu of group health coverage because the Participant is unable to certify that he or she has other health coverage. An amount will be treated as an amount under Code §125 pursuant to the preceding sentence only if the Employer does not request or collect information regarding the Participant's other health coverage as part of the enrollment process for the health plan.

(b)
Post-severance   compensation.   The Administrator shall adjust 415 Compensation, for Limitation Years beginning on or after July 1, 2007, or such earlier date as the Employer specifies in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement, for amounts that would otherwise be included in the definition of 415 Compensation but are paid by the later of 2 1/2 months after a Participant's severance from employment with the Employer or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, in accordance with the following, as elected in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement. The preceding time period, however, does not apply with respect to payments described in Subsections (4) and (5) bel ow. Any other payment of compensation paid after severance of employment that is not described in the following types of compensation is not considered 415 Compensation, even if payment is made within the time period specified above.

(1)
Regular   pay.   415 Compensation shall include regular pay after severance of employment (to the extent otherwise included in the definition of 415 Compensation) if:

(i)
The payment is regular compensation for services during the Participant's regular working hours, or compensation for services outside the Participant's regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments; and

(ii)
The payment would have been paid to the Participant prior to a severance from employment if the Participant had continued in employment with the Employer.

(2)
Leave   cash-outs.   415 Compensation shall include leave cash-outs if those amounts would have been included in the definition of 415 Compensation if they were paid prior to the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, and the amounts are for unused accrued bona fide sick, vacation, or other leave, but only if the Participant would have been able to use the leave if employment had continued.

(3)
Deferred   compensation.   415 Compensation shall include deferred compensation if those amounts would have been included in the definition of 415 Compensation if they were paid prior to the Participant's severance from employment with the Employer, and the amounts are received pursuant to a nonqualified unfunded deferred compensation plan, but only if the payment would have been paid if the Participant had continued in employment with the Employer and only to the extent the payment is includible in the Participant's gross income.

(4)
Military   Differential   Pay.   415 Compensation shall include payments to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (as that term is used in Code §414(u)(1)) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received if the individual had continued to perform services for the Employer rather than entering qualified military service.

(5)
Disability   pay.   415 Compensation shall include compensation paid to a Participant who is permanently and totally disabled, as defined in Code §22(e)(3), provided, as elected by the Employer in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement, salary continuation applies to all Participants who are permanently and totally disabled for a fixed or determinable period, or the Participant was not a Highly Compensated Employee immediately before becoming disabled.

(c)
Administrative   delay   ("the   first   few   weeks")   rule.   415 Compensation for a Limitation Year shall generally not include amounts earned but not paid during the Limitation Year solely because of the timing of pay periods and pay dates. However, if elected             in the Compensation Section of the Adoption Agreement, 415 Compensation for a Limitation Year shall include amounts earned but not paid during the Limitation Year solely because of the timing of pay periods and pay dates, provided the amounts are paid during the first few weeks of the next Limitation Year, the amounts are included on a uniform and consistent basis with respect to all similarly situated Participants, and no Compensation is included in more than one Limitation Year.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
8


                                                                                          Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Inclusion   of   certain   nonqualified   deferred   compensation   amounts.   If this is a PPA restatement and prior to the restatement 414(s) Compensation included all items includible in compensation under Regulation §1.415(c)-2(b) (Regulation §1.415-2(d)(2) under the Regulations in effect for Limitation Years beginning prior to July 1, 2007), then 415 Compensation for Limitation Years prior to the adoption of this restatement shall include amounts that are includible in the gross income of a Participant under the rules of Code
§409A or Code §457(f)(1)(A) or because the amounts are constructively received by the Participant. For Plan Years beginning on and after the Plan Year in which this restatement is adopted, the Plan does not provide for a definition of 415 Compensation incl uding all items in Regulation §1.415(c)-2(b).

(e)
Back   pay.   Back pay, within the meaning of Regulations §1.415(c)-2(g)(8), shall be treated as Compensation for the Limitation Year to which the back pay relates to the extent the back pay represents wages and compensation that would otherwise be included under this definition.

(f)
Dollar   limitation.   415 Compensation will be limited to the same dollar limitations set forth in Section 1.18(f) adjusted in such manner as permitted under Code §415(d).

(g)
Amendment.   Except as otherwise provided herein, if, in connection with the adoption of any amendment, the definition of 415 Compensation has been modified, then for Plan Years prior to the Plan Year which includes the adoption date of such amendment, 415 Compensation means compensation determined pursuant to the terms of the Plan then in effect.

1.41
"Highly   Compensated   Employee"   means an Employee described in Code §414(q) and the Regulations thereunder, and generally means any Employee who:

(a)
was a "five percent (5%) owner" as defined in Section 1.47(b) at any time during the "determination year" or the "look-back year"; or

(b)
for the "look-back year" had 415 Compensation from the Employer in excess of $80,000 and, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, was in the Top-Paid Group for the "look-back year." The $80,000 amount is adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as under Code §415(d). In applying this rule, the Employer may adopt any rounding or tie-breaking rules it desires, so long as such rules are reasonable, nondiscriminatory, and uniformly and consistently applied.

The "determination year" means the Plan Year for which testing is being performed and the "look-back year" means the immediately preceding twelve (12) month period. However, if the calendar year data election is made in the Adoption Agreement, for purpos es of (b) above, the "look-back year" shall be the calendar year beginning within the twelve (12) month period immediately preceding the "determination year."

A Highly Compensated Former Employee is based on the rules applicable to determining Highly Compensated Employee status as in effect for that "determination year," in accordance with Regulation §1.414(q)-1T, A-4 and IRS Notice 97-45 (or any superseding guidance).

In determining who is a Highly Compensated Employee, Employees who are nonresident aliens and who received no earned income (within the meaning of Code §911(d)) from the Employer constituting United States source income within the meaning of Code §861(a)(3) shall not be treated as Employees. If a nonresident alien Employee has U.S. source income, that Employee is treated as satisfying this definition if all of such Employee's U.S. source income from the Employer is exempt from U.S. income tax under an applicable income tax treaty. Additionally, all Affiliated Employers shall be taken into account as a single Employer and Leased Employees within the meaning of Code §§414(n)(2) and 414(o)(2) shall be considered Employees unless such Leased Employees are covered by a plan described in Code
§414(n)(5) and are not covered in any qualified plan maintained by the Employer. The exclusion of Leased Employees for this purpose shall be applied on a uniform and consistent basis for all of the Employer's retirement plans. Highly Compensated Former Empl oyees shall be treated as Highly Compensated Employees without regard to whether they performed services during the "determination year."

1.42
"Highly   Compensated   Participant"   means any Highly Compensated Employee who is eligible to participate in the component of the Plan being tested.

1.43
"Hour   of   Service"   means (a) each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly compensated or entitled to Compensation by the Employer for the performance of duties during the applicable computation period (these hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period in which the duties are performed); (b) each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly compensa ted or entitled to Compensation by the Employer (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) for reasons other than performance of duties (such as vacation, holidays, sickness, incapacity (including disability), jury duty, lay-off, military duty or leave of absence) during the applicable computation period (these hours will be calculated and credited pursuant to Department of Labor Regulation
§2530.200b-2 which is incorporated herein by reference); (c) each hour for which back pay is awarded or agreed to by the Employer without regard to mitigation of damages (these hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period or periods to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the award, agreement or payment is made). The same Hours of Service shall not be credited both under (a) or (b), as the case may be, and under (c).

Notwithstanding (b) above, (1) no more than 501 Hours of Service will be credited to an Employee on account of any single continuous period during which the Employee performs no duties (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period); (2) an hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment, on account of a period during which no duties are


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
9


                                                                                             Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

performed is not required to be credited to the Employee if such payment is made or due under a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable workers' compensation, or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws; and (3) Hours of Service are not required to be credited for a payment which solely reimburses an Employee for medical or medically related expenses i ncurred by the Employee. Furthermore, for purposes of (b) above, a payment shall be deemed to be made by or due from the Employer regardless of whether such payment is made by or due from the Employer directly, or indirectly through, among others, a trust fund, or insurer, to which the Employer contributes or pays premiums and regardless of whether contributions made or due to the trust fund, insurer, or other entity are for the benefit of particular Employees or are on behalf of a group of Employees in the aggregate.

Hours of Service will be credited for employment with all Affiliated Employers and for any individual considered to be a Leased Employee pursuant to Code §414(n) or 414(o) and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, the provisions of Department of Labor Regulations §2530.200b-2(b) and (c) are incorporated herein by reference.

Hours of Service will be determined using the actual hours method unless one of the methods below is elected in the Adoption Agreement. If the actual   hours   method is used to determine Hours of Service, an Employee is credited with the actual Hours of Service the Employee completes with the Employer or the number of Hours of Service for which the Employee is paid (or entitled to payment ).

If the days   worked   method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ten (10) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the day.

If the weeks   worked   method is elected, an Employee will be credited with forty-five (45) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the week.

If the semi-monthly   payroll   periods   worked   method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ninety-five (95) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the semi-monthly payroll period.

If the months   worked   method is elected, an Employee will be credited with one hundred ninety (190) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the month.

If the bi-weekly   payroll   periods   worked   method is elected, an Employee will be credited with ninety (90) Hours of Service if under the Plan such Employee would be credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service during the bi-weekly payroll period.

1.44
"Insurer"   means any legal reserve insurance company which has issued or shall issue one or more Contracts or Policies under the Plan.

1.45
"Investment   Manager"   means a Fiduciary as described in Act §3(38).

1.46
"Joint   and   Survivor   Annuity"   means an immediate annuity for the life of a Participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the Participant's Spouse which is not less than fifty percent (50%), nor more than one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the annuity payable during the joint lives of the Participant and the Participant's Spouse which can be purchased with the Participant's Vested interest in the Plan reduced by any outstanding loan balances pursuant to Section 7.6.

1.47
"Key   Employee"   means an Employee as defined in Code §416(i) and the Regulations thereunder. Generally, for purposes of determining top-heavy status, any Employee or Former Employee (including any deceased Employee as well as each of the Employee's or Former Employee's Beneficiaries) is considered a Key Employee if the Employee or Former Employee, at any time during the Plan Year that contains the "determination date," has been included in one of the following categories:

(a)
an officer of the Employer (as that term is defined within the meaning of the Regulations under Code §416) having annual 415 Compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Code §416(i)(1));

(b)
a "five percent (5%) owner" of the Employer. "Five percent (5%) owner" means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code §318) more than five percent (5%) of the value of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than five percent (5%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer or, in the case of an unincorporated business, any person who owns more than five percent (5%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer; and

(c)
a "one percent (1%) owner" of the Employer having annual 415 Compensation from the Employer of more than $150,000. "One percent (1%) owner" means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of Code §318) more than one percent (1%) of the value of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than one percent (1%) of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer or, in the case of an unincorporated business, any person who owns more than one percent (1%) of the capital or profits interest in the Employer.

In determining percentage ownership hereunder, employers that would otherwise be aggregated under Code §§414(b), (c), (m) and (o) shall be treated as separate employers. In determining whether an individual has 415 Compensation of more than $150,000, 415 Compensation from each employer required to be aggregated under Code §§414(b), (c), (m) and (o) shall be taken into account.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
10


                                                                                          Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Notwithstanding the foregoing, for purposes of determining Participants who are entitled to the minimum top-heavy contribution, the determination of Key Employees and Non-Key Employees will be made based on the Plan Year (rather than the Plan Year that contains the "determination date") for which the top-heavy contribution is being made.

1.48
"Late   Retirement   Date"   means the date of, or the first day of the month or the Anniversary Date coinciding with or next following, whichever corresponds to the election in the Adoption Agreement for the Normal Retirement Date, a Participant's actual retirement after having reached the Normal Retirement Date.

1.49
"Leased   Employee"   means any person (other than an Employee of the recipient Employer) who, pursuant to an agreement between the recipient Employer and any other person or entity ("leasing organization"), has performed services for the recipient (or for the recipient and related persons determined in accordance with Code §414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at least one year (unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections)), and such services are performed under primary direction or control by the recipient Employer. Contributions or benefits provided a Leased Employee by the leasing organization which are attributable to services performed for the recipient Employer shall be treated as provided by the recipient Employer. Furthermore, Compensation for a Leased Employee shall only include compensation from the leasing organization that is attributable to services performed for the recipient Employer.

A Leased Employee shall not be considered an employee of the recipient Employer if: (a) such employee is covered by a money purchase pension plan providing: (1) a non-integrated employer contribution rate of at least ten percent (10%) of compensation, as defined in Code §415(c)(3), (2) immediate participation, and (3) full and immediate vesting; and (b) leased employees do not constitute more than twenty percent (20%) of the recipient Employer's nonhighly compensated workforce.

1.50
"Limitation   Year"   means the "determination period" used to determine Compensation. However, the Employer may elect a different Limitation Year in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections). All qualified plans maintained by the Employer must use the same Limitation Year. Furthermore, unless there is a change to a new Limitation Year, the Limitation Year will be a twelve (12) consecutive month period. In the case of an initial Limitation Year, the Limitation Year will be the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending on the last day of the period specified in the Adoption Agreement. If the Limitation Year is amended to a different twelve (12) consecutive month period, the new "Limitation Year" must begin on a date within the "Limitation Year" in which the amendment is made. For Limitation Years beginning on and after July 1, 2007, the Limitation Year may only be cha nged by a Plan amendment. Furthermore, if the Plan is terminated effective as of a date other than the last day of the Plan's Limitation Year, then the Plan is treated as if the Plan had been amended to change its Limitation Year.

1.51
"Military   Differential   Pay"   means, for any Plan or Limitation Year beginning after June 30, 2007, any differential wage payments made to an individual that represents an amount which, when added to the individual's military pay, approximates the amount of compensation that was paid to the individual while working for the Employer. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, for Compensation "determination periods" beginning after December 31, 2008, an individual receiving a differential wage payment, as defined by
Code §3401(h)(2), is treated as an Employee of the Employer making the payment.

The Plan is not treated as failing to meet the requirements of any provision described in Code §414(u)(1)(C) (or corresponding Plan provisions, including, but not limited to, Plan provisions related to the ADP or ACP test) by reason of any contribution or benefit which is based on the Military Differential Pay. The preceding sentence applies only if all Employees of the Employer performing service in the uniformed services described in Code §3401(h)(2)(A) are entitled to receive differential wage payments (as defined in Code §3401(h)(2)) on reasonably equivalent terms and, if eligible to participate in a retirement plan maintained by the Employer, to make contributions based on the payments on reasonably equivalent terms (taking into account Code §§410(b)(3), (4), and (5)).

1.52
"Nonelective   Contribution"   means the Employer's contributions to the Plan other than Elective Deferrals, any Qualified Nonelective Contributions and any Qualified Matching Contributions. Employer matching contributions which are not Qualified Matching Contributions shall be considered a Nonelective Contribution for purposes of the Plan.

1.53
"Nonhighly   Compensated   Employee/Participant"   means any Employee/Participant who is not a Highly Compensated Employee. However, if pursuant to Sections 12.4 or 12.6 the prior year testing method is used to calculate the ADP or the ACP, a Nonhighly Compensated Employee/Participant shall be determined using the definition of Highly Compensated Employee in effect for the preceding Plan Year.

1.54
"Non-Key   Employee"   means any Employee or Former Employee (and such Employee's or Former Employee's Beneficiaries) who is not a Key Employee.

1.55
"Normal   Retirement   Age"   means the age elected in the Adoption Agreement at which time a Participant's Account shall be nonforfeitable (if the Participant is employed by the Employer on or after that date). For money purchase pension plans, if the Employer enforces a mandatory retirement age, then the Normal Retirement Age is the lesser of that mandatory age or the age specified in the Adoption Agreement. Furthermore, effective for Plan Years beginning after the adoption of this Plan, the Employer may not dee m the Social Security retirement age (as defined in Code §415(b)(8)) as the Normal Retirement Age for purposes of nondiscrimination testing under Code §401(a)(4).

1.56
"Normal   Retirement   Date"   means the date elected in the Adoption Agreement.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
11


                                                                                             Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

1.57
"1-Year   Break   in   Service"   means, if the Hour of Service method is used, the applicable computation period that is used to determine a Year of Service during which an Employee or Former Employee has not completed more than 500 Hours of Service. However, if the Employer selected, in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, to define a Year of Service as less than 1,000 Hours of Service, then the 500 Hours of Service in this definition of 1-Year Break in Service shall be proportionately reduced. Further, solely for the purpose of determining whether an Employee has incurred a 1-Year Break in Service, Hours of Service shall be recognized for "authorized leaves of absence" and "maternity and paternity leaves of absence." For this purpose, Hours of Service shall be credited for the computation period in which the absence from work begins, only if credit therefore is necessary to prevent the Employee from incurring a 1-Year Break in Service, or, in any other case, in the immediately following computation period. The Hours of Service credited for a "maternity or paternity leave of absence" shall be those which would normally have been credited but for such absence, or, in any case in which the Administrator is unable to determine such hours normally credited, eight (8) Hours of Service per day. The total Hours of   Service required to be credited for a "maternity or paternity leave of absence" shall not exceed the number of Hours of Service needed to prevent the Employee from incurring a 1-Year Break in Service.

"Authorized leave of absence" means an unpaid, temporary cessation from active employment with the Employer pursuant to an established nondiscriminatory policy, whether occasioned by illness, military service, or any other reason.

A "maternity or paternity leave of absence" means an absence from work for any period by reason of the Employee's pregnancy, birth of the Employee's child, placement of a child with the Employee in connection with the adoption of such child, or any absence for the purpose of caring for such child for a period immediately following such birth or placement.

If the elapsed time method is elected in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, then a "1-Year Break in Service" means a twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on the severance from service date or any anniversary thereof and ending on the next succeeding anniversary of such date; provided, however, that the Employee or Former Employee does not perform an Hour of Service for the Employer during such twelve (12) consecutive month period.

1.58
"Participant"   means any Employee or Former Employee who has satisfied the requirements of Sections 3.1 and 3.2 and entered the Plan and is eligible to accrue benefits under the Plan. In addition, the term "Participant" also includes any individual who was a Participant (as defined in the preceding sentence) and who must continue to be taken into account under a particular provision of the Plan (e.g., because the individual has an Account balance in the Plan).

1.59
"Participant   Directed   Account"   means that portion of a Participant's interest in the Plan with respect to which the Participant has directed the investment in accordance with the Participant Direction Procedures.

1.60
"Participant   Direction   Procedures"   means such instructions, guidelines or policies, the terms of which are incorporated herein, as shall be established pursuant to Section 4.10 and observed by the Administrator and applied and provided to Participants who have Participant Directed Accounts.

1.61
"Participating   Employer"   means an Employer which, with the consent of the "lead Employer" adopts the Plan pursuant to Section
11.1 or Article XIV. In addition, unless the context means otherwise, the term "Employer" shall include any Participating Employer which shall adopt this Plan.

1.62   "Period   of   Service"   means the aggregate of all periods of service commencing with an Employee's first day of employment or reemployment with the Employer or an Affiliated Employer and ending on the first day of a Period of Severance, or for benefit accrua l purposes, ending on the severance from service date. The first day of employment or reemployment is the first day the Employe e performs an Hour of Service. An Employee who incurs a Period of Severance of twelve (12) months or less will also receive service-spanning credit by treating any such period as a Period of Service for purposes of eligibility and vesting (but not benefit accrual). For purposes of benefit accrual, a Participant's whole year Periods of Service is equal to the sum of all full and partial periods of service, whethe r or not such service is continuous or contiguous, expressed in the number of whole years represented by such sum. For this purpose, fractional periods of a year will be expressed in terms of days.

Periods of Service with any Affiliated Employer shall be recognized. Furthermore, Periods of Service with any predecessor employer that maintained this Plan shall be recognized. Periods of Service with any other predecessor employer shall be recognized as elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, for a standardized Adoption Agreement, the recognition of service with any other employer (1) is limited to the period which does not exceed 5 years immediately preceding the year in which an amendment crediting such service becomes effective, (2) must be credited to all Employees on a reasonably uniform basis, and (3) must otherwise comply with Regulation
§1.401(a)(4)-5(a)(3).

In determining Periods of Service for purposes of vesting under the Plan, Periods of Service will be excluded as elected in the Adoption Agreement and as specified in Section 3.5.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
12


                                                                                             Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

In the event the method of crediting service is amended from the Hour of Service method to the elapsed time method, an Employee will receive credit for a Period of Service consisting of:

(a)
A number of years equal to the number of Years of Service credited to the Employee before the computation period during which the amendment occurs; and

(b)
The greater of (1) the Periods of Service that would be credited to the Employee under the elapsed time method for service during the entire computation period in which the transfer occurs or (2) the service taken into account under the Hour of Service method as of the date of the amendment.

In addition, the Employee will receive credit for service subsequent to the amendment commencing on the day after the last day of the computation period in which the transfer occurs.

1.63   "Period   of   Severance"   means a continuous period of time during which an Employee is not employed by the Employer. Such period begins on the date the Employee retires, quits or is discharged, or if earlier, the twelve (12) month anniversary of the date on which the Employee was otherwise first absent from service.

In the case of an individual who is absent from work for "maternity or paternity" reasons, the twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on the first anniversary of the first day of such absence shall not constitute a one year Period of Severance. For purposes of this paragraph, an absence from work for "maternity or paternity" reasons means an absence (a) by reason of the pregnancy of the i ndividual,
(b) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual, (c) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or (d) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement.

1.64
"Plan"   means this instrument hereinafter referred to as Pentegra Services, Inc. Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan and Trust (Basic Plan Document #07 and the Adoption Agreement) as adopted by the Employer, including all amendments thereto and any appendix which is specifically permitted pursuant to the terms of the Plan.

1.65
"Plan   Year"   means the Plan's accounting year as specified in the Adoption Agreement. Unless there is a Short Plan Year, the Plan Year will be a twelve-consecutive month period.

1.66
"Pre-Retirement   Survivor   Annuity"   means an immediate annuity for the life of a Participant's Spouse, the payments under which must be equal to the benefit which can be provided with the percentage, as specified in the Adoption Agreement, of the Participant's Vested interest in the Plan as of the date of death. If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, the percentage shall be equal to fifty percent (50%). Furthermore, if less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Participant's Vested interest in the Plan is used to provi de the
Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity, a proportionate share of each of the Participant's Accounts subject to the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall be used to provide the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity.

1.67
"Pre-Tax   Elective   Deferrals"   means a Participant's Elective Deferrals that are not includible in the Participant's gross income at the time deferred.

1.68
"Qualified   Automatic   Contribution   Arrangement"   (QACA)   means an automatic contribution arrangement which meets the requirements of Section 12.9.

1.69
"Qualified   Matching   Contribution"   (QMAC)   means any Employer matching contributions that are made pursuant to
Sections 12.1(a)(2) (if elected in the Adoption Agreement), 12.5 and 12.7 or pursuant to any other Plan provision which provides for such contributions.

1.70
"Qualified   Nonelective   Contribution"   (QNEC)   means the Employer's contributions to the Plan that are made pursuant to Sections 12.1(a)(4), 12.5 and 12.7 or pursuant to any other Plan provision which provides for such contributions.

1.71
"Regulation"   means the Income Tax Regulations as promulgated by the Secretary of the Treasury or a delegate of the Secretary of the Treasury, and as amended from time to time.

1.72
"Retirement   Date"   means the date as of which a Participant retires for reasons other than Total and Permanent Disability, regardless of whether such retirement occurs on a Participant's Normal Retirement Date, Early Retirement Date or Late Retirement Date (see
Section 6.1).

1.73
"Roth   Elective   Deferrals"   means a Participant's Elective Deferrals that are includible in the Participant's gross income at the time deferred and have been irrevocably designated as Roth Elective Deferrals at the time of the deferral. Roth Elective Deferrals shall be subject to the requirements of Sections 12.2(d) and 12.2(e) and shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be required to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of Regulation §1.401(k)-1(b), the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference. A Participant's Roth Elective Deferrals will be maintained in a separate account containing only the Participant's Roth Elective Deferrals and gains and losses attributable to those Roth Elective Deferrals. In addition, the Administrator shall, to the extent necessary for proper reporting, separately account for any "in-Plan Roth rollover contributions" (as defined in Section 12.11) that are transferred to a Participant's Roth


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
13


                                                Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Elective Deferral Account. The portion of a Participant's Account attributable to "in-Plan Roth rollover contributions" is not subject to the distribution restrictions of Section 12.2(e).

1.74
"Salary   Deferral   Agreement"   means an agreement between a Participant and the Employer, whereby the Participant elects to reduce Compensation by a specific dollar amount or percentage and the Employer agrees to contribute such amount into the 401(k) Plan. A Salary Deferral Agreement may require that an election be stated in specific percentage increments (not greater than one percent (1%) increments) or in specific dollar amount increments (not greater than dollar increments that could exceed one percent (1%) of Compensation).

A Salary Deferral Agreement may not be effective prior to the later of: (a) the date the Employee becomes a Participant; (b) the date the Participant agrees (including by automatic consent) to the Salary Deferral Agreement; or (c) the date the 401(k) plan is adopted by the Employer or applicable Participating Employer. A Salary Deferral Agreement is valid even though it is executed by an Employee before he or she actually becomes a Participant, so long as the Salary Deferral Agreement is not effective before the date the Employee becomes a Participant. A Salary Deferral Agreement may only apply to Compensation that becomes currently available to the Employee after the effective date of the Salary Deferral Agreement.

A Salary Deferral Agreement (or other written procedures) must designate a uniform period during which an Employee may change or terminate his or her deferral election under the Salary Deferral Agreement. A Participant's right to change or terminate a Salary Deferral Agreement may not be available on a less frequent basis than once per Plan Year.

1.75
"Self-Employed   Individual"   means an individual who has Earned Income for the taxable year from the trade or business for which the Plan is established, and, also, an individual who would have had Earned Income but for the fact that the trade or business had no net profits for the taxable year. A Self-Employed Individual shall be treated as an Employee.

1.76
"Short   Plan   Year"   means, if specified in the Adoption Agreement or as the result of an amendment, a Plan Year of less than a twelve (12) month period. If there is a Short Plan Year, the following rules shall apply in the administration of this Plan. In determining whether an Employee has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service if the elapsed time method is used) for benefit accrual
purposes in the Short Plan Year, the number of the Hours of Service (or months of service if the elapsed time method is used) required shall be proportionately reduced based on the number of days (or months) in the Short Plan Year. The determination of whether an Employee has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service) for vesting and eligibility purposes shall be made in accordance with Department of Labor Regulation §2530.203-2(c). In addition, if this Plan is integrated with Social Security, then the integration level shall be proportionately reduced based on the number of months in the Short Plan Year.

1.77
"Spouse"   means a spouse as determined under federal tax law. In addition, with respect to benefits or rights not mandated by law (e.g., Section 6.2(e)(1) with respect to death benefits in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity), Spouse also includes a spouse as elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections). The Employer may also elect, in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), to require that a Participant be married for at least one (1) year before the Participant is treated as married (and having a Spouse) for all purposes of the Plan other than for purposes of determining eligible hardship distribution expenses.

1.78
"Taxable   Wage   Base"   means, with respect to any Plan Year, the contribution and benefit base under Section 230 of the Social Security Act at the beginning of such Plan Year.

1.79
"Terminated   Participant"   means a person who has been a Participant, but whose employment has been terminated with the Employer (including an Affiliated Employer) or applicable Participating Employer, other than by death, Total and Permanent Disability or retirement.

1.80
"Top-Heavy   Plan"   means a plan described in Section 9.2(a).

1.81
"Top-Heavy   Plan   Year"   means a Plan Year during which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan.

1.82
"Top-Paid   Group"   shall be determined pursuant to Code §414(q) and the Regulations thereunder and generally means the top twenty percent (20%) of Employees who performed services for the Employer during the applicable year, ranked according to the amount of 415 Compensation received from the Employer during such year. All Affiliated Employers shall be taken into account as a single employer, and Leased Employees shall be treated as Employees if required pursuant to Code §414(n) or (o). Employees who are nonresident aliens who received no earned income (within the meaning of Code §911(d)(2)) from the Employer constituting United States source income within the meaning of Code §861(a)(3) shall not be treated as Employees. Furthermore, for the purpose of determining the number of Employees in any year, the following additional Employees may also be excluded, however, such Employees shall still be considered for the purpose   of identifying the particular Employees in the Top-Paid Group:

(a)
Employees with less than six (6) months of service;

(b)
Employees who normally work less than 17 1/2 hours per week;


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
14


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(c)
Employees who normally work less than six (6) months during a year; and

(d)
Employees who have not yet attained age twenty-one (21).

In addition, if ninety percent (90%) or more of the Employees of the Employer are covered under agreements the Secretary of Labor finds to be collective bargaining agreements between Employee representatives and the Employer, and the Plan covers only Empl oyees who are not covered under such agreements, then Employees covered by such agreements shall be excluded from both the total number of active Employees as well as from the identification of particular Employees in the Top-Paid Group.

The foregoing exclusions set forth in this Section shall be applied on a uniform and consistent basis for all purposes for which the Code §414(q) definition is applicable. Furthermore, in applying such exclusions, the Employer may substitute any lesser service, hour s or age.

1.83
"Total   and   Permanent   Disability"   means, unless otherwise specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), the inability to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or which has lasted or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months. The disability of a Participant shall be determined by a licensed physician. However, if the condition constitutes total disability under the federal Social Security Acts, the Administrator may rely upon such determination that the Participant is Totally and Permanently Disabled for the purposes of this Plan. The determination shall be applied uniformly to all Participants.

1.84
"Trustee"   means any person or entity that is named in the Adoption Agreement or has otherwise agreed to serve as Trustee, or any successors thereto. In addition, unless the context means, or the Plan provides, otherwise, the term "Trustee" shall mean the Insurer if the Plan is fully insured.

If the sponsor of this prototype or volume submitter practitioner is a bank, savings and loan, trust company, credit union or similar institution, a person or entity other than such sponsor or practitioner (or its affiliates or subsidiaries) may not serve as Trustee without the consent of such sponsor or practitioner.

1.85
"Trust   Fund"   means, if the Plan is funded with a trust, the assets of the Plan and Trust as the same shall exist from time to time.

1.86
"Valuation   Date"   means the date or dates specified in the Adoption Agreement. Regardless of any election to the contrary, for purposes of the determination and allocation of earnings and losses, the Valuation Date shall include the Anniversary Date and may include any other date or dates deemed necessary or appropriate by the Administrator for the valuation of Participants' Accounts during the Plan Year, which may include any day that the Trustee (or Insurer), any transfer agent appointed by the Trustee (or Insurer) or the Employer, or any stock exchange used by such agent, are open for business.

1.87
"Vested"   means the nonforfeitable portion of any Account maintained on behalf of a Participant.

1.88
"Year   of   Service"   means the computation period of twelve (12) consecutive months, herein set forth, and during which an Employee has completed at least 1,000 Hours of Service (unless a lower number of Hours of Service is specified in the Adoption Agreement).

For purposes of eligibility for participation, the initial computation period shall begin with the date on which the Employee first performs an Hour of Service (employment commencement date). Unless otherwise elected in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, the succeeding computation periods shall begin on the anniversary of the Employee's employment commencement date. However, unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, if one (1) Year of Service or less is required as a condition of eligibility, then the computation period after the initial computation period shall shift to the current Plan Year which includes the anniversary of the date on which the Employee first performed an Hour of Service, and subsequent computation periods shall be the Plan Year. If there is a shift to the Plan Year, an Employee who is credited with the number of Hours of Service to be credited with a Year of Service in both the initial eligibility computation period and the first Plan Year which commences prior to the first anniversary of the Employee's initial eligibility computation period will be credited with two (2) Years of Service for purposes of eligibility to participate.

If two (2) Years of Service are required as a condition of eligibility, a Participant will only have completed two (2) Years of Service for eligibility purposes upon completing two (2) consecutive Years of Service without an intervening 1-Year Break in Service (referred to as the two (2) 1-Year Breaks in Service rule).

For vesting purposes, and all other purposes not specifically addressed in this Section, the computation period shall be the period elected in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement. If no election is made in the Service Crediting Method Section of the Adoption Agreement, then the computation period shall be the Plan Year.

In determining Years of Service for purposes of vesting under the Plan, Years of Service will be excluded as elected in the Adoption Agreement and as specified in Section 3.5.

Years of Service and 1-Year Breaks in Service for eligibility purposes will be measured on the same eligibility computation period.
Years of Service and 1-Year Breaks in Service for vesting purposes will be measured on the same vesting computation period.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
15


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Years of Service with any Affiliated Employer shall be recognized. Furthermore, Years of Service with any predecessor employer that maintained this Plan shall be recognized. Years of Service with any other employer shall be recognized as elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, for a standardized Adoption Agreement, the recognition of service with any other employer (1) is limited to the period which does not exceed 5 years immediately preceding the year in which an amendment crediting such service becomes effective, (2) must be credited to all Employees on a reasonably uniform basis, and (3) must otherwise comply with Regulation §1.401(a)(4)-5(a)(3).

In the event the method of crediting service is amended from the elapsed time method to the Hour of Service method, an Employee will receive credit for Years of Service equal to:

(a)
The number of Years of Service equal to the number of 1-year Periods of Service credited to the Employee as of the date of the amendment; and

(b)
In the computation period which includes the date of the amendment, a number of Hours of Service (using the Hours of Service equivalency method, if any, elected in the Adoption Agreement) to any fractional part of a year credited to the Employee under this Section as of the date of the amendment.

ARTICLE II ADMINISTRATION

2.1
POWERS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER

(a)
Appointment   of   Trustee   (or   Insurer)   and   Administrator.   In addition to the general powers and responsibilities otherwise provided for in this Plan, the Employer shall be empowered to appoint and remove one or more Trustees (or Insurers) and Administrators from time to time as it deems necessary for the proper administration of the Plan to ensure that the Plan is being operated for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries in accordance with the terms of the Plan, the Code, and the Act. The Employer may appoint counsel, specialists, advisers, agents (including any nonfiduciary agent) and other persons as the Employer deems necessary or desirable in connection with the exercise of its fiduciary duties under this Plan. The Employer may compensate such agents or advisers from the assets of the Plan as fiduciary expenses (but not including any business (settlor) expenses of the Employer), to the extent not paid by the Employer.

(b)
Funding   policy   and   method.   The Employer shall establish a "funding policy and method," i.e., it shall determine whether the Plan has a short run need for liquidity (e.g., to pay benefits) or whether liquidity is a long run goal and investment growth (and stability of same) is a more current need, or shall appoint a qualified person to do so. If the Trustee (or Insurer) has discretionary authority,    the Employer or its delegate shall communicate such needs and goals to the Trustee (or Insurer), who shall coordinate such              Plan needs with its investment policy. The communication of such a "funding policy and method" shall not, however, constitute a directive to the Trustee (or Insurer) as to the investment of the Trust Funds. Such "funding policy and method" shall be consistent with the objectives of this Plan and with the requirements of Title I of the Act.

(c)
Appointment   of   Investment   Manager.   The Employer may appoint, at its option, one or more Investment Managers, investment advisers, or other agents to provide investment direction to the Trustee (or Insurer) with respect to any or all of the Plan assets. Such appointment shall be given by the Employer in writing in a form acceptable to the Trustee (or Insurer) and shall specifically identify the Plan assets with respect to which the Investment Manager or other agent shall have the authority to direct the investment.

(d)
Review   of   fiduciary   performance.   The Employer shall periodically review the performance of any Fiduciary or other person to whom duties have been delegated or allocated by it under the provisions of this Plan or pursuant to procedures established hereunder. This requirement may be satisfied by formal periodic review by the Employer or by a qualified person specifically designated by the Employer, through day-to-day conduct and evaluation, or through other appropriate ways.

2.2
DESIGNATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY

The Employer may appoint one or more Administrators. If the Employer does not appoint an Administrator, the Employer will be the Administrator. Any person, including, but not limited to, the Employees of the Employer, shall be eligible to serve as an Administrator.
Any person so appointed shall signify acceptance by filing written acceptance with the Employer. An Administrator may resign by delivering a written resignation to the Employer or be removed by the Employer by delivery of written notice of removal, to take effect at a date specified therein, or upon delivery to the Administrator if no date is specified. Upon the resignation or removal of an Administrator, the Employer may designate in writing a successor to this position.

2.3
ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES

If more than one person is appointed as Administrator, then the responsibilities of each Administrator may be specified by the Employer and accepted in writing by each Administrator. If no such delegation is made by the Employer, then the Administrator s may allocate the responsibilities among themselves, in which event the Administrators shall notify the Employer and the Trustee (or Insurer) in writing of such action and specify the responsibilities of each Administrator. The Trustee (or Insurer) thereafter shall accept and rely upon any documents executed by the appropriate Administrator until such time as the Employer or the Administrators file with the Trustee (or Insurer) a written revocation of such designation.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
16


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

2.4
POWERS AND DUTIES OF THE ADMINISTRATOR

The primary responsibility of the Administrator is to administer the Plan for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries, subject to the specific terms of the Plan. The Administrator shall administer the Plan in accordance with its terms and shall have the power and discretion to construe the terms of the Plan and determine all questions arising in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of the Plan. Benefits under this Plan will be paid only if the Administrator decides in its discretion that the applicant is entitled to them. Any such determination by the Administrator shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons. The Administrator may establish procedures, correct any defect, supply any information, or reconcile any inconsistency in such ma nner and to such extent as shall be deemed necessary or advisable to carry out the purpose of the Plan; provided, however, that any procedure, discretionary act, interpretation or construction shall be done in a nondiscriminatory manner based upon uniform principles consistently applied and shall be consistent with the intent that the Plan continue to be deemed a qualified plan under the terms of Code §401(a), and shall comply with the terms of the Act and all regulations issued pursuant thereto. The Administrator shall have all powers necessary or appropriate to accomplish its duties under this Plan.

The Administrator shall be charged with the duties of the general administration of the Plan and the powers necessary to carry out such duties as set forth under the terms of the Plan, including, but not limited to, the following:

(a)
the discretion to determine all questions relating to the eligibility of an Employee to participate or remain a Participant hereu nder and to receive benefits under the Plan;

(b)
the authority to review and settle all claims against the Plan, including claims where the settlement amount cannot be calculated or is not calculated in accordance with the Plan's benefit formula. This authority specifically permits the Administrator to settle disputed claims for benefits and any other disputed claims made against the Plan;

(c)
to compute, certify, and direct the Trustee (or Insurer) with respect to the amount and the kind of benefits to which any Participant shall be entitled hereunder;

(d)
to authorize and direct the Trustee (or Insurer) with respect to all discretionary or otherwise directed disbursements from the Trust Fund;

(e)
to maintain all necessary records for the administration of the Plan;

(f)
to interpret the provisions of the Plan and to make and publish such rules for regulation of the Plan that are consistent with the terms hereof;

(g)
to determine the size and type of any Contract to be purchased from any Insurer, and to designate the Insurer from which such Contract shall be purchased;

(h)
to compute and certify to the Employer and to the Trustee (or Insurer) from time to time the sums of money necessary or desirable to be contributed to the Plan;

(i)
to consult with the Employer and the Trustee (or Insurer) regarding the short and long-term liquidity needs of the Plan in order that the Trustee (or Insurer) can exercise any investment discretion (if the Trustee (or Insurer) has such discretion), in a manner designed to accomplish specific objectives;

(j)
to prepare and implement a procedure for notifying Participants and Beneficiaries of their rights to elect Joint and Survivor Annuities and Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuities if required by the Plan, Code and Regulations thereunder;

(k)
to assist Participants regarding their rights, benefits, or elections available under the Plan;

(l)
to act as the named Fiduciary responsible for communicating with Participants as needed to maintain Plan compliance with Act
§404(c) (if the Employer intends to comply with Act §404(c)) including, but not limited to, the receipt and transmission of Participants' directions as to the investment of their Accounts under the Plan and the formation of policies, rules, and procedures pursuant to which Participants may give investment instructions with respect to the investment of their Accounts; and

(m)
to determine the validity of, and take appropriate action with respect to, any "qualified domestic relations order" received by it.

2.5
RECORDS AND REPORTS

The Administrator shall keep a record of all actions taken and shall keep all other books of account, records, and other data that may be necessary for proper administration of the Plan and shall be responsible for supplying all information and reports to the Internal Revenue Service, Department of Labor, Participants, Beneficiaries and others as required by law.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
17


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

2.6
APPOINTMENT OF ADVISERS

The Administrator may appoint counsel, specialists, advisers, agents (including nonfiduciary agents) and other persons as the Administrator deems necessary or desirable in connection with the administration of this Plan, including but not limited to agents and advisers to assist with the administration and management of the Plan, and thereby to provide, among such other duties as the Administrator may appoint, assistance with maintaining Plan records and the providing of investment information to the Plan's investment fiduciaries and, if applicable, to Plan Participants.

2.7
INFORMATION FROM EMPLOYER

The Employer shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator on all pertinent facts as the Administrator may require in order to perform its functions hereunder and the Administrator shall advise the Trustee (or Insurer) of such of the foregoing facts as may be pertinent to the Trustee's (or Insurer's) duties under the Plan. The Administrator may rely upon such information as is suppl ied by the Employer and shall have no duty or responsibility to verify such information.

2.8
PAYMENT OF EXPENSES

All reasonable expenses of administration may be paid out of the Plan assets unless paid by the Employer. Such expenses shall include any expenses incident to the functioning of the Administrator, or any person or persons retained or appointed by any named Fiduciary incident to the exercise of their duties under the Plan, including, but not limited to, fees of accountants, counsel, Investment Managers, agents (including nonfiduciary agents) appointed for the purpose of assisting the Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer) in carrying out the instructions of Participants as to the directed investment of their Accounts (if permitted) and other specialists and their agents, the costs of any bonds required pursuant to Act §412, and other costs of administering the Plan. In addition, unless specifically prohibited under statute, regulation or other guidance of general applicability, the Administrator may charge to the Account of an individual Participant a reasonable charge to offset the cost of making a distribution to the Participant, Beneficiary, or Alternate Payee. If liquid assets of t he Plan are insufficient to cover the fees of the Trustee (or Insurer) or the Administrator, then Plan assets shall be liquidated to the extent necessary for such fees. In the event any part of the Plan assets becomes subject to tax, all taxes incurred will be paid from the Plan assets. Until paid, the expenses shall constitute a liability of the Trust Fund.

2.9
MAJORITY ACTIONS

Except where there has been an allocation and delegation of administrative authority pursuant to Section 2.3, if there is more than one Administrator, then they shall act by a majority of their number, but may authorize one or more of them to sign all papers on their behalf.

2.10
CLAIMS PROCEDURES

(a)
Initial   Claim.   Claims for benefits under the Plan may be filed in writing with the Administrator. Written or electronic notice of the disposition of a claim shall be furnished to the claimant within ninety (90) days (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits and disability is not based on the Social Security Acts) after the application is filed, or such period as is required by applica ble law or Department of Labor regulation. Any electronic notification shall comply with the standards imposed by Department of Labor Regulation §2520.104b-1(c)(1)(i), (iii) and (iv) or any subsequent guidance. In the event the claim is denied, the reasons for the denial shall be specifically set forth in the notice in language calculated to be understood by the claimant, pertinent provisions of the Plan shall be cited, and, where appropriate, an explanation as to how the claimant can perfect the claim will be provided. In addition, the claimant shall be furnished with an explanation of the Plan's claims review procedure.

(b)
Claims   review.   Any Employee, Former Employee, or Beneficiary of either, who has been denied a benefit by a decision of the Administrator pursuant to Section 2.10 shall be entitled to request the Administrator to give further consideration to the claim by filing with the Administrator a written request. Such request, together with a written statement of the reasons why the claimant believes such claim should be allowed, shall be filed with the Administrator no later than sixty (60) days after receipt of the written notification provided for in Section 2.10. A final decision as to the allowance of the claim shall be made by the Administrator within sixty (60) days (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits and disability is not based on the Social Security Acts) of receipt of the appeal (unless there has been an extension of sixty (60) days (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits and disability is not based on the Social Security Acts) due to special circumstances, provided the delay and the special circumstances occasioning it are communicated to the claimant within the sixty (60) day period (45 days if the claim involves disability benefits and disability is not based on the Social Security Acts)). Such communication shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant and shall include specific reasons for the decision and specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based. The communication may be written or electronic (provided the electronic communication complies with the standards imposed by Department of Labor Regulation §2520.104b-1(c)(1)(i), (iii) and (iv) or any subsequent guidance). Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent any of the time periods specified in this Section are amended by law or Department of Labor regulation, then the time frames specified herein shall automatically be changed in accordance with such law or regulation.

(c)
Civil   action.   If the Administrator, pursuant to the claims review procedure, makes a final written determination denying a Participant's or Beneficiary's benefit claim, then in order to preserve the claim, the Participant or Beneficiary must file a civil action under Act Section 502(a) with respect to the denied claim not later than one hundred eighty (180) days following the date of the Administrator's final determination.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
18


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Deadline   to   file   claim.   To be considered timely under the Plan's claims procedures, a claim must be filed under Sections 2.10(a) or (b) above within one year after the claimant knew or reasonably should have known of the principal facts upon which the claim is based. Knowledge of all facts that the Participant knew or reasonably should have known shall be imputed to the claimant for the purpose of applying this deadline.

(e)
Exhaustion   of   administrative   remedies.   The exhaustion of the claims procedures is mandatory for resolving every claim and dispute arising under this Plan. As to such claims and disputes: (1) no claimant shall be permitted to commence any legal action to recover Plan benefits or to enforce or clarify rights under the Plan under Act §502 or §510 or under any other provision of law, whether or not statutory, until the claims procedures set forth in Subsections (a) and (b) above have been exhausted in their entirety; and (2) in any such legal action all explicit and all implicit determinations by the Administrator (including, but not limited to, determinations as to whether the claim, or a request for a review of a denied claim, was timely filed) shall be afforded the maximum deference permitted by law.

(f)
Deadline   to   file   action.   No legal action to recover Plan benefits or to enforce or clarify rights under the Plan under Act §502 or
§510 or under any other provision of law, whether or not statutory, may be brought by any claimant on any matter pertaining to this Plan unless the legal action is commenced in the proper forum before the earlier of: (1) 30 months after the claimant knew or reasonably should have known of the principal facts on which the claim is based, or (2) six months after the claimant has exhausted the claims procedure under this Plan. Knowledge of all facts that the Participant knew or reasonably should have known shall be imputed to every claimant who is or claims to be a Beneficiary of the Participant or otherwise claims to derive an entitlement by reference to the Participant for the purpose of applying the previously specified periods.

(g)
Plan   Administrator   discretion;   court   review.   The Administrator and all persons determining or reviewing claims have full discretion to determine benefit claims under the Plan. Any interpretation, determination or other action of such persons shal l be subject to review only if it is arbitrary or capricious or otherwise an abuse of discretion. Any review of a final decision or action of the persons reviewing a claim shall be based only on such evidence presented to or considered by such persons at the time they ma de the decision that is the subject of review.

ARTICLE III ELIGIBILITY

3.1
CONDITIONS OF ELIGIBILITY

An Eligible Employee shall be eligible to participate hereunder on the date such Employee has satisfied the conditions of eligibility, if any, elected in the Adoption Agreement.

3.2
EFFECTIVE DATE OF PARTICIPATION

(a)
General   rule.   An Eligible Employee who has satisfied the conditions of eligibility pursuant to Section 3.1 shall become a Participant effective as of the date elected in the Adoption Agreement. Regardless of any election in the Adoption Agreement to the contrary, an Eligible Employee who has satisfied the maximum age (21) and service requirements (one (1) Year (or Period) of Service (or, with respect to contributions other than Elective Deferrals, more than one (1) year if full and immediate vesting)) and who is otherwise entitled to participate, will become a Participant no later than the earlier of (1) six (6) months after such requirements are satisfied, or (2) the first day of the first Plan Year after such requirements are satisfied, unless the Employee separates from service before such participation date.

(b)
Rehired   Employee.   If an Eligible Employee is not employed on the date determined pursuant to (a) above, but is reemployed before a 1-Year Break in Service has occurred, then such Eligible Employee shall become a Participant on the date of reemployment or, if later, the date that the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee not terminated employment. If such Employee incurs a 1-Year Break in Service, then eligibility will be determined under the 1-Year Break in Service rules set forth in Section 3.5.

(c)
Recognition   of   predecessor   service.   Unless specifically provided otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, an Eligible Employee who satisfies the Plan's eligibility requirement conditions by reason of recognition of service with a predecessor employer will become a Participant as of the day the Plan credits service with a predecessor employer or, if later, the date the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the service with the predecessor employer been service with the Employer.

(d)
Noneligible   to   eligible   class.   If an Employee, who has satisfied the Plan's eligibility requirements and would otherwise have become a Participant, shall go from a classification of a noneligible Employee to an Eligible Employee, such Employee shall become a Participant on the date such Employee becomes an Eligible Employee or, if later, the date that the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee always been an Eligible Employee.

(e)
Eligible   to   noneligible   class.   If an Employee, who has satisfied the Plan's eligibility requirements and would otherwise become a Participant, shall go from a classification of an Eligible Employee to a noneligible class of Employees, such Employee shall become a Participant in the Plan on the date such Employee again becomes an Eligible Employee, or, if later, the date that the Employee would


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
19


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

have otherwise entered the Plan had the Employee always been an Eligible Employee. However, if such Employee incurs a 1-Year Break in Service, eligibility will be determined under the 1-Year Break in Service rules set forth in Section 3.5.

(f)   Matching   contributions.   With respect to the determination of any matching contributions, the Plan will disregard Elective Deferrals made while a Participant is not eligible for the matching contribution component of the Plan unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement.

3.3
DETERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY

The Administrator shall determine the eligibility of each Employee for participation in the Plan based upon information furni shed by the Employer. Such determination shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons, as long as the same is made pursuant to the Plan and the Act. Such determination shall be subject to review pursuant to Section 2.10(b).

3.4
TERMINATION OF ELIGIBILITY

In the event a Participant shall go from a classification of an Eligible Employee to an ineligible Employee, such Participant shall continue to vest in the Plan for each Year of Service (or Period of Service, if the elapsed time method is used) completed while an ineligible Employee, until such time as the Participant's Account is forfeited or distributed pursuant to the terms of the Plan. Additionally, the Participant's interest in the Plan shall continue to share in the earnings of the Trust Fund in the same manner as Participants.

3.5
REHIRED EMPLOYEES AND 1-YEAR BREAKS IN SERVICE

(a)
Rehired   Participant/immediate   re-entry.   If any Former Employee who had been a Participant is reemployed by the Employer, then the Employee shall become a Participant as of the reemployment date, unless the Employee is not an Eligible Employee, the Employee does not satisfy the eligibility conditions taking into account prior service to the extent such prior service is not disregarded pursuant to Section 3.5(d) or (e) below. If such prior service is disregarded, then the rehired Eligible Employee shall be treated as a new hire.

(b)
Rehired   Eligible   Employee   who   satisfied   eligibility.   If any Eligible Employee had satisfied the Plan's eligibility requirements but, due to a severance of employment, did not become a Participant, then such Eligible Employee shall become a Participant as of the later of (1) the entry date on which he or she would have entered the Plan had there been no severance of employment, or (2) the date of his or her re-employment. Notwithstanding the preceding, if the rehired Eligible Employee's prior service is disregarded pursuant to Section 3.5(d) or (e) below, then the rehired Eligible Employee shall be treated as a new hire.

(c)
Rehired   Eligible   Employee   who   had   not   satisfied   eligibility.   If any Eligible Employee who had not satisfied the Plan's eligibility requirements is rehired after severance from employment, then such Eligible Employee shall become a Participant in the Plan in accordance with the eligibility requirements set forth in the Adoption Agreement and the Plan. However, in applying any shift in an eligibility computation period, the Eligible Employee is not treated as a new hire unless prior service is disregarded in accordance with Section 3.5(d) or (e) below.

(d)
Reemployed   after   five   (5)   1-Year Breaks   in   Service   ("rule   of   parity"   provisions).   If any Employee is reemployed after five
(5)
1-Year Breaks in Service has occurred, Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the elapsed time method is being used) shall include Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the elapsed time method is being used) prior to the five (5) 1-Year Breaks in Service subject to the rules set forth below. The Employer may elect in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections) to make the provisions of this paragraph inapplicable for purposes of eligibility and/or vesting.

(1)
In the case of a Former Employee who under the Plan does not have a nonforfeitable right to any interest in the Plan resulting from Employer contributions, Years of Service (or Periods of Service) before a period of 1-Year Breaks in Service will not be taken into account if the number of consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service equals or exceeds the greater of (i) five (5) or (ii) the aggregate number of pre-break Years of Service (or Periods of Service). Such aggregate number of Years of Service (or Periods of Service) will not include any Years of Service (or Periods of Service) disregarded under the preceding sentence by reason of prior 1-Year Breaks in Service;

(2)
A Former Employee who has not had Years of Service (or Periods of Service) before a 1-Year Break in Service disregarded pursuant to (1) above, shall participate in the Plan as of the date of reemployment, or if later, as of the date the Former Employee would otherwise enter the Plan pursuant to Sections 3.1 and 3.2 taking into account all service not disregarded.

(e)  One-Year   Hold-Out   Rule.   If elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), the "one-year hold-out" rule under Code §410(a)(5)(C) applies. Under this rule, a Participant who has severed employment will incur a suspension of participation in the Plan after incurring a 1-Year Break in Service and the Plan disregards a Participant's service completed prior to a 1-Year Break in Service until the Participant completes one Year of Service following the 1-Year Break in Service. The Plan suspends the Participant's participation in the Plan as of the first day of the eligibility computation period following the eligibility computation period in which the Participant incurs the 1-Year Break in Service.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
20


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(1)
Completion   of   one   Year   of   Service.   If a Participant completes one Year of Service following a 1-Year Break in Service, the Plan restores the Participant's pre-break service retroactively to the first day of the eligibility computation period in which the Participant first completes one Year of Service following the 1-Year Break in Service.

(2)
Eligibility computation   period.   The Administrator measures the initial eligibility computation period under this Subsection from the date the Participant first receives credit for an Hour of Service following the 1-Year Break in Service. The   Administrator measures any subsequent eligibility computation periods, if necessary, in a manner consistent with the eligibility computation periods, using the re-employment commencement date in determining the anniversary of the date of hire, if applicable.

(3)
Application   to   Employee   who   did   not   enter.   The Administrator also will apply the one-year hold-out rule, if applicable, to an Employee who satisfies the Plan's eligibility conditions, but who incurs a separation from service and a 1-Year Break in Service prior to becoming a Participant.

(4)
No   restoration   under   two   (2)   1-Year Breaks   in   Service   rule.   The Administrator in applying this Subsection does not restore any service disregarded under the two (2) 1-Year Breaks in Service rule in Section 1.88.

(5)
No   application   to   Elective   Deferrals.   The Administrator will not apply the provisions of this Subsection with respect to eligibility to make Elective Deferrals under the Plan.

(6)
USERRA.   An Employee who has completed qualified military service and who the Employer has rehired under the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended (USERRA), does not incur a 1-Year Break in Service under the Plan by reason of the period of such qualified military service.

(f)
Vesting   after   five   (5)   1-Year Breaks   in   Service.   If a Participant incurs five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, the   Vested portion of such Participant's Account attributable to pre-break service shall not be increased as a result of post-break service. In such case, separate accounts will be maintained as follows:

(1)
one account for nonforfeitable benefits attributable to pre-break service; and

(2)
one account representing the Participant's Employer-derived Account balance in the Plan attributable to post-break service.

(g)
Buyback   provisions.   If any Former Employee who had been a Participant is reemployed by the Employer before five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, and such Participant had received a distribution of the entire Vested interest prior to reemployment, then the forfeited account shall be reinstated only if the Participant repays the full amount which had been distributed (including amounts from Accounts that were fully Vested such as the Elective Deferral Account). The Employer, may, however, on a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis, only require the Participant to repay amounts that relate to the Account that was not fully Vested. Such repayment must be made before the earlier of five (5) years after the first date on which the Participant is subsequently reemployed by the Employer or the close of the first period of five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service commencing after the distribution. If a distribution occurs for any reason other than a severance of employment, the time for repayment may not end earlier than five (5) years after the date of distribution. If the Participant repays the distribution with after-tax amounts, such amounts are not after-tax voluntary Employee contributions subject to the ACP Test set forth in Section 12.6.

In the event the Participant repays the full amount distributed, the undistributed forfeited portion of the Participant's Account must be restored in full, unadjusted by any gains or losses occurring subsequent to the Valuation Date preceding the distribution. The source for such reinstatement may be Forfeitures occurring during the Plan Year. If such source is insufficient, then the Employer will contribute an amount which is sufficient to restore the Participant's Account, provided, however, that if a discretionary contribution is made for such year, such contribution will first be applied to restore any such accounts and the remainder shall be allocated in accordance with the terms of the Plan. If a non-Vested Participant was deemed to have received a distribution and such Participant is reemployed by the Employer before five (5) consecutive 1-Year Breaks in Service, then such Participant will be deemed to have repaid the deemed distribution as of the date of reemployment.

(h)
Waiver   of   allocation   or   contribution   conditions.   If the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement to waive allocations or contributions due to retirement (early or normal retirement), then a Participant shall only be entitled to one such waiver. Accordingly, if a Participant retires and allocation or contribution conditions are waived, then the Plan will not waive the allocation or contribution conditions if the Participant is rehired and then retires again.

3.6
ELECTION NOT TO PARTICIPATE

(a)
Prototype   plans.   If this is a prototype plan, then an Employee is not permitted to elect not to participate in the Plan. Notwithstanding the preceding, in case of a non-standardized Adoption Agreement, any irrevocable elections not to participate in any component of this Plan shall remain in effect provided such elections were made prior to the date of the adoption of this restatement.

(b)
Volume   submitter   plan.   If this is a volume submitter plan, then an Employee may, subject to the approval of the Employer, elect voluntarily not to participate in any component of the Plan before the Employee first becomes eligible to participate in any


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
21


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

qualified plan (subject to Code §401(a)) maintained by the Employer. Such election must be made upon inception of the Plan or at any time prior to the time the Employee first becomes eligible to participate under any such plan maintained by the Employer. The election not to participate must be irrevocable and communicated to the Employer, in writing, within a reasonable period of time before the date the Employee would have otherwise entered the Plan. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, if any pri or Plan document of this Plan contained a provision permitting an Employee to make a revocable election not to participate and an Employee made such revocable election not to participate while that prior Plan document was in effect, then such Employee's waiver shall continue to be in effect.

(c)  Effect   of   election.   An Employee who elects, or had previously elected, not to participate under the Plan is treated as a nonbenefiting Employee for purposes of the minimum coverage requirements under Code §410(b) and, if such election applies to Elective Deferrals, the Employee is not an eligible Participant for purposes of the ADP test set forth in Section 12.4 or the ACP test set forth in Section 12.6.

3.7  OMISSION OF ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE; INCLUSION OF INELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE

If, in any Plan Year, any Employee who should be included as a Participant in the Plan is erroneously omitted and discovery of such omission is not made until after a contribution by the Employer for the year has been made and allocated, or any person who should not have been included as a Participant in the Plan is erroneously included, then the Employer may take corrective actions consistent with, the IRS Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (i.e., Rev. Proc. 2013-12 or any subsequent guidance).

ARTICLE IV CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION

4.1
FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION

(a)
For a Money Purchase Plan:

(1)
The Employer will make contributions on the following basis. On behalf of each Participant eligible to share in allocations, for each year of such Participant's participation in this Plan, the Employer will contribute the amount elected in the Adoption Agreement. All contributions by the Employer will be made in cash. In the event a funding waiver is obtained, this Plan shall be deemed to be an individually designed plan.

(2)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to an Employer which is not a tax-exempt entity, the Employer's contribution for any Fiscal Year shall not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a deduction to the Employer under the provisions of Code §404. However, to the extent necessary to provide the top-heavy minimum allocations, the Employer shall make a contribution even if it exceeds the amount that is deductible under Code §404.

(b)
For a Profit Sharing Plan:

(1)
For each Plan Year, the Employer may (or will in the case of a "prevailing wage contribution" as set forth in the Profit Sharing Formula Section of the Adoption Agreement) contribute to the Plan such amount as elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement. In addition, the Employer may make a discretionary "gateway contribution" pursuant to Section 4.3(b)(4).

(2)
Additionally, the Employer will contribute to the Plan the amount necessary, if any, to provide the top-heavy minimum allocations even if it exceeds current or accumulated net profit or the amount that is deductible under Code §404.

(3)
Subject to the consent of the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer may make its contribution to the Plan in the form of unencumbered property instead of cash, provided the contribution of property is not a prohibited transaction. The decision to make a contribution of property is subject to the general fiduciary rules under the Act.

(c)
Frozen   Plans.   The Employer may designate that the Plan is a frozen Plan at the Contribution Types Section of the Adoption Agreement. As a frozen Plan, the Employer will not make any Employer contributions with respect to Compensation earned after the date the Plan is frozen, and if the Plan is a 401(k) Plan, no Participant will be permitted to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan for any period following such date. In addition, once a Plan is frozen, no additional Employees shall become Participants.

(d)
Union   Employees.   Regardless of any provision in this Plan to the contrary, Employees whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and "employee representatives" under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining shall be eligible to participate in this Plan to the extent of employment covered by such agreement provided the agreement provides for coverage in the Plan. The benefits, including but not limited to, contributions, allocations and vesting, under this Plan shall be those set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, which is hereby incorporated by reference and attached as an addendum to the Adoption Agreement. For this purpose, the term "employee representatives" does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the Employer. The provisions of this Subsection only apply if no more than two percent (2%) of the Employees covered pursuant to the agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation §1.410(b)-9. If a Participant performs services both as a collectively bargained Employee and


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
22


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

as a non-collectively bargained Employee, then the Participant's Hours of Service and Compensation in each respective category are treated separately for purposes of the Plan.

4.2
TIME OF PAYMENT OF EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION

Unless otherwise provided by contract or law, the Employer may make its contribution to the Plan for a particular Plan Year at such time as the Employer, in its sole discretion, determines. However, if pursuant to Section 12.8, the "ADP test safe harbor contribution" being made to the Plan (including a contribution being made pursuant to a QACA as described in Section 12.9) is a matching contribution that is made on a basis other than the Plan Year, then the matching contributions must be contributed to the Plan by the last day of the Plan Year quarter immediately following the Plan Year quarter to which the contributions relate. If the Employer makes a contribution for a particular Plan Year after the close of that Plan Year, the Employer will designate to the Administrator the Plan Year for which the Employer is making its contribution.

4.3
ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTIONS, FORFEITURES AND EARNINGS

(a)
Separate   accounting.   The Administrator shall establish and maintain an Account in the name of each Participant to which the Administrator shall credit as of each Anniversary Date, or other Valuation Date, all amounts allocated to each such Participant as set forth herein.

(b)
Allocation   of   contributions.   The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the Administrator to make a proper allocation of the Employer's contribution, if any, for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt by the Administrator of such information, the Administrator shall allocate any contributions as follows:

(1)
Money   Purchase   allocation.   For a Money Purchase Plan (other than a Money Purchase Plan which is integrated by allocation):

(i)
The Employer's contribution shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in the manner set forth in Section 4.1 herein and as specified in the Adoption Agreement.

(ii)
Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the condition s set forth in the Adoption Agreement and Section 3.5(h) are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of             Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year. Furthermore, with respect to a volume submitter or
non-standardized Adoption Agreement, regardless of any election in the Adoption Agreement to the contrary, for the Plan Year in which this Plan terminates, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer's contributions for the Plan Year if the Participant is employed at the end of the Plan Year and has completed a Year of Service (or Period of Service if the elapsed time method is elected).

(2)
Permitted   disparity   allocation.   For an integrated Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan allocation or a Money Purchase Plan which is integrated by allocation:

(i)
Subject to the "overall permitted disparity limits," the Employer's contribution shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in a dollar amount equal to 5.7% of the sum of each Participant's Compensation plus Excess Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that each such Participant's Compensation plus Excess Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation plus the total Excess Compensation of all Participants for that year. However, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the "cumulative permitted disparity limit," the allocation set forth in this paragraph shall be based on such Participant's Compensation rather than Compensation plus Excess Compensation.

Regardless of the preceding, 4.3% shall be substituted for 5.7% above if Excess Compensation is based on more than 20% and less than or equal to 80% of the Taxable Wage Base. If Excess Compensation is based on less than 100% and more than 80% of the Taxable Wage Base, then 5.4% shall be substituted for 5.7% above.

(ii)
The balance of the Employer's contribution over the amount allocated above, if any, shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in the same proportion that each such Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year.

(iii)
Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the condition s set forth in the Adoption Agreement and Section 3.5(h) are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
23


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year.

(iv)
The following "overall permitted disparity limits" (which consist of the "annual overall permitted disparity limit" and the "cumulative permitted disparity limit") apply to the allocations set forth above.

(A)
"Annual overall permitted disparity limit." Notwithstanding the preceding paragraphs, if in any Plan Year this Plan "benefits" any Participant who "benefits" under another qualified plan or simplified employee pension, as defined in Code §408(k), maintained by the Employer that either provides for or imputes permitted disparity (integrates), then such plans will be considered to be one plan and will be considered to comply with the permitted disparity rules if the extent of the permitted disparity of all such plans does not exceed 100%. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the extent of the permitted disparity of a plan is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, which the actual benefits, benefit rate, offset rate, or employer contribution rate, whatever is applicable under the Plan, bears to the limitation under Code
§401(l) applicable to such Plan.

(B)
"Cumulative permitted disparity limit." With respect to a Participant who "benefits" or "has benefited" under a defined benefit or target benefit plan of the Employer, the "cumulative permitted disparity limit" for the Participant is thirty-five (35) total cumulative permitted disparity years. Total cumulative permitted disparity years means the number of years credited to the Participant for allocation or accrual purposes under the Plan, any other qualified plan or simplified employee pension plan (whether or not terminated) ever maintained by the Employer, while such plan either provides for or imputes permitted disparity. For purposes of determining the Participant's "cumulative permitted disparity limit," all years ending in the same calendar year are treated as the same year. If the Participant has not "benefited" under a defined benefit or target benefit plan which neither provides for nor imputes permitted disparity for any year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, then such Participant has no cumulative disparity limit.

For purposes of this Section, "benefiting" means benefiting under the Plan for any Plan Year during which a Participant received or is deemed to receive an allocation in accordance with Regulation §1.410(b)-3(a).

(3)
Other   profit   sharing   allocations.   For a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan with a non-integrated allocation formula, a uniform points allocation formula, a "prevailing wage contribution" allocation formula, an "age-weighted method" allocation formula, or a "grouping method" allocation formula as elected in the Employer Profit Sharing Contribution Section of the Adoption Agreement:

(i)
The Employer's contribution shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in accordance with the allocation method below that corresponds to the elections in the Adoption Agreement. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the Administrator to make a proper allocation of the Employer's contribution for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt by the Administrator of such information, the allocation shall be made in accordance with the provisions below. The "gateway contribution" for plans with a cross-tested allocation formula shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Subsection (4) below.

(ii)
If the Employer's contribution is fixed, the Employer shall allocate the contribution in a set percentage to each Participant. If the Employer elects to contribute a uniform dollar amount for each Participant, the pro rata allocation shall allocate that uniform dollar amount to each Participant.

(iii)
If the Employer's contribution is discretionary and non-integrated, the contribution shall be allocated either in the same ratio as each Participant's Compensation bears to the total of such Compensation of all Participants, in the same dollar amount to all Participants (per capita), or in the same dollar amount per Hour of Service completed by each Participant.

(iv)
If the Employer's Contribution is allocated under a uniform points allocation formula, the allocation for each   Participant shall be determined based on the Participant's total points for the Plan Year, as determined under the Adoption Agreement. A Participant's allocation of the Employer Contribution is determined by multiplying the Employer Contribution by a fraction, the numerator of which is the Participant's total points for the Plan Year and the denominator of which is the sum of the points for all Participants for the Plan Year. A Participant shall receive points for each year(s) of age and/or each Year(s) of Service. In addition, a Participant also may receive points based on his or her Compensation.

(v)
If the Employer's contribution is a "prevailing wage contribution", it shall be allocated to each Participant who performs services subject to the Service Contract Act, Davis-Bacon Act or similar federal, state, or municipal prevailing wage statutes. The "prevailing wage contribution" will be an amount equal to the balance of the prevailing wage defined bona fide fringe benefit amount based on the Participant's employment classification as designated on the prevailing wage determination appropriate for that classification. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the "prevailing wage contribution" shall be fully Vested. Furthermore, the "prevailing wage contribution" shall not be subject to any age, service or employment condition requirements set forth in the Adoption Agreement and the Employer shall make such contribution to the Plan as frequently as is required under applicable law.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
24


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(vi)
If the Employer's contribution is allocated according to a "grouping method," the Employer may contribute to the Plan on behalf of each of the classifications of Participants set forth in the Adoption Agreement such amount as shall be determined by the Employer. The Employer shall provide the Administrator, if other than the Employer, with written notification of the amount of the contribution to be allocated to each classification on or before the due date of the Employer's tax return for the year of allocation, through written instructions from the Employer to the Administrator. The Employer may elect to specify any number of classifications and a classification may consist of any number of Participants.

(vii)
If the Employer's contribution is allocated according to an "age-weighting method," the Employer's contribution for the Plan Year shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in the same proportion that each such Participant's total points with respect to such year, bear to the total points awarded to all Participants with respect to such year. The conditional allocation provided for in the preceding sentence shall become the final allocation for the year only if it is not a Top-Heavy Plan Year; or if the minimum allocation required for Top-Heavy Plan Years is provided to all Employees eligible to receive such minimum allocation. If any such Employee does not receive the top-heavy minimum allocation, then in lieu of the conditional allocation, the Employer's contribution shall instead be allocated first to the affected Employees in an amount equal to their conditional allocation plus any additional amount necessary to provide the top-heavy minimum allocation.

The remainder of the Employer's contribution shall then be allocated as provided under the conditional allocation method, but for this purpose, those Employees who did not receive the top-heavy minimum allocation under the initial conditional allocation shall not be considered. If under the secondary allocation provided in the preceding sentence, an Employee who received a top-heavy minimum contribution under the conditional allocation no longer receives the same, then the steps outlined in the preceding paragraph and sentence shall be repeated until such time as all affected Employees have been allocated the top-heavy minimum contribution and the remaining contribution has been allocated, at which time, the allocations for the year shall be final.

A Participant's points with respect to any Plan Year shall be computed as follows:

(A)
Multiply the Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year by 1%.

(B)
Multiply the product for each Participant as determined in (a) above by the product of:

1.
the factor in Table I in Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, such factor to be determined by reference to the Participant's Normal Retirement Age, and

2.
the factor in Table II of Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, such factor to be determined by reference to the number of years remaining from the Participant's attained age as of the allocation date to his or her Normal Retirement Age.

The schedule of Age-Weighted Allocation Factors is set forth in Exhibit A to the Adoption Agreement, (which is hereby incorporated by reference and made a part of the Plan) and shall be based on the interest rate selected in the Adoption Agreement (if no selection is made, 8.5% interest shall be deemed to have been elected).

3.
The resulting number shall be the number of points allocated to the Participant.

(viii)
Notwithstanding the preceding provisions, a Participant shall only be eligible to share in the allocations of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant is an Eligible Employee at any time during the year and the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement and Section 3.5(h) are satisfied, unless a top-heavy contribution is required pursuant to Section 4.3(f). If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than five hundred (500) Hours of             Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year.

(4)
Gateway   contribution.   The Employer may make an additional discretionary Employer contribution ("gateway contribution") as set forth below (i.e., the minimum allocation gateway requirement described in Regulation
§1.401(a)(4)-8(b)(1)(vi)). In applying the provisions of this Subsection (4), the term "Employer contributions" shall also include any Forfeitures that are allocated to a Participant, other than Forfeitures that are subject to Code §401(m) because they are allocated as a matching contribution. Furthermore, in applying the provisions of this Subsection (4) to a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan, the term "Employer contributions" means any Employer Nonelective Contributions, nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contributions," and, except as otherwise provided in Subsections (4)(ii) and (iv) below, Qualified Nonelective Contributions, and such term excludes any matching contributions.

(i)
Any "gateway contribution" made pursuant to this Subsection for a Plan Year will be allocated to each Nonhighly Compensated Participant who receives an allocation of other "Employer contributions," for such Plan Year. The "gateway contribution" will be allocated without regard to any allocation conditions otherwise applicable to "Employer contributions" under the Plan. However, Participants who the Administrator disaggregates pursuant to Regulation §1.410(b)-7(c)(3) because they have not satisfied the greatest minimum age and service conditions permissible under Code §410(a) shall not


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
25


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

be eligible to receive an allocation of any "gateway contribution" made pursuant to this Subsection unless such an allocation is necessary to satisfy Code §401(a)(4).

(ii)
The "gateway contribution" will be allocated pro rata on the basis of Compensation (as defined in (iii) or (iv) below, whichever is applicable) of each eligible Participant (as described in Subsection (i) above) but in no event will an allocation of the "gateway contribution" exceed the lesser of: (A) five percent (5%) of Compensation or (B) one-third (1/3) of the highest allocation rate for any Highly Compensated Participant for the Plan Year. Any allocation under the prior sentence will be reduced by the amount of any other "Employer contributions," excluding any Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are used to satisfy the ADP test set forth in Section 12.4 or the ACP test set forth in Section 12.6, allocated for the same Plan Year to such Participant, provided that if an eligible Participant is receiving only a Qualified Nonelective Contribution and such contribution amount equals or exceeds the "gateway contribution," then the contribution satisfies the "gateway contribution" requirement as to that Participant.

(iii)
For allocation purposes under the 5% "gateway contribution" under (A) of Subsection (ii) above, Compensation means 415 Compensation except that it shall be determined for the Plan Year (rather than the Limitation Year) and shall exclude 415 Compensation paid while an Employee is not a Participant in the Plan.

(iv)
For purposes of the 1/3 "gateway contribution" alternative under (B) of Subsection (ii) above, the Administrator will
(A) determine the allocation rate, and (B) allocate the "gateway contribution," using a Participant's Compensation, provided the definition of Compensation satisfies Regulation §1.414(s). In addition, the allocation rate for any Participant is determined by dividing the total "Employer contribution" made on behalf of such Participant by the Participant's Compensation (as defined in the preceding sentence). However, solely for purposes of determining the allocation rate of any Nonhighly Compensated Participant, Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are used to satisfy the ADP test set forth in Section 12.4 or the ACP test set forth in Section 12.6, shall not be taken into account.

(v)  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Employer may increase the "gateway contribution" to satisfy the provisions of Regulation §1.401(a)(4)-9(b)(2)(v)(D) if the plan (for nondiscrimination testing purposes) consists of one or more defined contribution plans and one or more defined benefit plans.

(c)
Gains   or   losses.   Except as otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement or as provided in Section 4.10 with respect to Participant Directed Accounts, as of each Valuation Date, before allocation of any Employer contributions and Forfeitures, any earnings or losses (net appreciation or net depreciation) of the Trust Fund (exclusive of assets segregated for distribution) shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Participant's nonsegregated accounts bear to the total of all Participants' nonsegregated accounts as of such date. Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, the nonsegregated account will be reduced by any distributions made prior to the Valuation Date.

ERISA   recapture   account.   The Administrator in its discretion may use an "ERISA Recapture Account" to pay non-settlor Plan expenses and may allocate funds in the "ERISA Recapture Account" (or excess funds therein after payment of Plan Expenses) as earnings or as otherwise permitted by applicable law. The Plan Administrator will exercise its discretion in a reasonable, uniform and nondiscriminatory manner. An "ERISA Recapture Account" is an account designated to receive amounts which a Plan service provider receives in the form of 12b-1 fees, sub-transfer agency fees, shareholder servicing fees or similar amounts (also known as "revenue sharing"), which are received by the service provider from a source other than the Plan and which the service provider may remit to the Plan.

Late   trading   and   market   timing   settlement.   In the event the Plan becomes entitled to a settlement from a mutual fund or other investment relating to late trading, market timing or other activities, the Plan Administrator will allocate the settlement proceeds to Participants and Beneficiaries in accordance with Department of Labor Field Assistance Bulletin 2006-01 or other applicable law.

(d)
Contracts.   Participants' Accounts shall be debited for any insurance or annuity premiums paid, if any, and credited with any dividends or interest received on Contracts.

(e)
Forfeitures.   Forfeitures must be disposed of no later than the last day of the Plan Year following the Plan Year in which the Forfeiture occurs. The Employer must direct the Administrator to use Forfeitures to reinstate previously forfeited Account balances of Participants, if any, in accordance with Section 3.5(g), to satisfy any contribution that may be required pursuant to Section 6.10, or, to pay any Plan expenses. With respect to a Money Purchase Plan, any remaining Forfeitures will be disposed of in accordance with the elections in the Adoption Agreement. With respect to all other plans, the Employer must direct the Administrator to use any remaining Forfeitures in accordance with any combination of the following methods, including a different method based on the source of such Forfeitures. Forfeitures may be:

(1)
Added to any Employer discretionary contribution (e.g., matching or profit sharing) and allocated in the same manner;

(2)
Used to reduce any Employer contribution (e.g., matching or profit sharing);


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
26


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(3)
Added to any Employer matching contribution and allocated as an additional matching contribution; or

(4)
Allocated to all Participants in the same proportion that each Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the Compensation of all Participants for such year.

Notwithstanding (e)(2) above, effective for Plan Years beginning after the Plan Year in which this Plan document is adopted, Forfeitures may not be used to reduce any Employer contributions which are required pursuant to the Code to be fully Vested when contributed to the Plan (such as QMACs, QNECs and "ADP test safe harbor contributions" other than QACA "ADP test safe harbor contributions."

If Forfeitures are allocated to Participants (rather than used to reduce Employer contributions) then the Employer must also direct the Administrator as to which Participants are eligible to share in such allocation. The maximum allocation conditions the Employer may require are that Participants complete one (1) Year of Service (or Period of Service) and be employed on the last day of the Plan Year in order to share in the allocation of Forfeitures for such Plan Year. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if this is a standardized Plan, then the maximum allocation conditions are that Participants complete more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or be employed on the last day of the Plan Year.

(f)
Minimum   allocations   required   for   Top-Heavy   Plan   Years.   Notwithstanding the foregoing, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the sum of the Employer's contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of each Non-Key Employee or each Participant, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, shall be equal to at least three percent (3%) of such Employee's 415 Compensation for the Plan Year or the calendar year ending within the Plan Year (reduced by contributions and Forfeitures, if any, allocated to each such Employee in any defined contribution plan included with this Plan in a "required aggregation group" (as defined in Section 9.2(f)). However, if (1) the sum of the Employer's contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of each Key Employee for such Top-Heavy Plan Year is less than three percent (3%) of each Key Employee's 415 Compensation and (2) this Plan is not required to be included in a "required aggregation group" (as defined in Section 9.2(f)) to enable a defined benefit plan to meet the requirements of Code §401(a)(4) or 410, the sum of the Employer's contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of each Employee entitled to the top-heavy minimum contribution shall be equal to the largest percentage allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of any Key Employee. The minimum allocation required (to   the extent required to be nonforfeitable under Code §416(b)) may not be forfeited under Code §411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D).

However, for each Employee who is a Participant in a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan and a Money Purchase Plan, the minimum three percent (3%) allocation specified above shall be provided in the Money Purchase Plan unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections).

If this is an integrated prototype Plan, then for any Top-Heavy Plan Year the Employer's contribution shall be allocated as follows and shall still be required to satisfy the other provisions of this Subsection:

(1)
An amount equal to three percent (3%) multiplied by each Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year shall be allocated to each Participant's Account. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, the amount shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in the same proportion that such Participant's total Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year. Notwithstanding any contrary allocation conditions set forth in this Plan, Participants who are entitled to receive the top-heavy minimum allocation set forth in this Section shall be eligible to share in this first tier allocation.

(2)
The balance of the Employer's contribution over the amount allocated under subparagraph (1) hereof shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in a dollar amount equal to three percent (3%) multiplied by a Participant's Excess Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that such Participant's Excess Compensation bears to the total Excess Compensation of all Participants for that year. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the "cumulative permitted disparity limit" described in Section 4.3(b)(2), such Participant's total Compensation will be taken into account.

(3)
The balance of the Employer's contribution over the amount allocated under subparagraph (2) hereof shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in a dollar amount equal to 2.7% multiplied by the sum of each Participant's total Compensation plus Excess Compensation. If the Employer does not contribute such amount for all Participants, each Participant will be allocated a share of the contribution in the same proportion that such Participant's total Compensation plus Excess Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation plus Excess Compensation of all Participants for that year. For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of any Participant who has exceeded the "cumulative permitted disparity limit" described in
Section 4.3(b)(2), such Participant's total Compensation rather than Compensation plus Excess Compensation will be taken into account.

Regardless of the preceding, 1.3% shall be substituted for 2.7% above if Excess Compensation is based on more than 20% and less than or equal to 80% of the Taxable Wage Base. If Excess Compensation is based on less than 100% and more than 80% of the Taxable Wage Base, then 2.4% shall be substituted for 2.7% above.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
27


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(4)  The balance of the Employer's contributions over the amount allocated above, if any, shall be allocated to each Participant's Account in the same proportion that such Participant's total Compensation for the Plan Year bears to the total Compensation of all Participants for such year.

For each Employee who is a Participant in this Plan and another defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer, the minimum three percent (3%) allocation specified above shall be provided as specified in the Adoption Agreement Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections).

(g)
Top-heavy   contribution   allocation.   For purposes of the minimum allocations set forth above, the percentage allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of any Key Employee shall be equal to the ratio of the sum of the Employer's contributions and Forfeitures allocated on behalf of such Key Employee divided by the 415 Compensation for such Key Employee.

(h)
Participants   eligible   for   top-heavy   allocation.   Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the minimum allocations set forth in this Section shall only be allocated to the Participant's Combined Account of all Non-Key Employees, and Key Employees if elected in the Adoption Agreement, who are Participants and who are employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year (unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections)), including Employees who have (1) failed to complete a Year of Service; (2) declined to make mandatory contributions (if required) or, in the case of a cash or deferred arrangement, Elective Deferrals to the Plan; or (3) Compensation less than a stated amount. In addition, pursuant to Code §416(i)(4), Participants whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and employee representatives under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining shall not be eligible to receive the top-heavy minimum allocations unless otherwise provided in the collective bargaining agreement.

(i)
Top-heavy   allocation   if   DB   and   DC   plans   maintained.   Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, in any Plan Year in which the Employer maintains both this Plan and a non-frozen defined benefit pension plan included in a "required aggregation group" (as defined in Section 9.2(f)) which is top-heavy, the Employer will not be required (unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections)) to provide Employees with both the full separate minimum defined benefit plan benefit and the full separate defined contribution plan top-heavy minimum allocations. In such case, the top-heavy minimum benefits will be provided as elected in the Adoption Agreement and, if applicable, as follows:

(1)
If the 5% defined contribution minimum is elected in the Adoption Agreement:

(i)
The requirements of Section 9.1 will apply except that each Employee who accrues a benefit in the Profit Sharing Plan or Money Purchase Plan and who accrues a benefit in the Defined Benefit Plan will receive a minimum allocation of five percent (5%) of such Participant's 415 Compensation from the "applicable defined contribution plan(s)."

(ii)
For each Employee who is a participant only in the Defined Benefit Plan, the Employer will provide a minimum non-integrated benefit equal to two percent (2%) of such participant's highest five (5) consecutive year average 415 Compensation for each Year of Service while a participant in such plan, in which the Plan is top-heavy, not to exceed ten (10) such years.

(iii)
For each Employee who is a Participant only in this defined contribution plan, the Employer will provide a minimum allocation equal to three percent (3%) of such Participant's 415 Compensation.

(2)
If the 2% defined benefit minimum is elected in the Adoption Agreement, then for each Employee who is a participant only in the defined benefit plan, the Employer will provide a minimum non-integrated benefit equal to two percent (2%) of such participant's highest five (5) consecutive year average of 415 Compensation for each Year of Service while a participant in the plan, in which the plan is top-heavy, not to exceed ten (10) such years.

(j)
Matching   contributions   used   to   satisfy   top-heavy   contribution.   Unless otherwise specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code §416(c)(2) and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shal l be met in another plan, such other plan. Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the ACP test and other requirements of Code §401(m).

(k)
Contributions   under   other   plans.   The Employer may provide, in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), that the minimum benefit requirement shall be met in another plan (including another pl an that consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code §401(k)(12) and matching contributions with respect to which the requirements of Code §401(m)(11) apply). The Employer must specify the name of the other plan, the minimum benefit that will be provided under such other plan, and the Employees who will receive the minimum benefit under such other plan.

(l)
Delay   in   processing   transactions.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, all information necessary to properly reflect a given transaction may not be available until after the date specified herein for processing such transaction, in which case the transaction will be reflected when such information is received and processed. Subject to express limits that may be imposed under the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
28


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Code, the processing of any contribution, distribution or other transaction may be delayed for any legitimate business reason (including, but not limited to, failure of systems or computer programs, failure of the means of the transmission of data, force majeure, the failure of a service provider to timely receive values or prices, and correction for errors or omissions or the errors or omissions of any service provider). The processing date of a transaction will be binding for all purposes of the Plan.

(m) 410(b)   ratio   percentage   fail-safe   provisions.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of this Subsection apply for any Plan Year if, in the volume submitter or non-standardized Adoption Agreement, the Employer elected to apply the 410(b) ratio percentage fail-safe provisions and the Plan fails to satisfy the "ratio percentage test" due to a last day of the Plan Year allocation condition or an Hours of Service (or months of service) allocation condition. A plan satisfies the "ratio percentage test" if, on the last day of the Plan Year, the "benefiting ratio" of the Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are                "includible" is at least 70% of the "benefiting ratio" of the Highly Compensated Employees who are "includible." The "benefiting ratio" of the Nonhighly Compensated Employees is the number of "includible" Nonhighly Compensated Employees "benefiting" under the Plan divided by the number of "includible" Employees who are Nonhighly Compensated Employees. The "benefiting ratio"           of the Highly Compensated Employees is the number of Highly Compensated Employees "benefiting" under the Plan divided by the number of "includible" Highly Compensated Employees. "Includible" Employees are all Employees other than: (1) those Employees excluded from participating in the Plan for the entire Plan Year by reason of the collective bargaining unit exclusion or the nonresident alien exclusion described in the Code or by reason of the age and service requirements of Article III; and (2) any Employee who   incurs a separation from service during the Plan Year and fails to complete at least 501 Hours of Service (or three (3) months of service if the elapsed time method is being used) during such Plan Year.

For purposes of this Subsection, an Employee is "benefiting" under the Plan on a particular date if, under the Plan, the Employee is entitled to an Employer contribution or an allocation of Forfeitures for the Plan Year.

If this Subsection applies and the Hours of Service method is used, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions and expand the group of the "includible" Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are Participants by including the minimum number of Participants eligible to share in the contribution, beginning first with the "includible" Employees employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year who have completed the greatest number of Hours of Service in the Plan Year, then the "includible" Employees who have completed the greatest number of Hours of Service during the Plan Year, and continuing to suspend the allocation conditions for each "includible" Employee who completed Hours of Service, from the greatest number of Hours of Service to the least, until the Plan satisfies the "ratio percentage test" for the Plan Year. If two or more "includible" Employees have the same number of Hours of Service, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions for all such "includible" Employees, irrespective of whether the Plan can satisfy the "ratio percentage test" by accruing benefits for fewer than all such "includible" Employees. If the Plan for any Plan Year suspends the allocation conditions for an "includible" Employee, then that Employee will share in the allocation for that Plan Year of the Employer contribution and Forfeitures, if any, without regard to whether the Employee has satisfied the other allocation conditions set forth in this Section.

If this Subsection applies and the elapsed time method is used, then the Administrator will suspend the allocation conditions for the "includible" Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are Participants, beginning first with the "includible" Employees employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year, then the "includible" Employees who have the latest separation from service during the Plan Year, and continuing to suspend the allocation conditions for each "includible" Employee who incurred an earlier separation from service, from the latest to the earliest separation from service date, until the Plan satisfies the "ratio percentage test" for the Plan Year. If two or more "includible" Employees have a separation from service on the same day, then the Administrator will suspe nd the allocation conditions for all such "includible" Employees, irrespective of whether the Plan can satisfy the "ratio percentage test" by accruing benefits for fewer than all such "includible" Employees. If the Plan for any Plan Year suspends the allocation condi tions for an "includible" Employee, then that Employee will share in the allocation for that Plan Year of the Employer contribution and Forfeitures, if any, without regard to whether the Employee has satisfied the other allocation conditions set forth in this Section.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the portion of the Plan which is not a Code §401(k) or 401(m) plan would fail to satisfy Code
§410(b) if the coverage tests were applied by treating those Participants whose only allocation would otherwise be provided under the top-heavy formula as if they were not currently benefiting under the Plan, then, for purposes of applying this Subsection (m), such Participants shall be treated as not benefiting.

4.4
MAXIMUM ANNUAL ADDITIONS

(a)
Calculation of "annual additions."

(1)
If a Participant does not participate in, and has never participated in another qualified plan maintained by the "employer," or a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code §419(e)) maintained by the "employer," or an individual medical benefit account (as defined in Code §415(l)(2)) maintained by the "employer," or a simplified employee pension (as defined in Code §408(k)) maintained by the "employer" which provides "annual additions," the amount of "annual additions" which may be credited to the Participant's Accounts for any Limitation Year shall not exceed the lesser of the "maximum permissible amount" or any other limitation contained in this Plan. If the "employer" contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant's Accounts would cause the "annual additions" for the Limitation Year to exceed the "maximum permissible amount," the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the "annual additions" for the Limitation Year will equal the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
29


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

"maximum permissible amount," and any amount in excess of the "maximum permissible amount" which would have been allocated to such Participant may be allocated to other Participants.

(2)
Prior to determining the Participant's actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, the "employer" may determine the "maximum permissible amount" for a Participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the Participant's 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, uniformly determined for all Participants similarly situated.

(3)
As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation Year the "maximum permissible amount" for such Limitation Year shall be determined on the basis of the Participant's actual 415 Compensation for such Limitation Year.

(b)
"Annual additions" if a Participant is in more than one plan.

(1)
Except as provided in Subsection (c) below, this Subsection applies if, in addition to this Plan, a Participant is covered under another "employer" maintained qualified defined contribution plan, welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code §419(e)), individual medical benefit account (as defined in Code §415(l)(2)), or simplified employee pension (as defined in Code §408(k)), which provides "annual additions," during any Limitation Year. The "annual additions" which may be credited to a Participant's Accounts under this Plan for any such Limitation Year shall not exceed the "maximum permissible amount" reduced by the "annual additions" credited to a Participant's accounts under the other plans and welfare benefit funds, individual medical benefit accounts, and simplified employee pensions for the same Limitation Year. If the "annual additions" with respect to the Participant under other defined contribution plans and welfare benefit funds maintained by the "employer" are less than the "maximum permissible amount" and the "employer" contribution that would otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant's accounts under this Plan would cause the "annual additions" for the Limitation Year to exceed this limitation, the amount             contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the "annual additions" under all such plans and welfare benefit funds for the Limitation Year will equal the "maximum permissible amount," and any amount in excess of the "maximum permissible amount" which would have been allocated to such Participant may be allocated to other Participants. If the "annual additions" with respect to the Participant under such other defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual medical benefit accounts and simplified employee pensions in the aggregate are equal to or greater than the "maximum permissible amount," no amount will
be contributed or allocated to the Participant's Account under this Plan for the Limitation Year.

(2)
Prior to determining the Participant's actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, the "employer" may determine the "maximum permissible amount" for a Participant on the basis of a reasonable estimation of the Participant's 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year, uniformly determined for all Participants similarly situated.

(3)
As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation Year, the "maximum permissible amount " for the Limitation Year will be determined on the basis of the Participant's actual 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year.

(4)
If, pursuant to Section 4.4(b)(2), a Participant's "annual additions" under this Plan and such other plans would result in an "excess amount" for a Limitation Year, the "excess amount" will be deemed to consist of the "annual additions" last allocated, except that "annual additions" attributable to a simplified employee pension will be deemed to have been allocated first, followed by "annual additions" to a welfare benefit fund or individual medical benefit account, and then by "annual additions" to a plan subject to Code §412, regardless of the actual allocation date.

(5)
If an "excess amount" was allocated to a Participant on an allocation date of this Plan which coincides with an allocation date of another plan, the "excess amount" attributed to this Plan will be the product of:

(i)
the total "excess amount" allocated as of such date, times

(ii)
the ratio of (A) the "annual additions" allocated to the Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this Plan to (B) the total "annual additions" allocated to the Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this and all the other qualified defined contribution plans.

(c)
Coverage   under   another   plan.   If the Participant is covered under another qualified defined contribution plan maintained by the "employer," "annual additions" which may be credited to the Participant's Accounts under this Plan for any Limitation Year will be limited in accordance with Section 4.4(b), unless the "employer" provides other limitations in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections).

(d)
Time   when   "annual   additions"   credited.   An "annual addition" is credited to the Account of a Participant for a particular Limitation Year if it as allocated to the Participant's Account under the Plan as of any date within that Limitation Year. However, an amount is not deemed allocated as of any date within a Limitation Year if such allocation is dependent upon participation in the Plan as of any date subsequent to such date.

For purposes of this subparagraph, "employer" contributions are not deemed credited to a Participant's Account for a particul ar Limitation Year unless the contributions are actually made to the Plan no later than thirty (30) days after the end of the period described in Code §404(a)(6) applicable to the taxable year with or within which the particular Limitation Year ends. In the case of an Employer that is exempt from federal income tax (including a governmental employer), Employer contributions are treated as credited


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
30


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

to a Participant's Account for a particular Limitation Year only if the contributions are actually made to the Plan no later than the 15th day of the tenth calendar month following the end of the calendar year or Fiscal Year (as applicable, depending on the basis on which the Employer keeps its books) with or within which the particular Limitation Year ends.

(e)
Definitions.   For purposes of this Section, the following terms shall be defined as follows:

(1)
"Annual   additions"   means the sum credited to a Participant's accounts for any Limitation Year of (a) "employer" contributions, (b) Employee contributions (except as provided below), (c) Forfeitures, (d) amounts allocated to an individual medical benefit account, as defined in Code §415(l)(2), which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the "employer,"
(e)
amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued which are attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee (as defined in Code §419A(d)(3)) under a welfare benefit fund (as defined in Code §419(e)) maintained by the "employer" and (f) allocations under a simplified employee pension. Except, however, the Compensation percentage limitation referred to in paragraph (e)(6)(ii) below shall not apply to: (1) any contribution for medical benefits (within the meaning of Code §419A(f)(2)) after separation from service which is otherwise treated as an "annual addition," or (2) any amount otherwise treated as an "annual addition" under Code §415(l)(1).

(i)
Restorative   payments.   "Annual additions" for purposes of Code §415 and this Section shall not include restorative payments. A restorative payment is a payment made to restore losses to a Plan resulting from actions by a Fiduciary for which there is reasonable risk of liability for breach of a fiduciary duty under the Act or under other applicable federal or state law, where Participants who are similarly situated are treated similarly with respect to the payments. Generally, payments are restorative payments only if the payments are made in order to restore some or all of the Plan's losses due to an action (or a failure to act) that creates a reasonable risk of liability for such a breach of fiduciary duty (other than a breach of fiduciary duty arising from failure to remit contributions to the Plan). This includes payments to a plan made pursuant to a Department of Labor order, the Department of Labor's Voluntary Fiduciary Correction Program, or a court-approved settlement, to restore losses to a qualified defined contribution plan on account of the breach of fiduciary duty (other than a breach of fiduciary duty arising from failure to remit contributions to the Plan). Payments made to the Plan to make up for losses due merely to market fluctuations and other payments that are not made on account of a reasonable risk of liability for breach of a fiduciary duty under the Act are not restorative payments and generally constitute contributions that are considered "annual additions."

(ii)
Other   amounts.   "Annual additions" for purposes of Code §415 and this Section shall not include: (A) The direct transfer of a benefit or employee contributions from a qualified plan to this Plan; (B) Rollover contributions (as described in Code §§401(a)(31), 402(c)(1), 403(a)(4), 403(b)(8), 408(d)(3), and 457(e)(16)); (C) Repayments of loans made to a Participant from the Plan; and (D) Repayments of amounts described in Code §411(a)(7)(B) (in accordance with
Code §411(a)(7)(C)) and Code §411(a)(3)(D) or repayment of contributions to a governmental plan (as defined in
Code §414(d)) as described in Code §415(k)(3), as well as Employer restorations of benefits that are required pursuant to such repayments.

(2)
"Defined   contribution   dollar   limitation"   means $40,000 as adjusted under Code §415(d).

(3)
"Employer"   means, for purposes of this Section, the Employer that adopts this Plan and all Affiliated Employers, except that for purposes of this Section, the determination of whether an entity is an Affiliated Employer shall be made by applying Code §415(h).

(4)
"Excess   amount"   means the excess of the Participant's "annual additions" for the Limitation Year over the "maximum permissible amount."

(5)
"Master   or   prototype   plan"   means a plan the form of which is the subject of a favorable opinion letter from the Internal Revenue Service.

(6)
"Maximum   permissible   amount"   means, except to the extent permitted under this Plan and Code §414(v), the maximum "annual addition" that may be contributed or allocated to a Participant's Accounts under the Plan for any Limitation Year, which shall not exceed the lesser of:

(i)
the "defined contribution dollar limitation," or

(ii)
one hundred percent (100%) of the Participant's 415 Compensation for the Limitation Year.

The 415 Compensation Limitation referred to in (ii) shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after separation from service (within the meaning of Code §§401(h) or 419A(f)(2)) which is otherwise treated as an "annual addition."

If a short Limitation Year is created because of an amendment changing the Limitation Year to a different twelve (12) consecutive month period, the "maximum permissible amount" will not exceed the "defined contribution dollar limitation"


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
31


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the short Limitation Year and the denominator of which is twelve (12).

(f)
Special rules.

(1)
Aggregation   of   plans.   For purposes of applying the limitations of Code §415, all defined contribution plans (without regard to whether a plan has been terminated) ever maintained by the "employer" (or a "predecessor employer") under which the Participant receives "annual additions" are treated as one defined contribution plan. For purposes of this Section:

(i)
A former "employer" is a "predecessor employer" with respect to a participant in a plan maintained by an "employer" if the "employer" maintains a plan under which the participant had accrued a benefit while performing services for the former "employer," but only if that benefit is provided under the plan maintained by the "employer." For this purpose, the "formerly affiliated plan" rules in Regulation §1.415(f)-1(b)(2) apply as if the "employer" and "predecessor employer" constituted a single employer under the rules described in Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2) immediately prior to the "cessation of affiliation" (and as if they constituted two, unrelated employers under the rules described in Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2) immediately after the "cessation of affiliation") and "cessation of affiliation" was the event that gives rise to the "predecessor employer" relationship, such as a transfer of benefits or plan sponsorship.

(ii)
With respect to an "employer" of a Participant, a former entity that antedates the "employer" is a "predecessor employer" with respect to the Participant if, under the facts and circumstances, the "employer" constitutes a continuation of all or a portion of the trade or business of the former entity.

(2)
Break-up   of   an   affiliated   employer   or   an   affiliated   service   group.   For purposes of aggregating plans for Code §415, a "formerly affiliated plan" of an "employer" is taken into account for purposes of applying the Code §415 limitations to the "employer," but the "formerly affiliated plan" is treated as if it had terminated immediately prior to the "cessation of affiliation." For purposes of this paragraph, a "formerly affiliated plan" of an "employer" is a plan that, immediately prior to the "cessation of affiliation," was actually maintained by one or more of the entities that constitute the "employer" (as determined under the employer affiliation rules described in Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2)), and immediately after the "cessation of affiliation," is not actually maintained by any of the entities that constitute the "employer" (as determined under the employer affiliation rules described in Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2)). For purposes of this paragraph, a "cessation of affiliation" means the event that causes an entity to no longer be aggregated with one or more other entities as a single "employer" under the employer affiliation rules described in Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2) (such as the sale of a subsidiary outside a controlled group), or that causes a plan to not actually be maintained by any of the entities that constitute the "employer" under the employer affiliation rules of Regulation §1.415(a)-1(f)(1) and (2) (such as a transfer of plan sponsorship outside of a controlled group).

(3)
Mid-year   aggregation.   Two or more defined contribution plans that are not required to be aggregated pursuant to Code
§415(f) and the Regulations thereunder as of the first day of a Limitation Year do not fail to satisfy the requirements of Code
§415 with respect to a Participant for the Limitation Year merely because they are aggregated later in that Limitation Year, provided that no "annual additions" are credited to the Participant's Account after the date on which the plans are required to be aggregated.

4.5
ADJUSTMENT FOR EXCESS ANNUAL ADDITIONS

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, if the "annual additions" (as defined in Section 4.4) are exceeded for any Participant, then the Plan may only correct such excess in accordance with the Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System (EPCRS) as set forth in Revenue Procedure 2008-50 or any superseding guidance.

4.6
ROLLOVERS

(a)
Acceptance   of   "rollovers"   into   the Plan.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement and with the consent of the Administrator (such consent must be exercised in a nondiscriminatory manner and applied uniformly to all Participants), the Plan may accept a "rollover," provided the "rollover" will not jeopardize the tax-exempt status of the Plan or create adverse tax consequences for the Employer. The amounts rolled over shall be separately accounted for in a "Participant's Rollover Account." Furthermore, any Roth Elective Deferrals that are accepted as "rollovers" in this Plan on or after January 1, 2006 shall be separately accounted for. A Participant's Rollover Account shall be fully Vested at all times and shall not be subject to Forfeiture for any reason. For purposes of this Section, the term Participant shall include any Eligible Employee who is not yet a Participant, if, pursuant to the Adoption Agreement, "rollovers" are permitted to be accepted from Eligible Employees. In addition, for purposes of this Section the term Participant shall also include Former Employees if the Employer and Administrator consent to accept "rollovers" of distributions made to Former Employees from any plan of the Employer.

(b)
Treatment   of   "rollovers"   under   the Plan.   Amounts in a Participant's Rollover Account shall be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) pursuant to the provisions of this Plan and may not be withdrawn by, or distributed to the Participant, in whole or in part, except as elected in the Adoption Agreement and Subsection (c) below. The Trustee (or Insurer) shall have no duty or responsibility to inquire as to the propriety of the amount, value or type of assets transferred, nor to conduct any due diligence with respect to such assets; provided, however, that such assets are otherwise eligible to be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) under the terms of this Plan.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
32


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(c)
Distribution   of   "rollovers."   At such time as the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied, the Administrator, at the election of the Participant, shall direct the distribution of up to the entire amount credited to the Rollover Account maintained on behalf of such Participant. Any distribution of amounts held in a Participant's Rollover Account shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Sections 6.5 and 6.6, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, such amounts shall be considered to be part of a Participant's benefit in determining whether an involunt ary cash-out of benefits may be made without Participant consent.

(d)
"Rollovers"   maintained   in   a   separate   account.   The Administrator may direct that "rollovers" made after a Valuation Date be segregated into a separate account for each Participant until such time as the allocations pursuant to this Plan have been made, at which time they may remain segregated, invested as part of the general Trust Fund or, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, directed by the Participant.

(e)
Limits   on   accepting   "rollovers."   Prior to accepting any "rollovers" to which this Section applies, the Administrator may require the Employee to establish (by providing opinion of counsel or otherwise) that the amounts to be rolled over to this Plan meet the requirements of this Section. The Employer may instruct the Administrator, operationally and on a nondiscriminatory basis, to limit the source of "rollover" contributions that may be accepted by the Plan.

(f)
Definitions.   For purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply:

(1)
A "rollover" means: (i) amounts transferred to this Plan directly from another "eligible retirement plan;" (ii) distributions received by an Employee from other "eligible retirement plans" which are eligible for tax-free rollover to an "eligible retirement plan" and which are transferred by the Employee to this Plan within sixty (60) days following receipt thereof; and (iii) any other amounts which are eligible to be rolled over to this Plan pursuant to the Code or any other federally enacted legislation.

(2)
An "eligible retirement plan" means an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a), an individual retirement annuity described in Code §408(b) (other than an endowment contract), a qualified trust (an employees' trust described in Code
§401(a) which is exempt from tax under Code §501(a)), an annuity plan described in Code §403(a), an eligible deferred compensation plan described in Code §457(b) which is maintained by an eligible employer described in Code §457(e)(1)(A), and an annuity contract described in Code §403(b).

4.7
PLAN-TO-PLAN TRANSFERS FROM QUALIFIED PLANS

(a)
Transfers   into   this Plan.   With the consent of the Administrator, amounts may be transferred (within the meaning of
Code §414(l)) to this Plan from other tax qualified plans under Code §401(a), provided the plan from which such funds are transferred permits the transfer to be made and the transfer will not jeopardize the tax-exempt status of the Plan or Trust or create adverse tax consequences for the Employer. Prior to accepting any transfers to which this Section applies, the Administrator may require an opinion of counsel that the amounts to be transferred meet the requirements of this Section. The amounts transferred shall be set up in a separate account herein referred to as a "Participant's Transfer Account." Furthermore, for vesting purposes, the Participant's Transfer Account shall be treated as a separate "Participant's Account."

(b)
Accounting   of   transfers.   Amounts in a Participant's Transfer Account shall be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) pursuant to the provisions of this Plan and may not be withdrawn by, or distributed to the Participant, in whole or in part, except as elected in the Adoption Agreement and Subsection (d) below, provided the restrictions of Subsection (c) below and Section 6.16 are satisfied. The Trustee (or Insurer) shall have no duty or responsibility to inquire as to the propriety of the amount, value or type of assets transferred, nor to conduct any due diligence with respect to such assets; provided, however, that such assets are otherwise eligible to be held by the Trustee (or Insurer) under the terms of this Plan. Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, transferred amounts are not required to be separately accounted for and may be combined with the corresponding Account maintained in this Plan provided all rights, benefits and features and other attributes are identical with respect to each account, or are identical after the combination and such combination does not result in the impermissible elimination of any Code §411(d)(6) protected benefits.

(c)
Restrictions   on   Elective   Deferrals.   Except as permitted by Regulations (including Regulation §1.411(d)-4), amounts attributable to elective contributions (as defined in Regulation §1.401(k)-6), including amounts treated as elective contributions, which are transferred from another qualified plan in a plan-to-plan transfer (other than a direct rollover) shall be subject to the distribution limitations provided for in the Code §401(k) Regulations.

(d)
Distribution   of   plan-to-plan   transfer   amounts.   At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary shall be entitled to receive benefits, the Participant's Transfer Account shall be used to provide additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary. Any distribution of amounts held in a Participant's Transfer Account shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Sections 6.5 and 6.6, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. Furthermore, such amounts shall be considered to be part of a Participant's benefit in determining whether an involuntary cash-out of benefits may be made without Participant consent.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
33


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(e)
Segregation.   The Administrator may direct that Employee transfers made after a Valuation Date be segregated into a separate account for each Participant until such time as the allocations pursuant to this Plan have been made, at which time they may remain segregated, invested as part of the general Trust Fund or, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, directed by the Participant.

(f)
Protected   benefits.   Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, a transfer directly to this Plan from another qualified plan (or a transaction having the effect of such a transfer) shall not result in the elimination or reduction of any "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefit" (as described in Section 8.1(e)) that may not be eliminated or reduced pursuant to Regulation §1.411(d)-4.

4.8
AFTER-TAX VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS

(a)
Not   permitted   in   Money   Purchase   or   Profit   Sharing   Plan.   Except as provided in Section 4.8(b) below, this Plan will not accept after-tax voluntary Employee contributions. If this is an amendment to a Plan that had previously allowed after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, then this Plan will not accept after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for Plan Years beginning after the Plan Year in which this Plan is adopted by the Employer.

(b)
After-tax   voluntary   Employee   contributions   allowed   in   401(k)   Plans.   For 401(k) Plans, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, each Participant who is eligible to make Elective Deferrals may, in accordance with nondiscriminatory procedures established by the Administrator, elect to make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions to this Plan. Such contributions must generally be paid to the Trustee (or Insurer) within a reasonable period of time after being received by the Employer. An after-tax voluntary Employee contribution is any contribution (other than Roth Elective Deferrals) made to the Plan by or on behalf of a Participant that is included in the Participant's gross income in the year in which made and that is separately accounted for under the Plan.

(c)
Full   vesting.   The balance in each Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account shall be fully Vested at all times and shall not be subject to Forfeiture for any reason.

(d)
Distribution   at   any   time.   A Participant may elect at any time to withdraw after-tax voluntary Employee contributions from such Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account and the actual earnings thereon in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. If the Administrator maintains sub-accounts with respect to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions (and earnings thereon) which were made on or before a specified date, a Participant shall be permitted to designate which sub-account shall be the source for the withdrawal. Forfeitures of Employer contributions shall not occur solely as a result of an Employee's withdrawal of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions.

In the event a Participant has received a hardship distribution under the safe harbor hardship provisions of the Code §401(k) Regulations from any plan maintained by the Employer, then the Participant shall be barred from making any after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for a period of six (6) months after receipt of the hardship distribution. Any prior elections to make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions will become void upon the receipt of the hardship distribution that triggers the suspension period of this paragraph.

(e)
Used   to   provide   benefits.   At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary is entitled to receive benefits, the Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account shall be used to provide additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary.

(f)
Prior   mandatory   contributions.   To the extent a Participant has previously made mandatory Employee contributions under prior provisions of this Plan, such contributions will be treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, except that the provisions of Subsection (d) above permitting a distribution at any time shall not apply to mandatory Employee contributions.

4.9
QUALIFIED VOLUNTARY EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS

(a)
Maintenance   of   existing   QVEC   Accounts.   If this is an amendment to a Plan that previously permitted deductible voluntary Employee contributions, then each Participant who made "qualified voluntary Employee contributions" within the meaning of Code
§219(e)(2) as it existed prior to the enactment of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, shall have such contributions held in a separate Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account which shall be fully Vested at all times. Such contributions, however, shall not be permitted for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1986.

(b)
Distribution   from   QVEC   Account.   A Participant may, upon written request delivered to the Administrator, make withdrawals from such Participant's Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account. Any distribution shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code
§§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder.

(c)
Used to   provide   benefits.   At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary is entitled to receive benefits, the Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account shall be used to provide additional benefits to the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
34


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

4.10
PARTICIPANT DIRECTED INVESTMENTS

(a)
Directed   investment   options   allowed.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, all Participants may direct the Trustee (or Insurer) as to the investment of all or a portion of their individual Account balances as set forth in the Adoption Agreement and within limits set by the Employer. Participants may direct the Trustee (or Insurer), in writing (or in such other form which is acceptable to the Trustee (or Insurer)), to invest their accounts in specific assets, specific funds or other investments permitted under the Plan and the Participant Direction Procedures. That portion of the Account of any Participant that is subject to investment direction of such Participant will be considered a Participant Directed Account.

(b)
Establishment   of   Participant   Direction   Procedures.   The Administrator will establish Participant Direction Procedures, to be applied in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner, setting forth the permissible investment options under this Section, how often changes between investments may be made, and any other limitations and provisions that the Administrator may impose on a Participant's right to direct investments.

(c)
Administrative   discretion.   The Administrator may, in its discretion, include or exclude by amendment or other action from the Participant Direction Procedures such instructions, guidelines or policies as it deems necessary or appropriate to ensure proper administration of the Plan, and may interpret the same accordingly.

(d)
Allocation   of   gains   or   losses.   As of each Valuation Date, all Participant Directed Accounts shall be charged or credited with the net earnings, gains, losses and expenses as well as any appreciation or depreciation in the market value using publicly listed fair market values when available or appropriate as follows:

(1)
to the extent the assets in a Participant Directed Account are accounted for as pooled assets or investments, the allocation of earnings, gains and losses of each Participant's Account shall be based upon the total amount of funds so invested in a manner proportionate to the Participant's share of such pooled investment; and

(2)
to the extent the assets in a Participant Directed Account are accounted for as segregated assets, the allocation of earnings, gains on and losses from such assets shall be made on a separate and distinct basis.

(e)
Plan   will   follow   investment   directions.   Investment directions will be processed as soon as administratively practicable after proper investment directions are received from the Participant. No guarantee is made by the Plan, Employer, Administrator or Trustee (or Insurer) that investment directions will be processed on a daily basis, and no guarantee is made in any respect regarding the processing time of an investment direction. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Employer, Administrator or Discretionary Trustee (or Insurer) reserves the right to not value an investment option on any given Valuation Date for any reason deemed appropriate by the Employer, Administrator or Discretionary Trustee (or Insurer). Furthermore, the processing of any investment transaction may be delayed for any legitimate business reason (including, but not limited to, failure of systems or computer programs, failure of the means of the transmission of data, the failure of a service provider to timely receive values or pri ces, and correction for errors or omissions or the errors or omissions of any service provider) or force majeure. The processing date of a transaction will be binding for all purposes of the Plan and considered the applicable Valuation Date for an investment transaction.

(f)
Other   documents   required   by   directed   investments.   Any information regarding investments available under the Plan, to the extent not required to be described in the Participant Direction Procedures, may be provided to Participants in one or more documents (or in any other form, including, but not limited to, electronic media) which are separate from the Participant Direction Procedures and are not thereby incorporated by reference into this Plan.

4.11
INTEGRATION IN MORE THAN ONE PLAN

If the Employer maintains qualified retirement plans that provide for permitted disparity (integration), the provisions of Section 4.3(b)(2) will apply.

4.12
QUALIFIED MILITARY SERVICE

(a)
USERRA.   Notwithstanding any provisions of this Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with Code §414(u). Furthermore, loan repayments may be suspended under this Plan as permitted under Code §414(u)(4).

(b)
Benefit   accrual.   If the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement to apply this Subsection, then effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement but no earlier than the first day of the 2007 Plan Year, for benefit accrual purposes, the Plan treats an individual who becomes Totally and Permanently disabled or dies while performing "qualified military service" (as defined in Code §414(u)) with respect to the Employer as if the individual had resumed employment in accordance with the individual's reemployment rights under Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended (USERRA), on the day preceding Total and Permanent Disability and terminated employment on the actual date of Total and Permanent Disability.

The Plan will determine the amount of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions and Elective Deferrals of an individual treated as reemployed under this Section for purposes of applying paragraph Code §414(u)(8)(C) on the basis of the individual's average


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
35


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

actual after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or Elective Deferrals for the lesser of: (1) the 12-month period of service with the Employer immediately prior to "qualified military service" (as defined in Code §414(u)); or (2) the actual length of continuous service with the Employer.

(c)  Death   benefits.   In the case of a death occurring on or after January 1, 2007, if a Participant dies while performing "qualified military service" (as defined in Code §414(u)), the Participant's Beneficiary is entitled to any additional benefits (other than benefit accruals (unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement) relating to the period of "qualified military service" but incl uding vesting credit for such period and any other ancillary life insurance or other survivor benefits) provided under the Plan as if the Participant had resumed employment and then terminated employment on account of death. Moreover, the Plan will credit the Participant's "qualified military service" as service for vesting purposes, as though the Participant had resumed employment under Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended (USERRA) immediately prior to the Participant's death.

4.13
TRANSFER OF ASSETS FROM TERMINATED EMPLOYER DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION PLAN

(a)
Transferred   DB   Assets.   The Employer may transfer an amount to this Plan from the Employer's terminated defined benefit plan in accordance with Code §4980(d)(2)(B). The amounts transferred into this Plan shall be held in a "transferred assets suspension account." Amounts released from the "transferred assets suspension account" pursuant to the provisions of this Section shall be allocated in the same manner and to the same Participants that Employer Nonelective Contributions are allocated, as described in Section 4.3. If the Plan does not provide for Nonelective Contributions, then the amounts released from the "transferred assets suspension account" pursuant to the provisions of this Section shall be allocated to each Participant eligible to share in allocations in the same ratio as such Participant's Compensation bears to the total Compensation of all Participants eligible to share in allocations.

The Employer will determine, in its discretion, the amount to be released from the "transferred suspension account." However, the minimum amount that shall be released from the "transferred assets suspension account" for any Plan Year is the percentage of the account based on the following table:


Years Since Transfer
 
0
Percentage of Suspense Account
 
14.2857%
1
16.6667%
2
20.0000%
3
25.0000%
4
33.3333%
5
50.0000%
6
100.0000%
(b)
Earnings.   The amount in the "transferred suspension account" shall be credited with earnings and losses as of each Valuation Date in accordance with Section 4.3, except that Participants may not direct the investment of amounts in the "transferred suspension account." Amounts released from the account prior to the last day of a Plan Year shall not share in such earnings or losses.

(c)
Annual   additions.   Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, amounts in the "transferred suspension account" shall not be treated as "annual additions" pursuant to Section 4.4 until such amounts are released and allocated to Participants.

(d)
Plan   termination.   If upon the termination of the Plan any amount credited to the "transferred suspension account" remains unallocated, then such amount shall be allocated as provided above to the Accounts of Participants as of such date of Plan termination, but limited as to each Participant to avoid allocating exceeding the limitations of Code §415 as set forth in Section 4.4. Any amount that cannot be allocated to a Participant under the preceding sentence shall be reallocated to remaining Participants, but only to the extent that no Participant receives an amount that exceeds the limitations of Code §415 as set forth in Section 4.4. The reallocation process will continue until all amounts in the "transferred suspension account" have been reallocated. If all Participants have received the maximum "annual addition" permitted pursuant to Section 4.4, then any remaining amounts shall revert to the Employer.

ARTICLE V VALUATIONS

5.1  VALUATION OF THE TRUST FUND

The Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer), as of each Valuation Date, to determine the net worth of the assets comprising the Trust Fund as it exists on the Valuation Date. In determining such net worth, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall value the assets comprising the Trust Fund at their fair market value as of the Valuation Date and may deduct all expenses for which the Trustee (or Insurer) has not yet been paid by the Employer or the Trust Fund. The Trustee (or Insurer), when determining the net worth of the assets, may update the value of any shares held in a Participant Directed Account by reference to the number of shares held on behalf of the Participant, priced at the market value as of the Valuation Date.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
36


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

5.2  METHOD OF VALUATION

In determining the fair market value of securities held in the Trust Fund which are listed on a registered stock exchange, the Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to value the same at the prices they were last traded on such exchange preceding the close of business on the Valuation Date. If such securities were not traded on the Valuation Date, or if the exchange on which they are traded was not open for business on the Valuation Date, then the securities shall be valued at the prices at which they were last traded prior to the Valuation Date. Any unlisted security held in the Trust Fund shall be valued at its bid price next preceding the close of business on the Valuation Date, which bid price shall be obtained from a registered broker or an investment banker. In determining the fair market value of assets other than securities for which trading or bid prices can be obtained, the Trustee, the Administrator (if the Trustee is a directed Trustee), or Insurer may appraise such assets itself (assuming it has the appropriate expertise), or in its discretion, employ one or more appraisers for that purpose and rely on the values established by such appraiser or appraisers.

ARTICLE VI
DETERMINATION AND DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS

6.1
DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON RETIREMENT

Every Participant may terminate employment with the Employer and retire for purposes hereof on the Participant's Normal Retirement Date or Early Retirement Date. However, a Participant may postpone the severance of employment with the Employer to a later date, in which event the participation of such Participant in the Plan, including the right to receive allocations pursuant to Section 4.3, shall continue until such Participant's Retirement Date. Upon a Participant's Retirement Date, or if elected in the Adoption Agreement, the attainment of Normal Retirement Date without severance of employment with the Employer (subject to Sections 6.11 and 12.2(e)), or as soon thereafter as is practicable, the Administrator shall direct the distribution, at the election of the Participant, of the Participant's entire Vested interest in the Plan in accordance with Section 6.5.

6.2
DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH

(a)
100%   vesting   on   death.   Upon the death of a Participant before the Participant's Retirement Date or other severance of employment, all amounts credited to such Participant's Combined Account shall, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, become fully Vested. The Administrator shall direct, in accordance with the provisions of Sections 6.6 and 6.7, the distribution of the deceased Participant's Vested accounts to the Participant's Beneficiary.

(b)
Distribution   upon   death.   Upon the death of a Participant, the Administrator shall direct, in accordance with the provisions of Sections 6.6 and 6.7, the distribution of any remaining Vested amounts credited to the accounts of such deceased Participant to such Participant's Beneficiary.

(c)
Determination   of   death   benefit   by   Administrator.   The Administrator may require such proper proof of death and such evidence of the right of any person to receive payment of the value of the account of a deceased Participant as the Administrator may deem desirable. The Administrator's determination of death and of the right of any person to receive payment shall be conclus ive.

(d)
Beneficiary   designation.   Unless otherwise elected in the manner prescribed in Section 6.6, the Beneficiary of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall be the Participant's surviving Spouse. Except, however, the Participant may designate a Beneficiary ot her than the Spouse for the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity if:

(1)
the Participant and the Participant's Spouse have validly waived the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity in the manner prescribed in Section 6.6, and the Spouse has waived the right to be the Participant's Beneficiary,

(2)
the Participant is legally separated or has been abandoned (within the meaning of local law) and the Participant has a court order to such effect (and there is no "qualified domestic relations order" as defined in Code §414(p) which provides otherwise),

(3)
the Participant has no Spouse, or

(4)
the Spouse cannot be located.

In such event, the designation of a Beneficiary shall be made on a form satisfactory to the Administrator. A Participant may at any time revoke a designation of a Beneficiary or change a Beneficiary by filing written (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) notice of such revocation or change with the Administrator. However, the Participant's Spouse must again consent in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to any change in Beneficiary unless the original consent acknowledged that the Spouse had the right to limit consent only to a specific Beneficiary and that the Spouse voluntarily elected to relinquish such right.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
37


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(e)
Beneficiary   if   no   Beneficiary   elected   by Participant.   A Participant may, at any time, designate a Beneficiary for death benefits, if any, payable under the Plan that are in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity without the waiver or consent of the Participant's Spouse. In the event no valid designation of Beneficiary exists, or if the Beneficiary with respect to a portion of a Participant's death benefit is not alive at the time of the Participant's death and no contingent Beneficiary has been designated, then such portion of the death benefit will be paid in the following order of priority, unless the Employer specifies a different order of priority in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), to:

(1)
The Participant's surviving Spouse;

(2)
The Participant's issue, per stirpes;

(3)
The Participant's surviving parents, in equal shares; or

(4)
The Participant's estate.

If the Beneficiary does not predecease the Participant, but dies prior to distribution of the death benefit, the death benefit will be paid to the Beneficiary's "designated Beneficiary" (or if there is no "designated Beneficiary," to the Beneficiary's estate). For purposes of these provisions, and with respect to any Beneficiary designations, adopted children shall be treated as children.

(f)
Divorce   revokes   spousal   Beneficiary   designation.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), if a Participant has designated the Spouse as a Beneficiary, then a divorce decree that relates to such Spouse shall revoke the Participant's designation of the Spouse as a Beneficiary unless the decree or a "qualified domestic relations order" (within the meaning of Code §414(p)) provides otherwise or a subsequent Beneficiary designation is made.

(g)
Simultaneous   death   of   Participant   and   Beneficiary.   If a Participant and his or her Beneficiary should die simultaneously, or under circumstances that render it difficult or impossible to determine who predeceased the other, then unless the Participant's Beneficiary designation otherwise specifies, the Administrator will presume conclusively that the Beneficiary predeceased the Participant.

(h)
Slayer   statute.   The Administrator may apply slayer statutes, or similar rules which prohibit inheritance by a person who murders someone from whom he or she stands to inherit, under applicable state laws without regard to federal pre-emption of such state laws.

(i)
Insured   death   benefit.   If the Plan provides an insured death benefit and a Participant dies before any insurance coverage to which the Participant is entitled under the Plan is effected, the death benefit from such insurance coverage shall be limited to the premium which was or otherwise would have been used for such purpose.

(j)
Plan   terms   control.   In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any Contract issued hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control.

6.3
DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS IN EVENT OF DISABILITY

In the event of a Participant's Total and Permanent Disability prior to the Participant's Retirement Date or other severance of employment, all amounts credited to such Participant's Combined Account shall, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, become fully Vested. In the event of a Participant's Total and Permanent Disability, the Participant's entire Vested interest in the Plan will be distributable and may be distributed in accordance with the provisions of Sections 6.5 and 6.7.

6.4
DETERMINATION OF BENEFITS UPON TERMINATION

(a)
Payment   on   severance   of   employment.   If a Participant's employment with the Employer and any Affiliated Employer is severed for any reason other than death, Total and Permanent Disability, or attainment of the Participant's Retirement Date, then such Participant shall be entitled to such benefits as are provided herein.

Distribution of the funds due to a Terminated Participant shall be made on the occurrence of an event which would result in the distribution had the Terminated Participant remained in the employ of the Employer (upon the Participant's death, Total and Permanent Disability, Early or Normal Retirement). However, at the election of the Participant, the Administrator shall direct that the entire Vested portion of the Terminated Participant's Combined Account be payable to such Terminated Participant provided the conditions, if any, set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. Any distribution under this paragraph shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder.

Regardless of whether distributions in kind are permitted, in the event the amount of the Vested portion of the Terminated Participant's Combined Account equals or exceeds the fair market value of any insurance Contracts, the Trustee (or Insurer), when so directed by the Administrator and agreed to by the Terminated Participant, shall assign, transfer, and set over to such Terminated Participant all Contracts on such Terminated Participant's life in such form or with such endorsements, so that the settlement options and forms of payment are


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
38


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

consistent with the provisions of Section 6.5. In the event that the Terminated Participant's Vested portion does not at least equal the fair market value of the Contracts, if any, the Terminated Participant may pay over to the Trustee (or Insurer) the sum needed to make the distribution equal to the value of the Contracts being assigned or transferred, or the Trustee (or Insurer), pursuant to the Participant's election, may borrow the cash value of the Contracts from the Insurer so that the value of the Contracts is equal to the Vested portion of the Terminated Participant's Combined Account and then assign the Contracts to the Terminated Participant.

Notwithstanding the above, unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, if the value of a Terminated Participant's Vested benefit derived from Employer and Employee contributions does not exceed $5,000 (or such lower amount as elected in the Adoption Agreement), the Administrator shall direct that the entire Vested benefit be paid to such Participant in a single lump-sum as soon as practical without regard to the consent of the Participant, provided the conditions, if any, set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. A Participant's Vested benefit shall not include (1) qualified voluntary employee contributions within the meaning of Code
§72(o)(5)(B) and (2) if selected in the Conditions for Distributions Upon Severance of Employment Section of the Adoption Agreement, the Participant's Rollover Account. If a mandatory distribution is made pursuant to this paragraph and such distribution is greater than
$1,000 and the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an "eligible retirement plan" specified by the Participant in a "direct rollover" in accordance with Section 6.15 or to receive the distribution directly, then the Administrator shall transfer such amount to an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code §408(b) designated by the Administrator. However, if the Participant elects to receive or make a "direct rollover" of such amount, then the Administrator shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to cause the entire Vested benefit to be paid to such Participant in a single lump sum, or make a "direct rollover" pursuant to Section 6.15, provided the conditions, if any, set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied. The Administrator may establish a uniform and nondiscriminatory procedure as to whether a Participant who fails to make an Affirmative Election with respect to a mandatory distribution of $1,000 or less is treated as having made a "direct rollover" election. For purposes of determining whether the $1,000 threshold set forth in this paragraph is met, the mandatory distribution includes amounts in a Participant's Rollover Account. For purposes of determining whether the $5,000 threshold in this paragraph is met, a Participant's Rollover Account is taken into account unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement. Furthermore, the Administrator may apply this paragraph by treating a Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account separately from the Participant's other Accounts.

(b)
Vesting   schedule.   The Vested portion of any Participant's Account shall be a percentage of such Participant's Account determined on the basis of the Participant's number of Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the elapsed time method is elected) according to the vesting schedule specified in the Adoption Agreement. However, a Participant's entire interest in the Plan shall be non-forfeitable upon the Participant's Normal Retirement Age (if the Participant is employed by the Employer on or after such date).

(c)
EGTRRA   matching   vesting   schedule.   If the Employer maintained a vesting schedule for matching contributions that did not comply with Code §411(a)(2) as in effect prior to the enactment of the Economic Growth and Tax Relief Reconciliation Act of 2001, then the matching contribution vesting schedule selected in the Adoption Agreement shall apply to Participants who complete an Hour of Service in a Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001, unless a provision was adopted to have the vesting schedule apply to all Participants. However, if specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted   Elections), the matching contribution vesting schedule set forth in the Adoption Agreement shall only apply to the portion of the Participant's Account attributable to matching contributions made after December 31, 2001 and matching contributions made pri or to the first day of the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001 will vest in accordance with the vesting schedule then in effect.

(d)
PPA   Employer   Nonelective   profit   sharing   vesting   schedule.   For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006, if the Employer maintained a vesting schedule for Employer Nonelective profit sharing contributions that did not comply with Code
§411(a)(2) as in effect prior to the enactment of the Pension Protection Act of 2006, then the vesting schedule selected in t he Adoption Agreement for Employer Nonelective profit sharing contributions shall apply to Participants who complete an Hour of Service in a Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2006, unless a provision was adopted to have the vesting schedule apply to all Participants. However, if specified in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer Nonelective profit sharing contribution vesting schedule set forth in the Adoption Agreement shall only apply to the portion of the Participant's Account attributable to such contributions made after December 31, 2006 and contributions made prior to such date will vest in accordance with the vesting schedule then in effect.

(e)
Top-heavy   vesting   schedule.   For any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the minimum top-heavy vesting schedule elected by the Employer in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections) will automatically apply to the Plan. The minimum top-heavy vesting schedule applies to all benefits within the meaning of Code §411(a)(7) except those attributable to Employee contributions, including benefits accrued before the effective date of Code §416 and benefits accrued before the Plan became top-heavy. Further, no decrease in a Participant's Vested percentage shall occur in the event the Plan's status as top-heavy changes for any Plan Year. However, this Subsection does not apply to the Account balances of any Employee who does not have an Hour of Service after the Plan has initially become top-heavy and the Vested percentage of such Employee's Participant's Account shall be determined without regard to this Section 6.4(e). Furthermore, pursuant to Code §416(i)(4), Participants whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and employee representatives under which retirement benefits were the subject of good faith bargaining will not be subject to this Subsection unless otherwise provided in the collective bargaining agreement.

If in any subsequent Plan Year the Plan ceases to be a Top-Heavy Plan, then unless a specific Plan amendment is made to provide otherwise, the Administrator will continue to use the vesting schedule in effect while the Plan was a Top-Heavy Plan.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
39


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(f)
100%   vesting   on   partial   or   full Plan   termination.   Upon the complete discontinuance of the Employer's contributions to the Plan (if this is a profit sharing plan) or upon any full or partial termination of the Plan, all amounts then credited to the Account of any affected Participant shall become 100% Vested and shall not thereafter be subject to Forfeiture.

(g)
No   reduction   in   Vested   percentage   due   to   change   in   vesting   schedule.   If this is an amended or restated Plan, then notwithstanding the vesting schedule specified in the Adoption Agreement, the Vested percentage of a Participant's Account shall not be less than the Vested percentage attained as of the later of the Effective Date or adoption date of this amendment and restatement. The computation of a Participant's nonforfeitable percentage of such Participant's interest in the Plan shall not be reduced as the result of any direct or indirect amendment to this Article, or due to changes in the Plan's status as a Top-Heavy Plan. Furthermore, if the Plan's vesting schedule is amended (including a change in the calculation of Years of Service or Periods or Service), then the amended schedule will only apply to those Participants who complete an Hour of Service after the effective date of the amendment.

(h)
Continuation   of   old   schedule   if   3   Years   of   Service.   If the Plan's vesting schedule is amended, or if the Plan is amended in any way that directly or indirectly affects the computation of the Participant's nonforfeitable percentage or if the Plan is deemed amended by an automatic change to a top-heavy vesting schedule, then each Participant with at least three (3) Years of Service (or Periods of Service if the elapsed time method is elected) as of the expiration date of the election period may elect to have such Participant's nonforfeitable percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such amendment or change. If a Participant fails to make such election, then such Participant shall be subject to the new vesting schedule. The Participant's election period shall commence on the adoption date of the amendment, or deemed adoption date, and shall end sixty (60) days after the latest of:

(1)
the adoption date, or deemed adoption date, of the amendment,

(2)
the effective date of the amendment, or

(3)
the date the Participant receives written notice of the amendment from the Employer or Administrator.

(i)
Excludable   service   for   vesting.   In determining Years of Service or Periods of Service for purposes of vesting under the Plan, Years of Service or Periods of Service shall be excluded as elected in the Adoption Agreement. For this purpose, a predecessor plan is described in Regulation §1.411(a)-5(b)(3).

6.5
DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS

(a)
Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity.

(1)
Unless otherwise elected as provided below, a Participant who is married on the Annuity Starting Date and who does not die before the Annuity Starting Date shall receive the value of all Plan benefits in the form of a Joint and Survivor Annuity. The Joint and Survivor Annuity is an annuity that commences immediately and shall be equal in value to a single life annuity. Such joint and survivor benefits following the Participant's death shall continue to the Spouse during the Spouse's lifetime at a rate equal to either fifty percent (50%), seventy-five percent (75%) (or, sixty-six and two-thirds percent (66 2/3%) if the Insurer used to provide the annuity does not offer a joint and seventy-five percent (75%) survivor annuity), or one hundred percent (100%) of the         rate at which such benefits were payable to the Participant. Unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, a joint and fifty percent (50%) survivor annuity shall be considered the designated qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and the normal form of payment for the purposes of this Plan. However, the Participant may, without spousal consent, elect an alternative Joint and Survivor Annuity, which alternative shall be equal in value to the designated qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. An unmarr ied Participant shall receive the value of such Participant's benefit in the form of a life annuity. Such unmarried Participant, however, may elect to waive the life annuity. The election must comply with the provisions of this Section as if it were an election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity by a married Participant, but without fulfilling the spousal consent requirement. The Participant may elect to have any annuity provided for in this Section distributed upon the attainment of the "earliest retirement age" under the Plan. The "earliest retirement age" is the earliest date on which, under the Plan, the Participant could elect to receive retirement benefits.

(2)
Any election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity must be made by the Participant in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) during the election period and be consented to in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) by the Participant's Spouse. If the Spouse is legally incompetent to give consent, the Spouse's legal guardian, even if such guardian   is the Participant, may give consent. Such election shall designate a Beneficiary (or a form of benefits) that may not be cha nged without spousal consent (unless the consent of the Spouse expressly permits designations by the Participant without the requirement of further consent by the Spouse). Such Spouse's consent shall be irrevocable and must acknowledge the effect of such election and be witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public. Such consent shall not be required if it is established to the satisfaction of the Administrator that the required consent cannot be obtained because there is no Spouse, the Spouse   cannot be located, or other circumstances that may be prescribed by Regulations. The election made by the Participant and consented to by such Participant's Spouse may be revoked by the Participant in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) without the consent of the Spouse at any time during the election period. A revocation of a prior election shall cause the Participant's benefits to be distributed as a Joint and Survivor Annuity. The number of revocations shall not be limited. Any new election must comply with the requirements of this paragraph. A former Spouse's waiver shall not be binding on a new Spouse.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
40


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(3)
The election period to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity shall be the one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date.

(4)
For purposes of this Section and Section 6.6, Spouse or surviving Spouse means the Spouse or surviving Spouse of the Participant, provided that a former Spouse will be treated as the Spouse or surviving Spouse and a current Spouse will not be treated as the Spouse or surviving Spouse to the extent provided under a "qualified domestic relations order" as described in Code
§414(p).

(5)
With regard to the election, except as otherwise provided herein, the Administrator shall, in accordance with Regulation
§1.417(a)(3)-1, provide to the Participant no less than thirty (30) days and no more than one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) days before the Annuity Starting Date a written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) explanation of:

(i)
the terms and conditions of the qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, and, effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2007, the "qualified optional survivor annuity" that is payable in lieu of the qualified Joint and Survivor Annuit y,

(ii)
the Participant's right to make and the effect of an election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity,

(iii)
the right of the Participant's Spouse to consent to any election to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity, and

(iv)
the right of the Participant to revoke such election, and the effect of such revocation.

(6)
Any distribution provided for in this Section may commence less than thirty (30) days after the notice required by Code
§417(a)(3) is given provided the following requirements are satisfied:

(i)
the Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of thirty (30) days after receiving the notice to consider whether to waive the Joint and Survivor Annuity and to elect (with spousal consent) a form of distribution other than a Joint and Survivor Annuity;

(ii)
the Participant is permitted to revoke any affirmative distribution election at least until the Annuity Starting Date or, if later, at any time prior to the expiration of the seven (7) day period that begins the day after the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant;

(iii)
the Annuity Starting Date is after the time that the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant. However, the Annuity Starting Date may be before the date that any affirmative distribution election is made by the Participant and before the date that the distribution is permitted to commence under (iv) below; and

(iv)
distribution in accordance with the affirmative distribution election does not commence before the expiration of the seven (7) day period that begins the day after the explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity is provided to the Participant.

(b)
Alternative   forms   of   distributions.   In the event a married Participant duly elects pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) above not to receive the benefit in the form of a Joint and Survivor Annuity, or if such Participant is not married, in the form of a life annuity, the Administrator, pursuant to the election of the Participant, shall direct the distribution to a Participant or Beneficiary any amount to which the Participant or Beneficiary is entitled under the Plan in one or more of the following methods which are permitted pursuant to the Adoption Agreement.

(1)
One lump-sum payment in cash or in property, provided that if a distribution of property is permitted, it shall be limited to property that is specifically allocated and identifiable with respect to such Participant.

(2)
Partial withdrawals.

(3)
Payments over a period certain in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual cash installments. The period over which such payment is to be made shall not extend beyond the earlier of the Participant's life expectancy (or the joint life expectancy of the Participant and the Participant's designated Beneficiary). Once payments have begun, a Participant may elect to accelerate the payments (reduce the term and increase payments).

(4)
Purchase of or providing an annuity. However, such annuity may not be in any form that will provide for payments over a period extending beyond the life of the Participant (or the lives of the Participant and the Participant's designated Beneficiary) or the life expectancy of the Participant (or the life expectancy of the Participant and the Participant's designated Beneficiary).

(c)
Consent   to   distributions.   Benefits may not be paid without the Participant's and the Participant's Spouse's consent if the present value of the Participant's Joint and Survivor Annuity derived from Employer and Employee contributions exceeds $5,000 and the benefit is "immediately distributable." However, spousal consent is not required if the distribution will be made in the form of a qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and the benefit is "immediately distributable." A benefit is "immediately distributable" if any part


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
41


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

of the benefit could be distributed to the Participant (or surviving Spouse) before the Participant attains (or would have attained if not deceased) the later of the Participant's Normal Retirement Age or age 62.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the value of the Participant's benefit derived from Employer and Employee contributions doe s not exceed $5,000, then the Administrator will distribute such benefit in a lump-sum. No distribution may be made under the preceding sentence after the Annuity Starting Date unless the Participant and the Participant's Spouse consent in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to such distribution. Any consent required under this paragraph must be obtained not more than one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) days before commencement of the distribution and shall be made in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a)(2).

For purposes of this Subsection, the Participant's benefit derived from Employer and Employee contributions shall not include:
(1) the Participant's Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account, and (2) if selected in the Conditions for Distributions Upon Severance of Employment Section of the Adoption Agreement, the Participant's Rollover Account.

(d)
Obtaining   consent.   The following rules will apply with respect to the consent requirements set forth in Subsection (c):

(1)
No consent shall be valid unless the Participant has received a general description of the material features and an explanation of the relative values of the optional forms of benefit available under the Plan that would satisfy the notice requirements of Code §417;

(2)
The Participant must be informed of the right, if any, to defer receipt of the distribution, and for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2007 a description of the consequences of failing to defer any distribution. If a Participant fails to consent, it shall be deemed an election to defer the commencement of payment of any benefit. However, any election to defer the receipt of benefits shall not apply with respect to distributions that are required under Section 6.8;

(3)
Notice of the rights specified under this paragraph shall be provided no less than thirty (30) days and no more than
one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) days before the Annuity Starting Date;

(4)
Written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) consent of the Participant to the distribution must not be made before the Participant receives the notice and must not be made more than one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) days before the Annuity Starting Date; and

(5)
No consent shall be valid if a significant detriment is imposed under the Plan on any Participant who does not consent to the distribution.

(e)
Required   minimum   distributions   (Code   §401(a)(9)).   Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, the distribution of a Participant's benefits, whether under the Plan or through the purchase of an annuity Contract, shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 6.8.

(f)
Annuity   Contracts.   All annuity Contracts under this Plan shall be non-transferable when distributed. Furthermore, the terms of any annuity Contract purchased and distributed to a Participant or Spouse shall comply with all of the requirements of this Plan.

(g)
TEFRA 242(b)(2)   election.   The provisions of this Section shall not apply to distributions made in accordance with Plan Section 6.8(a)(4).

(h)
Distribution   from   partially   Vested   Account.   If a distribution is made to a Participant who has not severed employment and who is not fully Vested in the Participant's Account, and the Participant may increase the Vested percentage in such Account, then at any relevant time the Participant's Vested portion of the Account will be equal to an amount ("X") determined by the formula:

X = P (AB plus D) - D

For purposes of applying the formula: P is the Vested percentage at the relevant time, AB is the Account balance at the relevant time, D is the amount of distribution, and the relevant time is the time at which, under the Plan, the Vested percentage in the Account cannot increase.

(i)
Transition rules.

(1)
Any living Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984, who would otherwise not receive the benefits prescribed by the previous Subsections of this Section must be given the opportunity to elect to have such prior Subsections apply if such Participant is credited with at least one Hour of Service under this Plan or a predecessor plan in a Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1976, and such Participant had at least ten (10) years of vesting service when he or she separated from service.

(2)
Any living Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984, who was credited with at least one Hour of Service under this Plan or a predecessor plan on or after September 2, 1974, and who is not otherwise credited with any service in a Plan Year


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
42


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

beginning on or after January 1, 1976, must be given the opportunity to have his or her benefits paid in accordance with Subsection (4) below.

(3)
The respective opportunities to elect (as described in Subsections (1) and (2) above) must be afforded to the appropriate Participants during the period commencing on August 23, 1984, and ending on the date benefits would otherwise commence to said Participants.

(4)
Any Participant who has elected pursuant to Subsection (2) above and any Participant who does not elect under Subsection
(1)
or who meets the requirements of Subsection (1) except that such Participant does not have at least ten (10) years of vesting service when he or she separates from service, shall have his or her benefits distributed in accordance with all of the following requirements if benefits would have been payable in the form of a life annuity:

(i)
If benefits in the form of a life annuity become payable to a married Participant who:

(A)
begins to receive payments under the Plan on or after Normal Retirement Age; or

(B)
dies on or after Normal Retirement Age while still working for the Employer; or

(C)
begins to receive payments on or after the "qualified early retirement age"; or

(D)
separates from service on or after attaining Normal Retirement Age (or the "qualified early retirement age") and after satisfying the eligibility requirements for the payment of benefits under the Plan and thereafter dies before beginning to receive such benefits;

then such benefits will be received under this Plan in the form of a qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, unless the Participant has elected otherwise during the election period. The election period must begin at least six (6) months before the Participant attains "qualified early retirement age" and end not more than one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) days for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) before the commencement of benefits. Any election hereunder will be in writing and may be changed by the Participant at any time.

(ii)
A Participant who is employed after attaining the "qualified early retirement age" will be given the opportunity to elect, during the election period, to have a survivor annuity payable on death. If the Participant elects the survivor annuity, payments under such annuity must not be less than the payments which would have been made to the Spouse under the qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity if the Participant had retired on the day before his or her death. Any election under this provision will be in writing and may be changed by the Participant at any time. The election period begins on the later of (A) the 90th day before the Participant attains the "qualified early retirement age," or (B) the date on which Participation begi ns, and ends on the date the Participant terminates employment.

(iii)
For purposes of this Subsection, the "qualified early retirement age" means the latest of: (A) the earliest date, under the Plan, on which the Participant may elect to receive retirement benefits, (B) the first day of the 120th month beginning before the Participant reaches Normal Retirement Age, or (C) the date the Participant begins participation.

(j)
Qualified optional survivor annuity

(1)
Right to   elect   "qualified   optional   survivor   annuity."   Notwithstanding the preceding, effective with respect to Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2007 and prior to the date this Plan is adopted, the Plan satisfied the "qualified optional survivor annuity" provisions set forth in this Subsection. A Participant who elected to waive the qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity form of benefit was entitled to elect the "qualified optional survivor annuity" at any time during the applicable election period. Furthermore, the written explanation of the Joint and Survivor Annuity explains the terms and conditions of the "qualified optional survivor annuity."

(2)
Definition of "qualified optional survivor annuity."

(i)
General.   For purposes of this Article, the term "qualified optional survivor annuity" means an annuity:

(A)
For the life of the Participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the Participant's Spouse which is equal to the "applicable percentage" of the amount of the annuity which is payable during the joint lives of the Participant and the Participant's Spouse, and

(B)
Which is the actuarial equivalent of a single annuity for the life of the Participant.

Such term also includes any annuity in a form having the effect of an annuity described in the preceding sentence.

(ii)
Applicable   percentage.   For purposes of this Subsection, the "applicable percentage" is based on the survivor annuity percentage (i.e., the percentage which the survivor annuity under the Plan's qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity bears to the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
43


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

annuity payable during the joint lives of the Participant and the Participant's Spouse). If the survivor annuity percentage is less than seventy-five percent (75%), then the "applicable percentage" is seventy-five percent (75%); otherwise, the "applicable percentage" is fifty percent (50%).

6.6
DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS UPON DEATH

(a)
Qualified   Pre-Retirement   Survivor   Annuity   (QPSA).   Unless otherwise elected as provided below, a Vested Participant who dies before the Annuity Starting Date and who has a surviving Spouse shall have the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity paid to the surviving Spouse. The Participant's Spouse may direct that payment of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity commence within a reasonable period after the Participant's death. If the Spouse does not so direct, payment of such benefit will commence at t he time the Participant would have attained the later of Normal Retirement Age or age 62. However, the Spouse may elect a later commencement date. Any distribution to the Participant's Spouse shall be subject to the rules specified in Section 6.8.

(b)
Election   to   waive   QPSA.   Any election to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity before the Participant's death must be made by the Participant in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) during the election period and shall requi re the Spouse's irrevocable consent in the same manner provided for in Section 6.5(a)(2). Further, the Spouse's consent must acknowledge the specific non-Spouse Beneficiary. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the non-Spouse Beneficiary need not be acknowledged, provided the consent of the Spouse acknowledges that the Spouse has the right to limit consent only to a specific Beneficiary and that the Spouse voluntarily elects to relinquish such right.

(c)
Time   to   waive QPSA.   The election period to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity shall begin on the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35 and end on the date of the Participant's death. An earlier waiver (with spousal consent) may be made provided a written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) explanation of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity is given to the Participant and such waiver becomes invalid at the beginning of the Plan Year in which the Participant turns age 35. In the event a Participant separates from service prior to the beginning of the election period, the election period shall begin on the date of such separation from service.

(d)
QPSA notice.   With regard to the election, the Administrator shall provide each Participant within the applicable election period, with respect to such Participant (and consistent with Regulations), a written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) explanation of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity containing comparable information to that required pursuant to Section 6.5(a)(5). For the purposes of this paragraph, the term "applicable period" means, with respect to a Participant, whichever of the following periods ends last:

(1)
The period beginning with the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 32 and ending with the close of the Plan Year preceding the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35;

(2)
A reasonable period after the individual becomes a Participant;

(3)
A reasonable period ending after the Plan no longer fully subsidizes the cost of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity with respect to the Participant; or

(4)
A reasonable period ending after Code §401(a)(11) applies to the Participant.

For purposes of applying this Subsection, a reasonable period ending after the enumerated events described in (2), (3) and (4) is the end of the two (2) year period beginning one (1) year prior to the date the applicable event occurs, and ending one (1) year after that date. In the case of a Participant who separates from service before the Plan Year in which age 35 is attained, notice shall be provided within the two (2) year period beginning one (1) year prior to separation and ending one (1) year after separation. If such a Participant thereafter returns to employment with the Employer, the "applicable period" for such Participant shall be redeter mined.

(e)
Pre-REA.   The Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity provided for in this Section shall apply only to Participants who are credited with an Hour of Service on or after August 23, 1984. Participants who are not credited with an Hour of Service on or after
August 23, 1984, shall be provided with rights to the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity in accordance with Section 303(e)(2) of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984.

(f)
Consent.   If the value of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity derived from Employer and Employee contributions does not exceed $5,000, the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such amount to the Participant's Spouse in a single lump-sum as soon as practicable. No distribution may be made under the preceding sentence after the Annuity Starting Date unless the Spouse consents in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS). If the value exceeds $5,000, an immediate distribution of the entire amount may be made to the surviving Spouse, provided such surviving Spouse consents in writing (or in such other form as permitted by the IRS) to such distribution. Any consent required under this paragraph must be obtained not more than one-hundred eighty (180) days (ninety (90) days for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) before commencement of the distribution and shall be made in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a)(2).


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
44


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(g)
Alternative   forms   of   distribution.   Death benefits may be paid to a Participant's Beneficiary in one of the following optional forms of benefits subject to the rules specified in Section 6.8 and the elections made in the Adoption Agreement. Such optional forms of distributions may be elected by the Participant in the event there is an election to waive the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity, and for any death benefits in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. However, if no optional form of distribution was elected by the Participant prior to death, then the Participant's Beneficiary may elect the form of distribution.

(1)
One lump-sum payment in cash or in property that is allocated to the Accounts of the Participant at the time of the distribution.

(2)
Partial withdrawals.

(3)
Payment in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual cash installments over a period to be determined by the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary. In order to provide such installment payments, the Administrator may (A) segregate the aggregate amount thereof in a separate, federally insured savings account, certificate of deposit in a bank or savings and loan association, money market certificate or other liquid short-term security or (B) purchase a nontransferable annuity Contract for a term certain (with no life contingencies) providing for such payment. After periodic installments commence, the Beneficiary shall have the right to reduce the period over which such periodic installments shall be made, and the cash amount of such periodic installments shall be adjusted accordingly.

(4)
In the form of an annuity over the life expectancy of the Beneficiary.

(5)
If death benefits in excess of the Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity are to be paid to the surviving Spouse, such benefits may be paid pursuant to (1), (2) or (3) above, or used to purchase an annuity so as to increase the payments made pursuant to the
Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity.

(h)
Required   minimum   distributions   (Code   §401(a)(9)).   Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, distributions upon the death of a Participant shall comply with the requirements of Section 6.8.

(i)
Payment   to   a   child.   For purposes of this Section, any amount paid to a child of the Participant will be treated as if it had been paid to the surviving Spouse if the amount becomes payable to the surviving Spouse when the child reaches the age of majority.

(j)
Voluntary   Contribution   Account.   In the event that less than one hundred percent (100%) of a Participant's interest in the Plan is distributed to such Participant's Spouse, the portion of the distribution attributable to the Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account shall be in the same proportion that the Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account bears to the Participant's total interest in the   Plan.

(k)
TEFRA 242(b)(2)   election.   The provisions of this Section shall not apply to distributions made in accordance with Section 6.8(a)(4).

6.7
TIME OF DISTRIBUTION

Except as limited by Section 6.8, whenever a distribution is to be made, or a series of payments are to commence, the distribution or series of payments may be made or begun as soon as practicable. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, unless a Participant otherwise elects, payments of benefits under the Plan will begin not later than the sixtieth (60th) day after the close of the Plan Year in which the latest of the following events occurs: (a) the date on which the Participant attains the earlier of age 65 or the Normal Retirement Age specified herein; (b) the tenth (10th) anniversary of the year in which the Participant commenced participation in the Plan; or (c) the date the Participant terminates service with the Employer. The failure of a Participant and, if applicable, the Participant's Spouse, to request a distribution shall be deemed to be an election to defer the commencement of payment of any benefit until the time otherwise permitted under the Plan.

6.8
REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS

(a)
General rules

(1)
Effective   Date.   Subject to the Joint and Survivor Annuity requirements set forth in Plan Section 6.5, the requirements of this Section shall apply to any distribution of a Participant's interest in the Plan and will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of this Plan.

(2)
Requirements   of   Treasury   Regulations   incorporated.   All distributions required under this Section will be determined and made in accordance with the Regulations under Code §401(a)(9) and the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirement of Code §401(a)(9)(G).

(3)
Limits   on   distribution   periods.   As of the first "distribution calendar year," distributions to a Participant may only be made in accordance with the selections made in the Form of Distributions Section of the Adoption Agreement. If such distributions are not made in a single-sum, then they may only be made over one of the following periods: (i) the life of the Participant, (ii) the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
45


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

joint lives of the Participant and a "designated Beneficiary," (iii) a period certain not extending beyond the "life expectancy" of the Participant, or (iv) a period certain not extending beyond the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and a "designated Beneficiary."

(4)
TEFRA Section 242(b)(2) elections.

(i)
Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, other than the Spouse's right of consent afforded under the Plan, distributions may be made on behalf of any Participant, including a five percent (5%) owner, who has made a designation in accordance with Section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act (TEFRA) and in accordance with all of the following requirements (regardless of when such distribution commences):

(A)
The distribution by the Plan is one which would not have disqualified such Plan under Code §401(a)(9) as in effect prior to amendment by the Deficit Reduction Act of 1984.

(B)
The distribution is in accordance with a method of distribution designated by the Participant whose interest in the Plan is being distributed or, if the Participant is deceased, by a Beneficiary of such Participant.

(C)
Such designation was in writing, was signed by the Participant or the Beneficiary, and was made before January 1, 1984.

(D)
The Participant had accrued a benefit under the Plan as of December 31, 1983.

(E)
The method of distribution designated by the Participant or the Beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will commence, the period over which distributions will be made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Participant's death, the Beneficiaries of the Participant listed in order of priority.

(ii)
A distribution upon death will not be covered by the transitional rule of this Subsection unless the information in the designation contains the required information described above with respect to the distributions to be made upon the death of the Participant.

(iii)
For any distribution which commences before January 1, 1984, but continues after December 31, 1983, the Participant, or the Beneficiary, to whom such distribution is being made, will be presumed to have designated the method of distribution under which the distribution is being made if the method of distribution was specified in writing and the distribution satisfies the requirements in (i)(A) and (i)(E) of this Subsection.

(iv)
If a designation is revoked, any subsequent distribution must satisfy the requirements of Code §401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder. If a designation is revoked subsequent to the date distributions are required to begin, the Plan must distribute by the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the revocation occurs the total amount not yet distributed which would have been required to have been distributed to satisfy Code §401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder, but for the Section 242(b)(2) election. For calendar years beginning after December 31, 1988, such distributions must meet the minimum distribution incidental benefit requirements. Any changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of another Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will not be considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as such substitution or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are to be made under the designation, directly or indirectly (for example, by altering the relevant measuring life).

(v)
In the case in which an amount is transferred or rolled over from one plan to another plan, the rules in Regulation
§1.401(a)(9)-8, Q&A-14 and Q&A-15, shall apply.

(b)
Time and manner of distribution

(1)
Required   beginning   date.   The Participant's entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant's "required beginning date."

(2)
Death   of   Participant   before   distributions   begin.   If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant's entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows as elected in the Distributions Upon Death Section of the Adoption Agreement (or if no election is made, then the Beneficiary may elect either the lifetime method or the five-year method):

(i)
Lifetime   method   (Spouse).   If the Participant's surviving Spouse is the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary," then, except as otherwise provided herein, distributions to the surviving Spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70 1/2, if later.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
46


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(ii)
Lifetime   method   (non-Spouse).   If the Participant's surviving Spouse is not the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary," then, except as provided in Section 6.8(b)(3) below, distributions to the "designated Beneficiary" will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.

(iii)
Five-year   method.   If there is no "designated Beneficiary" as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant's death or if otherwise elected pursuant to the Adoption Agreement with respect to a "designated Beneficiary," the Participant's entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death.

(iv)
Death   of   Spouse.   If the Participant's surviving Spouse is the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary" and the surviving Spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving Spouse begin, this Section 6.8(b)(2), other than Section 6.8(b)(2)(i), will apply as if the surviving Spouse were the Participant.

For purposes of this Section 6.8(b)(2) and Section 6.8(b)(3), unless Section 6.8(b)(2)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant's "required beginning date." If Section 6.8(b)(2)(iv) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving Spouse under Section 6.8(b)(2)(i). If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant's "required beginning date " (or to the Participant's surviving Spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving Spouse under Section 6.8(b)(2)(i)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.

(3)  Forms   of   distribution.   Unless the Participant's interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the "required beginning date," as of the first "distribution calendar year" distribut ions will be made in accordance with Sections 6.8(c) and 6.8(d) and only in a form of distribution provided in Section 6.5 or 6.6, as applicable. If the Participant's interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distr ibutions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of Code §401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder.

(c)
Required minimum distributions during Participant's lifetime

(1)
Amount   of   required   minimum   distribution   for   each   "distribution   calendar   year."   During the Participant's lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each "distribution calendar year" is the lesser of the following, as elected in the Form of Distributions Section of the Adoption Agreement:

(i)
the quotient obtained by dividing the "Participant's account balance" by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Regulation §1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant's age as of the Participant's birthday in the "distribution calendar year"; or

(ii)
if the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary" for the "distribution calendar year" is the Participant's Spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the "Participant's account balance" by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Regulation §1.401(a)(9)-9, using the Participant's and Spouse's attained ages as of the Participant's and Spouse's birthdays in the "distribution calendar year."

(2)
Lifetime   required   minimum   distributions   continue   through   year   of   Participant's   death.   Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 6.8(c) beginning with the first "distribution calendar year" and up to and including the "distribution calendar year" that includes the Participant's date of death.

(d)
Required minimum distributions after Participant's death

(1)
Death on or after date distributions begin.

(i)
Participant   survived   by   "designated   Beneficiary."   If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a "designated Beneficiary," the minimum amount that will be distributed for each "distribution calendar year" after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the "Participant's account balance" by the longer of the remaining "life expectancy" of the Participant or the remaining "life expectancy" of the Participant's "designated Beneficiary," determined as follows:

(A)
The Participant's remaining "life expectancy" is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(B)
If the Participant's surviving Spouse is the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary," the remaining "life expectancy" of the surviving Spouse is calculated for each "distribution calendar year" after the year of the Participant's death using the surviving Spouse's age as of the Spouse's birthday in that year. For "distribution calendar years" after the year of the surviving Spouse's death, the remaining "life expectancy" of the surviving Spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving Spouse as of the Spouse's birthday in the calendar year of the Spouse's death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
47


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(C) If the Participant's surviving Spouse is not the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary," the "designated Beneficiary's" remaining "life expectancy" is calculated using the age of the Beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant's death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(ii)  No   "designated   Beneficiary."   If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no "designated Beneficiary" as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant's death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each "distribution calendar year" after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by divid ing the "Participant's account balance" by the Participant's remaining "life expectancy" calculated using the age of the   Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(2)
Death before date distributions begin.

(i)
Participant   survived   by   "designated   Beneficiary."   Except as provided in Sections 6.8(b)(2) and 6.8(b)(3), if the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a "designated Beneficiary," the minimum amount that will be distributed for each "distribution calendar year" after the year of the Participant's death is the quotient obtained by dividing the "Participant's account balance" by the remaining "life expectancy" of the Participant's "designated Beneficiary," determined as provided in Section 6.8(d)(1).

(ii)
No   "designated   Beneficiary."   If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no "designated Beneficiary" as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant's death, distribution of the Participant's entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death.

(iii)
Death   of   surviving   Spouse   before   distributions   to   surviving   Spouse   are   required   to   begin.   If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant's surviving Spouse is the Participant's sole "designated Beneficiary," and the surviving Spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving Spouse under Section 6.8(b)(2)(i), this Section 6.8(d)(2) will apply as if the surviving Spouse were the Participant.

(e)
Definitions.   For purposes of this Section, the following definitions apply:

(1)
"Designated Beneficiary" means the individual who is designated as the Beneficiary under the Plan and is the "designated Beneficiary" under Code §401(a)(9) and Regulation §1.401(a)(9)-4.

(2)
"Distribution calendar year" means a calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant's death, the first "distribution calendar year" is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant's "required beginning date." For distributions beginning after the Participant's death, the first "distribution calendar year" is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Section 6.8(b). The required minimum distribution for the Participant's first "distribution calendar year" will be made on or before the Participant's "required beginning date." The required minimum distribution for other "distribution calendar years," including the required minimum distribution for the "distribution calendar year" in which the Participant's "required beginning date" occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that "distribution calendar year."

(3)
"Life expectancy" means the life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Regulation §1.401(a)(9)-9.

(4)
"Participant's account balance" means the Participant's account balance as of the last Valuation Date in the calendar year immediately preceding the "distribution calendar year" (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or Forfeitures allocated to the account balance as of the dates in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date. For this purpose, the Administrator may exclude contributions that are allocated to the account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the Valuation Date, but that are not actually made during the valuation calendar year. The account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the "distribution calendar year" if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.

(5)
"Required beginning date" means, except as otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), with respect to any Participant, April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2 or the calendar year in which the Participant retires, except that benefit distributions to a "5-percent owner" must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2.

(6)
"5-percent owner" means a Participant who is a 5-percent owner as defined in Code §416 at any time during the Plan Year ending with or within the calendar year in which such owner attains age 70 1/2. Once distributions have begun to a 5-percent owner under this Section they must continue to be distributed, even if the Participant ceases to be a 5-percent owner in a subsequent year.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
48


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(f)
Waiver of 2009 required distributions

(1)
Suspension   of   RMDs   unless   otherwise   elected   by Participant.   This paragraph does not apply if the Employer elected options a., b., or c. at the WRERA – RMD Waivers for 2009 Section of the Adoption Agreement. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Plan relating to required minimum distributions under Code §401(a)(9), a Participant or Beneficiary who would have been required to receive required minimum distributions for 2009 but for the enactment of Code §401(a)(9)(H) ("2009 RMDs"), and who would have satisfied that requirement by receiving distributions that are (i) equal to the "2009 RMDs" or (ii) one or more payments in a series of substantially equal distributions (that include the "2009 RMDs") made at least annually and expected to last for the life (or "life expectancy") of the Participant, the joint lives (or joint "life expectancy") of the Participant and the Participant's "designated Beneficiary," or for a period of at least 10 years ("Extended 2009 RMDs"), did not receive those distributions for 2009 unless the Participant or Beneficiary chooses to receive such distributions. Participants and Beneficiaries described in the preceding sentence were given the opportunity to elect to receive the distributions described in the preceding sentence.

(2)
Continuation   of   RMDs   unless   otherwise   elected   by   Participant.   This paragraph applies if the Employer elected option b. at the WRERA – RMD Waivers for 2009 Section of the Adoption Agreement. Notwithstanding the provisions of the Plan relating to required minimum distributions under Code §401(a)(9), a Participant or Beneficiary who would have been required to receive required minimum distributions for 2009 but for the enactment of Code §401(a)(9)(H) ("2009 RMDs"), and who would have satisfied that requirement by receiving distributions that are (i) equal to the "2009 RMDs" or (ii) one or more payments in a series of substantially equal distributions (that include the "2009 RMDs") made at least annually and expected to last for the life (or "life expectancy") of the Participant, the joint lives (or joint "life expectancy") of the Participant and the Participant's "designated Beneficiary," or for a period of at least 10 years ("Extended 2009 RMDs"), did not receive those distributions for 2009 unless the Participant or Beneficiary choose not to receive such distributions. Participants and Beneficiaries described in the preceding sentence were given the opportunity to elect to stop receiving the distributions described in the preceding sentence.

(3)
Direct   rollovers.   Notwithstanding the provisions of the Plan relating to required minimum distributions under Code
§401(a)(9), and solely for purposes of applying the direct rollover provisions of the Plan, certain additional distributions in 2009, as elected by the Employer in the WRERA – RMD Waivers for 2009 Section of the Adoption Agreement, were treated as eligible rollover distributions. If no election was made by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement, then a direct rollover was offered only for distributions that would have been eligible rollover distributions without regard to Code §401(a)(9)(H).

6.9
DISTRIBUTION FOR MINOR OR INCOMPETENT INDIVIDUAL

If, in the opinion of the Administrator, a Participant or Beneficiary entitled to a distribution is not able to care for his or her affairs because of a mental condition, a physical condition, or by reason of age, then the Administrator shall direct the distribution to the Participant's or Beneficiary's guardian, conservator, trustee, custodian (including under a Uniform Transfers or Gifts to Minors Act) or to his or her attorney-in-fact or to other legal representative, upon furnishing evidence of such status satisfactory to the Administrator. The Administrator and the Trustee (or Insurer) do not have any liability with respect to payments so made and neither the Administrator nor the Trustee (or Insurer) has any duty to make inquiry as to the competence of any person entitled to receive payments under the Plan.

6.10
LOCATION OF PARTICIPANT OR BENEFICIARY UNKNOWN

In the event that all, or any portion, of the distribution payable to a Participant or Beneficiary hereunder shall, at the later of the Participant's attainment of age 62 or Normal Retirement Age, remain unpaid solely by reason of the inability of the Administrator to ascertain the whereabouts of such Participant or Beneficiary, the amount so distributable may, in the sole discretion of the Administrator, either be treated as a Forfeiture or be paid directly to an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a) or an individual   retirement annuity described in Code §408(b). In addition, if the Plan provides for mandatory distributions and the amount to be distributed to a Participant or Beneficiary does not exceed $1,000, then the amount distributable may, in the sole discretion of the Admi nistrator, either be treated as a Forfeiture, or be paid directly to an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code §408(b) at the time it is determined that the whereabouts of the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary   cannot be ascertained. In the event a Participant or Beneficiary is located subsequent to the Forfeiture, such benefit shall be restored, first from Forfeitures, if any, and then from an additional Employer contribution if necessary. Upon Plan termination, the portion of the distributable amount that is an "eligible rollover distribution" as defined in Section 6.15(b)(1) may be paid directly to an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code §408(b). However, regardless of the preceding, a benefit that is lost by reason of escheat under applicable state law is not treated as a Forfeiture for purposes of this Section nor as an impermissible forfeiture under the Code.

6.11
IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION

If elected in the Adoption Agreement, at such time as the conditions set forth in the Adoption Agreement have been satisfied, then the Administrator, at the election of a Participant who has not severed employment with the Employer, shall direct the distribution of up to the entire Vested amount then credited to the Accounts as elected in the Adoption Agreement maintained on behalf of such Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account balance in the Plan. In the event that the Administrator makes such a distribution, the Participant shall continue to be eligible to participate in the Plan on the same basis as any other Employee. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be made in a manner consistent with Section 6.5, including, but not


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
49


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder. The Plan may, however, make a partial distribution pursuant to this Section regardless of whether partial distributions are otherwise permitted pursuant to the Adoption Agreement. Furthermore, if an in-service distribution is permitted from more than one account type, the Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant's in-service distribution from such accounts.

6.12
ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP

(a)
Hardship   events.   For Profit Sharing Plans and 401(k) Plans (except to the extent Section 12.10 applies), if elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Administrator, at the election of the Participant, shall direct the distribution to any Participant in any one Plan Year up to the lesser of 100% of the Vested interest of the Accounts selected in the Adoption Agreement, valued as of the last Valuation Date or the amount necessary to satisfy the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account balance in the Plan. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be deemed to be made as of the first day of the Plan Year or, if later, the Valuation Date immediately preceding the date of distribution, and the Account from which the distribution is made shall be reduced accordingly. Withdrawal under this Section shall be authorized only if the distribution is for an immediate and heavy financial need. The Administrator will determine whether there is an immediate and heavy financial need based on the facts and circumstances. An immediate and heavy financial need includes, but is not limited to, a distribution for one of the following:

(1)
Expenses for (or necessary to obtain) medical care (as defined in Code §213(d));

(2)
Costs directly related to the purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the Participant;

(3)
Payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Participant's deceased parent, Spouse, children or dependents (as defined in Code §152, and without regard to Code §152(d)(1)(B));

(4)
Payment of tuition, related educational fees, and room and board expenses, for up to the next twelve (12) months of post-secondary education for the Participant, the Participant's Spouse, children, or dependents (as defined in Code §152, and without regard to Code §§152(b)(1), (b)(2), and (d)(1)(B));

(5)
Payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the Participant from the Participant's principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage on that residence; or

(6)
Expenses for the repair of damage to the Participant's principal residence that would qualify for the casualty deduction under Code §165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income).

(b)
Beneficiary-based   distribution.   If elected in Adoption Agreement, then effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement, but no earlier than August 17, 2006, a Participant's hardship event includes an immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant's "primary Beneficiary under the Plan," that would constitute a hardship event if it occurred with respect to the Participant's Spouse or dependent as defined under Code §152 (such hardship events being limited to educational expenses, funeral expenses and certain medical expenses). For purposes of this Section, a Participant's "primary Beneficiary under the Plan" is an individual who is named as a Beneficiary under the Plan (by the Participant or pursuant to Section 6.2(d)) and has an unconditional right to all or a portion of the Participant's Account balance under the Plan upon the Participant's death.

(c)
Other   limits   and   conditions.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, no distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section from the Participant's Account until such Account has become fully Vested. Furthermore, if a hardship distribution is permitted from more than one Account, the Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant's hardship distribution from such Accounts.

(d)
Distribution   rules   apply.   Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder.

6.13
SPECIAL RULE FOR CERTAIN PROFIT SHARING PLANS

(a)
The provisions of this Section apply to a Participant in a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan to the extent elected in the Adoption Agreement. However, unless otherwise permitted pursuant to Regulation §1.411(d)-4, this Section shall not apply with respect to amounts that are transferred directly or indirectly (i.e., other than by a rollover) to this Plan from a defined benefit plan, money purchase pension plan, target benefit plan, or stock bonus or profit sharing plan which is subject to the survivor annuity requirements of Code §§401(a)(11) and 417.

(b)
If an election is made to not offer life annuities as a form of distribution, then a Participant shall be prohibited from electing benefits in the form of a life annuity and the Joint and Survivor Annuity provisions of Section 6.5 shall not apply.

(c)
If an election is made to offer life annuities as a form of distribution but not as the normal form of distribution, then the Joint and Survivor Annuity provisions of Section 6.5 shall not apply if a Participant does not elect an annuity form of distribution. Furthermore, Subsection (e) shall not apply if a Participant elects an annuity form of distribution.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
50


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Notwithstanding anything in Sections 6.2 and 6.6 to the contrary, upon the death of a Participant, the automatic form of distribution will be a lump-sum rather than a Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. Furthermore, the Participant's Spouse will be the Beneficiary of the Participant's entire Vested interest in the Plan unless an election is made to waive the Spouse as Beneficiary. The other provisions in Section 6.2 shall be applied by treating the death benefit in this Subsection as though it is a Qualified
Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity.

(e)
Except to the extent otherwise provided in this Section, the provisions of Sections 6.2 and 6.5 regarding spousal consent shall be inoperative with respect to this Plan.

(f)
If a distribution is one to which Code §§401(a)(11) and 417 do not apply, such distribution may commence less than thirty (30) days after the notice required under Regulation §1.411(a)-11(c) is given, provided that:

(1)
the Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of at least thirty (30) days after the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular distribution option), and

(2)
the Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.

6.14
QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDER DISTRIBUTION

All benefits provided to a Participant in this Plan shall be subject to the rights afforded to any Alternate Payee under a "qualified domestic relations order." Furthermore, unless otherwise elected in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), a distribution to an Alternate Payee shall be permitted if such distribution is authorized by a "qualified domestic relations order," even if the affected Participant has not reached the "earliest retirement age." For the purposes of this Section, "qualified domestic relations order" and "earliest retirement age" shall have the meanings set forth under Code §414(p).

Effective as of April 6, 2007, a domestic relations order that otherwise satisfies the requirements for a "qualified domestic relations order" will not fail to be a "qualified domestic relations order": (i) solely because the order is issued after, or revises, another domestic relations order or "qualified domestic relations order"; or (ii) solely because of the time at which the order is issued, including issuance after the Annuity Starting Date or after the Participant's death.

6.15
DIRECT ROLLOVERS

(a)
Right to   direct   rollover.   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a "distributee's" election under this Section, a "distributee" may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Administrator, to have an "eligible rollover distribution" paid directly to an "eligible retirement plan" specified by the "distributee" in a "direct rollover." However, if less than the entire amount of the "eligible rollover distribution" is being paid directly to an "eligible retirement plan," then the Administrator may require that the amount paid directly to such plan be at least $500. Furthermore, the Administrator may apply this Section by treating a Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account separately from the Participant's other Account s.

(b)
Definitions.   For purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply:

(1)
Eligible   rollover   distribution.   An "eligible rollover distribution" means any distribution described in Code §402(c)(4) and generally includes any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the "distributee," except that an "eligible rollover distribution" does not include: any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the "distributee" or the joint lives (or joint life expectanci es) of the "distributee" and the "distributee's" "designated Beneficiary," or for a specified period of ten (10) years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under Code §401(a)(9); any hardship distribution; the portion of any other distribution(s) that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities); and any other distribution reasonably expected to total less than $200 during a year. For purposes of the $200 rule, a distribution from a designated Roth account and a distribution from other accounts under the Plan may be treated as made under separate plans. In addition, Section 6.8(f) applies with respect to distributions made in 2009.

Notwithstanding the above, a portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an "eligible rollover distribution" merely because the portion consists of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions which are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred only to:

(i)
a traditional individual retirement account or annuity described in Code §408(a) or (b) (a "traditional IRA")

(ii)
for taxable years beginning after December 31, 2006, a Roth individual account or annuity described in Code §408A (a "Roth IRA"), or

(iii)
a qualified defined contribution plan or an annuity contract described in Code §401(a) or Code §403(b), respectively, that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred (and earnings thereon), including separately accounting for the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
51


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

portion of such distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible.

(2)
Eligible   retirement   plan.   An "eligible retirement plan" is a "traditional IRA," for distributions made after December 31, 2007, a "Roth IRA," a qualified trust (an employees' trust) described in Code §401(a) which is exempt from tax under Code
§501(a), an annuity plan described in Code §403(a), an eligible plan under Code §457(b) which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan, and an annuity contract described in Code §403(b), that accepts the "distributee's" "eligible rollover distribution." The definition of "eligible retirement plan" shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving Spouse, or to a Spouse or former Spouse who is an Alternate Payee. If any portion of an "eligible rollover distribution" is attributable to payments or distributions from a designated Roth account, an "eligible retirement plan" with respect to such portion shall include only another designated Roth account of the individual from whose account the payments or distributions were made, or a Roth IRA of such individual. A "direct rollover" of a distribution from a Roth Elective Deferral Account (other than an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" (as defined in Section 12.11)) will only be made to another Roth Elective Deferral Account under an applicable retirement plan described in Code §402A(e)(1) or to a Roth IRA described in Code §408A, and only to the extent that the rollover is permitted under the rules of Code §402(c). In the case of a "distributee" who is a non-Spouse designated Beneficiary, (i) the "direct rollover" may be made only to a traditional or Roth individual retirement account or an annuity described in Code §408(b) ("IRA") that is established on behalf of the designated non-Spouse Beneficiary and that will be treated as an inherited IRA pursuant to the provisions of Code §402(c)(11), and (ii) the determi nation of any required minimum distribution required under Code §401(a)(9) that is ineligible for rollover shall be made in accordance with IRS Notice 2007-7, Q&A 17 and 18.

(3)
Distributee.   A "distributee" includes an Employee or Former Employee. In addition, the Employee's or Former Employee's surviving Spouse and the Employee's or Former Employee's Spouse or former Spouse who is the Alternate Payee, are "distributees" with regard to the interest of the Spouse or former Spouse.

(4)
Direct   rollover.   A "direct rollover" is a payment by the Plan to the "eligible retirement plan" specified by the "distributee."

(c)
Participant   notice.   A Participant entitled to an "eligible rollover distribution" must receive a written explanation of the right to a "direct rollover," the tax consequences of not making a "direct rollover," and, if applicable, any available special income tax elections. The notice must be provided within the same thirty (30) – one-hundred eighty (180) day timeframe applicable to the Participant consent notice as set forth in Section 6.5(d)(3). The "direct rollover" notice must be provided to all Participants, unless the total amount the Participant will receive as a distribution during the calendar year is expected to be less than $200.

(d)
Non-Spouse   Beneficiary   rollover   right.   For distributions after December 31, 2009, and unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, for distributions after December 31, 2006, a non-Spouse Beneficiary who is a "designated Beneficiary" under Code §401(a)(9)(E) and the Regulations thereunder, by a direct trustee-to-trustee transfer ("direct rollover"), may roll over all or any portion an "eligible rollover distribution" to an IRA the Beneficiary establishes for purposes of receiving the distribution.

(1)
Certain   requirements   not   applicable.   Any distribution made prior to January 1, 2010 is not subject to the "direct rollover" requirements of Code §401(a)(31) (including Code §401(a)(31)(B), the notice requirements of Code §402(f) or the mandatory withholding requirements of Code §3405(c)).

(2)
Trust Beneficiary.   If the Participant's named Beneficiary is a trust, the Plan may make a direct rollover to an IRA on behalf of the trust, provided the trust satisfies the requirements to be a "designated Beneficiary."

6.16
RESTRICTIONS ON DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS TRANSFERRED FROM A MONEY PURCHASE PLAN

Notwithstanding any provision of this Plan to the contrary, to the extent that any optional form of benefit under this Plan permits a distribution prior to the Employee's retirement, death, Total and Permanent Disability, or severance from employment, and prior to Plan termination, the optional form of benefit is not available with respect to benefits attributable to assets (including the post-transfer earnings thereon) and liabilities that are transferred, within the meaning of Code §414(l), to this Plan from a money purchase pension plan qualified under Code §401(a) (other than any portion of those assets and liabilities attributable to after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or to a direct or indirect rollover contribution). Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, effective with respect to Plan Years beginning after June 30, 2008, a Participant may not obtain an in-service distribution with respect to such transferred amounts prior to the earlier of the Participant's Normal Retirement Age or attainment of age 62.

6.17
CORRECTIVE DISTRIBUTIONS

Nothing in this Article shall preclude the Administrator from making a distribution to a Participant, to the extent such distribution is made to correct a qualification defect in accordance with the corrective procedures under the IRS' Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System or any other voluntary compliance programs established by the IRS or the Department of Labor.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
52


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

6.18
QUALIFIED RESERVIST DISTRIBUTIONS AND HEART ACT

(a)
Qualified   reservist   distribution   defined.   A "qualified reservist distribution" is any distribution to an individual who is ordered or called to active duty after September 11, 2001, if: (1) the distribution is from amounts attributable to elective deferrals in a 401(k) plan; (2) the individual was (by reason of being a member of a reserve component, as defined in section 101 of title 37, United States Code) ordered or called to active duty for a period in excess of 179 days or for an indefinite period; and (3) the Plan makes the distribution during the period beginning on the date of such order or call, and ending at the close of the active duty period.

(b)
Death   benefits.   In the case of a death occurring on or after January 1, 2007, if a Participant dies while performing qualified military service (as defined in Code §414(u)), the Participant's Beneficiary is entitled to any additional benefits (other than benefit accruals (unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement) relating to the period of qualified military service) provided under the Plan as if the Participant had resumed employment and then terminated employment on account of death. Moreover, the Plan will credit the Participant's qualified military service as service for vesting purposes, as though the Participant had resumed employment under Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended (USERRA) immediately prior to the Participant's death.

(c)
Military   Differential Pay.   For years beginning after December 31, 2008: (1) an individual receiving Military Differential Pay is treated as an Employee of the Employer making the payment; (2) the Military Differential Pay is treated as 415 Compensation (and Compensation unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement); and (3) the Plan is not treated as failing to meet the requirements of any provision described in Code §414(u)(1)(C) (or corresponding Plan provisions, including, but not limited to, Plan provisions related to the ADP or ACP test) by reason of any contribution or benefit which is based on the Military Differential Pay. The Administrator operationally may determine, for purposes of the provisions described in Code §414(u)(1)(C), whether to take into account any Elective Deferrals, and if applicable, any matching contributions, attributable to Military Differential Pay.

Subsection (c)(3) above applies only if all Employees of the Employer performing service in the uniformed services described in Code §3401(h)(2)(A) are entitled to receive Military Differential Pay on reasonably equivalent terms and, if eligible to participate in a retirement plan maintained by the Employer, to make contributions based on the payments on reasonably equivalent terms (taking into account Code §410(b)(3), (4), and (5)).

(d)
Deemed   Severance.   Notwithstanding Subsection (c)(1) above, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant performs service in the uniformed services (as defined in Code §414(u)(12)(B)) on active duty for a period of more than 30 days, the Participant will be deemed to have a severance from employment solely for purposes of eligibility for distribution of amounts not subject to Code
§412. However, the Plan will not distribute such a Participant's Account on account of this deemed severance unless the Participant specifically elects to receive a benefit distribution hereunder. If a Participant elects to receive a distribution on account of this deemed severance, then the individual may not make an Elective Deferral or after-tax voluntary Employee contribution during the six (6) month period beginning on the date of the distribution. If a Participant would be entitled to a distribution on account of a deemed severance, and a distribution on account of another Plan provision (such as a "qualified reservist distribution" as defined in Subsection
(a) above), then the other Plan provision will control and the six (6) month suspension will not apply.

ARTICLE VII TRUSTEE AND CUSTODIAN

7.1
BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TRUSTEE

(a)
Application   of   Article.   The provisions of this Article, other than Sections 7.6 and 7.15, shall not apply to this Plan if a separate trust agreement is being used. Furthermore, the provisions of this Article, other than Sections 7.5, 7.6 and 7.15, shall not apply if the Plan is fully insured. If the Employer has appointed two or more Trustees to hold Plan assets, then each Trustee shall be the Trustee only with respect to those Plan assets specifically deposited by the Employer in the Trust Fund for which such Trustee is the trustee. References in the Plan to the responsibilities, power or duties of the Trustee and any other provisions in the Plan relating to the Trustee shall be interpreted as applying to each Trustee only with respect to the assets of the Trust Fund for which such Trustee is the Trustee. Each Trustee shall have no responsibility for, or liability with respect to, any of the Plan assets other than the assets for which it serves as Trustee.

(b)
Duty   to   collect   contributions.   The Trustee is obligated to collect any amounts owed to the Trust, except as otherwise provided in Section 7.3(c), even if such amounts are owed by the Employer, unless another person or entity has been designated with such duty in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections) or other written agreement (including a designation made pursuant to Section 7.3(c)). In determining how to discharge any duty to collect contributions, the Trustee should weigh the value of the Plan assets involved, the likelihood of a successful recovery, and the expenses expected to be incurred.

(c)
Reliance   on   Administrator's   directions.   The Trustee will credit and distribute the Trust Fund as directed by the Administrator. The Trustee is not obligated to inquire as to whether any payee or distributee is entitled to any payment or whether the distribution is proper or within the terms of the Plan, or whether the manner of making any payment or distribution is proper. The Trustee is accountable only to the Administrator for any payment or distribution made by it in good faith on the order or direction of t he Administrator.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
53


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Directions   by   others.   In the event that the Trustee shall be directed by a Participant (pursuant to the Participant Direction Procedures if the Plan permits Participant directed investments), the Employer, or an Investment Manager or other agent appoi nted by the Employer with respect to the investment of any or all Plan assets, the Trustee shall have no liability with respect to the investment of such assets, but shall be responsible only to execute such investment instructions as so directed.

(1)
The Trustee shall be entitled to rely fully on the written (or other form acceptable to the Administrator and the Trustee, including but not limited to, voice recorded) instructions of a Participant (pursuant to the Participant Direction Procedures), the Employer, or any Fiduciary or nonfiduciary agent of the Employer, in the discharge of such duties, and shall not be liable for any loss or other liability resulting from such direction (or lack of direction) of the investment of any part of the Plan assets.

(2)
The Trustee may delegate the duty of executing such instructions to any nonfiduciary agent, which may be an affiliate of the Trustee or any Plan representative.

(3)
The Trustee may refuse to comply with any direction from the Participant in the event the Trustee, in its sole and absolute discretion, deems such direction improper by virtue of applicable law. The Trustee shall not be responsible or liable for any loss or expense that may result from the Trustee's refusal or failure to comply with any direction from the Participant.

(4)
Any costs and expenses related to compliance with the Participant's directions shall be borne by the Participant's Directed Account, unless paid by the Employer.

(5)
Notwithstanding anything herein above to the contrary, the Trustee shall not invest any portion of a Participant's Directed Account in "collectibles" within the meaning of Code §408(m).

(e)
Records.   The Trustee will maintain records of receipts and disbursements and furnish to the Employer and/or Administrator for each Plan Year a written annual report pursuant to Section 7.9.

(f)
Employment   of   bank   or   trust   company.   The Trustee may employ a bank or trust company pursuant to the terms of its usual and customary bank agency agreement, under which the duties of such bank or trust company shall be of a custodial, clerical and record-keeping nature.

(g)
Payment   of   expenses.   The Trustee may employ and pay from the Trust Fund reasonable compensation to agents, attorneys, accountants and other persons to advise the Trustee as in its opinion may be necessary. The Trustee may delegate to any agent , attorney, accountant or other person selected by it any non-Trustee power or duty vested in it by the Plan, and the Trustee may act or refrain from acting on the advice or opinion of any such person.

7.2
INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF DISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE

(a)
Discretionary   authority.   This Section applies if the Employer, in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee, designates the Trustee to administer all or a portion of the trust as a Discretionary Trustee. If so designated, then the Trustee has the discretion and authority to invest, manage, and control those Plan assets except, however, with respect to those assets which are subject to the investment direction of a Participant (if Participant directed investments are permitted), or an Investment Manager, the Administrator, or other agent appointed by the Employer. The exercise of any investment discretion hereunder shall be consistent with the "funding policy and method" determined by the Employer.

(b)
Duties.   The Trustee shall, except as otherwise provided in this Plan, invest and reinvest the Trust Fund to keep the Trust Fund invested without distinction between principal and income and in such securities or property, real or personal, wherever situated, as the Trustee shall deem advisable, including, but not limited to, common or preferred stocks, open-end or closed-end mutual funds, bonds and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership, and real estate or any interest therein. The Trustee shall at all times in making investments of the Trust Fund consider, among other factors, the short and long-term financial needs of the Plan on the basis of information furnished by the Employer. In making such investments, the Trustee shall not be restricted to securities or other property of the character expressly authorized by the applicable law for trust investments; however, the Trustee shall give due regard to any limitations imposed by the Code or the Act so that at all times this Plan may qualify as a qualified Plan and Trust. The Trustee shall discharge its duties with respect to the Plan solely in the interest of the Participants and Beneficiaries and with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims.

(c)
Powers.   The Trustee, in addition to all powers and authorities under common law, statutory authority, including the Act, and other provisions of this Plan, shall have the following powers and authorities to be exercised in the Trustee's sole discretion:

(1)
To purchase, or subscribe for, any securities or other property and to retain the same. In conjunction with the purchase of securities, margin accounts may be opened and maintained;

(2)
To sell, exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee, by private contract or at public auction. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
54


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition, with or without advertisement;

(3)
To vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special proxies or powers of attorney with or without power of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in, corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting corporate securities, and to delegate discretionary powers, and to pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities, or other property;

(4)
To cause any securities or other property to be registered in the Trustee's own name, or in the name of a nominee or in a street name provided such securities or other property are held on behalf of the Plan by (i) a bank or trust company, (ii) a broker or dealer registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or a nominee of such broker or dealer, or (iii) a clearing agency as defined in Section 3(a)(23) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934;

(5)
To invest in a common, collective, or pooled trust fund (the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference) maintained by any Trustee (or any affiliate of such Trustee) hereunder pursuant to Revenue Ruling 81-100 (as modified by Rev. Rul. 2011-1 or any subsequent guidance), all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable, and the part of the Trust Fund so transferred shall be subject to all the terms and provisions of the common, collective, or pooled trust fund which contemplate the commingling for investment purposes of such trust assets with trust assets of other trusts. The name of the trust fund may be specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections). The Trustee may withdraw from such common, collective, or pooled trust fund all or such part of the Trust Fund as the Trustee may deem advisable;

(6)
To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Plan in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee shall deem advisable; and for any sum so borrowed, to issue a promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment thereof by pledging all, or any part, of the Trust Fund; and no person lending money to the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the money lent or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any borrowing;

(7)
To accept and retain for such time as it may deem advisable any securities or other property received or acquired by it as Trustee hereunder, whether or not such securities or other property would normally be purchased as investments hereunder;

(8)
To make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted;

(9)
To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration (provided such arbitration does not apply to qualification issues nor to Participants or Beneficiaries) any claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Plan, to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative proceedings, and to represent the Plan in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings;

(10)
To employ suitable agents and counsel and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation, and such agents or counsel may or may not be an agent or counsel for the Employer;

(11)
To apply for and procure from the Insurer as an investment of the Trust Fund any annuity or other Contracts (on the life of any Participant, or in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), on the life of any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest, or on the joint lives of a Participant and any person in whom the Participant has an insurable interest) as the Administrator shall deem proper; to exercise, at any time or from time to time, whatever rights and privileges may be granted under such annuity, or other Contracts; to collect, receive, and settle for the proceeds of all such annuity, or other Contracts as and when entitled to do so under the provisions thereof;

(12)
To invest funds of the Trust in time deposits or savings accounts bearing a reasonable rate of interest or in cash or cash balances without liability for interest thereon, including the specific authority to invest in any type of deposit of the Trustee (or of a financial institution related to the Trustee);

(13)
To invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations;

(14)
To sell, purchase and acquire put or call options if the options are traded on and purchased through a national securities exchange registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or, if the options are not traded on a national securities exchange, are guaranteed by a member firm of the New York Stock Exchange regardless of whether such options are covered;

(15)
To deposit monies in federally insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan associations including the specific authority to make deposit into any savings accounts or certificates of deposit of the Trustee (or a financial institution related to the Trustee);

(16)
To pool all or any of the Trust Fund, from time to time, with assets belonging to any other qualified employee pension benefit trust created by the Employer or any Affiliated Employer, and to commingle such assets and make joint or common


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
55


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

investments and carry joint accounts on behalf of this Plan and Trust and such other trust or trusts, allocating undivided shares or interests in such investments or accounts or any pooled assets of the two or more trusts in accordance with their respective interests; and

(17) To do all such acts and exercise all such rights and privileges, although not specifically mentioned herein, as the Trustee may deem necessary to carry out the purposes of the Plan.

(d)  Appointment   of   Investment Manager   or   others.   The Trustee may appoint, at its option, an Investment Manager, investment adviser, or other agent to provide direction to the Trustee with respect to the investment of any or all of the Plan assets. Such appointment shall be in writing and shall specifically identify the Plan assets with respect to which the Investment Manager or other agent shall have the authority to direct the investment.

7.3
INVESTMENT POWERS AND DUTIES OF NONDISCRETIONARY TRUSTEE

(a)
No   discretionary   powers.   This Section applies if the Employer, in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee, designates the Trustee to administer all or a portion of the trust as a nondiscretionary Trustee. If so designated, then the Trustee shall have no discretionary authority to invest, manage, or control those Plan assets, but must act solely as a Directed Trustee of those Plan assets. A nondiscretionary Trustee, as Directed Trustee of the Plan funds it holds, is authorized and empowered, by way of limitation, with the powers, rights and duties set forth herein and in Section 7.14, each of which the nondiscretionary Trustee exercises solely as Directed Trustee in accordance with the direction of the party which has the aut hority to manage and control the investment of the Plan assets. If no directions are provided to the Trustee, the Employer will provide necessary direction. Furthermore, the Employer and the nondiscretionary Trustee may, in writing, limit the powers of the nondiscretionary Trustee to any combination of powers listed within this Section. The party which has the authority to manage and control the investment of the Plan assets shall discharge its duties with respect to the Plan solely in the interest of the Participants and Beneficiaries and with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent person acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims.

(b)
Powers.   The Trustee, in addition to all powers and authorities under common law, statutory authority, including the Act, and other provisions of this Plan, shall have the following powers and authorities:

(1)
To invest the assets, without distinction between principal and income, in securities or property, real or personal, wherever situated, including, but not limited to, common or preferred stocks, open-end or closed-end mutual funds, bonds and other evidences of indebtedness or ownership, and real estate or any interest therein. In making such investments, the Trustee shall not be restricted to securities or other property of the character expressly authorized by the applicable law for trust investments; however, the Trustee shall give due regard to any limitations imposed by the Code or the Act so that at all times this Plan may qualify as a qualified Plan and Trust;

(2)
To purchase, or subscribe for, any securities or other property and to retain the same. In conjunction with the purchase of securities, margin accounts may be opened and maintained;

(3)
To sell, exchange, convey, transfer, grant options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by the Trustee, by private contract or at public auction. No person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the purchase money or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other disposition, with or without advertisement;

(4)
At the direction of the party which has the authority or discretion, to vote upon any stocks, bonds, or other securities; to give general or special proxies or powers of attorney with or without power of substitution; to exercise any conversion privileges, subscription rights or other options, and to make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise participate in, corporate reorganizations or other changes affecting corporate securities, and to delegate powers, and pay any assessments or charges in connection therewith; and generally to exercise any of the powers of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities, or other property;

(5)
To cause any securities or other property to be registered in the Trustee's own name, or in the name of a nominee or in a street name provided such securities or other property are held on behalf of the Plan by (i) a bank or trust company, (ii) a broker or dealer registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, or a nominee of such broker or dealer, or (iii) a clearing agency as defined in Section 3(a)(23) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934;

(6)
To invest in a common, collective, or pooled trust fund (the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference) maintained by any Trustee (or any affiliate of such Trustee) hereunder pursuant to Revenue Ruling 81-100 (as modified by Rev. Rul. 2011-1 or any subsequent guidance), all or such part of the Trust Fund as the party which has the authority to manage and control the investment of the assets shall deem advisable, and the part of the Trust Fund so transferred shall be subject to all the terms and provisions of the common, collective, or pooled trust fund which contemplate the commingling for investment purposes of such trust assets with trust assets of other trusts. The name of the trust fund may be specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections);


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
56


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(7)
To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Plan in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee shall deem advisable; and for any sum so borrowed, to issue a promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment thereof by pledging all, or any part, of the Trust Fund; and no person lending money to the Trustee shall be bound to see to the application of the money lent or to inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety of any borrowing;

(8)
To make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and all documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other instruments that may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the powers herein granted;

(9)
To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration (provided such arbitration does not apply to qualification issues nor to Participants or Beneficiaries) any claims, debts, or damages due or owing to or from the Plan, to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative proceedings, and to represent the Plan in all suits and legal and administrative proceedings;

(10)
To employ suitable agents and counsel and to pay their reasonable expenses and compensation, and such agent or counsel may or may not be an agent or counsel for the Employer;

(11)
To apply for and procure from the Insurer as an investment of the Trust Fund any annuity or other Contracts (on the life of any Participant, or in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), on the life of any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest, or on the joint lives of a Participant and any person in whom the Participant has an insurable interest) as the Administrator shall deem proper; to exercise, at the direction of the person with the authority to do so, whatever rights and privileges may be granted under such annuity or other Contracts; to collect, receive, and settle for the proceeds of all such annuity or other Contracts as and when entitled to do so under the provisions thereof;

(12)
To invest funds of the Trust in time deposits or savings accounts bearing a reasonable rate of interest or in cash or cash balances without liability for interest thereon, including the specific authority to invest in any type of deposit of the Trustee (or of a financial institution related to the Trustee);

(13)
To invest in Treasury Bills and other forms of United States government obligations;

(14)
To sell, purchase and acquire put or call options if the options are traded on and purchased through a national securities exchange registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or, if the options are not traded on a national securities exchange, are guaranteed by a member firm of the New York Stock Exchange regardless of whether such options are covered;

(15)
To deposit monies in federally insured savings accounts or certificates of deposit in banks or savings and loan associations including the specific authority to make deposit into any savings accounts or certificates of deposit of the Trustee (or a financial institution related to the Trustee); and

(16)
To pool all or any of the Trust Fund, from time to time, with assets belonging to any other qualified employee pension benefit trust created by the Employer or any Affiliated Employer, and to commingle such assets and make joint or common investments and carry joint accounts on behalf of this Plan and such other trust or trusts, allocating undivided shares or interests in such investments or accounts or any pooled assets of the two or more trusts in accordance with their respective interests.

(c)  The Trustee shall have no responsibility to enforce the collection from the Employer of any contribution to the Plan or determine the correctness of the amount or timing any contribution. The Employer is responsible for transmitting contributions to the Trustee at such times and in such manner as is mutually agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee and as required by the Plan and appl icable law. Further, the Employer represents and warrants that it either has responsibility as a "named fiduciary" (as defined in Act
§402(a)(2)) or has properly delegated the responsibility to a Plan fiduciary, other than the nondiscretionary Trustee, for determining the correctness, amount and timing of contributions and for the collection of contributions.

7.4
POWERS AND DUTIES OF CUSTODIAN

The Employer may appoint a Custodian of the Plan assets. A Custodian has the same powers, rights and duties as a nondiscretionary Trustee. Any reference in the Plan to a Trustee also is a reference to a Custodian unless the context of the Plan indicates otherwise. A limitation of the Trustee's liability by Plan provision also acts as a limitation of the Custodian's liability. The Custodian will be protected from any liability with respect to actions taken pursuant to the direction of the Trustee, Administrator, the Employer, an Investment Manager, a named Fiduciary or other third party with authority to provide direction to the Custodian. The resignation or removal of the Custodian shall be made in accordance with Section 7.11 as though the Custodian were a Trustee.

7.5
LIFE INSURANCE

(a)
Permitted   insurance.   The Trustee (or Insurer), in accordance with nondiscriminatory operational procedures of the Administrator, shall ratably apply for, own, and pay all premiums on Contracts on the lives of the Participants or, in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), on the life of a member of the Participant's family or on the joint lives of a Participant and a member of the Participant's family. Furthermore, if a Contract is purchased on the joint lives of the Participant and another person and such other person predeceases the Participant, then the Contract may not be maintained under this Plan. Any initial or


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
57


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

additional Contract purchased on behalf of a Participant shall have a face amount of not less than $1,000, an amount set forth in the Administrator's procedures, or the limitation of the Insurer, whichever is greater. If a life insurance Contract is to be pur chased for a Participant, then the aggregate premium for ordinary life insurance for each Participant must be less than 50% of the aggregate contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account. For purposes of this limitation, ordinary life insurance Contracts are Contracts with both non-decreasing death benefits and non-increasing premiums. If term insurance or universal life insurance is purchased, then the aggregate premium must be 25% or less of the aggregate contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account. If both term insurance and ordinary life insurance are purchased, then the premium for term insurance plus one-half of the premium for ordinary life insurance may not in the aggregate exceed 25% of the aggregate Employer contributions and Forfeitures allocated to the Participant's Combined Account. Notwithstanding the preceding, the limitations imposed herein with respect to the purchase of life insurance shall not apply, in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan (including a 401(k) Plan), to the portion of the Participant's Account, other than the Participant's Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account, that has accumulated for at least two (2) Plan Years or to the entire Participant's Account if the Participant has been a Participant in the Plan for at least five (5) years. In addition, amounts transferred to this Plan in accordance with Section 4.6(f)(1)(ii) or (iii) and a Participant's Voluntary Contribution Account may be used to purchase Contracts               without limitation. Thus, amounts that are not subject to the limitations contained herein may be used to purchase life insur ance on any person in whom a Participant has an insurable interest or on the joint lives of a Participant and any person in whom the Participant has an insurable interest, and without regard to the amount of premiums paid to purchase any life insurance hereunder.

(b)
Contract   conversion   at   retirement.   Subject to the survivor annuity requirements of Sections 6.5 and 6.6 (if applicable), the Trustee (or Insurer) must distribute the Contracts to the Participant or convert the entire value of the Contracts at or before retirement into cash or provide for a periodic income so that no portion of such value may be used to continue life insurance protection beyond the date on which benefits commence.

(c)
Limitations   on   purchase.   Notwithstanding anything herein above to the contrary, amounts credited to a Participant's Qualified Voluntary Employee Contribution Account pursuant to Section 4.9, shall not be applied to the purchase of life insurance Contracts. Furthermore, no life insurance Contracts shall be required to be obtained on an individual's life if, for any reason (other than the nonpayment of premiums) the Insurer will not issue a Contract on such individual's life.

(d)
Proceeds   payable   to   Plan.   The Trustee (or Insurer) will be the owner of any life insurance Contract purchased under the terms of this Plan. The Contract must provide that the proceeds will be payable to the Trustee (or Insurer); however, the Trustee ( or Insurer) shall be required to pay over all proceeds of the Contract to the Participant's "designated Beneficiary" in accordance with the distribution provisions of Article VI. A Participant's Spouse will be the "designated Beneficiary" pursuant to Section 6.2, unless a qualified election has been made in accordance with Sections 6.5 and 6.6 of the Plan, if applicable. Under no circumstances shall the Trust retain any part of the proceeds that are in excess of the cash surrender value immediately prior to death. However, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall not pay the proceeds in a method that would violate the requirements of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, as stated in Article VI of the Plan, or Code §401(a)(9) and the Regulations thereunder. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms of any insurance Contract purchased hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control.

(e)
No   responsibility   for   act   of   Insurer.   The Employer, the Administrator and the Trustee shall not be responsible for the validity   of the provisions under a Contract issued hereunder or for the failure or refusal by the Insurer to provide benefits under such Contract. The Employer, Administrator and the Trustee are also not responsible for any action or failure to act by the Insurer or any other person which results in the delay of a payment under the Contract or which renders the Contract invalid or unenforceable in whole or in part.

7.6
LOANS TO PARTICIPANTS

(a)
Permitted   loans.   The Trustee (or the Administrator if the Trustee is a nondiscretionary Trustee or if loans are treated as Participant directed investments) may, in the Trustee's (or, if applicable, the Administrator's) sole discretion, make loans to Participants or Beneficiaries. If loans are permitted, then the following shall apply: (1) loans shall be made available to all Participants and Beneficiaries on a reasonably equivalent basis; (2) loans shall not be made available to Highly Compensated Employees in an amount greater than the amount made available to other Participants; (3) loans shall bear a reasonable rate of interest; (4) loans shall be adequately secured; and (5) loans shall provide for periodic repayment over a reasonable period of time. Furthermore, no      Participant loan shall exceed the Participant's Vested interest in the Plan. For purposes of this Section, the term Participa nt shall include any Eligible Employee who is not yet a Participant, if, pursuant to the Adoption Agreement, "rollovers" are permitted to be accepted from Eligible Employees.

(b)
Prohibited   assignment   or   pledge.   An assignment or pledge of any portion of a Participant's interest in the Plan and a loan, pledge, or assignment with respect to any insurance Contract purchased under the Plan, shall be treated as a loan under this Section.

(c)
Spousal   consent.   If the Vested interest of a Participant is used to secure any loan made pursuant to this Section, then the written (or such other form as permitted by the IRS) consent of the Participant's Spouse shall be required in a manner consistent with Section 6.5(a), provided the spousal consent requirements of such Section apply to the Plan. Such consent must be obtained within the
one-hundred eighty (180) (ninety (90) for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2007) day period prior to the date the loan is made. A new consent shall be required if the Vested interest of a Participant is used for renegotiation, extension, renewal or other revision of the loan. However, unless the loan program established pursuant to this Section provides otherwise, no spousal consent shall be required under this paragraph if the total interest subject to the security is not in excess of $5,000. If a valid spousal consent has been


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
58


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

obtained in accordance with this Subsection, then, notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, the portion of the Participant's Vested Account balance used as a security interest held by the Plan by reason of a loan outstanding to the Participant shall be taken into account for purposes of determining the amount of the Account balance payable at the time of death or distribution, but only if the reduction is used as repayment of the loan. If less than 100% of the Participant's Vested Account balance (determined without regard to the preceding sentence) is payable to the surviving Spouse, then the Account balance shall be adjusted by first reducing the Vested Account balance by the amount of the security used as repayment of the loan, and then determining the benefit payable to the surviving Spouse.

(d)
Loan   program.   The Administrator shall be authorized to establish a Participant loan program to provide for loans under the Plan. The loan program shall be established in accordance with Department of Labor Regulation §2550.408(b)-1(d)(2) providing for loans by the Plan to parties-in-interest under said Plan, such as Participants or Beneficiaries. In order for the Administrator to implement such loan program, a separate written document forming a part of this Plan must be adopted, which document shall specifically include, but need not be limited to, the following:

(1)
the identity of the person or positions authorized to administer the Participant loan program;

(2)
a procedure for applying for loans;

(3)
the basis on which loans will be approved or denied;

(4)
limitations, if any, on the types and amounts of loans offered;

(5)
the procedure under the program for determining a reasonable rate of interest;

(6)
the types of collateral which may secure a Participant loan; and

(7)
the events constituting default and the steps that will be taken to preserve Plan assets in the event such default.

(e)
Loan   default.   Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if a Participant or Beneficiary defaults on a loan made pursuant to this Section that is secured by the Participant's interest in the Plan, then a Participant's interest may be offset by the amount subject to the security to the extent there is a distributable event permitted by the Code or Regulations.

(f)
Loans   subject   to   Plan   terms.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, if this is an amendment and restatement of an existing Plan, any loans made prior to the date this amendment and restatement is adopted shall be subject to the terms of the Plan in effect at the time such loan was made.

7.7
ALLOCATION AND DELEGATION OF RESPONSIBILITIES

If there is more than one Trustee, then the responsibilities of each Trustee may be specified by the Employer and accepted in writing by each Trustee. If no such delegation is made by the Employer, then the Trustees may allocate the responsibilities among themselves, in which event the Trustees shall notify the Employer and the Administrator in writing of such action and specify the responsibilities of each Trustee. Except where there has been an allocation and delegation of powers, if there shall be more than one Trustee, they shall act by a majority of their number, but may authorize one or more of them to sign papers on their behalf.

7.8
TRUSTEE'S COMPENSATION AND EXPENSES AND TAXES

The Trustee shall be paid such reasonable compensation as set forth in the Trustee's fee schedule (if the Trustee has such a schedule) or as agreed upon in writing by the Employer and the Trustee. However, an individual serving as Trustee who already receives full-time compensation from the Employer shall not receive compensation from this Plan. In addition, the Trustee shall be reimbursed for any reasonable expenses, including reasonable counsel fees incurred by it as Trustee. Such compensation and expenses shall be pai d from the Trust Fund unless paid or advanced by the Employer. All taxes of any kind whatsoever that may be levied or assessed under existing or future laws upon, or in respect of, the Trust Fund or the income thereof, shall be paid from the Trust Fund.

7.9
ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TRUSTEE

(a)
Annual   report.   Within a reasonable period of time after the later of the Anniversary Date or receipt of the Employer's contribution for each Plan Year, the Trustee, or its agent, shall furnish to the Employer and Administrator a written statement of account with respect to the Plan Year for which such contribution was made setting forth:

(1)
the net income, or loss, of the Trust Fund;

(2)
the gains, or losses, realized by the Trust Fund upon sales or other disposition of the assets;

(3)
the increase, or decrease, in the value of the Trust Fund;


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
59


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(4)
all payments and distributions made from the Trust Fund; and

(5)
such further information as the Trustee and/or Administrator deems appropriate.

(b)  Employer   approval   of   report.   The Employer, promptly upon its receipt of each such statement of account, shall acknowledge receipt thereof in writing and advise the Trustee and/or Administrator of its approval or disapproval thereof. Failure by the Employer to disapprove any such statement of account within thirty (30) days after its receipt thereof shall be deemed an approval thereof. The approval by the Employer of any statement of account shall be binding on the Employer and the Trustee as to all matters contained in the statement to the same extent as if the account of the Trustee had been settled by judgment or decree in an action for a judicial settlement of its account in a court of competent jurisdiction in which the Trustee, the Employer and all persons having or claiming an interest in the Plan were parties. However, nothing contained in this Section shall deprive the Trustee of its right to have its accounts judicially settled if the Trustee so desires.

7.10
AUDIT

(a)
Duty   to   engage   accountant.   If an audit of the Plan's records shall be required by the Act and the regulations thereunder for any Plan Year, the Administrator shall engage on behalf of all Participants an independent qualified public accountant for that purpose. Such accountant shall, after an audit of the books and records of the Plan in accordance with generally accepted auditing sta ndards, within a reasonable period after the close of the Plan Year, furnish to the Administrator and the Trustee a report of the audit setting forth the accountant's opinion as to whether any statements, schedules or lists, that are required by Act §103 or the Secretary of Labor to be filed with the Plan's annual report, are presented fairly in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles applied consistently.

(b)
Payment   of   fees.   All auditing and accounting fees shall be an expense of and may, at the election of the Employer, be paid from the Trust Fund.

(c)
Information   to   be   provided   to   Administrator.   If some or all of the information necessary to enable the Administrator to comply with Act §103 is maintained by a bank, insurance company, or similar institution, regulated, supervised, and subject to periodic examination by a state or federal agency, then it shall transmit and certify the accuracy of that information to the Administrator as provided in Act §103(b) within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of the Plan Year or such other date as may be prescribed under regulations of the Secretary of Labor.

7.11
RESIGNATION, REMOVAL AND SUCCESSION OF TRUSTEE

(a)
Trustee   resignation.   Unless otherwise agreed to by both the Trustee and the Employer, a Trustee may resign at any time by delivering to the Employer, at least thirty (30) days before its effective date, a written notice of resignation.

(b)
Trustee   removal.   Unless otherwise agreed to by both the Trustee and the Employer, the Employer may remove a Trustee at any time by delivering to the Trustee, at least thirty (30) days before its effective date, a written notice of such Trustee's removal.

(c)
Appointment   of   successor.   Upon the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of any Trustee, a successor may be appointed by the Employer; and such successor, upon accepting such appointment in writing and delivering same to the Employer, shall, without further act, become vested with all the powers and responsibilities of the predecessor as if such successor had been originally named as a Trustee herein. Until such a successor is appointed, any remaining Trustee or Trustees shall have full authority to act under the terms of the Plan.

(d)
Appointment   of   successor   prior   to   removal   of   predecessor.   The Employer may designate one or more successors prior to the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of a Trustee. In the event a successor is so designated by the Employer and accept s such designation, the successor shall, without further act, become vested with all the powers and responsibilities of the predecessor as if such successor had been originally named as Trustee herein immediately upon the death, resignation, incapacity, or removal of the predecessor.

(e)
Trustee's   statement   upon   cessation   of   being   Trustee.   Whenever any Trustee hereunder ceases to serve as such, the Trustee shall furnish to the Employer and Administrator a written statement of account with respect to the portion of the Plan Year during which the individual or entity served as Trustee. This statement shall be either (i) included as part of the annual statement of account for the Plan Year required under Section 7.9 or (ii) set forth in a special statement. Any such special statement of account should be rendered to the Employer no later than the due date of the annual statement of account for the Plan Year. The procedures set forth in Section 7.9 for the approval by the Employer of annual statements of account shall apply to any special statement of account rendered hereunder and approval by the Employer of any such special statement in the manner provided in Section 7.9 shall have the same effect upon the statement as the Employer's approval of an annual statement of account. No successor to the Trustee shall have any duty or responsibility to investigate the acts or transactions of any predecessor who has rendered all statements of account required by Section 7.9 and this subparagraph.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
60


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

7.12
TRANSFER OF INTEREST

Notwithstanding any other provision contained in this Plan, the Trustee at the direction of the Administrator shall transfer the interest, if any, of a Participant to another trust forming part of a pension, profit sharing, or stock bonus plan that meets the requirements of Code
§401(a), provided that the trust to which such transfers are made permits the transfer to be made and further provided that the terms of the transferee plan properly allocates the funds in each account to a transferee account that preserves all the required features and restrictions applicable to such account under this Plan. However, the transfer of amounts from this Plan to a nonqualified foreign trust is treated as a distribution and the transfer of assets and liabilities from this Plan to a plan that satisfies Section 1165 of the Puerto Rico Code is also treated as distribution from the transferor plan.

7.13
TRUSTEE INDEMNIFICATION

To the extent permitted by the Code and the Act, the Employer agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Trustee against any a nd all claims, losses, damages, expenses and liabilities the Trustee may incur in the exercise and performance of the Trustee's powers and duties hereunder, unless the same are determined to be due to gross negligence or willful misconduct.

7.14
EMPLOYER SECURITIES AND REAL PROPERTY

Subject to the provisions of Section 7.15, the Trustee shall be empowered to acquire and hold "qualifying employer securities" and "qualifying employer real property," as those terms are defined in the Act. However, no more than one hundred percent (100%), in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan or 401(k) Plan, or ten percent (10%), in the case of a Money Purchase Plan, of the fair market value of all the assets in the Trust Fund may be invested in "qualifying employer securities" and "qualifying employer real property."

Any such investment shall only be made upon written direction of the Employer who shall be solely responsible for the propriety of such investment, except to the extent Participants direct the investment of their Accounts in such investment. Additional dir ectives regarding the purchase, sale, or retention of such securities may be addressed in a funding policy, statement of investment policy, or other separate procedures or documents governing the investment of Plan assets. In the event of any conflicts between the Plan document and a separate investment trust agreement, the Plan document shall prevail.

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Plan does not permit Participants to direct the investment of their Elective Deferral Accounts, then the Trustee shall only be permitted to acquire or hold "qualifying employer securities" and "qualifying employer real property" to the extent permitted under Act §407.

7.15
DIVESTMENT OF EMPLOYER SECURITIES

(a)
Application   of   Section.   This Section only applies to a Plan that is an "applicable defined contribution plan." Except as provided herein or in Regulations, an "applicable defined contribution plan" means a defined contribution plan that holds employer securities (within the meaning of Regulation §1.401(a)(35)-1(f)(3)) that are publicly traded (within the meaning of Regulation
§1.401(a)(35)-1(f)(5)). An "applicable defined contribution plan" does not include a one-participant plan, as defined in Code
§401(a)(35)(E)(iv) or an employee stock ownership plan ("ESOP") as defined in Code §4975(e)(7) if: (1) the ESOP holds no contributions (or related earnings) that are (or were ever) subject to Code §§401(k) or 401(m); and (2) the ESOP is a separate plan, for purposes of Code §414(l), from any other defined benefit plan or defined contribution plan maintained by the same employer or employers. Except as provided in Regulation §1.401(a)(35)-1(f)(2)(iv) or in Code §401(a)(35)(F)(ii) (relating to certain controlled groups), the Plan is treated as holding publicly traded Employer securities if any Employer corporation, or any member of a controlled group of corporations which includes such Employer corporation (as defined in Code §401(a)(35)(F)(iii)) has issued a class of stock which is a "publicly traded Employer security."

(b)
Effective   date.   The provisions of Code §401(a)(35) generally apply to Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006. However, the effective date of the provisions relating to Regulation §1.401(a)(35)-1 are applicable to Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2011.

(c)
Rule   applicable   to   Elective   Deferrals,   Employee   contributions   and   rollovers.   If any portion of an "applicable individual's" account attributable to Elective Deferrals, after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or rollover contributions is invested in
publicly-traded Employer securities, then, except as otherwise provided herein, the "applicable individual" may elect to direct the Plan to divest any such securities, and to reinvest an equivalent amount in other investment options which satisfy the requirements of Subsection (e). For purposes of this Section, an "applicable individual" means: (1) a Participant; (2) an Alternate Payee who has an account under the Plan; or (3) a Beneficiary of a deceased Participant.

(d)
Rule   applicable   to   Employer   contributions.   If any portion of an "applicable individual's" account attributable to Employer contributions (other than Elective Deferrals) is invested in publicly-traded Employer securities, then, except as otherwise provided herein, the "applicable individual" may elect to direct the Plan to divest any such securities, and to reinvest an equivalent amount in other investment options which satisfy the requirements of Subsection (e) below.

(1)
Definition   of   "Applicable   individual."   For purposes of this Subsection, an "applicable individual" means: (i) a Participant who has completed at least three (3) Years of Service; (ii) an Alternate Payee who has an account under the Plan with respect to a


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
61


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Participant who has completed at least three (3) Years of Service; or (iii) a Beneficiary of a deceased Participant. For this purpose, a Participant completes three (3) Years of Service on the last day of the vesting computation period provided for under the Plan that constitutes the completion of the third year of service under Code §411(a)(5). However, if the Plan uses the elapsed time method of crediting service for vesting purposes (or the Plan provides for immediate vesting without using a vesting computation period or the elapsed time method of determining vesting), a Participant completes three (3) years of service on the day immediately preceding the third anniversary of the Participant's date of hire.

(2)
Definition   of   "publicly traded   Employer   security."   For purposes of this Section, a "publicly traded Employer security" means a security which is traded on a national securities exchange that is registered under Section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1935 or which is traded on a foreign national securities exchange that is officially recognized, sanctioned, or supervised by a governmental authority and the security is deemed by the securities and Exchange commission as having a "ready market" under SEC Rule 14c3-1 (17 CFR 240.15c3). In addition, if the Employer, or any member of a controlled group of corporations            (as described in Regulation §1.401(a)(35)-1(f)(2)(iv)(A) which includes the Employer, has issued a class of stock which is a publicly traded employer security, and the Plan hold employer securities which are not publicly traded Employer securities, then the Plan shall be treated as holding publicly traded Employer securities.

(3)
Three-year phase-in applicable to Employer contributions. For Employer securities acquired with Employer contributions (other than Elective Deferrals) during a Plan Year beginning before January 1, 2007, the rule described in this Subsection only applies to the percentage of the Employer securities (applied separately for each class of securities) as follows:

Plan   Year
Percentage
2007
33
2008
66
2009
100
(4)  Exception to phase-in for certain age 55 Participants. The 3-year phase-in rule in paragraph (3) above does not apply to a Participant who has attained age 55 and who has completed at least three (3) years of service (as defined in paragraph (1) above before the first Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2005.

(e)
Investment   options.   For purposes of this Section, other investment options must include not less than three (3) investment options, other than Employer securities, to which the individual who the right to divest under Subsections (c) or (d) may dir ect the proceeds from the divestment of Employer securities. Each of the three (3) investment options must be diversified and have materially different risk and return characteristics. For this purpose, investment options that constitute a broad range of investment alternatives within the meaning of Department of Labor Regulation §2550.404c–1(b)(3) are treated as being diversified and having materially different risk and return characteristics.

(f)
Restrictions   or   conditions   on   investments   in   Employer   securities.   The Plan must provide reasonable divestment and reinvestment opportunities at least quarterly. Furthermore, except as permitted by Regulation §1.401(a)(35)-1(e), the Plan may not impose restrictions or conditions on the investment of Employer securities which the Plan does not impose on the investment of other Plan assets.

ARTICLE VIII
AMENDMENT, TERMINATION AND MERGERS

8.1
AMENDMENT

(a)
General   rule   on   Employer   amendment.   The Employer shall have the right at any time to amend this Plan subject to the limitations of this Section. However, any amendment that affects the rights, duties or responsibilities of the Trustee (or Insurer) or Administrator may only be made with the Trustee's (or Insurer's) or Administrator's written consent. Any such amendment shall become effective as provided therein upon its execution. The Trustee (or Insurer) shall not be required to execute any such amendment unless the amendment affects the duties of the Trustee (or Insurer) hereunder.

(b)
Permissible   amendments.   The Employer may amend the Plan to accomplish any of the following items without affecting reliance on the opinion or advisory letter: (1) change the choice of options in the Adoption Agreement, (2) add any appendix to the Adoption Agreement that is specifically permitted pursuant to the terms of the Plan (e.g., Appendix A to the Adoption Agreeme nt (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections)); (3) amend administrative trust or custodial provisions in the case of a volume submitter or non-standardized Plan and make more limited amendments in the case of a standardized Plan such as the name of the Plan, Employer, Trustee or Custodian, (4) add certain sample or model amendments published by the Internal Revenue Service or other required good-faith amendments which specifically provide that their adoption will not cause the Plan to be treated as an individually designed plan, (5) add or change provisions permitted under the Plan and/or specify or change the effective date of a provision as permitted under the Plan, (6) add a list of any "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" which must be preserved, (7) conform to the requirements of Act Section 402(a) (relating to named fiduciaries), Act Section 503 (relating to claims procedures), or DOL Field Assistance Bulletin 2008-01 (relating to the duty to collect delinquent contributions), (8) adjust the limitations under Code
§§415, 402(g), 401(a)(17) and 414(q)(1)(B) to reflect annual cost-of-living increases, and (9) change the prototype sponsor's or volume submitter practitioner's name. An Employer that amends the Plan for any other reason, including a waiver of the minimu m


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
62


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

funding requirement under Code §412(c) (or for Plan Years beginning on or before December 31, 2007, Code §412(d)), will no longer participate in this prototype or volume submitter Plan and this Plan will be considered to be an individually designed plan for purposes of reliance.

(c)
Sponsoring   organization/volume   submitter   practitioner   amendments.   The Employer (and every Participating Employer) expressly delegates authority to the sponsoring organization of this prototype Plan or volume submitter practitioner, the right to amend the Plan by submitting a copy of the amendment to each Employer (and Participating Employer) who has adopted this prototype or volume submitter plan, after first having received a ruling or favorable determination from the Internal Revenue Service that the prototype or volume submitter Plan as amended qualifies under Code §401(a) (unless a ruling or determination is not required by the IRS). For purposes of this Section, the mass submitter shall be recognized as the agent of the sponsor. If the sponsor does not adopt any amendment made by the mass submitter, it will no longer be identical to, or a minor modifier of, the mass submitter plan.

(d)
Impermissible   amendments.   No amendment to the Plan shall be effective if it authorizes or permits any part of the Trust Fund (other than such part as is required to pay taxes and administration expenses) to be used for or diverted to any purpose other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries or estates; or causes any reduction in the amount credited to the account of any Participant; or causes or permits any portion of the Trust Fund to revert to or become property of the Employer.

(e)
Anti-cutback   restrictions.   No Plan amendment or transaction having the effect of a Plan amendment (such as a merger, plan transfer or similar transaction) shall be effective if it eliminates or reduces any "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefit" or adds or modifies conditions relating to "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" which results in a further restriction on such benefits (even if the amendment merely adds a restriction or condition that is permitted under the vesting rules in Code §§411(a)(3) – (11)) unless such "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" are preserved in operation with respect to benefits accrued as of the later of the adoption date or effective date of the amendment. Notwithstanding the preceding, "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" may be eliminated or reduced to the extent permitted by Code §412(d)(2) or Regulations (including Regulation §§1.411(d)-3 and 1.411(d)-4 ) or other IRS guidance. For purposes of this Subsection, a plan amendment which has the effect of decreasing a Participant's "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment shall be treated as reducing a "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefit." "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" are benefits described in Code §411(d)(6)(A), early retirement benefits and retirement-type subsidies, and optional forms of benefit. The preceding shall not apply to a Plan amendment that eliminates or restricts the ability of a Participant to receive payment of his or her Account under a particular optional form of benefit if the amendment provides a single-sum distribution form that is otherwise identical to the optional form of benefit being eliminated or restricted. For this purpose, a single-sum distribution form is otherwise identical only if the single-sum distribution form is identical in all respects to the eliminated or restricted optional form of benefit (or would be identical except that it provides greater rights to the Participant) except with respect to the timing of payments after commencement.

8.2
TERMINATION

(a)
Termination   of   Plan.   The Employer shall have the right at any time to terminate the Plan by delivering to the Trustee (or Insurer) and Administrator written notice of such termination. Upon any full or partial termination or upon the complete discontinuance of the Employer's Contributions to the Plan (in the case of a Profit Sharing Plan), all amounts credited to the affected Participants' Combined Accounts shall become 100% Vested and shall not thereafter be subject to Forfeiture.

(b)
Distribution   of   assets.   Upon the full termination of the Plan, the Employer shall direct the distribution of the assets to Participants in a manner that is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, except that no Participant or spousal consent is required. Distributions to a Participant shall be made in cash (or in property if permitted in the Adoption Agreement) or through the purchase of irrevocable nontransferable deferred commitments from the Insurer. Except as permitted by Regulations, the termination of the Plan shall not result in the reduction of "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" as described in Section 8.1(e). In addition, to the extent Section 6.13 (Special Rule for Certain Profit Sharing Plans) could apply to all or a portion of the assets, then, subject to Section 12.2, the Administrator will direct the distribution of assets to Participants in a lump-sum distribution. Such distribution will be made as soon as reasonable after the Plan termination, regardless of: (1) the amount of the Participant's Vested Account balance; (2) the Participant's age; and (3) whether the Participant consents to the distribution. Furthermore, to the extent a distribution is required to be made pursuant to this Section and the Participant does not consent to such distribution, then the Administrator may make a direct distribution to an individual retirement account described in Code §408(a) or an individual retirement annuity described in Code
§408(b).

(c)
Abandoned   plan.   If the Employer, in accordance with DOL guidance, abandons the Plan, then the Trustee (or Insurer) or other party permitted to take action as a qualified terminal administrator (QTA), may terminate the Plan in accordance with applica ble DOL and IRS regulations and other guidance.

8.3
MERGER, CONSOLIDATION OR TRANSFER OF ASSETS

This Plan may be merged or consolidated with, or its assets and/or liabilities may be transferred to any other plan only if the benefits which would be received by a Participant of this Plan, in the event of a termination of the plan immediately after such trans fer, merger or consolidation, are at least equal to the benefits the Participant would have received if the Plan had terminated immediately before the transfer, merger or consolidation and such transfer, merger or consolidation does not otherwise result in the elimination or reduction of any "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" as described in Section 8.1(e).


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
63


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

ARTICLE IX
TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

9.1
TOP-HEAVY PLAN REQUIREMENTS

Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, for any Top-Heavy Plan Year, the Plan shall provide the special vesting requirements of Code §416(b) pursuant to Section 6.4 of the Plan and the special minimum allocation requirements of Code §416(c) pursuant to Section 4.3(f) of the Plan. Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, the minimum allocation shall be an Employer Nonelective Contribution and, if no vesting schedule has been selected in the Adoption Agreement or the selection is invalid, shall be subject to the 6 Year Graded vesting schedule described in the Adoption Agreement.

Notwithstanding the above, the Top-Heavy Plan Year requirements of this Article and Code §416 shall not apply in any Plan Year in which the Plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code §401(k)(12) or §401(k)(13) and matching contributions meet the requirements of Code §401(m)(11) or §401(m)(12).

9.2
DETERMINATION OF TOP-HEAVY STATUS

(a)
Definition   of   Top-Heavy   Plan.   This Plan shall be a Top-Heavy Plan if any of the following conditions exists:

(1)
if the "top-heavy ratio" for this Plan exceeds sixty percent (60%) and this Plan is not part of any "required aggregation group" or "permissive aggregation group";

(2)
if this Plan is a part of a "required aggregation group" but not part of a "permissive aggregation group" and the "top-heavy ratio" for the group of plans exceeds sixty percent (60%); or

(3)
if this Plan is a part of a "required aggregation group" and part of a "permissive aggregation group" and the "top-heavy ratio" for the "permissive aggregation group" exceeds sixty percent (60%).

(b)
Top-heavy   ratio.   "Top-heavy ratio" means, with respect to a "determination date":

(1)
If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code §408(k))) and the Employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan which during the 5-year period ending on the "determination date" has or has had accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for this Plan alone or for the "required aggregation group" or "permissive aggregation group" as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of the account balances of all Key Employees as of the "determination date" (including any part of any Account balance distributed in the 1-year period ending on the "determination date") (5-year period ending on the "determination date" in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or Total and Permanent Disability), and the denominator of which is the sum of all Account balances (including any part of any Account balance distributed in the 1-year period ending on the "determination date") (5-year period ending on the "determination date" in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or Total and Permanent Disability), both computed in accordance with Code §416 and the Regulations thereunder.

Both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased to reflect any contribution not actually made as of the "determination date," but which is required to be taken into account on that date under Code §416 and the Regulations thereunder.

(2)
If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution plans (including any simplified employee pension plan) and the Employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined benefit plans which during the 5-year period ending on the "determination date" has or has had any accrued benefits, the top-heavy ratio for any "required aggregation group" or "permissive aggregation group" as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all Key Employees, determined in accordance with (1) above, and the "present value" of accrued benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for all Key Employees as of the "determination date," and the denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all participants, determined in accordance with (1) above, and the "present value" of accrued benefits under the defined benefit plan or plans for all participants as of the "determination date," all determined in accordance with Code §416 and the Regulations thereunder. The accrued benefits under a defined benefit plan in both the numerator and denominator of the top-heavy ratio are increased for any distribution of an accrued benefit made in the 1-year period ending on the "determination date" (5-year period ending on the "determination date" in the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death or Total and Permanent Disability).

(3)
For purposes of (1) and (2) above, the value of Account balances and the "present value" of accrued benefits will be determined as of the most recent Valuation Date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the "determination date," except as provided in Code §416 and the Regulations thereunder for the first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan. The Account balances and accrued benefits of a Participant (i) who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
64


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

a prior year, or (ii) who has not been credited with at least one Hour of Service with any Employer maintaining the Plan at a ny time during the 1-year period ending on the "determination date" will be disregarded. The calculation of the top-heavy ratio, and the extent to which distributions, rollovers, and transfers are taken into account will be made in accordance with Code §416 and the Regulations thereunder. Deductible Employee contributions will not be taken into account for purposes of computing the top-heavy ratio. When aggregating plans the value of Account balances and accrued benefits will be calculated with reference to the "determination dates" that fall within the same calendar year.

The accrued benefit of a participant other than a Key Employee shall be determined under (i) the method, if any, that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained by the Employer, or (ii) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of Code
§411(b)(1)(C).

(c)
Determination   date.   "Determination date" means, for any Plan Year subsequent to the first Plan Year, the last day of the preceding Plan Year. For the first Plan Year of the Plan, "determination date" means the last day of that Plan Year.

(d)
Permissive   aggregation   group.   "Permissive aggregation group" means the "required aggregation group" of plans plus any other plan or plans of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer which, when considered as a group with the "required aggregation group," would continue to satisfy the requirements of Code §§401(a)(4) and 410.

(e)
Present   value.   "Present value" means the present value based only on the interest and mortality rates specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections).

(f)
Required   aggregation   group.   "Required aggregation group" means: (1) each qualified plan of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer in which at least one Key Employee participates or participated at any time during the Plan Year containing the "determination date" or any of the four preceding Plan Years (regardless of whether the plan has terminated), and (2) any other qualified plan of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer which enables a plan described in (l) to meet the requirements of Code
§401(a)(4) or 410.

(g)
Valuation   Date.   Valuation Date means the date elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement as of which Account balances or accrued benefits are valued for purposes of calculating the "top-heavy ratio."

ARTICLE X MISCELLANEOUS

10.1
EMPLOYER ADOPTIONS

(a)
Method   of   adoption.   Any organization may become the Employer hereunder by executing the Adoption Agreement in a form satisfactory to the Trustee (or Insurer), and it shall provide such additional information as the Trustee (or Insurer) may require. The consent of the Trustee (or Insurer) to act as such shall be signified by its execution of the Adoption Agreement or a separate agreement (including, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, a separate trust agreement).

(b)
Separate   affiliation.   Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, the affiliation of the Employer and the participation of its Participants shall be separate and apart from that of any other employer and its participants hereunder.

10.2
PARTICIPANT'S RIGHTS

This Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract between the Employer and any Participant or to be a consideration or an inducement for the employment of any Participant or Employee. Nothing contained in this Plan shall be deemed to give any Participant or Employee the right to be retained in the service of the Employer or to interfere with the right of the Employer to discharge any Participant or Employee at any time regardless of the effect which such discharge shall have upon the Employee as a Participant of this Plan.

10.3
ALIENATION

(a)
General   rule.   Subject to the exceptions provided below and as otherwise permitted by the Code and the Act, no benefit which shall be payable to any person (including a Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary) shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, or charge, and any attempt to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber, or charge the same shall be void; and no such benefit shall in any manner be liable for, or subject to, the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements, or torts of any such person, nor shall it be subject to attachment or legal process for or against such person, and the same shall not be recognized except to such extent as may be required by law.

(b)
Exception   for   loans.   Subsection (a) shall not apply to the extent a Participant or Beneficiary is indebted to the Plan by reason of a loan made pursuant to Section 7.6. At the time a distribution is to be made to or for a Participant's or Beneficiary's benefit, such portion of the amount to be distributed as shall equal such indebtedness shall be paid to the Plan, to apply against or discharge such indebtedness. Prior to making a payment, however, the Participant or Beneficiary must be given notice by the Administrator that such indebtedness is to be so paid in whole or part from the Participant's interest in the Plan. If the Participant or Beneficiary does not agree


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
65


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

that the indebtedness is a valid claim against the Participant's interest in the Plan, the Participant or Beneficiary shall be entitled to a review of the validity of the claim in accordance with procedures provided in Section 2.10.

(c)
Exception   for   QDRO.   Subsection (a) shall not apply to a "qualified domestic relations order" defined in Code §414(p), and   those other domestic relations orders permitted to be so treated by the Administrator under the provisions of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984. The Administrator shall establish a written procedure to determine the qualified status of domestic relations orders and to administer distributions under such qualified orders. Further, to the extent provided under a "qualified domestic relations order," a former Spouse of a Participant shall be treated as the Spouse or surviving Spouse for all purposes under the Plan.

(d)
Exception   for   certain   debts   to   Plan.   Notwithstanding any provision of this Section to the contrary, an offset to a Participant's accrued benefit against an amount that the Participant is ordered or required to pay the Plan with respect to a judgment, order, or decree issued, or a settlement entered into, on or after August 5, 1997, shall be permitted in accordance with Code §§401(a)(13)(C) and (D).

10.4
PLAN COMMUNICATIONS, INTERPRETATION AND CONSTRUCTION

(a)
Applicable   law.   This Plan and Trust shall be construed and enforced according to the Code, the Act and the laws of the state or commonwealth in which the Employer's (or if there is a corporate Trustee, the Trustee's, or if the Plan is fully insured, the Insurer's) principal office is located (unless otherwise designated in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections)), other than its laws respecting choice of law, to the extent not pre-empted by federal law.

(b)
Administrator's   discretion/nondiscriminatory   administration.   The Administrator has total and complete discretion to interpret and construe the Plan and to determine all questions arising in the administration, interpretation and application of the Plan. Any determination the Administrator makes under the Plan is final and binding upon any affected person. The Administrator must exercise all of its Plan powers and discretion, and perform all of its duties in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner.

(c)
Communications.   All Participant or Beneficiary notices, designations, elections, consents or waivers must be made in a form the Administrator (or, as applicable, the Trustee or Insurer) specifies or otherwise approves. Any person entitled to notice under the Plan may waive the notice or shorten the notice period unless such actions are contrary to applicable law.

(d)
Evidence.   Anyone, including the Employer, required to give data, statements or other information relevant under the terms of the Plan ("evidence") may do so by certificate, affidavit, document or other form which the person to act in reliance may conside r pertinent, reliable and genuine, and to have been signed, made or presented by the proper party or parties. The Administrator, Trustee and Insurer are protected fully in acting and relying upon any evidence described under the immediately preceding sentence.

(e)
Plan   terms   binding.   The Plan is binding upon all parties, including but not limited to, the Employer, Trustee, Insurer, Administrator, Participants and Beneficiaries.

(f)
Parties   to   litigation.   Except as otherwise provided by applicable law, a Participant or a Beneficiary is not a necessary party or required to receive notice of process in any court proceeding involving the Plan, the Trust or any Fiduciary. Any final judgment (not subject to further appeal) entered in any such proceeding will be binding upon all parties, including the Employer, the Administrator, Trustee, Insurer, Participants and Beneficiaries.

(g)
Fiduciaries   not   insurers.   The Trustee, Administrator and the Employer in no way guarantee the Plan assets from loss or depreciation. The Employer does not guarantee the payment of any money which may be or becomes due to any person from the Plan. The liability of the Employer, the Administrator and the Trustee to make any distribution from the Trust at any time and all times is limited to the then available assets of the Trust.

(h)
Construction/severability.   The Plan, the Adoption Agreement, the Trust and all other documents to which they refer, will be interpreted consistent with and to preserve tax qualification of the Plan under Code §401(a) and tax exemption of the Trust under Code §501(a) and also consistent with the Act and other applicable law. To the extent permissible under applicable law, any provision which a court (or other entity with binding authority to interpret the Plan) determines to be inconsistent with such construction and interpretation, is deemed severed and is of no force or effect, and the remaining Plan terms will remain in full force and effect.

(i)
Uniformity.   All provisions of this Plan shall be interpreted and applied in a uniform, nondiscriminatory manner.

(j)
Headings.   The headings and subheadings of this Plan have been inserted for convenience of reference and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions hereof.

10.5
GENDER, NUMBER AND TENSE

Wherever any words are used herein in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, they shall be construed as though they were also used in another gender in all cases where they would so apply; whenever any words are used herein in the singular or plural form, they shall be construed as though they were also used in the other form in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
66


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

used herein in the past or present tense, they shall be construed as though they were also used in the other form in all cases where they would so apply.

10.6
LEGAL ACTION

In the event any claim, suit, or proceeding is brought regarding the Trust and/or Plan established hereunder to which the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer or the Administrator may be a party, and such claim, suit, or proceeding is resolved in favor of the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer or the Administrator, they shall be entitled to be reimbursed from the Trust Fund for any and all costs, attorney's fees, and other expenses pertaining thereto incurred by them for which they shall have become liable.

10.7
PROHIBITION AGAINST DIVERSION OF FUNDS

(a)
General   rule.   Except as provided below and otherwise specifically permitted by law, it shall be impossible by operation of the Plan or of the Trust, by termination of either, by power of revocation or amendment, by the happening of any contingency, by collateral arrangement or by any other means, for any part of the corpus or income of any Trust Fund maintained pursuant to the Plan or any funds contributed thereto to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than the exclusive benefit of Participants or their Beneficiaries.

(b)
Mistake   of   fact.   In the event the Employer shall make a contribution under a mistake of fact pursuant to Act §403(c)(2)(A), the Employer may demand repayment of such contribution at any time within one (1) year following the time of payment and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall return such amount to the Employer within the one (1) year period. Earnings of the Plan attributable to the contributions may not be returned to the Employer but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount so returned.

(c)
Contribution   conditioned   on   deductibility.   Except as specifically stated in the Plan, any contribution made by the Employer to the Plan (if the Employer is not tax-exempt) is conditioned upon the deductibility of the contribution by the Employer under the Code and, to the extent any such deduction is disallowed, the Employer may, within one (1) year following a final determination of the disallowance, whether by agreement with the Internal Revenue Service or by final decision of a court of competent jurisdiction, demand repayment of such disallowed contribution and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall return such contribution within one (1) year following the disallowance. Earnings of the Plan attributable to the contribution may not be returned to the Employer, but any losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount so returned.

10.8
EMPLOYER'S AND TRUSTEE'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE

The Employer, Administrator and Trustee, and their successors, shall not be responsible for the validity of any Contract issued hereunder or for the failure on the part of the Insurer to make payments provided by any such Contract, or for the action of any person which may delay payment or render a Contract null and void or unenforceable in whole or in part.

10.9
INSURER'S PROTECTIVE CLAUSE

Except as otherwise agreed upon in writing between the Employer and the Insurer, an Insurer which issues any Contracts hereunder shall not have any responsibility for the validity of this Plan or for the tax or legal aspects of this Plan. The Insurer shall be protected and held harmless in acting in accordance with any written direction of the Administrator or Trustee, and shall have no duty to see to the application of any funds paid to the Trustee, nor be required to question any actions directed by the Administrator or Trustee. Regardless of any provision of this Plan, the Insurer shall not be required to take or permit any action or allow any benefit or privilege contrary to the terms of any Contract which it issues hereunder, or the rules of the Insurer.

10.10
RECEIPT AND RELEASE FOR PAYMENTS

Any payment to any Participant, the Participant's legal representative, Beneficiary, or to any guardian or committee appointed for such Participant or Beneficiary in accordance with the provisions of this Plan, shall, to the extent thereof, be in full satisfaction of all claims hereunder against the Trustee (or Insurer) and the Employer.

10.11
ACTION BY THE EMPLOYER

Whenever the Employer under the terms of the Plan is permitted or required to do or perform any act or matter or thing, it shall be done and performed by a person duly authorized by its legally constituted authority.

10.12
NAMED FIDUCIARIES AND ALLOCATION OF RESPONSIBILITY

The "named Fiduciaries" of this Plan are (a) the Employer, (b) the Administrator, (c) the Trustee (if the Trustee has discretionary authority as elected in the Adoption Agreement or as otherwise agreed upon by the Employer and the Trustee), and (d) any Investment Manager appointed hereunder. The Employer may, however, modify the preceding sentence to add or remove named Fiduciaries. The named Fiduciaries shall have only those specific powers, duties, responsibilities, and obligations as are specifically given them under the Plan including, but not limited to, any agreement allocating or delegating their responsibilities, the terms of which are incorporated herein by reference. In general, the Employer shall have the sole responsibility for making the contributions provided for under the Plan; and shall


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
67


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

have the sole authority to appoint and remove the Trustee and the Administrator; to formulate the Plan's "funding policy and method"; and to amend the elective provisions of the Adoption Agreement or terminate, in whole or in part, the Plan. The Administrator shall have the sole responsibility for the administration of the Plan, which responsibility is specifically described in the Plan. If the Trustee has discretionary authority, it shall have the sole responsibility of management of the assets held under the Trust, except those assets, the management of which has been assigned to an Investment Manager or Administrator, who shall be solely responsible for the management of the assets assigned to it, all as specifically provided in the Plan. Each named Fiduciary warrants that any directions given, information furnished, or action taken by it shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Plan, authorizing or providing for such direction, information or action. Furthermore, each named Fiduciary may rely upon any such direction, information or action of another named Fiduciary as being proper under the Plan, and is not required under the Plan to inquire into the propriety of any such direction, information or action. It is intended under the Plan that each named Fiduciary shall be responsible for the proper exercise of its own powers, duties, responsibilities and obligations under the Plan. No named Fiduciary shall guarantee the Trust Fund in any manner against investment loss or depreciation in asset value. Any person or group may serve in more than one Fiduciary capacity.

10.13
APPROVAL BY INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if, pursuant to an application for qualification is made by the time prescribed by law for filing the Employer's return for the taxable year in which the Plan or an amendment to the Plan is adopted, or such later date as the Secretary of Treasury may prescribe, the Commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service or the Commissioner's delegate should determine that the Plan does not initially qualify as a tax-exempt plan under Code §§401 and 501, and such determination is not contested, or if contested, is finally upheld, then if the Plan is a new plan, it shall be void ab initio and all amounts contributed to the Plan, by the Employer, less expenses paid, shall be returned within one (1) year and the Plan shall terminate, and the Trustee (or Insurer) shall be discharged from all further obligations. If the disqualification relates to a Plan amendment, then the Plan shall operate as if it had not been amended. If the Employer's Plan fails to attain or retain qualification, such Plan will no longer participate in this prototype or volume submitter plan and will be considered an individually designed plan.

10.14
PAYMENT OF BENEFITS

Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, benefits under this Plan shall be paid, subject to Sections 6.11, 6.12 and 12.10, only upon death, Total and Permanent Disability, normal or early retirement, severance of employment, or termination of the Plan.

10.15
ELECTRONIC MEDIA

The Administrator may use any electronic medium to give or receive any Plan notice, communicate any Plan policy, conduct any written Plan communication, satisfy any Plan filing or other compliance requirement and conduct any other Plan transaction to the extent permissible under applicable law. A Participant or a Participant's Spouse, to the extent authorized by the Administrator, may use any electronic medium to make or provide any Beneficiary designation, election, notice, consent or waiver under the Plan, to the extent permissible under applicable law. Any reference in this Plan to a "form," a "notice," an "election," a "consent," a "waiver," a "designation," a "policy" or to any other Plan-related communication includes an electronic version thereof as permitted under applicable law.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Participant or Beneficiary notices and consent that are required pursuant to the Code must satisfy Regulation §1.401(a)-21.

10.16
PLAN CORRECTION

The Administrator in conjunction with the Employer may undertake such correction of Plan errors as the Administrator deems necessary, including correction to preserve tax qualification of the Plan under Code §401(a) or to correct a fiduciary breach under the Act. Without limiting the Administrator's authority under the prior sentence, the Administrator, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, may undertake correction of Plan document, operational, demographic and Employer eligibility failures under a method described                in the Plan or under the IRS Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System ("EPCRS") or any successor program to EPCRS.                 The Administrator, as it determines to be reasonable and appropriate, also may undertake or assist the appropriate Fiduciary or Plan official in undertaking correction of a fiduciary breach, including correction under the DOL Voluntary Fiduciary Correction Program ("VFC") or any successor program to VFC. If the Plan is a 401(k) Plan, to correct an operational error, the Administrator may require the Trustee (or Insurer) to distribute from the Plan Elective Deferrals or Vested matching contributions, including earnings, where such amounts result from an operational error other than a failure of Code §415, Code §402(g), or a failure of the ADP or ACP tests. Furthermore, the Employer may make corrective contributions pursuant to this Section regardless of whether the Plan otherwise permits such contribution source. In addition, the Plan is authorized to recover benefits from Participants or Beneficiaries that have been improperly distributed.

10.17
NONTRUSTEED PLANS

If the Plan is funded solely with Contracts, then notwithstanding Sections 10.7 and 10.13, no Contract will be purchased under the Plan unless such Contract or a separate definite written agreement between the Employer and the Insurer provides that no value under Contracts providing benefits under the Plan or credits determined by the Insurer (on account of dividends, earnings, or other experience rating credits, or surrender or cancellation credits) with respect to such Contracts may be paid or returned to the Employer or diverted to or used for other than the exclusive benefit of the Participants or their Beneficiaries. However, any contribution made by the Employer because of a mistake of fact must be returned to the Employer within one year of the contribution.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
68


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

If this Plan is funded by individual Contracts that provide a Participant's benefit under the Plan, such individual Contracts shall constitute the Participant's Account balance. If this Plan is funded by group Contracts, under the group annuity or group insurance Contract, premiums or other consideration received by the Insurer must be allocated to Participants' Accounts under the Plan.

ARTICLE XI PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS

11.1
ELECTION TO BECOME A PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, with the consent of the Employer and Trustee (or Insurer), any Employer may adopt the Employer's Plan and all of the provisions hereof, and participate herein and be known as a Participating Employer, by a properly executed document evidencing said intent and will of such Participating Employer (a participation agreement). In the event a Participating Employer is not an Affiliated Employer, then the provisions of Article XIV shall apply rather than the provision of this Article XI.

11.2
REQUIREMENTS OF PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS

(a)
Permissible   variations   of   participation   agreement.   The participation agreement must identify the Participating Employer and the covered Employees and provide for the Participating Employer's signature. In addition, in the participation agreement, the Employer shall specify which elections, if any, the Participating Employer can modify, and any restrictions on the modifications. Any such modification shall apply only to the Employees of that Participating Employer. The Participating Employer shall make any such modification by selecting the appropriate option on its participation agreement to the Employer's Adoption Agreement. To the extent that the participation agreement does not permit modification of an election, any attempt by a Participating Employer to modi fy the election shall have no effect on the Plan and the Participating Employer is bound by the Plan terms as selected by the Employer. If a Participating Employer does not make any permissible participation agreement election modifications, then with regard to any election, the Participating Employer is bound by the Adoption Agreement terms as completed by the "lead Employer." Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, if a standardized Plan is being used, then the elections available to Participating Employers must be limited to the elections available to the Employer in order to ensure the Plan, by design, satisfies the minimum coverage requirements of Code §410(b) and the nondiscrimination requirements of Code §401(a)(4).

(b)
Holding   and   investing   assets.   The Trustee (or Insurer) may, but shall not be required to, commingle, hold and invest as one Trust Fund all contributions made by Participating Employers, as well as all increments thereof. However, the assets of the Plan shall, on an ongoing basis, be available to pay benefits to all Participants and Beneficiaries under the Plan without regard to the Employer or Participating Employer who contributed such assets.

(c)
Payment   of   expenses.   Unless the Employer otherwise directs, any expenses of the Plan which are to be paid by the Employer or borne by the Trust Fund shall be paid by each Participating Employer in the same proportion that the total amount standing to the credit of all Participants employed by such Employer bears to the total standing to the credit of all Participants.

11.3
DESIGNATION OF AGENT

Each Participating Employer shall be deemed to be a part of this Plan; provided, however, that with respect to all of its relations with the Trustee (or Insurer) and Administrator for purposes of this Plan, each Participating Employer shall be deemed to have des ignated irrevocably the Employer as its agent. Unless the context of the Plan clearly indicates otherwise, the word "Employer" shall be deemed to include each Participating Employer as related to its adoption of the Plan.

11.4
EMPLOYEE TRANSFERS

In the event an Employee is transferred between Participating Employers, accumulated service and eligibility shall be carried with the Employee involved. No such transfer shall effect a severance of employment hereunder, and the Participating Employer to which the Employee is transferred shall thereupon become obligated hereunder with respect to such Employee in the same manner as was the Participating Employer from whom the Employee was transferred.

11.5
PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION AND FORFEITURES

For volume submitter or non-standardized Adoption Agreements, if elected by a Participating Employer in its participation agreement, then to the extent permitted under Code §411(d)(6), effective with respect to Plan Years beginning in and after the Plan Year in which the provisions of this Plan are adopted, any contribution and/or Forfeiture subject to allocation during each Plan Year shall be determined and allocated separately by each Participating Employer, and shall be allocated only among the Participants eligible to share in the contribution and Forfeiture allocation of the Employer or Participating Employer making the contribution or by which the forfeiting Participant was employed. Alternatively (if so elected), and with respect to standardized Adoption Agreements, any contribution or Forfeiture subject to allocation during each Plan Year shall be allocated among all Participants of all Participating Employers in accordance with the provisions of this Plan. However, if a Participating Employer is not an Affiliated Employer then any contributions made by such Participating Employer will only be allocated among the Participants eligible to share in the contribution and Forfeiture allocation of the Participating Employer.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
69


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

On the basis of the information furnished by the Administrator, the Trustee (or Insurer) shall keep separate books and records concerning the affairs of each Participating Employer hereunder and as to the accounts and credits of the Employees of each Participating Employer. The Trustee (or Insurer) may, but need not, register Contracts so as to evidence that a particular Participating Employer is the interested Employer hereunder, but in the event of an Employee transfer from one Participating Employer to another, the empl oying Employer shall immediately notify the Trustee (or Insurer) thereof.

11.6
AMENDMENT

Any Participating Employer hereby authorizes the Employer to make amendments on its behalf, unless otherwise agreed among all affected parties. If a Participating Employer is not an Affiliated Employer (due to the transition period under Code §410(b)( 6)(C)), then amendment of this Plan by the Employer at any time when there shall be a Participating Employer shall, unless otherwise agreed to by the affected parties, only be by the written action of each and every Participating Employer and with the consent of the Trustee (or Insurer) where such consent is necessary in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

11.7
DISCONTINUANCE OF PARTICIPATION

Except in the case of a standardized Plan, any Participating Employer that is an Affiliated Employer shall be permitted to discontinue or revoke its participation in the Plan at any time. At the time of any such discontinuance or revocation, satisfactory evide nce thereof and of any applicable conditions imposed shall be delivered to the Trustee (or Insurer). The Trustee (or Insurer) shall thereafter transfer, deliver and assign Contracts and other Trust Fund assets allocable to the Participants of such Participating Employer to such new trustee (or         insurer) or custodian as shall have been designated by such Participating Employer, in the event that it has established a separate qualified retirement plan for its employees provided, however, that no such transfer shall be made if the result is the elimination or reduction of any "Section 411(d)(6) protected benefits" as described in Section 8.1(e). If no successor is designated, the Trustee (or Insurer ) shall retain such assets for the Employees of said Participating Employer pursuant to the provisions of Article VII hereof. In no such event shall any part of the corpus or income of the Trust Fund as it relates to such Participating Employer be used for or diverted to purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Employees of such Participating Employer.

11.8
ADMINISTRATOR'S AUTHORITY

The Administrator shall have authority to make any and all necessary rules or regulations, binding upon all Participating Employers and all Participants, to effectuate the purpose of this Article.

11.9
PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTION FOR AFFILIATE

If any Participating Employer is prevented in whole or in part from making a contribution which it would otherwise have made under the Plan by reason of having no current or accumulated earnings or profits, or because such earnings or profits are less than the contribution which it would otherwise have made, then, pursuant to Code §404(a)(3)(B), so much of the contribution which such Participating Employer was so prevented from making may be made, for the benefit of the participating employees of such Participating Employer, by other Participating Employers who are members of the same affiliated group within the meaning of Code §1504 to the extent of their current or accumulated earnings or profits, except that such contribution by each such other Participating Employer shall be limited to the proportion of its total current and accumulated earnings or profits remaining after adjustment for its contribution to the Plan made without regard to this paragraph which the total prevented contribution bears to the total current and accumulated earnings or profits of all the Participating Employers remaining after adjustment for all contributions made to the Plan without regard to this paragraph.

A Participating Employer on behalf of whose employees a contribution is made under this paragraph shall not be required to reimburse the contributing Participating Employers.

ARTICLE XII
CASH OR DEFERRED PROVISIONS

Except as specifically provided elsewhere in this Plan, the provisions of this Article shall apply with respect to any 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan regardless of any provisions in the Plan to the contrary.

12.1
FORMULA FOR DETERMINING EMPLOYER'S CONTRIBUTION

(a)
Permitted   contributions.   For each Plan Year, the Employer will (or may with respect to any discretionary contributions) contribute to the Plan:

(1)
The amount of the total salary deferral elections of all Participants made pursuant to Section 12.2(a), which amount shall be deemed Elective Deferrals, plus

(2)
If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a matching contribution equal to the percentage, if any, specified in the Adoption Agreement of the Elective Deferrals of each Participant eligible to share in the allocations of the matching contribution, which amount shall be deemed an Employer matching contribution or Qualified Matching Contribution as elected in the Adoption Agreement, plus


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
70


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(3)
If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a discretionary amount determined each year by the Employer, which amount if any, shall be deemed an Employer Nonelective Contribution, or a "prevailing wage contribution" as set forth in the Adoption Agreement, which amount shall be an Employer Nonelective Contribution or an Elective Contribution as elected in the Adoption Agreement, plus

(4)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution in a discretionary amount determined by the Employer.

(5)
Regardless of any provision in the Plan to the contrary, Employees whose employment is governed by a collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and "employee representatives" under which retirement benefits were the subject of              good faith bargaining shall be eligible to participate in this Plan to the extent of employment covered by such agreement provided the agreement provides for coverage in the Plan. The contributions and allocations under this Plan shall be those set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, which is hereby incorporated by reference. For this purpose, the term "employee representatives" does not include any organization more than half of whose members are employees who are owners, officers, or executives of the Employer. The provisions of this Subsection only apply if no more than two percent (2%) of the Employees covered pursuant to the agreement are professionals as defined in Regulation §1.410(b)-9.

(b)  Timing   and   form   of   contributions.   Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Employer is not a tax-exempt entity, then the Employer's contributions for any Fiscal Year may generally not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a deduction to the Employer under the provisions of Code §404. However, to the extent necessary to provide the top-heavy minimum allocations, the Employer shall make a contribution even if it exceeds current or accumulated net profit or the amount that is deductible under Code
§404. Subject to the consent of the Trustee (or Insurer), the Employer may make its contribution to the Plan in the form of property, provided such contribution does not constitute a prohibited transaction under the Code or the Act. The decision to make a contribution of property is subject to the general fiduciary rules under the Act.

12.2
PARTICIPANT'S SALARY DEFERRAL ELECTION

(a)
Salary   deferral   elections.   Each Participant may elect to defer a portion of Compensation which would have been received in the Plan Year, but for the salary deferral election, subject to the limitations of this Section and the Adoption Agreement. A salary deferral election (or modification of an earlier election) may not be made with respect to Compensation which is currently available on or before the date the Participant executed such election, or if later, the later of the date the Employer adopts this cash or deferred arrangement or the date such arrangement first became effective. Any elections made pursuant to this Section, including a modification or termination of an election, shall become effective as soon as is administratively feasible following the receipt of such election by the Administrator. Furthermore, if the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement to apply the Automatic Contribution Arrangement provisions, then in the event a Participant fails to make an Affirmative Election, such Participant shall be deemed to have made a salary deferral election in accordance with the provisions selected in the Adoption Agreement and such other procedu res     that the Administrator may establish and apply in a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis.

Regardless of the definition of Compensation selected in the Adoption Agreement, the Administrator may adopt a uniform policy for purposes of determining the amount of a Participant's Elective Deferrals of excluding "non-cash Compensation." For purposes of this Section, "non-cash Compensation" means tips, fringe benefits, and other items of Compensation not regularly paid in cash or cash equivalents, or for which the Employer does not or may not have the ability to withhold Elective Deferrals in cash for the purpose of transmitting the Elective Deferrals to the Plan pursuant to the Participant's Salary Deferral Agreement. Additionally, the Employer may, on a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis, permit different salary deferral elections for different items of Compensation (e.g., a separate salary deferral election for bonuses), and may exclude for purposes of calculating Elective Deferrals one or more items of irregular pay (e.g., car allowance).

If elected in the Adoption Agreement, effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant may make a salary deferral election to have Roth Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan. Roth Elective Deferrals are includible in the Participant's gross income at the time deferred and must be irrevocably designated as Roth Elective Deferrals by the Participant in the Salary Deferral Agreement (or if applicable, in the Automatic Deferral provisions of the Plan).

The amount by which Compensation is reduced shall be that Participant's Elective Deferrals and shall be treated as an Employer contribution and allocated to that Participant's Elective Deferral Account. If the Plan permits Roth Elective Deferral contributions, then a Participant's Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals shall be allocated to the Participant's Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account and a Participant's Roth Elective Deferrals shall be allocated to the Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account. Except in the case of an "in-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution" made pursuant to Section 12.11, Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan as one type, either Roth Elective Deferrals or Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals, may not later be reclassified as the other type.

Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, Participants may not make Elective Deferrals with respect to amounts that are not 415 Compensation. However, for this purpose, 415 Compensation is not limited to the annual compensation limit of Code
§401(a)(17). Furthermore, for purposes of this Section, the annual dollar limitation of Code §401(a)(17) ($200,000 as adjusted) shall not apply except that the Administrator may elect to apply such limit as part of the salary deferral election procedures established hereunder.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
71


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Once made, a Participant's election to reduce Compensation shall remain in effect until modified or terminated. The Administrator shall establish procedures setting forth the conditions on modifications of an election. However, Participants must be permitted to modify elections at least once each Plan Year. Furthermore, terminations may be made at any time.

(b)
Eligible   Automatic   Contribution   Arrangement   (EACA).   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer maintains a Plan with Automatic Deferral provisions as an Eligible Automatic Contribution Arrangement (EACA) and the following provisions will apply:

(1)
Participants   subject   to   EACA.   The Employer in its Adoption Agreement will elect which Participants are subject to the EACA Automatic Deferral on the "EACA Effective Date" thereof which may include some or all current Participants or may be limited to those Employees who become Participants after the EACA Effective Date. The "EACA Effective Date" means the date on which the EACA goes into effect, either as to the overall Plan or as to an individual Participants as the context requires . An EACA becomes effective as to the Plan as of the date the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement. A Participant's "EACA Effective Date" is as soon as practicable after the Participant is subject to Automatic Deferrals under the EACA, consistent with:
(i) applicable law; and (ii) the objective of affording the Participant a reasonable period of time after receipt of the EACA notice to make an Affirmative Election (and, if applicable, an investment election).

(2)
Uniformity.   The Automatic Deferral percentage must be a uniform percentage of Compensation. However, the Plan does not violate the uniform Automatic Deferral percentage requirement merely because the Plan applies any of the following provisions:

(i)
Years   of   participation.   The Automatic Deferral percentage varies based on the number of Plan Years the Participant has participated in the Plan while the Plan has applied EACA provisions;

(ii)
No   reduction   from   prior   percentage.   The Plan does not reduce a deferral percentage that, immediately prior to the EACA's effective date was higher (for any Participant) than the Automatic Deferral percentage;

(iii)
Applying   statutory   limits.   The Plan limits the Automatic Deferral amount so as not to exceed the limits of Code
§401(a)(17), 402(g) (determined without regard to Age 50 Catch-Up Deferrals), or 415;

(iv)
No   Automatic   Deferrals   during   hardship   suspension.   The Plan does not apply the Automatic Deferral during a period of suspension, under the Plan's hardship distribution provisions, of Participant's right to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan following a hardship distribution; or

(v)
Disaggregated   groups.   The Plan applies different default percentages to different groups if the groups can be disaggregated under Regulation §1.401(k)-1(b)(4).

(3)
EACA   notice.   The Administrator annually will provide a notice to each Participant covered by the EACA provisions (including, if elected in the Adoption Agreement, Participants who made an Affirmative Election) within a reasonable period of time prior to each Plan Year the Employer maintains the Plan as an EACA ("EACA Plan Year").

(i)
Deemed   reasonable   notice/new   Participant.   The Administrator is deemed to provide timely notice if the Administrator provides the EACA notice at least thirty (30) days and not more than ninety (90) days prior to the beginning of the EACA Plan Year.

(ii)
Mid-year   notice/new   Participant   or   Plan.   If: (A) an Employee becomes eligible to make Elective Deferrals in the Plan during an EACA Plan Year but after the Administrator has provided the annual EACA notice for that Plan Year; or (B) the Employer adopts mid-year a new Plan as an EACA, the Administrator must provide the EACA notice no later than the date the Employee becomes eligible to make Elective Deferrals. However, if it is not practicable for the notice to be provided on or before the date an Employee becomes a Participant, then the notice will nonetheless be treated as provided           timely if it is provided as soon as practicable after that date and the Employee is permitted to elect to defer from all types of Compensation that may be deferred under the Plan earned beginning on that date.

(iii)
Content.   The EACA notice must provide comprehensive information regarding the Participants' rights and obligations under the Plan and must be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average Participant in accordance with applicable law.

(4)
EACA   permissible   withdrawal.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant who has Automatic Deferrals under the EACA may elect to withdraw all the Automatic Deferrals (and allocable earnings) under the provisions of this Subsection. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section will be processed in accordance with normal distribution provisions of the Plan.

(i)
Amount.   If a Participant elects a permissible withdrawal under this Subsection, then the Plan must make a distribution equal to the amount (and only the amount) of the Automatic Deferrals made under the EACA (adjusted for allocable gains and losses to the date of the distribution). The Plan may separately account for Automatic Deferrals, in which case the entire


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
72


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

account will be distributed. If the Plan does not separately account for the Automatic Deferrals, then the Plan must determine earnings or losses in a manner similar to the refund of Excess Contributions.

(ii)
Fees.   Notwithstanding the above, the Administrator may reduce the permissible distribution amount by any generally applicable fees. However, the Plan may not charge a greater fee for distribution under this Section than applies to other distributions. The Administrator may adopt a policy regarding charging such fees consistent with this paragraph.

(iii)
Timing.   The Participant may make an election to withdraw the Automatic Deferrals under the EACA no later than ninety (90) days, or such shorter period as specified in the Adoption Agreement, after the date of the first Automatic Deferral under the EACA. For this purpose, the date of the first Automatic Deferral is the date that the Compensation subject to the Automatic Deferral otherwise would have been includible in the Participant's gross income. For this purpose, EACAs under the Plan are aggregated, except that the mandatory disaggregation rules of Code §410(b) apply. In addition, a Participant's withdrawal right is not restricted due to the Participant making an Affirmative Election during the ninety (90) day period (or shorter period as specified in the Adoption Agreement).

(iv)
Rehired   Employees.   For purposes of paragraph (iii) above, an Employee who for an entire Plan Year did not have contributions made pursuant to a default election under the EACA will be treated as having not had such contributions for any prior Plan Year as well.

(v)
Effective   date   of   the   withdrawal   election.   The effective date of the permissible withdrawal will be as soon as practicable, but in no event later than the earlier of (A) the pay date of the second payroll period beginning after the election is made, or (B) the first pay date that occurs at least thirty (30) days after the election is made. The election will also be deemed to be an Affirmative Election to have no Elective Deferrals made to the Plan.

(vi)
Related   matching   contributions.   The Administrator will not take any Elective Deferrals withdrawn pursuant to this Section into account in computing and allocating matching contributions. If the Employer has already allocated matching contributions to the Participant's Account with respect to Elective Deferrals being withdrawn pursuant to this Subsection (4), then such matching contributions, as adjusted for gains and losses, must be forfeited.

(vii)
Treatment   of   withdrawals.   With regard to Elective Deferrals withdrawn pursuant to this Subsection, (A) the Administrator will disregard such Elective Deferrals in the Actual Deferral Percentage Test (if applicable); (B) the Administrator will disregard such Elective Deferrals for purposes of the limitation on Elective Deferrals under Code
§402(g); (C) such Elective Deferrals are not subject to the consent requirements of Code §401(a)(11) or 417. The Administrator will disregard any matching contributions forfeited under paragraph (vi) above in the ACP Test (if applicable).

(viii)
Effect   of   Affirmative   Election.   A Participant's Affirmative Election continues in effect until the Participant subsequently revokes or modifies his or her Salary Deferral Agreement, or the Affirmative Election expires. A Participant who makes an Affirmative Election is not thereafter subject to the Automatic Deferral or to any scheduled increases thereto, even if the Participant later revokes the Affirmative Election or the Affirmative Election, unless the Participant is subject to the EACA. In addition, a Participant who is subject to the EACA provisions who revokes his or her Affirmative Election or whose Affirmative Election expires, will be deemed to have made an Affirmative Election to have no Elective Deferrals made to the Plan.

(c)
Catch-Up   Contributions.   If selected in the Adoption Agreement, all Employees who are eligible to make Elective Deferrals under this Plan and who have attained age 50 before the close of the taxable year shall be eligible to make Catch-Up Contributions in accordance with, and subject to the dollar limitations of, Code §414(v)(2)(B)(i) for the taxable year. The limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code §414(v)(2)(C). Such Catch-Up Contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of the provisions of the Plan implementing the required limitations of Code §§402(g) and 415. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan implementing the requirements of Code §401(k)(3), 401(k)(11), 401(k)(12), 410(b), or 416, as applicable, by reason of the making of such Catch-Up Contributions (but Catch-Up Contributions made in prior years are counted in determining whether the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan). If selected in the Adoption Agreement, Catch-Up Contributions shall not be treated as Elective Deferrals for purposes of applying any Employer matching contributions. Such option cannot be selected if the Plan elects to follow the safe harbor provisions of Section 12.8.

(d)
Full   vesting.   The balance in each Participant's Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account shall be fully Vested at all times and, except as otherwise provided herein, shall not be subject to Forfeiture for any reason.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
73


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(e)
Distribution   restrictions.   Amounts held in a Participant's Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account may only be distributable as provided in (4) below or as provided under the ot her provisions of this Plan, but in no event prior to the earlier of the following events or any other events permitted by the Code or Regulations:

(1)
the Participant's severance of employment (regardless of when the severance of employment occurred), Total and Permanent Disability, or death;

(2)
the Participant's attainment of age 59 1/2;

(3)
the proven financial hardship of the Participant, subject to the limitations of Section 12.10(d) (or, for a volume submitter plan, Section 6.12);

(4)
the termination of the Plan without the existence at the time of Plan termination of another defined contribution plan or the establishment of a successor defined contribution plan by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer within the period ending twelve months after distribution of all assets from the Plan maintained by the Employer. For this purpose, a defined contribution plan does not include an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in Code §4975(e)(7) or 409(a)), a simplified employee pension plan (as defined in Code §408(k)), a SIMPLE individual retirement account plan (as defined in Code §408(p)), a plan or contract that satisfies the requirements of Code §403(b), or a plan that is described in Code §457(b) or (f). A distribution that is made because of this paragraph (4) must be made in a lump-sum;

(5)
the Participant's call to active duty after September 11, 2001, because of the Participant's status as a member of a reserve component, for a period of at least 180 days or for an indefinite period, i.e., a "qualified reservist distribution" within the meaning of Section 6.18; or

(6)
a Participant's service in the uniformed services while on active duty for a period of at least 30 days, i.e., a "deemed distribution" within the meaning of Section 6.18.

(f)
Code   §402(g)   dollar limit.   A Participant's Elective Deferrals made under this Plan and all other plans, contracts or arrangements of the Employer maintaining this Plan during any calendar year shall not exceed the dollar limitation imposed by Code §402(g) , as in effect at the beginning of such calendar year, except to the extent permitted under Section 12.2(c) and Code §414(v), if applicable.   The limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code §402(g)(4). For this purpose, "elective deferrals" means, with respect to a calendar year, the sum of all Employer contributions made on behalf of such Participant pursuant to an election to defer under any qualified cash or deferred arrangement as described in Code §401(k), any salary reduction simplified employee pension (as defined in Code §408(k)(6)), any SIMPLE IRA plan described in Code §408(p), any eligible deferred compensation plan under Code §457, any plans described under Code §501(c)(18), and any Employer contributions made on the behalf of a Participant for the purchase of an annuity contract under Code §403(b) pursuant to a salary deferral agreement.

(g)
Excess   Deferrals.   If a Participant has Excess Deferrals for a taxable year, the Participant may, not later than March 1st following the close of such taxable year, notify the Administrator in writing of such excess and request that the Participant's Elective Deferrals under this Plan be reduced by an amount specified by the Participant. In such event, the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such excess amount (and any "income" allocable to such excess amount) to the Participant not later than the first April 15th following the close of the Participant's taxable year. Any distribution of less than the entire amount of Excess Deferrals and "income" shall be treated as a pro rata distribution of Excess Deferrals and "income." The amount distributed shall not exceed the Participant's Elective Deferrals under the Plan for the taxable year. Any distribution on or before the last day of the Participant's taxable year must satisfy each of the following conditions:

(1)
the Participant shall designate the distribution as Excess Deferrals;

(2)
the distribution must be made after the date on which the Plan received the Excess Deferrals; and

(3)
the Plan must designate the distribution as a distribution of Excess Deferrals.

Regardless of the preceding, if a Participant has Excess Deferrals solely from Elective Deferrals made under this Plan or any other plan maintained by the Employer, a Participant will be deemed to have notified the Administrator of such excess amount and the Administrator shall direct the distribution of such Excess Deferrals in a manner consistent with the provisions of this Subsection.

For the purpose of this Subsection, "income" means the amount of income or loss allocable to a Participant's Excess Deferrals, which amount shall be allocated in the same manner as income or losses are allocated pursuant to Section 4.3(c). For taxable years after 2007, the Administrator may not distribute "income" allocable to Excess Deferrals for the period between the end of the Participant's taxable year in which the Excess Deferral occurred and the date of the distribution (the "gap period").

Notwithstanding the above, for any years in which a Participant makes both Roth Elective Deferrals and Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals, the distribution of any Excess Deferrals for such year shall be made, as operationally determined by the Administrator, from the Participant's Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account or Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account. Matching contributions which


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
74


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

relate to Excess Elective Deferrals (regardless of whether such Excess Elective Deferrals are Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals or Roth Elective Deferrals) shall be treated as a Forfeiture.

Any distribution of Excess Deferrals made pursuant to this Subsection shall be made first from unmatched Elective Deferrals (regardless of whether they are attributable to Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals or Roth Elective Deferrals) and, thereafter, from Elective Deferrals which are matched. Matching contributions which relate to Excess Deferrals that are distributed pursuant to this Section 12.2(g) shall be treated as a Forfeiture to the extent required pursuant to Code §401(a)(4) and the Regulations thereunder.

(h)
Coordination   with   ADP   test.   Notwithstanding the preceding, a Participant's Excess Deferrals shall be reduced, but not below zero, by any distribution and/or recharacterization of Excess Deferrals pursuant to Section 12.5(b) for the Plan Year beginning with or within the taxable year of the Participant.

(i)
Suspension   due   to   hardship   or   deemed   severance.   In the event a Participant has received a hardship distribution pursuant to Regulation §1.401(k)-1(d)(3) from any other plan maintained by the Employer or from the Participant's Elective Deferral Account pursuant to Section 12.10, or has received a distribution on account of deemed severance on account of qualified military service from this Plan or any other plan maintained by the Employer, then such Participant shall not be permitted to elect to have Elective Deferrals contributed to the Plan for a period of six (6) months following the receipt of the distribution. Furthermore, any provisions of the Plan providing for the reduction of the dollar limitation under Code §402(g) for the Participant's taxable year following the taxable year in which the hardship distribution was made shall no longer apply. Upon the expiration of the suspension period, a Participant's prior Affirmative Election will no longer apply unless the Employer provides otherwise in the Plan's administrative procedures.

(j)
Distributable   based   on   other   terms   of   Plan.   At Normal Retirement Date, or such other date when the Participant shall be entitled to receive benefits, the fair market value of the Participant's Elective Deferral Account shall be used to provide benefits to the Participant or the Participant's Beneficiary.

(k)
Adjustment   due   to   anticipated   failure   of   ADP   test.   If during a Plan Year, it is projected that the aggregate amount of Elective Deferrals to be allocated to all Highly Compensated Participants under this Plan would cause the Plan to fail the tests set forth in Section 12.4, then the Administrator may automatically reduce the Elective Deferrals of affected Highly Compensated Participants, beginning with the Highly Compensated Participant who has the highest actual deferral ratio until it is anticipated the Plan will pass the tests or until the actual deferral ratio equals the actual deferral ratio of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next highest actual deferral ratio. This process may continue until it is anticipated that the Plan will satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Alternatively, the Employer may specify a maximum percentage of Compensation that may be deferred by Highly Compensated Participants (and any such limitation shall be a Plan-imposed limit for purposes of determining Catch-up Contributions).

(l)
Procedures   must   be   established.   The Employer and the Administrator shall establish procedures necessary to implement the salary deferral elections provided for herein. Such procedures may contain limits on salary deferral elections such as limiti ng elections to whole percentages of Compensation or to equal dollar amounts per pay period that an election is in effect.

12.3
ALLOCATION OF CONTRIBUTIONS AND FORFEITURES

(a)
Separate   accounting.   The Administrator shall establish and maintain an account in the name of each Participant to which the Administrator shall credit as of each Anniversary Date, or other Valuation Date, all amounts allocated to each such Participant as set forth herein.

(b)
Contributions.   The Employer shall provide the Administrator with all information required by the Administrator to make a proper allocation of Employer contributions for each Plan Year. Within a reasonable period of time after the date of receipt by the Administrator of such information, the Administrator shall allocate contributions as follows:

(1)
With respect to Elective Deferrals made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(1), to each Participant's Elective Deferral Account in an amount equal to each such Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year.

(2)
With respect to the Employer matching contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2), to each Participant's Account, or Participant's Qualified Matching Contribution Account, as elected in the Adoption Agreement, in accordance with
Section 12.1(a)(2).

Except, however, in order to be entitled to receive any Employer matching contribution, a Participant must satisfy the conditions for sharing in the Employer matching contribution as set forth in the Adoption Agreement.

(3)
With respect to the Employer Nonelective Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3), to each Participant's Account   in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.3(b)(2) or (3) (including the "gateway contribution" pursuant to Section 4.3(b)(4)), whichever is applicable.

(4)
With respect to the Employer Qualified Nonelective Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(4), to each Participant's Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account in the same ratio as each Participant's Compensation bears to the total of such Compensation of all Participants.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
75


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(c)
Elective   Deferrals   not   taken   into   account   for   Non-Key   Employees.   Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, in determining whether a Non-Key Employee has received the required minimum allocation pursuant to Section 4.3(f) such Non-Key Employee's Elective Deferrals shall not be taken into account. In addition, unless otherwise specified in Appendix A to the Adoption Agreement (Special Effective Dates and Other Permitted Elections), Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code §416(c)(2) and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shal l be met in another plan, such other plan. Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the ACP test and other requirements of Code §401(m).

(d)
Elective   Deferrals   not   conditioned   on   service   during   a   year.   Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Participants who terminated employment during the Plan Year shall share in the Elective Deferral contributions made by the Employer for the year of termination without regard to the Hours of Service credited.

(e)
Conditions   for   sharing in   contributions/allocations.   Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary (other than Sections 3.5(h), 4.3(f) and 12.3(f)), Participants shall only share in the allocations of the Employer matching contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2), the Employer Nonelective Contributions made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(3), the Employer Qualified Nonelective Contribution made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(4), and Forfeitures as provided in the Adoption Agreement. If no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, then a Participant shall be eligible to share in the allocation of the Employer's contribution for the year if the Participant completes more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is chosen in the Adoption Agreement) during the Plan Year or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year.

(f)
Code   §410(b) fail-safe.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, if, in the volume submitter or non-standardized Adoption Agreement, the Employer elected to apply the 410(b) ratio percentage fail-safe provisions, then the provisions of Section 4.3(m) shall apply. Furthermore, if the Plan includes Employer matching contributions subject to ACP testing, then Section 4. 3(m) shall be applied separately to the Code §401(m) portion of the Plan.

12.4
ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS

(a)
ADP   test.   Except as otherwise provided herein, this Subsection applies if the prior year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement. The "Actual Deferral Percentage" (hereinafter ADP) for a Plan Year for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees (hereinafter "HCEs") for each Plan Year and the prior year's ADP for Participants who were Nonhighly Compensated Employees (hereinafter "NHCEs") for the prior Plan Year must satisfy one of the following tests:

(1)
The ADP for a Plan Year for Participants who are "HCEs" for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year's ADP for Participants who were "NHCEs" for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or

(2)
The ADP for a Plan Year for Participants who are "HCEs" for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year's ADP for Participants who were "NHCEs" for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ADP for Participants who are "HCEs" does not exceed the prior year's ADP for Participants who were "NHCEs" in the prior Plan Year by more than two (2) percentage points.

Notwithstanding the above, for purposes of applying the foregoing tests with respect to the first Plan Year (as defined in Regulation §1.401(k)-2(c)(2)) in which the Plan permits any Participant to make Elective Deferrals, the ADP for the prior year's "NHCEs" shall be the greater of three percent (3%) or the current Plan Year's ADP for these Participants. However, the provisions of this paragraph may not be used if the Plan is a successor plan or is otherwise prohibited from using such provisions pursuant to Regulation §1.401(k)-2(c)(2).

(b)
Current   year   testing   method.   Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the current year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement, or if no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, and for any Plan Year for which the Employer has either reserved the right to make a nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" pursuant to Section 12.8 or amended the Plan to make an "ADP test safe harbor contribution," the ADP tests in (a)(1) and (a)(2) above shall be applied by comparing the current Plan Year's ADP for Participants who are "HCEs" with the current Plan Year's ADP (rather than the prior Plan Year's ADP) for Participants who are "NHCEs" for the current Plan Year. Once made, the Employer can elect prior year testing for a Plan Year only if the Plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 5 Plan Years (or if lesser, the number of Plan Years the Plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code §410(b)(6)(C)(i), the Employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in Code §410(b)(6)(C)(ii).

(c)
Determination   of   "HCEs"   and   "NHCEs."   A Participant is an "HCE" for a particular Plan Year if the Participant meets the definition of an "HCE" in effect for that Plan Year. Similarly, a Participant is an "NHCE" for a particular Plan Year if the Participant does not meet the definition of an "HCE" in effect for that Plan Year.

(d)
Calculation   of   ADP.   For the purposes of this Section and Section 12.5, ADP means, for a specific group of Participants for a Plan Year, the average of the ratios (calculated separately for each Participant in such group) of (1) the amount of Employer contributions actually paid over to the Plan on behalf of such Participant for the Plan Year to (2) the Participant's 414(s) Compensation


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
76


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

for such Plan Year. Employer contributions on behalf of any Participant shall include: (1) any Elective Deferrals made pursuant to the Participant's salary deferral election (including Excess Deferrals of "HCEs"), but excluding (i) Excess Deferrals of "NHCEs" that arise solely from Elective Deferrals made under the plan or plans of this Employer and (ii) Elective Deferrals that are taken into account in the ACP tests set forth in Section 12.6 (provided the ADP test is satisfied both with and without exclusion of these Elective Deferrals); and (2) except as provided in Subsections (f) and (g), at the election of the Employer, Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions to the extent such contributions are not used to satisfy the ACP test.

The actual deferral ratio for each Participant and the ADP for each group shall be calculated to the nearest one-hundredth of one percent. Furthermore, Elective Deferrals allocated to each Highly Compensated Participant's Elective Deferral Account shall not be reduced by Excess Deferrals to the extent such excess amounts are made under this Plan or any other plan maintained by the Employer.

(e)
Participants   taken   into   account.   For purposes of this Section and Section 12.5, a Highly Compensated Participant and a Nonhighly Compensated Participant shall include any Employee eligible to make salary deferrals pursuant to Section 12.2 for t he Plan Year. Such Participants who fail to make Elective Deferrals shall be treated for ADP purposes as Participants on whose behalf no Elective Deferrals are made. If a Participant has no 414(s) Compensation for the Plan Year, then such Participant is disregar ded for purposes of calculating the ADP test.

(f)
Contributions   taken   into   account.   For purposes of determining the ADP and the amount of Excess Contributions pursuant to Section 12.5, only Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions contributed to the Plan prior to the end of the twelve (12) month period immediately following the Plan Year to which the contributions relate shall be considered. A Participant's Elective Deferrals are only taken into account for purposes of determining the ADP for a Plan Year if allocated to the Participant's Elective Deferral Account as of a date within that Plan Year and are only made with respect to Compensation that would have either been received by the Participant in the Plan Year (but for the salary deferral election) or is attributable to services performed by the Participant in the Plan Year and would have been paid within two and one-half (2 1/2) months after the close of the Plan Year (but for the salary deferral election).

(g)
Targeted   contributions.   Notwithstanding the preceding, for Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), Qualified Nonelective Contributions cannot be taken into account in determining the ADP for a Plan Year for an "NHCE" to the extent such contributions exceed the product of that "NHCE's" 414(s) Compensation and the greater of five percent (5%) or two (2) times the Plan's "representative contribution rate." Any Qualified Nonelective Contribution taken into account under an ACP test under Regulation §1.401(m)-2(a)(6) (including the determination of the "representative contribution rate" for purposes of Regulation §1.401(m)-2(a)(6)(v)(B)), is not permitted to be taken into account for purposes of this paragraph (including the determination of the "representative contribution rate" under this Section). For purposes of this Subsection:

(1)
The Plan's "representative contribution rate" is the lowest "applicable contribution rate" of any eligible "NHCE" among a group of eligible "NHCEs" that consists of half of all eligible "NHCEs" for the Plan Year (or, if greater, the lowest "applicable contribution rate" of any eligible "NHCE" in the group of all eligible "NHCEs" for the Plan Year and who is employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year), and

(2)
The "applicable contribution rate" for an eligible "NHCE" is the sum of the Qualified Matching Contributions taken into account under Subsection (d) for the eligible "NHCE" for the Plan Year and the Qualified Nonelective Contributions made for the eligible "NHCE" for the Plan Year, divided by the eligible "NHCE's" 414(s) Compensation for the same period.

Notwithstanding the above, Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are made in connection with an Employer's obligation to pay prevailing wages under the Davis-Bacon Act (46 Stat. 1494), Public Law 71-798, Service Contract Act of 1965 (79 Stat. 1965), Public Law 89-286, or similar legislation can be taken into account for a Plan Year for an "NHCE" to the extent such contributions do not exceed 10 percent (10%) of that "NHCE's" 414(s) Compensation.

Qualified Matching Contributions may only be used to calculate the ADP to the extent that such Qualified Matching Contributions are matching contributions that are not precluded from being taken into account under the ACP test for the Plan Year under the rules of Regulation §1.401(m)-2(a)(5)(ii).

Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions cannot be taken into account to determine the ADP to the extent such contributions are taken into account for purposes of satisfying any other ADP test, any ACP test, or the requirements of Regulation §1.401(k)-3, 1.401(m)-3 or 1.401(k)-4. Thus, for example, matching contributions that are made pursuant to Regulation
§1.401(k)-3(c) cannot be taken into account under the ADP test. Similarly, if a plan switches from the current year testing method to the prior year testing method pursuant to Regulation §1.401(k)-2(c), Qualified Nonelective Contributions that are taken into account under the current year testing method for a year may not be taken into account under the prior year testing method for the next year.

(h)
Aggregation   with   other   plans.   In the event this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code §401(a)(4), 401(k), or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections of the Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section shall be applied by determining the ADP of Employees as if all such plans were a single plan. If more than ten percent (10%) of the Employer's "NHCEs" are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
77


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

§1.401(k)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the "NHCEs" ADP for the prior year will be made in accordance with such Regulations, if the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to use the prior year testing method. Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code §401(k) only if they have the same Plan Year and use the same ADP testing method.

(i)
ADP   if   multiple   plans.   The ADP for any Participant who is an "HCE" for the Plan Year and who is eligible to have Elective Deferrals (and Qualified Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions, or both, if treated as Elective Deferrals for purposes of the ADP test) allocated to such Participant's accounts under two (2) or more arrangements described in Code §401(k), that are maintained by the Employer, shall be determined as if such Elective Deferrals (and, if applicable, such Qualified Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions, or both) were made under a single arrangement for purposes of determining such "HCE's" actual deferral ratio. If an "HCE" participates in two or more arrangements described in Code §401(k) of the Employer that have different plan years, all Elective Deferrals made during the Plan Year under all such arrangements shall be aggregated. For Plan Years beginning before 2006 (or if earlier, the Plan Year prior to the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), if the plans have different Plan Years, then all such arrangements ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under Regulations under Code §401(k).

(j)
Disaggregation   and   otherwise   excludable   Employees.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of this Section and Section 12.5 may be applied separately (or will be applied separately to the extent required by Regulations) to each "plan" within the meaning of Regulation §1.401(k)-6. Furthermore, the provisions of Code §401(k)(3)(F) may be used to exclude from consideration all Nonhighly Compensated Employees who have not satisfied the minimum age and service requirements of Code
§410(a)(1)(A). For purposes of applying this provision, the Administrator may use any effective date of participation that is permitted under Code §410(b) provided such date is applied on a consistent and uniform basis to all Participants.

(k)
"HCEs"   as   sole   Eligible   Employees.   If, for the applicable year for determining the ADP of the "NHCEs" for a Plan Year, there are no eligible "NHCEs," then the Plan is deemed to satisfy the ADP test for the Plan Year.

12.5
ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL DEFERRAL PERCENTAGE TESTS

(a)
Authority   to   correct.   In the event the Plan does not satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4, the Administrator shall adjust Excess Contributions or, if the current year testing method is being used, the Employer shall make contributions pursuant to the options set forth below or any combination thereof.

(b)
Corrective   distribution   and/or   recharacterization.   On or before the close of the following Plan Year (or with respect to recharacterization as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, on or before the fifteenth day of the third month following the end of each Plan Year), the Highly Compensated Participant allocated the largest amount of Elective Deferrals shall have a portion of such Elective Deferrals (and "income" allocable to such amounts) distributed (and/or, at the Participant's election, recharacterized as an after-tax voluntary Employee contribution pursuant to Section 4.8) until the total amount of Excess Contributions has been distributed, or until the amount of the Participant's Elective Deferrals equals the Elective Deferrals of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next largest amount of Elective Deferrals allocated. This process shall continue until the total amount of Excess Contributions has been distributed. However, in the event the Plan permits Catch-Up Contributions, then any "HCE" who is eligible to make Catch-Up Contributions pursuant to Section 12.2(c) shall have any amount that would have otherwise been distributed pursuant to this Section recharacterized as a Catch-Up Contribution (up to the maximum catch-up dollar limitation). Any distribution and/or recharacterization of Excess Contributions shall be made in the following order:

(1)
With respect to the distribution of Excess Contributions, such distribution:

(i)
shall be made first from unmatched Elective Deferrals used in the ADP and, thereafter, simultaneously from such Elective Deferrals which are matched and matching contributions which relate to such Elective Deferrals (if the matching contributions are used in the ADP). Matching contributions which are not used in the ADP but which relate to Elective Deferrals that are distributed pursuant to this Subsection shall be forfeited unless the related matching contributions are distributed as Excess Aggregate Contributions pursuant to Section 12.7;

(ii)
shall be made, as operationally determined by the Administrator, from the Participant's Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account or the Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account, to the extent both Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals and Roth Elective Deferrals were made for the Plan Year;

(iii)
shall be adjusted for "income"; and

(iv)
shall be designated by the Employer as a distribution of Excess Contributions (and "income").

(2)
With respect to the recharacterization of Excess Contributions as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to (a) above, such recharacterized amounts:

(i)
shall be deemed to have occurred on the date on which the last of those Highly Compensated Participants with Excess Contributions to be recharacterized is notified of the recharacterization and the tax consequences of such recharacterization;


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
78


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(ii)
shall not exceed the amount of Elective Deferrals on behalf of any Highly Compensated Participant for any Plan Year;

(iii)
shall be treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions for purposes of Code §401(a)(4) and Regulation
§1.401(k)-1(b). However, for purposes of Sections 4.3(f) and 9.2 (top-heavy rules), recharacterized Excess Contributions continue to be treated as Employer contributions that are Elective Deferrals. Excess Contributions (and "income" attributable to such amounts) recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions shall continue to be nonforfeitable and subject to the same distribution rules provided for in Section 12.2(d); and

(iv)
are not permitted if the amount recharacterized plus after-tax voluntary Employee contributions actually made by such Highly Compensated Participant exceed the maximum amount of after-tax voluntary Employee contributions (determined prior to application of Section 12.6) that such Highly Compensated Participant is permitted to make under the Plan in the absence of recharacterization.

(3)
Any distribution and/or recharacterization of less than the entire amount of Excess Contributions shall be treated as a pro rata distribution and/or recharacterization of Excess Contributions and "income."

(4)
For the purpose of this Section, "income" means the income or losses allocable to Excess Contributions, which amount shall be determined and allocated, at the discretion of the Administrator, using any of the methods set forth below. The method must be used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year. However, effective      for Plan Years after December 31, 2007, the Administrator will not calculate and distribute "income" for the period between the end of the Plan Year in which the Excess Contribution and prior to the date of the distribution (the "gap period").

(i)
Method   of   allocating   "income."   The Administrator may use any reasonable method for computing the "income" allocable to Excess Contributions, provided that the method does not violate Code §401(a)(4), is used consistently for all Participants and for all corrective distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year, and is used by the Plan for allocating "income" to Participant's Accounts. A Plan will not fail to use a reasonable method for computing the "income" allocable to Excess Contributions merely because the "income" allocable to Excess Contributions is determined on a date that is no more than seven (7) days before the distribution.

(ii)
Alternative   method   of   allocating Plan   Year   income.   The Administrator may allocate "income" to Excess Contributions for the Plan Year by multiplying the "income" for the Plan Year allocable to the Elective Deferrals and other amounts taken into account under this Section (including contributions made for the Plan Year), by a fraction, the numerator of which is the Excess Contributions for the Employee for the Plan Year, and the denominator of which is the sum of the:

(A)
Account balance attributable to Elective Deferrals and other contributions taken into account under this Section as of the beginning of the Plan Year, and

(B)
Any additional amount of such contributions made for the Plan Year.

(iii)
Safe   harbor   method   of   allocating   gap   period   income.   The Administrator may use the safe harbor method in this paragraph to determine "income" on Excess Contributions for the "gap period." Under this safe harbor method, "income" on Excess Contributions for the "gap period" is equal to ten percent (10%) of the "income" allocable to Excess Contributions for the Plan Year that would be determined under paragraph (ii) above, multiplied by the number of calendar months that have elapsed since the end of the Plan Year. For purposes of calculating the number of calendar months that have elapsed under the safe harbor method, a corrective distribution that is made on or before the fifteenth day of a month is treated as made on the last day of the preceding month and a distribution made after the fifteenth day of a month is treated as made on the last day of the month.

(iv)
Alternative   method   for   allocating   Plan   Year   and   gap   period   income.   The Administrator may determine the allocable gain or loss for the aggregate of the Plan Year and the "gap period" by applying the alternative method provided by paragraph (ii) above to this aggregate period. This is accomplished by substituting the "income" for the Plan Year and the                 "gap period" for the "income" for the Plan Year and by substituting the contributions taken into account under this Section for the Plan Year and the "gap period" for the contributions taken into account under this Section for the Plan Year in determining the fraction that is multiplied by that "income."

(5)
Excess Contributions shall be treated as Employer contributions for purposes of Code §§404 and 415 even if distributed from the Plan.

(c)  Corrective   contributions.   Notwithstanding the above, if the current year testing method is used, then within twelve (12) months after the end of the Plan Year, the Employer may make a special Qualified Nonelective Contribution or Qualified Matching Contribution in accordance with one of the following provisions which contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account or Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant eligible to share in the allocation in accordance with such provision. If the prior year testing method is used, then a Qualified Nonelective Cont ribution


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
79


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

and a Qualified Matching Contribution may not be made to correct the tests set forth in Section 12.4. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with written notification of the amount of the contribution being made and to which provision it relates.

(1)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year.

(2)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(3)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita).

(4)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita). However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(5)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonel ective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until the applicable ADP test set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of t he maximum "annual addition" pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ADP test pursuant to Section 12.4(g) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied.

(6)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum "annual addition" pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ADP test pursuant to Section 12.4(g) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4 is satisfied. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(7)
A Qualified Matching Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants.

(8)
A Qualified Matching Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.4. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Matching Contribution Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(d)  Excise   tax   after   2   1/2   months   (or   6   months).   Any Excess Contributions (and "income") which are distributed after 2 1/2 months, or 6 months with respect to a Plan Year in which the EACA requirements of Section 12.2 are met, after the end of the Plan Year are subject to a ten percent (10%) Employer excise tax imposed by Code §4979.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
80


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

12.6
ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS

(a)
ACP   test.   Except as otherwise provided herein, this Subsection applies if the prior year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement. The "Actual Contribution Percentage" (hereinafter ACP) for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees (hereinafter "HCEs") for each Plan Year and the prior year's ACP for Participants who were Nonhighly Compensated Employees (hereinafter "NHCEs") for the prior Plan Year must satisfy one of the following tests:

(1)
The ACP for a Plan Year for Participants who are "HCEs" for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year's ACP for Participants who were "NHCEs" for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or

(2)
The ACP for a Plan Year for Participants who are "HCEs" for the Plan Year shall not exceed the prior year's ACP for Participants who were "NHCEs" for the prior Plan Year multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ACP for Participants who are "HCEs" does not exceed the prior year's ACP for Participants who were "NHCEs" in the prior Plan Year by more than two (2) percentage points.

Notwithstanding the above, for purposes of applying the foregoing tests with respect to the first Plan Year (as defined in Regulation §1.401(m)-2(c)(2)) in which the Plan permits any Participant to make "Employee contributions", provides for "matching contributions", or both, the ACP for the prior year's "NHCEs" shall be the greater of three percent (3%) or the current Plan Year's ACP for these Participants. However, the provisions of this paragraph may not be used if the Plan is a successor plan or is other wise prohibited from using such provisions pursuant to Regulation §1.401(m)-2(c)(2).

(b)
Current   year   testing   method.   Notwithstanding the preceding, if the current year testing method is elected in the Adoption Agreement or if no election is made in the Adoption Agreement, and for any Plan Year for which the Employer has either reserved the right to make a nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" pursuant to Section 12.8 or amended the Plan to make an "ADP test safe harbor contribution," the ACP tests in (a)(1) and (a)(2) above shall be applied by comparing the current Plan Year's ACP for Participants who are "HCEs" with the current Plan Year's ACP (rather than the prior Plan Year's ACP) for Participants who are "NHCEs" for the current Plan Year. Once made, the Employer can elect prior year testing for a Plan Year only if the Plan has used current year testing for each of the preceding 5 Plan Years (or if lesser, the number of Plan Years the Plan has been in existence) or if, as a result of a merger or acquisition described in Code §410(b)(6)(C)(i), the Employer maintains both a plan using prior year testing and a plan using current year testing and the change is made within the transition period described in Code §410(b)(6)(C)(ii).

(c)
Determination   of   "HCEs"   and   "NHCEs."   A Participant is an "HCE" for a particular Plan Year if the Participant meets the definition of an "HCE" in effect for that Plan Year. Similarly, a Participant is an "NHCE" for a particular Plan Year if the Participant does not meet the definition of an "HCE" in effect for that Plan Year.

(d)
Calculation   of   ACP.   For the purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, ACP for a specific group of Participants for a Plan Year means the average of the "contribution percentages" (calculated separately for each Participant in such group). For this purpose, "contribution percentage" means the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the Participant's "contribution percentage amounts" to the Participant's 414(s) Compensation. The actual contribution ratio for each Participant and the ACP for each group, shall be calculated to the nearest one-hundredth of one percent of the Participant's 414(s) Compensation.

(e)
Amounts   included   in   ACP.   "Contribution percentage amounts" means the sum of (1) after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, (2) Employer "matching contributions" made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) (including Qualified Matching Contributions to the extent such Qualified Matching Contributions are not used to satisfy the tests set forth in Section 12.4), (3) Excess Contributions recharacterized as nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5, and (4) Qualified Nonelective Contributions, to the extent the Qualified Nonelective Contributions are not used to satisfy the tests set forth in Section
12.4 and do not exceed the limitations of the targeted contribution limitation of Section 12.4(g). However, "contribution percentage amounts" shall not include "matching contributions" that are forfeited either to correct Excess Aggregate Contributions or due to Code
§401(a)(4) and the Regulations thereunder because the contributions to which they relate are Excess Deferrals, Excess Contributions, or Excess Aggregate Contributions. In addition, "contribution percentage amounts" may include Elective Deferrals provided the ADP test in Section 12.4 is met before the Elective Deferrals are used in the ACP test and continues to be met following the excl usion of those Elective Deferrals that are used to meet the ACP test.

(f)
Participants   taken   into   account.   For purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, a Highly Compensated Participant and a Nonhighly Compensated Participant shall include any Employee eligible to have "matching contributions" made pursuant to Section 12.1(a)(2) (whether or not a salary deferral election was made or suspended pursuant to the Plan) allocated to such Participant's Account for the Plan Year or to make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 4.8 (whether or not after-tax voluntary Employee contributions are made) allocated to the Participant's Account for the Plan Year.

(g)
Allocations   taken   into   account.   For purposes of determining the ACP test, "Employee contributions" are considered to have been made in the Plan Year in which contributed to the Plan. "Matching contributions" and Qualified Nonelective Contributions will be considered made for a Plan Year if made no later than the end of the twelve (12) month period beginning on the date after the close of the Plan Year. Excess Contributions recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5(b)(2) are taken into account in the ACP for the Plan Year in which the contribution would have been received in cash if there had not been a salary deferral election. A "matching contribution" will be taken into account in the ACP for a Plan Year only if (1) it is made on


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
81


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

account of the Participant's nondeductible voluntary "employee contributions" or on account of a Participant's Elective Deferrals under a plan maintained by the Employer for that Plan Year and (2) it is allocated to the Participant's Account as of any date within that Plan Year.

(h)
Definition   of   "matching   contribution"   and   "employee   contribution."   For purposes of this Section and Section 12.7, "matching contribution" means an Employer contribution made to the Plan, or to a contract described in Code §403(b), on behalf of a Participant on account of a nondeductible voluntary "employee contribution" made by such Participant, or on account of a Participant's elective deferrals under a plan maintained by the Employer. "Employee contribution" means any contribution (other than Roth Elective Deferrals) made to the Plan by or on behalf of a Participant that is included in the Participant's gross income in the year in which made and that is maintained under separate account to which earnings and losses are allocated.

(i)
Targeted   matching   contributions.   Notwithstanding the preceding, for Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(m) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), a "matching contribution" with respect to an Elective Deferral for a year is not taken into account in determining the ACP for "NHCEs" to the extent it exceeds the greatest of:

(1)
five percent (5%) of the Participant's 414(s) Compensation for the year;

(2)
the Employee's Elective Deferrals for the year; or
(3)
the product of two (2) times the Plan's "representative matching rate" and the Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year. For purposes of this Subsection, the Plan's "representative matching rate" is the lowest "matching rate" for any eligible "NHCE"
among a group of "NHCEs" that consists of half of all eligible "NHCEs" in the Plan for the Plan Year who make Elective Deferrals   for the Plan Year (or, if greater, the lowest "matching rate" for all eligible "NHCEs" in the Plan who are employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year and who make Elective Deferrals for the Plan Year).

For purposes of this Subsection, the "matching rate" for an Employee generally is the "matching contributions" made for such Employee divided by the Employee's Elective Deferrals for the year. If the "matching rate" is not the same for all levels of Elective Deferrals for an Employee, the Employee's "matching rate" is determined assuming that an Employee's Elective Deferrals are equal to six percent (6%) of 414(s) Compensation.

If the Plan provides a match with respect to the sum of the Employee's after-tax voluntary Employee contributions and Elective Deferrals, then for purposes of this Subsection, that sum is substituted for the amount of the Employee's Elective Deferrals and Employees who make either after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or Elective Deferrals are taken into account in determining the Plan's "representative matching rate." Similarly, if the Plan provides a match with respect to the Employee's after-tax voluntary Employee contributions, but not Elective Deferrals, then for purposes of this Subsection, the Employee's after-tax voluntary Employee contributions are substituted for the amount of the Employee's Elective Deferrals and Employees who make after-tax voluntary Employee contributions are taken into account in determining the Plan's "representative matching rate."

(j)
Aggregation   with   other   plans.   In the event that this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code §401(a)(4), 401(m), or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections of the Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section shall be applied by determining the ACP of Employees as if all such plans were a single plan. If more than ten percent (10%) of the Employer's "NHCEs" are involved in a plan coverage change as defined in Regulation
§1.401(m)-2(c)(4), then any adjustments to the "NHCE's" ACP for the prior year will be made in accordance with such Regulations, if the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to use the prior year testing method. Plans may be aggregated in order to satisfy Code §401(m) only if they have the same Plan Year and use the same ACP testing method.

(k)
ACP   if   multiple   plans.   For the purposes of this Section, if an HCE is a Participant under two (2) or more plans (other than an employee stock ownership plan as defined in Code §4975(e)(7)) which are maintained by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer to which "matching contributions," nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions, or both, are made, all such contributions on behalf of such HCE shall be aggregated for purposes of determining such HCE's actual contribution ratio. However, if the plans have different plan years, then for purposes of Plan Years beginning prior to 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(m) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), this paragraph shall be applied by treating all plans ending with or within the same calendar year as a     single plan. Notwithstanding the foregoing, certain plans shall be treated as separate if mandatorily disaggregated under Regulations under Code §401(m).

(l)
Disaggregation   and   otherwise   excludable   Employees.   Notwithstanding anything in this Section to the contrary, the provisions of this Section and Section 12.7 may be applied separately (or will be applied separately to the extent required by Regulations) to each "plan" within the meaning of Regulation §1.401(m)-5. Furthermore, the provisions of Code §401(m)(5)(C) may be used to exclude from consideration all Nonhighly Compensated Employees who have not satisfied the minimum age and service requirements of Code
§410(a)(1)(A). For purposes of applying this provision, the Administrator may use any effective date of participation that is permitted under Code §410(a) provided such date is applied on a consistent and uniform basis to all Participants.

(m)
"HCEs"   as   sole   Eligible   Employees.   If, for the applicable year for determining the ACP of the "NHCEs" for a Plan Year, there are no eligible "NHCEs," then the Plan is deemed to satisfy the ACP test for the Plan Year.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
82


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

12.7
ADJUSTMENT TO ACTUAL CONTRIBUTION PERCENTAGE TESTS

(a)
Authority   to   correct.   In the event the Plan does not satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6, the Administrator shall adjust Excess Aggregate Contributions or, if the current year testing method is used, the Employer shall make contributions pursuant to the options set forth below or any combination thereof.

(b)
Corrective   distribution   or   Forfeiture.   On or before the close of the following Plan Year, the Highly Compensated Participant having the largest allocation of "contribution percentage amounts" shall have a portion of such "contribution percentage amounts" (and "income" allocable to such amounts) distributed or, if non-Vested, Forfeited (including "income" allocable to such Forfeitures) until the total amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions has been distributed, or until the amount of the Participant's "contribution percentage amounts" equals the "contribution percentage amounts" of the Highly Compensated Participant having the next largest amount of "contribution percentage amounts." This process shall continue until the total amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions has been distributed or forfeited. Any distribution and/or Forfeiture of "contribution percentage amounts" shall be made in t he following order:

(1)
Employer "matching contributions" distributed and/or forfeited pursuant to Section 12.5(b)(1);

(2)
After-tax voluntary Employee contributions including Excess Contributions recharacterized as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions pursuant to Section 12.5(b)(2);

(3)
Unmatched Elective Deferrals used in the ACP and, thereafter, simultaneously from such Elective Deferrals used in the
ACP which are matched and "matching contributions" which relate to such Elective Deferrals (if the "matching contributions" are used in the ACP). "Matching contributions" which are not used in the ACP but which relate to Elective Deferrals that are distributed to Highly Compensated Participants pursuant to this Subsection shall be forfeited unless the related "matching contributions" are distributed as Excess Aggregate Contributions pursuant to this Subsection;

(4)
To the extent Elective Deferrals are distributed pursuant to the preceding paragraph, then the distribution shall be made, as operationally determined by the Administrator, from the Participant's Pre-Tax Elective Deferral Account or the Participant's Roth Elective Deferral Account, to the extent both Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals and Roth Elective Deferrals were made for the Plan Year, to the extent both Pre-Tax Elective Deferrals and Roth Elective Deferrals were made for the Plan Year; and

(5)
Remaining Employer "matching contributions."

(c)
Source   of   corrective   distribution   or   Forfeiture.   Any distribution or Forfeiture of less than the entire amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions (and "income") shall be treated as a pro rata distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions and "income." Distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be designated by the Employer as a distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions (and "income"). Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be treated in accordance with Section 4.3. However, no such Forfeiture may be allocated to a Highly Compensated Participant whose contributions are reduced pursuant to this Section.

(d)
Determination   of   income   or   loss.   For the purpose of this Section, "income" means the income or losses allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions, which amount shall be determined and allocated, at the discretion of the Administrator, using any of the methods set forth in Section 12.5(b)(4) with respect to the calculation of "income" for Excess Contributions (applied by substituting Excess Contributions with Excess Aggregate Contributions and by substituting amounts taken into account under the ACP test for amounts taken into account under the ADP test in Section 12.4). However, effective with respect to Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2007 the Administrator will not calculate and distribute "income" for the period between the end of the Plan Year in which the Excess Aggregate Contribution and prior to the date of the distribution (the "gap period").

(e)
Treatment   of   excess   amounts.   Excess Aggregate Contributions attributable to amounts other than nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions, including forfeited "matching contributions," shall be treated as Employer contributions for purposes of Code
§§404 and 415 even if distributed from the Plan.

(f)
Ordering   of   tests.   The determination of the amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions with respect to any Plan Year shall be made after first determining the Excess Contributions, if any, to be treated as nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions due to recharacterization for the Plan Year of any other qualified cash or deferred arrangement (as defined in Code §401(k)) maintained by the Employer that ends with or within the Plan Year or which are treated as after-tax voluntary Employee contributions due to recharacterization pursuant to Section 12.5.

(g)
Corrective   contributions.   Notwithstanding the above, if the current year testing method is being used, then within twelve (12) months after the end of the Plan Year, the Employer may make a special Qualified Nonelective Contribution or Employer matching contribution in accordance with one of the following provisions which contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account or with respect to Employer "matching contributions," to the Participant's Account of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant eligible to share in the allocation in accordance with such provision. If the prior year testing method is used, then a Qualified Nonelective Contribution or an Employer "matching contribution" may not be made to correct the tests set forth in


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
83


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

Section 12.6. The Employer shall provide the Administrator with written notification of the amount of the contribution being made and to which provision it relates.

(1)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year.

(2)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's 414(s) Compensation for the year bears to the total 414(s) Compensation of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants for such year. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(3)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita).

(4)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated in equal amounts (per capita). However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(5)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until the applicable test set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum "annual addition" pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ACP test pursuant to Section 12.6(i) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied.

(6)
A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated to the Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account of the Nonhighly Compensated Participant having the lowest 414(s) Compensation, until the applicable   test set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied, or until such Nonhighly Compensated Participant has received the lesser of the maximum "annual addition" pursuant to Section 4.4 or the maximum that may be taken into account in the ACP test pursuant to Section 12.6(i) (Targeted Contributions). This process shall continue until one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6 is satisfied. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Employees who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(7)
A "matching contribution" may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated on behalf of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the   total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. The Employer shall designate, at the time the contribution is made, whether the contribution made pursuant to this provision shall be a Qualified Matching Contribution or an Employer Nonelective Contribution.

(8)
A "matching contribution" may be made on behalf of Nonhighly Compensated Participants in an amount sufficient to satisfy one of the tests set forth in Section 12.6. Such contribution shall be allocated on behalf of each Nonhighly Compensated Participant in the same proportion that each Nonhighly Compensated Participant's Elective Deferrals for the year bears to the   total Elective Deferrals of all Nonhighly Compensated Participants. The Employer shall designate, at the time the contribution is made, whether the contribution made pursuant to this provision shall be a Qualified Matching Contribution or an Employer Nonelective Contribution. However, for purposes of this contribution, Nonhighly Compensated Participants who are not employed at the end of the Plan Year and, if this is a standardized Plan, who have not completed more than 500 Hours of Service               (or three (3) consecutive calendar months if the elapsed time method is selected in the Adoption Agreement) during such Plan Year, shall not be eligible to share in the allocation and shall be disregarded.

(h)  Excise   tax   after   2   1/2   months   (or   6   months).   Any Excess Aggregate Contributions (and "income") which are distributed after
2 1/2 months, or 6 months with respect to a Plan Year in which the EACA requirements of Section 12.2(b) are met, after the end of the Plan Year shall be subject to the ten percent (10%) Employer excise tax imposed by Code §4979.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
84


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

12.8
401(k) ADP TEST SAFE HARBOR PROVISIONS

(a)
Election   of   "ADP   test   safe   harbor."   The provisions of this Section will apply if the Employer has elected, in the 401(k) ADP Test Safe Harbor Provisions Section of the Adoption Agreement, to use the "ADP test safe harbor" or "ACP test safe harbor." If the Employer has elected to use the "ADP test safe harbor" for a Plan Year, then the provisions relating to the ADP test described in Section 12.4 and in Code §401(k)(3) do not apply for such Plan Year to the group of Participants subject to the "ADP test safe harbor" provisions. In addition, if the Employer has also elected to use the "ACP test safe harbor" for a Plan Year, then the provisions relating to the ACP test described in Section 12.6 and in Code §401(m)(2) do not apply for such Plan Year to the group of Participants subject to the "ACP test safe harbor" provisions. Furthermore, to the extent any other provision of the Plan is inconsistent with the provisions of this Section, the provisions of this Section will govern. In accordance with Regulation §1.401(k)-1(e)(7) and Regulation §1.401(m)- 1(c)(2), it is impermissible for the Employer to use the ADP test or the ACP test for a Plan Year in which it is intended for the Plan, through its written terms, to use the "ADP test safe harbor" or "ACP test safe harbor" and the Employer fails to satisfy the requirements of such safe harbors for the Plan Year.

(b)
Definitions.   For purposes of this Section and Section 12.9, the following definitions apply:

(1)
"ACP test safe harbor" means the method described in Subsection (d) below for satisfying the ACP test of Code §401(m)(2).

(2)
"ACP test safe harbor matching contributions" means "matching contributions" described in Subsection (d)(1).

(3)
"ADP test safe harbor" means the method described in Subsection (c) for satisfying the ADP test of Code §401(k)(3).

(4)
"ADP test safe harbor contributions" means the contributions made pursuant to Subsection (c)(1) below.

(5)
"Compensation" means Compensation as defined in Section 1.18, except, for purposes of this Section, no dollar limit, other than the limit imposed by Code §401(a)(17), applies to the Compensation of a Nonhighly Compensated Employee.

(6)
"Eligible Participant" means a Participant who is eligible to make Elective Deferrals under the Plan for any part of the Plan Year (or who would be eligible to make Elective Deferrals but for a suspension due to a hardship distribution described in Section 12.10 or to statutory limitations, such as Code §§402(g) and 415) and who is not excluded as an "eligible Participant" in the 401(k) ADP Test Safe Harbor Provisions Section of the Adoption Agreement.

(7)
"Matching contributions" means contributions made by the Employer on account of an "eligible Participant's" Elective Deferrals.

(c)
Satisfying   ADP   safe   harbor.   The provisions of this Subsection apply for purposes of satisfying the "ADP test safe harbor."

(1)
The "ADP test safe harbor contribution" is the contribution, elected by the Employer in the 401(k) ADP Test Safe Harbor Provisions Section of the Adoption Agreement, to be used to satisfy the "ADP test safe harbor." However, if no contribution is elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer will contribute to the Plan for the Plan Year a "basic matching contribution" on behalf of each Eligible Employee. The "basic matching contribution" is equal to (i) one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of an "eligible Participant's" Elective Deferrals that do not exceed three percent (3%) of the Participant's "Compensation" for the Plan Year, plus (ii) fifty percent (50%) of the amount of the Participant's Elective Deferrals that exceed three percent (3%) of the Participant's "Compensation" but do not exceed five percent (5%) of the Participant's "Compensation." However, if the contribution is being made pursuant to a QACA as described in Section 12.9, then the "basic matching contribution" is equal to
(i) one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of an "eligible Participant's" Elective Deferrals that do not exceed one percent (1%) of the Participant's "Compensation" for the Plan Year, plus (ii) fifty percent (50%) of the amount of the Participant's Elective Deferrals that exceed one percent (1%) of the Participant's "Compensation" but do not exceed six percent (6%) of the Participant's "Compensation." If pursuant to this Section, the "ADP test safe harbor contribution" being made to the Plan (including a contribution being made pursuant to a QACA as described in Section 12.9) is a matching contribution that is made on a basis other than the Plan Year, then the matching contributions must be contributed to the Plan by the last day of the Plan Year quarter immediately following the Plan Year quarter to which the contributions relate.

(2)
Except as provided in Subsection (e) below, for purposes of the Plan, a "basic matching contribution" or an "enhanced matching contribution" will be treated as a Qualified Matching Contribution and a nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" will be treated as a Qualified Nonelective Contribution. Accordingly, "ADP test safe harbor contributions" will be fully Vested and subject to the distribution restrictions set forth in Section 12.2(e) other than on account of a hardship (i.e., may generally not be distributed earlier than severance of employment, death, Total and Permanent Disability, an event described in Code §401(k)(10), or, in case of a profit sharing plan, the attainment of age 59 1/2.). In addition, such contributions must satisfy the "ADP test safe harbor" without regard to permitted disparity under Code §401(l). An "enhanced matching contribution" is a matching contribution that, at rate of Elective Deferrals, is at least equal to what the matching contribution would be if under the "basic matching contribution."

(3)
Notwithstanding the requirement that the Employer make the "ADP test safe harbor contribution" to this Plan, if the Employer so elects in the Adoption Agreement, the "ADP test safe harbor contribution" will be made to the defined contribution


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
85


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

plan indicated in the Adoption Agreement. However, such contributions will be made to this Plan unless (i) each Employee eligible under this Plan is also eligible under the other plan, and (ii) the other plan has the same Plan Year as this Plan.

(4)
Within a reasonable period before the beginning of the Plan Year (or, in the year an Eligible Employee becomes a Participant, within a reasonable period before the Employee becomes eligible), the Employer will provide each "eligible Participant" a comprehensive notice of the Participant's rights and obligations under the Plan, written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average Participant. The determination of whether a notice satisfies the timing requirement of this paragraph is based on all of the relevant facts and circumstances. However, the timing requirement of the notice is deemed to be satisfied if at least thirty (30) days, but not more than ninety (90) days, before the beginning of the Plan Year, the Employer will provide each "eligible Participant" a comprehensive notice of the Participant's rights and obligations under the Plan, written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average Participant. However, if an Employee becomes eligible after the 90th day before the beginning of the Plan Year and does not receive the notice for that reason, the notice must be provided no more than ninety ( 90) days before the Employee becomes eligible but not later than the date the Employee becomes eligible.

(5)
In addition to any other election periods provided under the Plan, each "eligible Participant" may make or modify a salary deferral election during the thirty (30) day period immediately following receipt of the notice described in Subsection (4) above. Furthermore, if the "ADP test safe harbor contribution" is a "matching contribution" each Eligible Employee must be permitted to elect sufficient Elective Deferrals to receive the maximum amount of "matching contributions" available to the Participant under the Plan.

(d)
Application   of   "ACP   test   safe   harbor."   The provisions of this Subsection apply if the Employer has elected to satisfy the "ACP test safe harbor."

(1)
In addition to the "ADP test safe harbor contributions," the Employer will make any "matching contributions" in accordance with elections made in the Adoption Agreement. Such additional "matching contributions" will be considered "ACP test safe harbor matching contributions." "Matching contributions" are taken into account for a Plan Year purposes of the "ACP test safe harbor" in accordance with the allocation and timing rules of Regulation §1.401(m)-2(a), which provides that a matching contribution will be taken into account for a Plan Year only if (1) it is made on account of the Participant's nondeductible voluntary "employee contributions" or elective deferrals under a plan maintained by the Employer for that Plan Year and (2) it is allocated to the Participant's account as of any date within that Plan Year, and (3) it is actually paid to the plan no later than twelve (12) months after the close of the Plan Year.

(2)
Notwithstanding any election in the Adoption Agreement to the contrary, an "eligible Participant's" Elective Deferrals in excess of six percent (6%) of "Compensation" may not be taken into account in applying "ACP test safe harbor matching contributions." In addition, any portion of an "ACP test safe harbor matching contribution" attributable to a discretionary "matching contribution" may not exceed four percent (4%) of an "eligible Participant's" "Compensation."

(e)
Application   of   ACP   test.   The Plan is required to satisfy the ACP test of Code §401(m)(2), using the current year testing method, if the Plan permits after-tax voluntary Employee contributions or if matching contributions that do not satisfy the "ACP test safe harbor" may be made to the Plan. In such event, only "ADP test safe harbor contributions" or "ACP test safe harbor contributi ons" that exceed the amount needed to satisfy the "ADP test safe harbor" or "ACP test safe harbor" (if the Employer has elected to use the   "ACP test safe harbor") may be treated as Qualified Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions in applying the ACP test. In addition, in applying the ACP test, elective contributions may not be treated as "matching contributions" under Code
§401(m)(3). Furthermore, in applying the ACP test, the Employer may operationally elect to disregard with respect to all "eligible Participants" (1) all "matching contributions" if the Plan satisfies the "ACP test safe harbor" and (2) "matching contributions" that do not exceed four percent (4%) (3 1/2% if a QACA) of each Participant's "Compensation" if the Plan satisfies the "ADP test safe harbor" using "matching contributions" (the "basic matching contribution" or the "enhanced matching contribution") and the "ACP test safe harbor" is not satisfied.

(f)
Modification   of   top-heavy   rules.   The top-heavy requirements of Code §416 and the Plan shall not apply in any Plan Year in which the Plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code §401(k)(12) and "matching contributions" with respect to which the requirements of Code §401(m)(11) are met.

(g)
Plan   Year   requirement.   Except as provided in Regulation §1.401(k)-3(e), the Plan will fail to satisfy the requirements of Code
§401(k)(12) and this Section for a Plan Year unless such provisions remain in effect for an entire twelve (12) month Plan Year.

(h)
Discretionary   safe   harbor   nonelective   contribution.   If the Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to either not use the 401(k) safe harbor provisions of this Section or to utilize the "maybe" election with respect to the nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution," then the Employer may elect to utilize the "ADP test safe harbor" provisions for a Plan Year after the Plan Year has commenced in accordance with the provisions of this Subsection. In order to utilize this Subsection, the Employer must provide a notice in accordance with Section 12.8(c)(4) above, except that the notice must provide that the Employer may provide the nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" and that a supplemental notice will be provided at least thirty (30) days prior to the last day of the Plan Year if the Employer decides to make the nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution". In order to implement the 401( k) safe harbor provisions of this Section for the Plan Year, the Employer must (1) amend the Adoption Agreement to provide for the nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" and, (2) provide a supplemental notice to Participants indicating its intention to


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
86


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

provide such nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution". The supplemental notice indicating the Employer's intention to make the nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" must be provided no later than thirty (30) days prior to the last day of the Plan Year for the Plan in order for the provisions of this Section to apply.

(i)
Elimination   of   safe   harbor   contributions   or   matching   contributions.   The Employer may amend the Plan during a Plan Year to reduce or eliminate "ADP test safe harbor contributions" or matching contributions for such Plan Year subject to the following provisions.

(1)
An amendment may be made during a Plan Year to reduce or eliminate prospectively any or all "ADP test safe harbor contributions" provided a supplemental notice is given to all "eligible Participants" explaining the consequences and effective date of the amendment, and that such "eligible Participants" have a reasonable opportunity (including a reasonable period) to change their Elective Deferral (and if applicable, their Voluntary Employee Contribution) elections. An amendment reducing or eliminating an "ADP test safe harbor contribution" must be effective no earlier than the later of: (i) thirty (30) days after "eligible Participants" are given the supplemental notice or (ii) the date the amendment is adopted. If the Employer amends the Plan to reduce or eliminate the "ADP test safe harbor contributions," then except as provided in Code §§401(k) and 401(m) and the Regulations thereunder, the Plan is subject to the ADP test set forth in Section 12.4 and the ACP test set forth in Section 12.6 for the entire Plan Year using current year testing and the Employer must also satisfy the provisions of this Section 12.8 until the amendment becomes effective.

(2)
Notwithstanding the preceding, an amendment may be made during a Plan Year to eliminate a nonelective "ADP test safe harbor contribution" for such Plan Year only in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 1.401(k)-3(g) and, if applicable, Regulation §1.401(m)-3(h)).

(3)
If the Employer eliminates a matching contribution that is not an "ADP test safe harbor contribution," then the "ADP test safe harbor" provisions of this Section continue to apply (i.e., the provisions relating to the ADP test described in Section 12.4 and in Code §401(k)(3) do not apply for such Plan Year to the group of Participants subject to the "ADP test safe harbor" provisions).

12.9
QUALIFIED AUTOMATIC CONTRIBUTION ARRANGEMENT

(a)
Qualified   Automatic   Contribution   Arrangement   (QACA).   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer maintains a Plan with Automatic Deferral provisions as a Qualified Automatic Contribution Arrangement (QACA) and the provisions of this Section will apply. Except as otherwise provided in this Section, the Plan's "ADP test safe harbor" and "ACP test safe harbor" provisions set forth in Section 12.8 apply. The Employer will contribute on behalf of the Participants specified in the Adopt ion Agreement, "ADP test safe harbor contributions," as elected in the Adoption Agreement.

(b)
Participants   subject   to   the   QACA.   The Employer in its Adoption Agreement will elect which Participants are subject to the QACA Automatic Deferral on the "QACA Effective Date" thereof which may include some or all current Participants or may be limited to those Employees who become Participants after the "QACA Effective Date." The "QACA Effective Date" means the date on which the QACA goes into effect, either as to the overall Plan or as to an individual Participants as the context requires. A QACA becomes effective as to the Plan as of the date the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement. A Participant's "QACA Effective Date" is as soon as practicable after the Participant is subject to Automatic Deferrals under the QACA, consistent with: (A) applicable law; and (B) the objective of affording the Participant a reasonable period of time after receipt of the QACA notice to make an Affirmative Election (and, if applicable, an investment election).

(c)
QACA   Automatic   Deferral   amount.   Except as provided in Subsection (d) below (relating to uniformity requirements), the Plan must apply to all Participants subject to the QACA, a uniform Automatic Deferral amount, as a percentage of each Participant's Compensation, which does not exceed ten percent (10%), and which is at least the following minimum amount:

(1)
Initial   period.   3% for the period that begins when the Participant first has contributions made pursuant to a default election under the QACA and ends on the last day of the following Plan Year;

(2)
Third   Plan   Year.   4% for the third Plan Year of the Participant's participation in the QACA;

(3)
Fourth   Plan   Year.   5% for the fourth Plan Year of the Participant's participation in the QACA; and

(4)
Fifth   and   later   Plan   Years.   6% for the fifth Plan Year of the Participant's participation in the QACA and for each subsequent Plan Year.

For purposes of the above, the Plan will treat an Employee who for an entire Plan Year did not have contributions made pursuant to a default election under the QACA as not having made such contributions for any prior Plan Year.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
87


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Uniformity.   The "Automatic Deferral Percentage" must be a uniform percentage of Compensation. The "Automatic Deferral Percentage" is the percentage of Automatic Deferral which the Employer elects in the Adoption Agreement (including any scheduled increase to the "Automatic Deferral Percentage"). However, the Plan does not violate the uniform "Automatic Deferral Percentage" merely because:

(1)
Years   of   participation.   The "Automatic Deferral Percentage" varies based on the number of Plan Years the Participant has participated in the Plan while the Plan has applied the QACA provisions;

(2)
No   reduction   from   prior   default   percentage.   The Plan does not reduce an "Automatic Deferral Percentage" that, immediately prior to the QACA's effective date was higher (for any Participant) than the "Automatic Deferral Percentage."

(3)
Applying   statutory   limits.   The Plan limits the Automatic Deferral amount so as not to exceed the limits of Code
§401(a)(17), 402(g) (determined without regard to Catch-Up Contributions), or 415;

(4)
No   Automatic   Deferrals   during   hardship   suspension.   The Plan does not apply the Automatic Deferral during a period of suspension, under the Plan's hardship distribution provisions, of Participant's right to make Elective Deferrals to the Plan following a hardship distribution; or

(5)
Disaggregated   groups.   The Plan applies different default percentages to different groups if the groups can be disaggregated under Regulation §1.401(k)-1(b)(4).

(e)
Safe   harbor   notice.   The Plan's safe harbor notice provisions apply as set forth in Section 12.8, except the Employer must provide the initial QACA safe harbor notice sufficiently early so that an Employee has a reasonable period after receiving the notice and before the first Automatic Deferral to make an Affirmative Election. In addition, the notice must state: (1) the Automati c Deferral amount that will apply in absence of the Employee's Affirmative Election; (2) the Employee's right to elect not to have any Automatic Deferral amount made on the Employee's behalf or to elect to make Elective Deferrals in a different amount or percentage of Compensation; and (iii) how the Plan will invest the Automatic Deferrals. However, if it is not practicable for the notice to be provided on or before the date an Employee becomes a Participant, then the notice nonetheless will be treated as provided timely if it                is provided as soon as practicable after that date and the Employee is permitted to elect to defer from all types of Compensation that may be deferred under the Plan earned beginning on that date. For this purpose, the Administrator is deemed to provide timely notice if the Administrator provides the notice at least thirty (30) days and not more than ninety (90) days prior to the beginning of the QACA Plan Year.

(f)
Distributions.   A Participant's Account balance attributable to QACA "ADP test safe harbor contributions" is subject to the distribution restrictions set forth in Section 12.2(e) other than on account of a hardship (i.e., may generally not be distributed earlier than severance of employment, death, Total and Permanent Disability, an event described in Code §401(k)(10), or, in case of a profit sharing plan, the attainment of age 59 1/2).

(g)
Vesting.   A Participant's Account balance attributable to QACA "ADP test safe harbor contributions" is Vested in accordance with the vesting schedule, if any, elected in the Adoption Agreement.

(h)
Compensation.   Compensation for purposes of determining the "Automatic Deferral Percentage" has the same meaning as Compensation with regard to Elective Deferrals.

(i)
Modification   of   top-heavy   rules.   The top-heavy requirements of Code §416 and the Plan shall not apply in any Plan Year in which the Plan consists solely of a cash or deferred arrangement which meets the requirements of Code §401(k)(13) and "matchi ng contributions" with respect to which the requirements of Code §401(m)(12) is met.

12.10
ADVANCE DISTRIBUTION FOR HARDSHIP

(a)
Hardship   events.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Administrator, at the election of a Participant, shall direct the Trustee (or Insurer) to distribute to the Participant in any one Plan Year up to the lesser of (1) 100% of the Accounts as selected in the Adoption Agreement valued as of the last Valuation Date or (2) the amount necessary to satisfy the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant. For purposes of this Section, a Participant shall include an Employee who has an Account balance in the Plan. Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be deemed to be made as of the first day of the Plan Year or, if later, the Valuation Date immediately preceding the date of distribution, and the Account from which the distribution is made shall be reduced accordingly. Effective with respect to Plan Years beginning in 2006 (or if earlier, the date the final 401(k) Regulations are effective with respect to the Plan), withdrawal under this Section shall be authorized only if the distribution is for one of the following or any other item permitted under Regulation §1.401(k)-1(d)(3)(iii)(B) or any other federally enacted legislation:

(1)
expenses for (or necessary to obtain) medical care (as defined in Code §213(d));

(2)
costs directly related to the purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the Participant;


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
88


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(3)
payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Participant's deceased parent, Spouse, children or dependents (as defined in Code §152, and without regard to Code §152(d)(1)(B));

(4)
payment of tuition, related educational fees, and room and board expenses, for up to the next twelve (12) months of post-secondary education for the Participant, the Participant's Spouse, children, or dependents (as defined in Code §152, and without regard to Code §152(b)(1), (b)(2), and (d)(1)(B));

(5)
payments necessary to prevent the eviction of the Participant from the Participant's principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage on that residence; or

(6)
expenses for the repair of damage to the Participant's principal residence that would qualify for the casualty deduction under Code §165 (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income).

(b)
Beneficiary-based   distribution.   If elected in Adoption Agreement, then effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement, but no earlier than August 17, 2006, a Participant's hardship event includes an immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant's "primary Beneficiary under the Plan," that would constitute a hardship event if it occurred with respect to the Participant's Spouse or dependent as defined under Code §152 (such hardship events being limited to educational expenses, funeral expenses and certain medical expenses). For purposes of this Section, a Participant's "primary Beneficiary under the Plan" is an individual who is named as a Beneficiary under the Plan (by the Participant or pursuant to Section 6.2(d)) and has an unconditional right to all or a portion of the Participant's Account balance under the Plan upon the Participant's death.

(c)
Other   limits   and   conditions.   No distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section unless the Administrator, based upon the Participant's representation and such other facts as are known to the Administrator, determines that all of the following conditions are satisfied:

(1)
The distribution is not in excess of the amount of the immediate and heavy financial need of the Participant (including any amounts necessary to pay any federal, state, or local taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from the distribution);

(2)
The Participant has obtained all distributions, other than hardship distributions, and all nontaxable loans currently available under all plans maintained by the Employer (to the extent the loan would not increase the hardship); and

(3)
The Plan, and all other plans maintained by the Employer, provide that the Participant's Elective Deferrals and nondeductible voluntary Employee contributions will be suspended, for at least six (6) months after receipt of the hardship distribution.

(d)
Limitation   on   Account   withdrawals.   Notwithstanding the above, distributions from the Participant's Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Matching Contribution Account and Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account pursuant to this Section shall be limited solely to the Participant's Elective Deferrals and any income attributable thereto credited to the Participant's Elective Deferral Account as of December 31, 1988.

(e)
Other   limits   and   conditions.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, no distribution shall be made pursuant to this Section from the Participant's Account until such Account has become fully Vested. Furthermore, if a hardship distribution is permitted from more than one Account, the Administrator may determine any ordering of a Participant's hardship distribution from such Accounts.

(f)
Distribution   rules   apply.   Any distribution made pursuant to this Section shall be made in a manner which is consistent with and satisfies the provisions of Section 6.5, including, but not limited to, all notice and consent requirements of Code §§411(a)(11) and 417 and the Regulations thereunder.

12.11
IN-PLAN ROTH ROLLOVER CONTRIBUTIONS

(a)
Right to   elect   In-Plan   Roth   Rollover   Contribution.   If elected in the Adoption Agreement, then effective as of the date specified in the Adoption Agreement, but no earlier than September 28, 2010, a Participant may elect to roll over a distribut ion directly               to an In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account in accordance with the provisions of the Plan, this Section and the elections       made in the Adoption Agreement. "In-Plan Roth rollover contributions" will be subject to the Plan rules related to designated Roth accounts.

(b)
Eligibility   for   distribution   and   rollover.   A Participant must be eligible for a distribution in order to roll over a distribution to an In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account in accordance with this Section. A Participant may not make an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" with regard to an amount which is not an "eligible rollover distribution" as defined in Section 6.15.

(c)
Form   of   rollover.   The Administrator may permit an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" either by converting to cash any non-cash investments prior to rolling over the Participant's distribution election amount to the In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution
Account, or by rolling over the Participant's current investments to the In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account. A Plan loan so transferred in a direct rollover (if such transfer is permitted) without changing the repayment schedule is not treated as a new loan.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
89


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(d)
Treatment of In-Plan Roth Rollover Contributions.

(1)
Amount   of   In-Plan   Roth   Rollover   Contribution.   If specified in the Adoption Agreement, a Participant may take an
in-service distribution only for purposes of electing a direct rollover to an In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account. If elected in the Adoption Agreement, a portion of the amount that is eligible to be rolled over to an In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account may be distributed solely for the purpose of federal or state income tax withholding for the Participant's anticipated tax obligations regarding the amount includible in the Participant's gross income by reason of the In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution (and the amount withheld for income taxes). The Administrator may limit the amount of the 100% withholding distribution to the amount the Administrator reasonably determines is sufficient to satisfy the Participant's federal and/or state income tax liability relating to the Plan distribution.

(2)
No   rollover   or   distribution   treatment.   Notwithstanding any other Plan provision, a direct In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution is not a rollover contribution for purposes of the Plan. Accordingly, the Plan will take into account the amount s attributable to an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" in determining whether a Participant's Vested Account balance exceeds
$5,000 for purposes of Code §411(a)(11). In addition, an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" is not a distribution for purposes of Code §§401(a)(11) (relating to spousal consent) and 3405(c) (relating to mandatory income tax withholding). Furthermore, it is not a distribution for purposes of applying any limitations that a Plan may impose with respect to the number of in-service distributions permitted by the Plan.

(3)
Withdrawal   of   In-Plan   Roth   Rollover   Contributions.   A Participant may withdraw amounts from the Participant's In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account only when the Participant is eligible for a distribution from the Plan account that is the source of the "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution." This Section does not expand (except, if elected, for distributions for withholding) or eliminate any distribution rights on amounts that a Participant elects to treat as an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution."

(e)
Definitions and other rules.

(1)
In-Plan   Roth   Rollover   Contribution.   An "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" means a rollover contribution to the Plan that consists of a distribution from a Participant's Plan account, other than a designated Roth account, that the Participant rolls over to the Participant's designated In-Plan Roth Rollover Contribution Account in the Plan, in accordance with Code §402(c)(4). An "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" may occur only by a direct rollover.

(2)
Participant   includes   spousal   Beneficiary/Alternate   Payee.   For purposes of eligibility for an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution," the Plan will treat a Participant's surviving Spouse Beneficiary or Alternate Payee Spouse or former Spouse as a Participant (unless the right to elect an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" is limited to Employees). A non-Spouse Beneficiary may not make an "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution."

(3)
Distribution   from   partially   Vested   account.   Distributions (i.e., the source of the "in-Plan Roth rollover contribution" amounts) are permitted only from Vested amounts allocated to a qualifying source as identified in the Adoption Agreement. If a distribution is made to a Participant who has not severed employment and who is not fully Vested in the Participant's Account from which the rollover is to be made, and the Participant may increase the Vested percentage in such account, then at any relevant time the Participant's Vested portion of the account will be determined in the manner set forth in Section 6.5(h).

ARTICLE XIII SIMPLE 401(K) PROVISIONS

13.1
SIMPLE 401(k) PROVISIONS

(a)
If elected in the Adoption Agreement, this Plan is intended to be a SIMPLE 401(k) plan which satisfies the requirements of Code
§§401(k)(11) and 401(m)(10).

(b)
The provisions of this Article apply for a "year" only if the following conditions are met:

(1)
The Employer adopting this Plan is an "eligible employer." An "eligible employer" means, with respect to any "year," an Employer that had no more than 100 Employees who received at least $5,000 of "compensation" from the Employer for the preceding "year." In applying the preceding sentence, all employees of an Affiliated Employer and Leased Employees are taken into account.

An "eligible employer" that has elected to use the SIMPLE 401(k) provisions but fails to be an "eligible employer" for any subsequent "year," is treated as an "eligible employer" for the two (2) "years" following the last "year" the Employer was an "eligible employer." If the failure is due to any acquisition, disposition, or similar transaction involving an "eligible employer," the preceding sentence applies only if the provisions of Code §410(b)(6)(C)(i) are satisfied.

(2)
No contributions are made, or benefits accrued for services during the "year," on behalf of any "eligible employee" under any other plan, contract, pension, or trust described in Code §219(g)(5)(A) or (B), maintained by the Employer.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
90


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(c)  To the extent that any other provision of the Plan is inconsistent with the provisions of this Article, the provisions of this Article govern.

13.2
DEFINITIONS

(a)
"Compensation" means, for purposes of this Article, the sum of the wages, tips, and other compensation from the Employer subject to federal income tax withholding (as described in Code §6051(a)(3)) and the Employee's salary deferral contributions made under this or any other 401(k) plan, and, if applicable, elective deferrals under a Code §408(p) SIMPLE plan, a SARSEP, or a Code
§403(b) annuity contract and compensation deferred under a Code §457 plan, required to be reported by the Employer on Form W-2 (as described in Code §6051(a)(8)). For Self-Employed Individuals, "compensation" means net earnings from self-employment determined under Code §1402(a) prior to subtracting any contributions made under this Plan on behalf of the individual. "Compensation" also includes amounts paid for domestic service (as described in Code §3401(a)(3)). The provisions of the Plan implementing the limit on Compensation under Code §401(a)(17) apply to the "compensation" under this Article.

(b)
"Eligible employee" means, for purposes of this Article, any Participant who is entitled to make Elective Deferrals described in Code §402(g) under the terms of the Plan.

(c)
"Year" means the calendar year.

13.3
CONTRIBUTIONS

(a)
Salary deferral contributions

(1)
Each "eligible employee" may make a salary deferral election to have "compensation" reduced for the "year" in any amount selected by the Employee subject to the limitation in Subsection (c) below. The Employer will make a salary deferral contribution to the Plan, as an Elective Deferral, in the amount by which the Employee's "compensation" has been reduced.

(2)
The total salary deferral contribution for the "year" for any Employee cannot exceed the limitation on salary deferral contributions in effect for the "year" pursuant to Code §408(p)(2). The limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of living increases under Code §408(p)(2)(E). Any such adjustments will be in multiples of $500. The amount of an Employee's salary deferral contributions permitted for a "year" is increased for Employees aged 50 or over by the end of the "year" by the amount of allowable Catch-Up Contributions pursuant to Code §414(v)(2). The limit will be adjusted by the Secretary of the Treasury for cost-of-living increases under Code §414(v)(2)(C). Any such adjustments will be in multiples of
$500. Catch-Up Contributions are otherwise treated the same as other salary deferral contributions.

(b)
Other contributions

(1)
Matching contributions. Unless (2) below is elected, each "year" the Employer will make a matching contribution to the Plan on behalf of each Employee who makes a salary deferral election under Section 13.3(a). The amount of the matching contribution will be equal to the Employee's salary deferral contribution up to a limit of three percent (3%) of the Employee's "compensation" for the full "year."

(2)
Nonelective Contributions. For any "year," instead of a matching contribution, the Employer may elect to contribute a Nonelective Contribution of two percent (2%) of "compensation" for the full "year" for each "eligible employee" who received at least $5,000 of "compensation" from the Employer for the "year."

(c)
Limitation on Other Contributions

No Employer or Employee contributions may be made to this Plan for the "year" other than salary deferral contributions described in Section 13.3(a), matching or Nonelective Contributions described in Section 13.3(b) and rollover contributions described                in Regulation §1.402(c)-2, Q&A-1(a). Furthermore, the provisions of Section 4.4 which implement the limitations of Code §415 apply to contributions made pursuant to this Section (other than Catch-Up Contributions).

13.4
ELECTION AND NOTICE REQUIREMENTS

(a)
Election period

(1)
In addition to any other election periods provided under the Plan, each "eligible employee" may make or modify a salary deferral election during the 60-day period immediately preceding each January 1st.

(2)
For the "year" an Employee becomes eligible to make salary deferral contributions under this Article, the 60-day election period requirement of Subsection (a)(1) is deemed satisfied if the Employee may make or modify a salary deferral election during a 60-day period that includes either the date the Employee becomes eligible or the day before.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
91


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

(3)  Each "eligible employee" may terminate a salary deferral election at any time during the "year."

(b)
Notice requirements

(1)
The Employer will notify each "eligible employee" prior to the 60-day election period described in Section 13.4(a) that a salary deferral election or a modification to a prior election may be made during that period.

(2)
The notification described in (1) above will indicate whether the Employer will provide a matching contribution described in Section 13.3(b)(1) or a two percent (2%) Nonelective Contribution described in Section 13.3(b)(2) for that "year."

13.5
VESTING REQUIREMENTS

All benefits attributable to contributions made pursuant to this Article are nonforfeitable at all times, and all previous contributions made under the Plan are nonforfeitable as of the beginning of the Plan Year that the 401(k) SIMPLE provisions apply.

13.6
TOP-HEAVY RULES

The Plan is not treated as a top-heavy plan under Code §416 for any "year" for which the provisions of this Article are effective and satisfied.

13.7
NONDISCRIMINATION TESTS

The Plan is treated as meeting the requirements of Code §§401(k)(3)(A)(ii) and 401(m)(2) for any "year" for which the provisions of this Article are effective and satisfied. Accordingly, Sections 12.4, 12.5, 12.6 and 12.7 shall not apply to the Plan for any "year" for which this Article applies.

ARTICLE XIV MULTIPLE EMPLOYER PROVISIONS

14.1
ELECTION AND OVERRIDING EFFECT

If a Participating Employer that is not an Affiliated Employer adopts this Plan, then the provisions of this Article XIV shall apply to such Participating Employer as of the Effective Date specified in its participation agreement and supersede any contrary provisions in the basic Plan document or the Adoption Agreement. If this Article XIV applies, then the Plan shall be a multiple employer plan as described in Code §413(c). In this case, the Employer and each Participating Employer acknowledge that the Plan is a multiple employer plan subj ect to the rules of Code §413(c) and the Regulations thereunder, which are hereby incorporated by reference, and specific annual reporting requirements.

14.2
DEFINITIONS

The following definitions shall apply to this Article XIV and shall supersede any conflicting definitions in the Plan:

(a)
Employee.   "Employee" means any common law employee, Self-Employed Individual, Leased Employee or other person the Code treats as an employee of a Participating Employer for purposes of the Participating Employer's qualified plan. Either the Adoption Agreement or a participation agreement to the Adoption Agreement may designate any Employee, or class of Employees, as not eligible to participate in the Plan.

(b)
Lead   Employer.   "Lead Employer" means the signatory Employer to the Adoption Agreement execution page, and does not include any Affiliated Employer or Participating Employer. The "lead Employer" has the same meaning as the Employer for purposes of making Plan amendments and other purposes regardless of whether the "lead Employer" is also a Participating Employer under this Article XIV.

14.3
PARTICIPATING EMPLOYER ELECTIONS

The participation agreement must identify the Participating Employer and the covered Employees and provide for the Participating Employer's signature. In addition, in the participation agreement, the "lead Employer" shall specify which elections, if any, the Participating Employer can modify, and any restrictions on the modifications. Any such modification shall apply only to the employees of that Participating Employer. The Participating Employer shall make any such modification by selecting the appropriate option on its participation agreement to the "lead Employer's" Adoption Agreement. To the extent that the Adoption Agreement does not permit modification of an election, any attempt by a Participating Employer to modify the election shall have no effect on the Plan and the Participating Employer is bound by the Plan terms as selected by the "lead Employer." If a Participating Employer does not make any permissible participation agreement election modifications, then with regard to any election, the Participating Employer is bound by the Adoption Agreement terms as completed by the "lead Employer." Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, if a Standardized Plan is being used, then the elections available to Participating Employers must be limited to the elections available to the "lead Employer"


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
92


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

that ensure the Plan, by design, satisfies the minimum coverage requirements of Code §410(b) and the nondiscrimination requirements of Code §401(a)(4).

14.4
HIGHLY COMPENSATED EMPLOYEE STATUS

Status as a Highly Compensated Employee shall be determined separately with respect to each Participating Employer.

14.5
TESTING

(a)
Separate   status.   The Administrator shall perform the tests listed below separately for each Participating Employer, with respect to the Employees of that Participating Employer. For this purpose, the Employees of a Participating Employer, and their allocations and accounts, shall be treated as though they were in separate plan. Any correction action, such as additional contributions or corrective distributions, shall only affect the Employees of the Participating Employer. The tests subject to this separate treatment are:

(1)
The ADP test in Section 12.4.

(2)
The ACP test in Section 12.6.

(3)
Nondiscrimination testing as described in Code §401(a)(4) and the applicable Regulations.

(4)
Coverage testing as described in Code §410(b) and the applicable Regulations.

(b)
Joint   status.   The Administrator shall perform the following tests for the Plan as whole, without regard to employment by a particular Participating Employer:

(1)
Applying the Code §415 limitation in Section 4.4.

(2)
Applying the Code §402(g) limitation in Section 12.2.

(3)
Applying the limit on Catch-Up Contributions in Section 12.2.

14.6
TOP HEAVY PROVISIONS

The Plan will apply the provisions of Article IX separately to each Participating Employer. The Plan will be considered separate plans for each Participating Employer and its Employees for purposes of determining whether such a separate plan is top-heavy under Section 9.1 or is entitled to the exemption described in Section 12.8(f) or 12.9(i). For purposes of applying this Article to a Participating Employer, the Participating Employer and any business which is related to that Participating Employer shall be the "Employer" for purposes of Section 9.1, and the terms "Key Employee" and "Non-Key Employee" shall refer only to the Employees of that Participating Employer. If such a Participating Employer's separate plan is top-heavy, then:

(a)
Highest   contribution   rate.   The Administrator shall determine the highest Key Employee contribution rate under Section 4.3(g) by reference to the Key Employees and their allocations in the separate plan of that Participating Employer;

(b)
Top-heavy   minimum   allocation.   The Administrator shall determine the amount of any required top-heavy minimum allocation separately for that separate plan under Section 4.3(f); and

(c)
Plan   Which   Will   Satisfy.   The Participating Employer shall make any additional contributions Section 4.3(k) requires.

14.7
COMPENSATION

(a)
Separate   determination.   For the following purposes, a Participant's Compensation shall be determined separately for each Participating Employer:

(1)
Nondiscrimination   and   coverage.   All of the separate tests listed in Section 14.5(a).

(2)
Top-heavy.   Application of the top-heavy rules in Article IX.

(3)
Allocations.   Application of allocations under Article IV.

(4)
HCE   determination.   The determination of an Employee's status as a Highly Compensated Employee.

(b)
Joint   status.   For all Plan purposes other than those described in Section 14.7(a), including but not limited to determining the Code §415 limits in Section 4.4, Compensation includes all Compensation paid by or for any Participating Employer.


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
93


Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan

14.8
SERVICE

An Employee's service includes all Hours of Service and Years of Service with any and all Participating Employers. An Employe e who terminates employment with one Participating Employer and immediately commences employment with another Participating Employer has not separated from service or had a severance from employment.

14.9
REQUIRED MINIMUM DISTRIBUTIONS

If a Participant is a more than 5% Owner (under Code §416(i) and Section 6.8(e)(6)) of any Participating Employer for which the Participant is an Employee in the Plan Year the Participant attains age 70 1/2, then the Participant's "required beginning date" under Section 6.8(e)(5) shall be the April 1 following the close of the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70 1/2.

14.10
COOPERATION AND INDEMNIFICATION

(a)
Cooperation.   Each Participating Employer agrees to timely provide all information the Administrator deems necessary to insure the Plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of the Code and the Act and will cooperate fully with the "lead Employer," the Plan, the Plan fiduciaries and other proper representatives in maintaining the qualified status of the Plan. Such coopera tion will include payment of such amounts into the Plan, to be allocated to employees of the Participating Employer, which are reasonably required to maintain the tax-qualified status of the Plan.

(b)
Indemnity.   Each Participating Employer will indemnify and hold harmless the Administrator, the "lead Employer" and its subsidiaries; officers, directors, shareholders, employees, and agents of the "lead Employer"; the Plan; the Trustees, Fiduci aries, Participants and Beneficiaries of the Plan, as well as their respective successors and assigns, against any cause of action, loss, liability, damage, cost, or expense of any nature whatsoever (including, but not limited to, attorney's fees and costs, whether or not suit is brought, as well as IRS plan disqualifications, other sanctions or compliance fees or DOL fiduciary breach sanctions and penalties) arising out of or relating to the Participating Employer's noncompliance with any of the Plan's terms or requirements; any intentional or negligent act or omission the Participating Employer commits with regard to the Plan; and any omission or provision of incorrect information with regard to the Plan which causes the Plan to fail to satisfy the requirements of a tax-qualified plan.

14.11
INVOLUNTARY TERMINATION

Unless the "lead Employer" provides otherwise in an addendum hereto, the "lead Employer" shall have the power to terminate the participation of any Participating Employer (hereafter "Terminated Employer") in this Plan. If and when the "lead Employer" wishes to exercise this power, the following shall occur:

(a)
Notice.   The "lead Employer" shall give the "Terminated Employer" a notice of the "lead Employer's" intent to terminate the "Terminated Employer's" status as a Participating Employer of the Plan. The "lead Employer" will provide such notice not less than thirty (30) days prior to the date of termination unless the "lead Employer" determines that the interest of Plan Participants requires earlier termination.

(b)
Spin-off.   The "lead Employer" shall establish a new defined contribution plan, using the provisions of this Plan with any modifications contained in the "Terminated Employer's" participation agreement, as a guide to establish a new defined contribut ion plan (the "spin-off plan"). The "lead Employer" will direct the Trustee to transfer (in accordance with the rules of Code §414(l) and   the provisions of Section 8.3) the Accounts of the Employees of the "Terminated Employer" to the "spin-off plan." The "Terminated Employer" shall be the Employer, Administrator, and sponsor of the "spin-off plan." The Trustee of the "spin-off plan" shall be the person or entity designated by the "Terminated Employer," or, in the absence of any such designation, the chief executive officer of the "Terminated Employer." If state law prohibits the "Terminated Employer" from serving as Trustee, the Trustee is the president of a corporate "Terminated Employer," the managing partner of a partnership "Terminated Employer," the managing member of a limited liability company "Terminated Employer," the sole proprietor of a proprietorship "Terminated Employer," or in the case of any other entity type, such other person with title and responsibilities similar to the foregoing. However, the "lead Employer" shall have the option to designate an appropriate financial institution as Trustee instead if necessary to protect the interest of the Participants. The "lead Employer" shall have the authority to charge the "Terminated Employer" or the Accounts of the Employees of the "Terminated Employer" a reasonable fee to pay the expenses of establishing the "spin-off plan."

(c)
Alternative.   The "Terminated Employer," in lieu of creation of the "spin-off plan" under (b) above, has the option to elect a transfer alternative in accordance with this Subsection (c).

(1)
Election.   To exercise the option described in this Subsection, the "Terminated Employer" must inform the "lead Employer" of its choice, and must supply any reasonably required documentation as soon as practical. If the "lead Employer" has not received notice of a "Terminated Employer's" exercise of this option within ten (10) days prior to the stated date of termination, the "lead Employer" can choose to disregard the exercise and proceed with the Spin-off.

(2)
Transfer.   If the "Terminated Employer" selects this option, the Administrator shall transfer (in accordance with the rules of Code §414(l) and the provisions of Section 8.3) the Accounts of the Employees of the "Terminated Employer" to a qualified plan the "Terminated Employer" maintains. To exercise this option, the "Terminated Employer" must deliver to the "lead Employer"


© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
94

Defined Contribution Volume Submitter Plan
 
or Administrator in writing the name and other relevant information of the transferee plan and must provide such assurances t hat
the Administrator shall reasonable require to demonstrate that the transferee plan is a qualified plan.

(d)
Participants.   The Employees of the "Terminated Employer" shall cease to be eligible to accrue additional benefits under the Plan with respect to Compensation paid by the "Terminated Employer," effective as of the date of termination. To the extent that these Employees have accrued but unpaid contributions as of the date of termination, the "Terminated Employer" shall pay such amounts to the Plan or the "spin-off plan" no later than thirty (30) days after the date of termination, unless the "Terminated Employer" effectively selects the Transfer option under Subsection (c)(2) above.

(e)
Consent.   By its signature on the participation agreement, the Terminated Employer specifically consents to the provisions of this Article and agrees to perform its responsibilities with regard to the "spin-off plan," if necessary.

14.12
VOLUNTARY TERMINATION

A Participating Employer (hereafter "withdrawing employer") may voluntarily withdraw from participation in this Plan at any t ime. If and when a "withdrawing employer" wishes to withdraw, the following shall occur:

(a)
Notice.   The "withdrawing employer" shall inform the "lead Employer" and the Administrator of its intention to withdraw from the Plan. The Withdrawing Employer must give the notice not less than thirty (30) days prior to the effective date of its withdrawal.

(b)
Procedure.   The "withdrawing employer" and the "lead Employer" shall agree upon procedures for the orderly withdrawal of the "withdrawing employer" from the plan. Such procedures may include any of the optional spin-off or transfer options described in Section 14.11.

(c)
Costs.   The "withdrawing employer" shall bear all reasonable costs associated with withdrawal and transfer under this Section.

(d)
Participants.   The Employees of the "withdrawing employer" shall cease to be eligible to accrue additional benefits under the Plan as to Compensation paid by the "withdrawing employer," effective as of the effective date of withdrawal. To the extent that such Employees have accrued but unpaid contributions as of the effective date of withdrawal, the "withdrawing employer" shall contribute such amounts to the Plan or the "spin-off plan" promptly after the effective date of withdrawal, unless the accounts are transferred to a
qualified plan the "withdrawing employer" maintains.
 
 
 
 
© 2014 Pentegra Services, Inc. or its suppliers
95

EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN
OF
DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.
AND CERTAIN AFFILIATES

(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 2008)
FOURTH AMENDMENT
1. ARTICLE I – The second sentence of Section 1.3, the definition of "Allocation Compensation" is amended to read as follows:
Notwithstanding anything in this section 1.3 to the contrary, an Employee's Allocation Compensation shall not include any amounts required to be reported to the Internal Revenue Service as wages pursuant to section 6041(a) that are attributable to (i) the exercise of stock options or a disqualifying disposition of incentive stock options by the Employee, (ii) the vesting of, or other recognition of income with respect to, restricted stock awards and (iii) cash awards under any long-term incentive plan of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer.
2. ARTICLE XII -- Section 12.2 is amended to read as follows:


Section 12.2 Dividends .
Subject to Article XIX, dividends paid with respect to Shares held under the Plan shall be credited to the Loan Repayment Account, if paid with respect to Financed Shares. Such dividends shall be: (i) applied to the payment of principal and accrued interest with respect to any Share Acquisition Loan, if paid in cash; or (ii) held in the Loan Repayment Account as Financed Shares for release in accordance with section 6.4, if paid in the form of Shares.
Dividends paid with respect to Shares allocated to a person's Share Investment Account shall be credited to such person's Share Investment Account. Cash dividends credited to a person's General Investment Account shall be, at the direction of the Board, either: (i) held in such General Investment Account and invested in accordance with sections 10.2 and 11.3; (ii) distributed immediately to such person; (iii) distributed to such person within 90 days of the close of the Plan Year in which such dividends were paid; or (iv) used to make payments of principal or interest on a Share Acquisition Loan; provided, however , that the Fair Market Value of Financed Shares released from the Loan Repayment Account equals or exceeds the amount of the dividend.
(c) In the sole discretion of the Employer, the Employer may grant Participants the right to elect: (i) to have cash dividends paid on shares of Stock credited to a Participant's Account distributed to the Participant, or (ii) to leave the cash dividends allocated to the Participant's Share Investment Account to be invested in Shares.  Dividends on which such election may be made will be fully vested in the Participant (even if not otherwise vested, absent the ability to make such election).  .  In the event the Employer elects to give Participants the right to determine the treatment of such dividends, the Participant's election shall be made by filing with the Plan Administrator (via online election made through the participant's account) the appropriate direction as provided by the Plan Administrator from time to time and in accordance with such procedures and limitations which the Plan Administrator may from time to time establish; provided, however, that such procedures shall provide a reasonable opportunity to change the election at least annually, may establish a default election if a Participant fails to make an affirmative election within the time established for making elections, may provide that the election is applicable for the Plan Year and cannot be revoked with respect to such Plan Year, shall

 
otherwise be implemented in a manner such that the dividends paid or reinvested will constitute "applicable dividends" which may be deducted under Code Section 404(k).  If the Employer elects to give Participants the right to make an election under this section 12.2(c), such election shall be available to the Participant with respect to dividends paid for the entire Plan Year.

3. ARTICLE XIII --  Section 13.3(a)(i) is amended to read as follows:
The vested portion of the balance credited to a Participant's or a Former Participant's Account shall be distributed to him commencing as of the last Valuation Date to occur in the Plan Year in which the Participant or Former Participant terminates employment with the Employer or attains age 65, whichever is later, unless the Participant or Former Participant elects otherwise pursuant to section 13.3(a)(ii), and the payment, or first in a series of payments, is actually made as soon as administratively feasible following such Valuation Date; provided, however, that required minimum distributions shall be made earlier in accordance with section 13.5.  Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary, (i) if the value of a Participant's or a Former Participant's vested Account balance at the time of any distribution does not exceed $1,000, then such Participant's vested Account shall be distributed, without regard to whether the Participant consents, in a lump sum as soon as administratively feasible after the end of the Plan Year in which employment terminates and (ii) unless a Participant elects to receive a distribution, the Plan Administrator shall transfer accounts of $1,000 or more, but not exceeding $5,000, in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Plan Administrator in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(31)(B) and the regulations promulgated thereunder and without regard to whether the Participant consents to such transfer. All distributions of $5,000 or less that are made pursuant to this section without the Participant's or Former Participant's consent shall be made in cash.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Fourth Amendment has been executed by the undersigned officer of Dime Community Bancshares, Inc., pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors, effective as of the date indicated below.
DIME COMMUNITY BANCSHARES, INC.

By: ______________________________
Name: ______________________________
Title: ______________________________
Date:_________________________________